Service Manual

iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series

iR2230

Aug 2 2005

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol

Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow
indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Overview of System Construction (output accessories) .......................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2 Output Accessories System Configuration 1 ........................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.3 Output Accessories System Configuration 2 ........................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.4 Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration .................................................................................... 1- 3
1.1.5 Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration ...................................................................................... 1- 4
1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions................................................................................................... 1- 4

1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 6

1.2.1 Names of Parts........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 6
1.2.1.1 External View ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.2.1.2 Cross-Section .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7

1.2.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................. 1- 10
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch ..................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.2.4 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 13

1.2.3 User Mode Items ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 14

1.2.3.1 Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 14
1.2.3.2 Setting the Timer.................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.3.4 Printing Out a Report ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 16
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 17
1.2.3.6 System Control Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 18
1.2.3.7 Copy Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.2.3.8 Transmission/Reception Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.2.3.9 Transmission/Reception Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.2.3.10 Box Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.2.3.11 Box Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.2.3.12 Printer Settings..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.2.3.13 Address Book Settings......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23

1.2.4 Maintenance by the User....................................................................................................................................... 1- 24

1.2.4.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 24
1.2.4.2 Inspection............................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25

1.2.5 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26

1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 26
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 26
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27

1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 27

1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27

1.2.7 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29

1.2.7.1 Printing Speed ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29
1.2.7.2 Types of Paper....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29

Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ....................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ............................................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V) ............................................................................................................................. 2- 2

2.2 Unpacking and Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 4

2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials ................................................................................................ 2- 4
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle........................................................................................................................................ 2- 4

Contents

2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit............................................................................................................................................2- 5

2.2.4 Securing the Copier Main Unit .................................................................................................................................2- 8
2.2.5 Connecting the Cable ..............................................................................................................................................2- 9
2.2.6 Stirring Toner ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 9
2.2.7 Setting the Cassettes...............................................................................................................................................2- 9
2.2.8 APVC Correction of the Drum................................................................................................................................2- 10
2.2.9 Adjusting the Image Position .................................................................................................................................2- 10
2.2.10 Attaching Other Parts...........................................................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.11 If Not Connected to a Network .............................................................................................................................2- 13

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2- 14

2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................2- 14
2.3.2 Using the PING Function .......................................................................................................................................2- 14
2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address....................................................................................................2- 14

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2- 15

2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address .........................................................................................................2- 15
2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address........................................................................................................2- 15

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ............................................................................................................. 2- 16

2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation ...........................................................................................................2- 16

2.6 Installing the Card Reader........................................................................................................................ 2- 17

2.6.1 Points to Note ........................................................................................................................................................2- 17
2.6.2 Checking the Contents...........................................................................................................................................2- 17
2.6.3 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................2- 18
2.6.4 Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment ......................................................................................2- 21

2.7 Installing the NE Controller....................................................................................................................... 2- 22

2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1...............................................................................................................................2- 22

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

3.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1 Functional Construction ...........................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram ......................................................................................................................................3- 1

3.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 3

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On .............................................................................................................3- 3

Chapter 4 Main Controller

4.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms.................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.1.2 Construction and Functions .....................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry........................................................................................................ 4- 3

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................4- 3
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................4- 4
4.2.3 HDD .........................................................................................................................................................................4- 4
4.2.4 HDD (optional) .........................................................................................................................................................4- 6

4.3 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................... 4- 9

4.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................4- 9
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................4- 9

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence .............................................................................................................................. 4- 12

4.4.1 Overview (w/ HDD) ................................................................................................................................................4- 12
4.4.2 Flow of Operation (w/ HDD)...................................................................................................................................4- 12

4.5 Image Processing..................................................................................................................................... 4- 13

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow ..................................................................................................................................4- 13
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................................4- 13
4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................................4- 14

Contents

4.5.4 Reader Unit Input Image Processing..................................................................................................................... 4- 14

4.5.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block.................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.5.6 Compression/Expansion/Edit Block....................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.5.7 Printer unit Output Image Processing.................................................................................................................... 4- 16

4.6 Flow of Image Data ..................................................................................................................................4- 17

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions ................................................................................................ 4- 17
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function ............................................................................................................ 4- 17
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function .............................................................................................................. 4- 18
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function .............................................................................................................. 4- 18
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function .......................................................................................................... 4- 19
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function .......................................................................................................... 4- 19
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission....................................................................................................... 4- 20
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function ........................................................................................ 4- 21
4.6.9 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function ............................................................................................. 4- 21
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function ........................................................................................... 4- 22
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function............................................................................................................ 4- 23
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function............................................................................................................ 4- 24

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................4- 25

4.7.1 Main Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 4- 25
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 25
4.7.1.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 25

4.7.2 SDRAM.................................................................................................................................................................. 4- 26
4.7.2.1 Removing the Face Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 26
4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 26

4.7.3 Boot ROM.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 26

4.7.3.1 Removing the Face Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 26
4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 26

4.7.4 HDD....................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 26
4.7.4.1 Removing the Face Cover (optional) ..................................................................................................................................... 4- 26
4.7.4.2 Removing the Counter PCB (optional)................................................................................................................................... 4- 27
4.7.4.3 Removing the HDD (optional) ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 27

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

5.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System......................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................ 5- 3

5.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................5- 5

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On............................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original) ........................... 5- 5
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original )........................... 5- 6

5.3 Various Control ...........................................................................................................................................5- 7

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System..................................................................................................................... 5- 7
5.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 7
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor................................................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ................................................................................................................................... 5- 8

5.3.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 8
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor.................................................................................................................... 5- 9

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction ......................................................................................................................................... 5- 10

5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction........................................................................................................ 5- 10
5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................................................................ 5- 10

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .............................................................................................................................. 5- 11

5.3.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 11
5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 12

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13

Contents

5.3.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 13

5.3.6 Image Processing ..................................................................................................................................................5- 15

5.3.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 15
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 16
5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output .................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline) .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 17
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 17
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction ................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 17

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 5- 18

5.4.1 Copyboard glass ....................................................................................................................................................5- 18
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 18
5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 18

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................................5- 19

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB........................................................................................................................ 5- 19
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover of the machine ............................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover ......................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.4.2.5 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 19
5.4.2.6 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................... 5- 20
5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM .............................................................................. 5- 21

5.4.3 Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................................5- 22

5.4.3.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................... 5- 22
5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 22

5.4.4 Contact sensor.......................................................................................................................................................5- 22

5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 22
5.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................... 5- 23
5.4.4.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 23
5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)........................................................................................................................... 5- 24
5.4.4.5 After Replacement of the CIS ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 25

5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ..................................................................................................................5- 25

5.4.5.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................... 5- 25
5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front/rear) ....................................................................................... 5- 25

5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................5- 26

5.4.6.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 26
5.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 26
5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor ......................................................................................................... 5- 27

5.4.7 Original Size Sensor ..............................................................................................................................................5- 27

5.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................... 5- 27
5.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 27
5.4.7.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 28

5.4.8 Reader Heater (option) ..........................................................................................................................................5- 29

5.4.8.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 29
5.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right)...................................................................................................................................... 5- 29
5.4.8.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 30
5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left) ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 30

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

6.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions .................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................6- 2
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System .........................................................................................................................6- 2

6.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 6- 5

6.2.1 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................6- 5

6.3 Various Controls ......................................................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ...................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light .......................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control....................................................................................................................................... 6- 6

Contents

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light .................................................................................................................... 6- 7

6.3.2.1 APC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 7

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor....................................................................................................................... 6- 7

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 6- 7

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter................................................................................................................................... 6- 8

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ................................................................................................................................................... 6- 8

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................6- 10

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................................................................ 6- 10
6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 6- 10
6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 10
6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 10

Chapter 7 Image Formation

7.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ....................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ............................................................................................... 7- 2

7.2 Image Formation Process ..........................................................................................................................7- 3

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) ......................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) .......................................................................................................... 7- 4

7.3 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................7- 5

7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying)............................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying)............................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)...................................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)...................................................................................................................... 7- 7

7.4 Image Stabilization Control.........................................................................................................................7- 8

7.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 8
7.4.2 APVC Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 8
7.4.3 ATVC Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 8

7.5 Drum Unit ...................................................................................................................................................7- 9

7.5.1 Charging Mechanism............................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias..................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism ........................................................................................................................ 7- 9

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit ....................................................................................................................................7- 10

7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning .............................................................................................................................. 7- 10

7.7 Developing Unit ........................................................................................................................................7- 11

7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias ............................................................................................................................ 7- 11

7.8 Toner Container........................................................................................................................................7- 12

7.8.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 12
7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply........................................................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge.......................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.8.4 Toner Supply Control............................................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.8.5 Recovery Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.8.6 Toner Level Detection ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 14

7.9 Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................................7- 16

7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.9.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ................................................................................................................................. 7- 16

7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.9.3 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 16

7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism..................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.9.4 Separation Mechanism.......................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias..................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.10 Transfer Mechanism ...............................................................................................................................7- 17

Contents

7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias .............................................................................................................................................7- 17

7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control................................................................................................................................................. 7- 17

7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 7- 18

7.11.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................7- 18
7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner....................................................................................................................................7- 18
7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box ...........................................................................................................................7- 18

7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................... 7- 19

7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp .............................................................................................................................................7- 19
7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 19
7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 19
7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................................................. 7- 19
7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.12.1.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper Tray .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 22
7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .................................................................................................................................. 7- 22
7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 22

7.12.2 Drum Unit .............................................................................................................................................................7- 22

7.12.2.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 22
7.12.2.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 23
7.12.2.3 Removing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 23

7.12.3 Hopper Assembly.................................................................................................................................................7- 24

7.12.3.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 24
7.12.3.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 24
7.12.3.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................................................. 7- 24
7.12.3.4 Removing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 25
7.12.3.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 26
7.12.3.6 Removing the Upper Tray .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 27
7.12.3.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .................................................................................................................................. 7- 27
7.12.3.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 27
7.12.3.9 Removing the Left Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 28
7.12.3.10 Removing the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 28
7.12.3.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 7- 29

7.12.4 Sub Hopper ..........................................................................................................................................................7- 30

7.12.4.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 30
7.12.4.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 30
7.12.4.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................................................. 7- 30
7.12.4.4 Removing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 31
7.12.4.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 32
7.12.4.6 Removing the Upper Tray .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.12.4.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .................................................................................................................................. 7- 33
7.12.4.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.12.4.9 Removing the Left Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 34
7.12.4.10 Removing the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 34
7.12.4.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 7- 35
7.12.4.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor .............................................................................................................................. 7- 36
7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub Hopper ................................................................................................................................................. 7- 36

7.12.5 Developing Assembly...........................................................................................................................................7- 37

7.12.5.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 37
7.12.5.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 38
7.12.5.3 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 38

7.12.6 Developing Cylinder .............................................................................................................................................7- 39

7.12.6.1 Detaching the Developing Cylinder...................................................................................................................................... 7- 39

7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller......................................................................................................................................7- 41

7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 41

7.12.8 Waste Toner Box .................................................................................................................................................7- 41

7.12.8.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 41
7.12.8.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 42

7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor..............................................................................................................................................7- 42

7.12.9.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 7- 42
7.12.9.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 42

Contents

7.12.9.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................................................. 7- 43

7.12.9.4 Removing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 43
7.12.9.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 44
7.12.9.6 Removing the Upper Tray .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 45
7.12.9.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .................................................................................................................................. 7- 45
7.12.9.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 45
7.12.9.9 Removing the Left Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 46
7.12.9.10 Removing the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 46
7.12.9.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 7- 47
7.12.9.12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor..................................................................................................................................... 7- 48

7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor..................................................................................................................................... 7- 48

7.12.10.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 7- 48
7.12.10.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 48
7.12.10.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 48
7.12.10.4 Removing the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.12.10.5 Removing the Developing Assembly.................................................................................................................................. 7- 50
7.12.10.6 Removing the Upper Tray .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 51
7.12.10.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ................................................................................................................................ 7- 51
7.12.10.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp .................................................................................................................................... 7- 51
7.12.10.9 Removing the Left Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 52
7.12.10.10 Removing the Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 52
7.12.10.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 53
7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor ............................................................................................................................ 7- 54

7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator .................................................................................................................................... 7- 54

7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 54

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

8.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions .................................................................................................................. 8- 1
8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers............................................................................................................................................ 8- 2
8.1.3 Paper Path (printer unit on its own) ......................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.1.4 Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray) .................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.1.5 Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray)...................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.1.6 Arrangement of Sensors.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 6

8.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................8- 7

8.2.1 Basic Sequence ...................................................................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.2.2 Acceleration Intervals .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 7

8.3 Detecting Jams ...........................................................................................................................................8- 9

8.3.1 Stationary Jams....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.3.1.1 Common Stationary Jam ......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.3.1.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 9

8.3.2 Other Jams .............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 9

8.3.2.1 Door Open Jam........................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 9

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..............................................................................................................................8- 10

8.4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 10
8.4.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.3 Identifying the Paper Size...................................................................................................................................... 8- 11
8.4.4 Setting Up the Universal Cassette......................................................................................................................... 8- 12
8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 13

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit .........................................................................................................................8- 16

8.5.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 16
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation................................................................................................................................ 8- 16
8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size...................................................................................................................................... 8- 16
8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 8- 17

8.6 Registration Unit .......................................................................................................................................8- 19

8.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 19
8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration .......................................................................................................................... 8- 19

Contents

8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................. 8- 20

8.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................8- 20
8.7.2 Sequence of Image Formation...............................................................................................................................8- 21
8.7.3 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option).......................................................................................................................8- 22
8.7.4 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option)..........................................................................................................................8- 27

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 8- 33

8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1.........................................................................................................................................................8- 33
8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 33
8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 33
8.8.1.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 34
8.8.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 34
8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 34

8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2.........................................................................................................................................................8- 35

8.8.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 35
8.8.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 35
8.8.2.3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 35

8.8.3 Pickup Roller..........................................................................................................................................................8- 35

8.8.3.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller .................................................................................................. 8- 35

8.8.4 Sensor Mount.........................................................................................................................................................8- 36

8.8.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 36
8.8.4.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 36
8.8.4.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 37
8.8.4.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 37
8.8.4.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 37
8.8.4.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 38
8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................................................... 8- 38
8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate..................................................................................................................................... 8- 38

8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1.......................................................................................................................................8- 39

8.8.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 39
8.8.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 39
8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 40
8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1................................................................................................................................. 8- 40

8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2.......................................................................................................................................8- 40

8.8.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 40
8.8.6.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 40
8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2................................................................................................................................. 8- 41

8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor ............................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.8.7.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.8.7.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 42
8.8.7.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 43
8.8.7.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 43
8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 43
8.8.7.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.8.7.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 44

8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................................8- 45

8.8.8.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.8.8.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 46
8.8.8.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 46
8.8.8.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.8.8.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.8.8.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.8.8.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 8- 48

8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor..........................................................................................................................................8- 48

8.8.9.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.8.9.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.8.9.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 49
8.8.9.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)................................................................................................................................. 8- 49
8.8.9.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 50

Contents

8.8.9.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 50

8.8.9.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................................................... 8- 50
8.8.9.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................... 8- 51

8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)..................................................................................................................... 8- 51

8.8.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.8.10.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.8.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)............................................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.8.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1........................................................................................................................................ 8- 53
8.8.10.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2........................................................................................................................................ 8- 53
8.8.10.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate.................................................................................................................................. 8- 53
8.8.10.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) .............................................................................................................. 8- 54

8.8.11 Slide Resistor....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 54

8.8.11.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 54
8.8.11.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 54
8.8.11.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 55
8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 56
8.8.11.5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit........................................................................................................................................... 8- 56
8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide Resistor................................................................................................................................................ 8- 57

8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid.................................................................................................................................... 8- 57

8.8.12.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 57
8.8.12.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 57
8.8.12.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 58
8.8.12.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)............................................................................................................................... 8- 59
8.8.12.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1........................................................................................................................................ 8- 59
8.8.12.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2........................................................................................................................................ 8- 59
8.8.12.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................. 8- 59

8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB........................................................................................................................ 8- 60

8.8.13.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 60
8.8.13.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 60
8.8.13.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 61
8.8.13.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)............................................................................................................................... 8- 61
8.8.13.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1........................................................................................................................................ 8- 61
8.8.13.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2........................................................................................................................................ 8- 62
8.8.13.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB................................................................................................................. 8- 62

8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 62

8.8.14.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 62
8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 63
8.8.14.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 63
8.8.14.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 64
8.8.14.5 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 8- 65

8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 65

8.8.15.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 65
8.8.15.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 65
8.8.15.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 66
8.8.15.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 67

8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................................... 8- 68

8.8.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 68
8.8.16.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 68
8.8.16.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 69
8.8.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 69
8.8.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................... 8- 70

8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch......................................................................................................................................... 8- 70

8.8.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 70
8.8.17.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 71
8.8.17.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 71
8.8.17.4 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 72
8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 72
8.8.17.6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch .......................................................................................................................... 8- 73

8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 73

8.8.18.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 73

Contents

8.8.18.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 73

8.8.18.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 74
8.8.18.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 75
8.8.18.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................... 8- 75
8.8.18.6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad........................................................................................................................ 8- 76

8.8.19 Registration Clutch...............................................................................................................................................8- 76

8.8.19.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 76
8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 8- 76
8.8.19.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 8- 77
8.8.19.4 Removing the Registration Clutch........................................................................................................................................ 8- 77

8.8.20 Feeding Roller......................................................................................................................................................8- 77

8.8.20.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ................................................................................................ 8- 77

8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller ..............................................................................................................................................8- 78

8.8.21.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 78
8.8.21.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 78
8.8.21.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 79
8.8.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)............................................................................................................................... 8- 79
8.8.21.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1........................................................................................................................................ 8- 79
8.8.21.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2........................................................................................................................................ 8- 80
8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate.................................................................................................................................. 8- 80
8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 80

8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ...........................................................................................................................................8- 81

8.8.22.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 81
8.8.22.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 81
8.8.22.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 82
8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 .................................................................................................................................... 8- 82

8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor ............................................................................................................................................8- 83

8.8.23.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 83
8.8.23.2 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 83
8.8.23.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 84
8.8.23.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 85

8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch..............................................................................................................................................8- 85

8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 85
8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch ...................................................................................................................................... 8- 85

8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1.............................................................................................................................................8- 86

8.8.25.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 86
8.8.25.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 8- 86
8.8.25.3 Removing the Delivery Tray................................................................................................................................................. 8- 86
8.8.25.4 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 86
8.8.25.5 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 87
8.8.25.6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit ................................................................................................................................... 8- 88
8.8.25.7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 89

8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly...........................................................................................................................8- 89

8.8.26.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 89
8.8.26.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit............................................................................................................................................ 8- 89
8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray................................................................................................................................................. 8- 89
8.8.26.4 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 89
8.8.26.5 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 90
8.8.26.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 91
8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 91
8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................... 8- 92

8.8.27 Separation Roller .................................................................................................................................................8- 92

8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ................................................................................................ 8- 92

Chapter 9 Fixing System

9.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................9- 1
9.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................9- 1

9.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 2

Contents

9.2.1 Power-On Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 2

9.2.2 Down Sequence ...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 2

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................9- 3

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film.................................................................................................................. 9- 3
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature...................................................................................... 9- 3
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed ............................................................................................................................................ 9- 3

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ................................................................................................................. 9- 3

9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature ............................................................................................ 9- 3
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature...................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up ................................................................................................................................ 9- 3
9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control.................................................................................................................................................. 9- 4
9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature ....................................................................................................................... 9- 4
9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy...................................................................................... 9- 4
9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size................................................................................................... 9- 4

9.3.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 4

9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 4

9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper.............................................................................................................................. 9- 5

9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 5

9.4 Protective Functions ...................................................................................................................................9- 6

9.4.1 Protective Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 6
9.4.2 Detecting an Error ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 6

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................9- 8

9.5.1 Fixing Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 8
9.5.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................. 9- 8
9.5.1.2 Removing the Right Door......................................................................................................................................................... 9- 8
9.5.1.3 Removing the Right Door......................................................................................................................................................... 9- 9
9.5.1.4 Removing the Fixing Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 9- 9

9.5.2 Pressure Roller...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 10

9.5.2.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 10
9.5.2.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ...................................................................................................................... 9- 12
9.5.2.3 Removing the Grounding Plate.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 12
9.5.2.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover............................................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.2.5 Removing the Left Side Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.2.6 Releasing the Locking Plate .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 14
9.5.2.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.2.8 Removing the Inlet Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.2.9 Removing the Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.3 Cleaning Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.3.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.5.3.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ...................................................................................................................... 9- 18
9.5.3.3 Removing the Cleaning Roller ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 18

9.5.4 Fixing Film ............................................................................................................................................................. 9- 19

9.5.4.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 19
9.5.4.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ...................................................................................................................... 9- 21
9.5.4.3 Removing the Grounding Plate.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 21
9.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover............................................................................................................................................ 9- 21
9.5.4.5 Removing the Left Side Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 22
9.5.4.6 Releasing the Locking Plate .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 23
9.5.4.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 23

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 24

9.5.5.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 24
9.5.5.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ...................................................................................................................... 9- 26
9.5.5.3 Removing the Grounding Plate.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 26
9.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover............................................................................................................................................ 9- 26
9.5.5.5 Removing the Left Side Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 27
9.5.5.6 Releasing the Locking Plate .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 28
9.5.5.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 28
9.5.5.8 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 9- 29

9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 9- 29

9.5.6.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 29

Contents

9.5.6.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ...................................................................................................................... 9- 31

9.5.6.3 Removing the Grounding Plate.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 31
9.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 32

Chapter 10 External and Controls

10.1 Control Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing...................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.3 Adjustment of the LCD Contact............................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ....................................................................................................................10- 1

10.2 Counters ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 2

10.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 2
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count ............................................................................................................................10- 2

10.3 Fans........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 4

10.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 4
10.3.2 2-Speed Control ...................................................................................................................................................10- 4
10.3.3 Sequence of Operation ........................................................................................................................................10- 4

10.4 Power Supply System ............................................................................................................................ 10- 6

10.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................................10- 6
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit................................................................................................................................. 10- 6
10.4.1.2 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................. 10- 7
10.4.1.3 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.4.1.4 Connections to Various Accessories.................................................................................................................................... 10- 7

10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................10- 8

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................... 10- 8
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB.............................................................................................................. 10- 8
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB.......................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................ 10- 9

10.4.3 Protection Function ..............................................................................................................................................10- 9

10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 9

10.4.4 Backup Battery.....................................................................................................................................................10- 9

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function.....................................................................................................................................10- 10

10.4.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 10
10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 10

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................. 10- 12

10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly .........................................................................................................................................10- 12
10.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 12
10.5.1.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 10- 12

10.5.2 Power Supply Unit..............................................................................................................................................10- 12

10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 12
10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 13
10.5.2.3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................. 10- 13
10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply ..................................................................................................................................... 10- 13

10.5.3 Control Panel .....................................................................................................................................................10- 14

10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 14

10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit......................................................................................................................................10- 15

10.5.4.1 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 15
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover .......................................................................................................................... 10- 15
10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame................................................................................................................................... 10- 15
10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD PCB.............................................................................................................................. 10- 16

10.5.5 DC Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................10- 17

10.5.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................... 10- 17

10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB................................................................................................................................10- 18

10.5.6.1 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 18
10.5.6.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover .......................................................................................................................... 10- 18
10.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame................................................................................................................................... 10- 18

Contents

10.5.6.4 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB......................................................................................................................... 10- 19

10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB.......................................................................................................................... 10- 19

10.5.7.1 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 19
10.5.7.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover .......................................................................................................................... 10- 20
10.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame................................................................................................................................... 10- 20
10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ................................................................................................................... 10- 21

10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB .................................................................................................................................... 10- 21

10.5.8.1 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 21
10.5.8.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover .......................................................................................................................... 10- 22
10.5.8.3 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ............................................................................................................................. 10- 22

10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB.............................................................................................................................. 10- 22

10.5.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 22
10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power Supply PCB....................................................................................................................... 10- 23

10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB.......................................................................................................................... 10- 23

10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 23
10.5.10.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)...................................................................................................................................... 10- 23
10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.5.10.5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................... 10- 24

10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB............................................................................................................................... 10- 24

10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 24
10.5.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)...................................................................................................................................... 10- 25
10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 25
10.5.11.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................... 10- 25

10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB............................................................................................................................................ 10- 26

10.5.12.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit........................................................................................................................................ 10- 26
10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case .................................................................................................................................... 10- 26
10.5.12.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 26
10.5.12.4 Removing the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 27
10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly................................................................................................................................ 10- 27
10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray ................................................................................................................................................ 10- 29
10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .............................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.5.12.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 10- 30
10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 10- 30
10.5.12.12 Removing the Right Cover (rear).................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.12.13 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.12.14 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.5.12.15 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 33
10.5.12.16 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 34
10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear ........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 35
10.5.12.18 Removing the High-Voltage PCB ................................................................................................................................... 10- 35

10.5.13 Exhaust Fan..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 35

10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................................................................. 10- 35
10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................................................................. 10- 36

10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 10- 37

10.5.14.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 37
10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................................ 10- 37
10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor....................................................................................................................................... 10- 38
10.5.14.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor....................................................................................................................................... 10- 38

10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor........................................................................................................................................... 10- 39

10.5.15.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 39
10.5.15.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 10- 39
10.5.15.3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor ..................................................................................................................................... 10- 40

10.5.16 Right Door........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 40

10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ..................................................................................................................................... 10- 40
10.5.16.2 Removing the Right Door ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 40
10.5.16.3 Removing the Right Door ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 41

10.5.17 Circuit Braker ................................................................................................................................................... 10- 42

10.5.17.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 42

Contents

10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit Breaker .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 42

Chapter 11 MEAP
11.1 MEAP ..................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.1.2 MEAP Counter .....................................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform .....................................................................................................................11- 1

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts.................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.2 Reader Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.3 Printer Unit ...........................................................................................................................................................12- 1

12.2 Durables and Consumables ................................................................................................................... 12- 2

12.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................12- 2
12.2.2 Reader Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................12- 2
12.2.3 Printer Unit ...........................................................................................................................................................12- 2

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ................................................................................................... 12- 4

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit .............................................................................................................12- 4
12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit ..............................................................................................................12- 4
12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures ...............................................................................................................12- 6
12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing ....................................................................................................12- 6

12.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 12- 9

12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide.......................................................................................................................12- 9
12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide.............12- 9
12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator ............................................................................................................12- 16
12.4.4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator ............................................................................................................12- 23

Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments

13.1 Image Adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1 Standards for Image Position...............................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.2 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.3 Cassette ...............................................................................................................................................................13- 2
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ................................................................................................................................................13- 3
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ..................................................................................................................................................13- 3

13.2 Scanning System.................................................................................................................................... 13- 5

13.2.1 After Replacement of the CIS ..............................................................................................................................13- 5
13.2.2 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM.....................................................................13- 5

13.3 Laser Exposure System ......................................................................................................................... 13- 6

13.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit...............................................................................................................13- 6

13.4 Image Formation System ....................................................................................................................... 13- 7

13.4.1 After Replacing the Developing Unit ....................................................................................................................13- 7
13.4.2 After Replacing the Drum Unit (APVC correction) ...............................................................................................13- 7

13.5 Electrical Components............................................................................................................................ 13- 8

13.5.1 After Replacing the HDD......................................................................................................................................13- 8
13.5.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ...............................................................................................................13- 8
13.5.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB.............................................................................................................13- 8
13.5.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.........................................................................................................13- 8

13.6 Pickup/Feeding System ........................................................................................................................ 13- 10

13.6.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Cassette ................................................................13- 10
13.6.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ............................................................13- 11
13.6.3 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration ...............................................................................13- 11
13.6.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value ..........................................................................................................13- 12

Contents

Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images

14.1 Making lnitial Checks ..............................................................................................................................14- 1
14.1.1 Site Environment ................................................................................................................................................. 14- 1
14.1.2 Checking the Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 1
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ....................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................................ 14- 1
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items............................................................................................................ 14- 1
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems ....................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.7 Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 2

14.2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................14- 3

14.2.1 Image Faults ........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 3
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density.................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 3
14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked ....................................................................................................................................................... 14- 4
14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked .............................................................................................................................................................. 14- 7
14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory.................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 10

14.2.2 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 11

14.2.2.1 No Power ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 11
14.2.2.2 Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 11

14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related ................................................................................................................................... 14- 12

14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem ....................................................................................................................................................... 14- 12

14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ ................................................................................................................................ 14- 12

14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 12
14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 13
14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications........................................................................................................................................... 14- 13

14.3 Outline of Electrical Components..........................................................................................................14- 15

14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid.................................................................................................................................................. 14- 15
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 15

14.3.2 Motor.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 15

14.3.2.1 Motors ................................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 15

14.3.3 Fan..................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 17

14.3.3.1 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 17

14.3.4 Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 14- 18

14.3.4.1 Sensors .............................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 18

14.3.5 Switch ................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 21

14.3.5.1 Switches............................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 21

14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others.............................................................................................................................. 14- 22

14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 22
14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 24

14.3.7 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 26

14.3.7.1 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 26
14.3.7.2 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 28

14.3.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB .............................................. 14- 30
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ......................................................................... 14- 30
14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker........................................................................................................................ 14- 30
14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 31

Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis

15.1 Error Code Table ....................................................................................................................................15- 1
15.1.1 Error Code ........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

15.2 Error Code Details ..................................................................................................................................15- 3

15.2.1 Error Code Details ............................................................................................................................................... 15- 3
15.2.2 E602 in Detaill...................................................................................................................................................... 15- 9
15.2.3 Error Code Detailsitest for A4 sizej ............................................................................................................... 15- 14

15.3 Error Code (SEND) ...............................................................................................................................15- 19

15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis................................................................................................................................... 15- 19
15.3.2 Error Codes ....................................................................................................................................................... 15- 20

Contents

15.4 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................................. 15- 25

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) ......................................................................................................................................15- 25
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)................................................................................................................................15- 25

15.5 Alarm Code........................................................................................................................................... 15- 26

15.5.1 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................................15- 26

15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes................................................................................................... 15- 27

15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher)..............................................................................................................15- 27
15.6.2 Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher) .................................................................................................................15- 41

15.7 DADF Error Codes ............................................................................................................................... 15- 47

15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF) ...................................................................................................................................15- 47

Chapter 16 Service Mode

16.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ..............................................................................................................................16- 1
16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections.....................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.3 Ending Service Mode ...........................................................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.4 Back-Up ...............................................................................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.5 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................................................................16- 3
16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen.............................................................................................................................................16- 3
16.1.7 4th Item Screen....................................................................................................................................................16- 4

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ............................................................................................................ 16- 5

16.2.1 COPIER ...............................................................................................................................................................16- 5
16.2.1.1 Copier List ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16- 5

16.2.2 FEEDER...............................................................................................................................................................16- 9
16.2.2.1 Feeder List ........................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 9

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) .......................................................................................................................... 16- 10

16.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................16- 10
16.3.2 <DC-CON>.........................................................................................................................................................16- 10
16.3.3 <R-CON> ...........................................................................................................................................................16- 12
16.3.4 <FEEDER> ........................................................................................................................................................16- 14
16.3.5 <SORTER> ........................................................................................................................................................16- 14

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ................................................................................................................ 16- 21

16.4.1 COPIER .............................................................................................................................................................16- 21
16.4.1.1 Copier List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 21

16.4.2 FEEDER.............................................................................................................................................................16- 26
16.4.2.1 FEEDER List ...................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 26

16.4.3 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................................16- 27

16.4.3.1 Sorter List........................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 27

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)............................................................................................. 16- 28

16.5.1 COPIER .............................................................................................................................................................16- 28
16.5.1.1 Copier List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 28

16.5.2 FEEDER.............................................................................................................................................................16- 35
16.5.2.1 Feeder List ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 35

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) ....................................................................................................... 16- 37

16.6.1 COPIER .............................................................................................................................................................16- 37
16.6.1.1 Copier List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 37

16.6.2 FEEDER.............................................................................................................................................................16- 54
16.6.2.1 Feeder List ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 54

16.6.3 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................................16- 54

16.6.3.1 Sorter List........................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 54

16.6.4 BOARD ..............................................................................................................................................................16- 55

16.6.4.1 Board List ........................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 55

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)........................................................................................................................ 16- 56

16.7.1 COPIER .............................................................................................................................................................16- 56
16.7.1.1 Copier List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 56

Contents

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ..................................................................................................................16- 58

16.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 58
16.8.1.1 Copier List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 58

Chapter 17 Upgrading
17.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................17- 1
17.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine ....................................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool..................................................................................................................... 17- 1

17.2 Formatting the HDD ................................................................................................................................17- 5

17.2.1 Formatting All Partitions....................................................................................................................................... 17- 5
17.2.2 Formatting Selected Partitions............................................................................................................................. 17- 5
17.2.3 Formatting Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 17- 6

17.3 Downloading System Software ...............................................................................................................17- 9

17.3.1 Downloading System ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 9
17.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 9
17.3.1.2 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 17- 9

17.3.2 Downloading RUI, and Language...................................................................................................................... 17- 11

17.3.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 11
17.3.2.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 12

17.3.3 Downloading SDICT .......................................................................................................................................... 17- 14

17.3.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 14
17.3.3.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 14

17.3.4 Downloading MEAPCONT................................................................................................................................. 17- 16

17.3.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 16
17.3.4.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 16

17.3.5 Downloading KEY.............................................................................................................................................. 17- 18

17.3.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 18
17.3.5.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 18

17.3.6 Downloading BOOT........................................................................................................................................... 17- 20

17.3.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 20
17.3.6.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 21

17.3.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon ............................................................................................................................ 17- 23

17.3.7.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 23
17.3.7.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 23

17.3.8 Downloading G3 FAX ........................................................................................................................................ 17- 25

17.3.8.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 25
17.3.8.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 26

17.3.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ........................................................................................................ 17- 27

17.3.9.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 27
17.3.9.2 Uploading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 28
17.3.9.3 Downloading Procedur....................................................................................................................................................... 17- 30

Chapter 18 Service Tools

18.1 Service Tools ..........................................................................................................................................18- 1
18.1.1 Special Tools ....................................................................................................................................................... 18- 1
18.1.2 Oils and Solvents................................................................................................................................................. 18- 1

Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

Contents

Contents
1.1 System Construction ......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Overview of System Construction (output accessories) .............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Output Accessories System Configuration 1 ............................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Output Accessories System Configuration 2 ............................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4 Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.5 Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration.......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions ...................................................................................................................... 1-4

1.2 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-6

1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.2.1.1 External View..................................................................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.2.1.2 Cross-Section ..................................................................................................................................................................................................1-7

1.2.2 Using the Machine ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch.........................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ..................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch..........................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.2.4 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-13

1.2.3 User Mode Items........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-14

1.2.3.1 Common Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.3.2 Setting the Timer...........................................................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.2.3.4 Printing Out a Report ....................................................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings................................................................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.3.6 System Control Settings................................................................................................................................................................................1-18
1.2.3.7 Copy Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.2.3.8 Transmission/Reception Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.2.3.9 Transmission/Reception Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................1-21
1.2.3.10 Box Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-21
1.2.3.11 Box Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.2.3.12 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.2.3.13 Address Book Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................1-23

1.2.4 Maintenance by the User ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-24

1.2.4.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.2.4.2 Inspection ......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-25

1.2.5 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-26

1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light...............................................................................................................................................................................1-26
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations........................................................................................................................................................................................1-26
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-27

1.2.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-27

1.2.6.1 Product Specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................1-27

1.2.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-29

1.2.7.1 Printing Speed ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-29
1.2.7.2 Types of Paper...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-29

Chapter 1

1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 Overview of System Construction (output accessories)
0008-6919

The output accessories designed for the machine can broadly be divided into 2 groups:
- if the work is limited to stapling and the like, output accessories configuration 1
- if the work calls for 3-way sorting, output accessories system construction 2

1.1.2 Output Accessories System Configuration 1

0008-6920

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[3]

[4a]

[3a]

[4]

[2]

[6a]

[2a]

[5a]
[6]
[1a]
[5]

[1]
F-1-1
T-1-1

[1]Finisher-S1
[2]3Way Unit-A1

[1a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Finisher-S1
[2a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the 3Way Unit-A1

[3]Output Tray-J1

[3a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Output Tray-J1

[4]Accessories Power Supply-P2

[standard with 120 or 230 V model]
(It is necessary when installing [1].)
[5]Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1

[4a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Accessories Power
Supply-P2
[5a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/
R1/S1/T1
[6a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Finisher Additional
Tray-B1

[6]Finisher Additional Tray-B1

The following table shows individual functions and the accessories needed:

1-1

Chapter 1
T-1-2

Function
- 2-way delivery
- Stapling

Accessories needed
Finisher-S1
Accessories Power Supply-P2
3Way Unit-A1
Output Tray-J1

T-1-3

Function
- 3-way delivery
- Stapling

Accessories needed
Finisher-S1
Accessories Power Supply-P2
3Way Unit-A1
Finisher Additional Tray-B1
Output Tray-J1

T-1-4

Function
- Punching

Accessories needed
Finisher-S1
Accessories Power Supply-P2
3Way Unit-A1
Inner Puncher Kit-Q1

1.1.3 Output Accessories System Configuration 2

0008-6922

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[3]

[3a]

[2]

[2a]

[1a]

[1]
F-1-2
T-1-5

[1]Inner 2-Way Tray-D1

1-2

[1a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Inner 2-Way Tray-D1

Chapter 1

[2]3Way Unit-A1
(powered by host; no need for
Accessories Power Supply-P2)

[2a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the 3Way Unit-A1

[3]Output Tray-J1

[3a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Output Tray-J1

1.1.4 Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration

0008-6923

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[2]

[1]

[1a]

[4]
[3]

[7]

[7a]

[5a]

[6]

[5]
F-1-3
T-1-6

[1]DADF-N1

[1a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the DADF-N1

[2]Platen Cover Type-H

[3]Document Tray-J1

[3a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Document Tray-J1

[4]Card Reader-C1/Card Reader

Mounting Kit-B1
[5]Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

[6a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

[6]Envelope Cassette-C1 (100 V)

1-3

Chapter 1

[7]Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1 (115/

200 V)

[8a]Installation Procedure
- installation of the Envelope Cassettes
Attachment-C1

1.1.5 Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration

0008-6929

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[4]

[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]

[6]

[5]

[8]
F-1-4

[1] UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P Boot ROM)

[2] Printer Kit-E2 (H Boot ROM)
[3] Multi PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N Boot ROM)
[4] iR System Expansion Kit-A1
[5] Super G3 Fax Board-Q1
[6] PCI Bus Expansion Kit-B1
[7] Security Expansion Board (USB)-D1
[8] iR Security Kit-A2 (license certificate)

1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions

0008-6933

- List of Print Transmission Optional Functions

The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories; for details, see the chapters that follow:
T-1-7

1-4

UFR II print function

==>

UFR II/PCL print function

==>

UFR II/PCL/PS print function

==>

Fax function (1-line)

==>

UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P BootROM)

iR System Expansion Kit-A1
Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM)
iR System Expansion Kit-A1
Multi-PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N BootROM)
iR System Expansion Kit-A1
Super G3 Fax Board-Q1
iR System Expansion Kit-A1

Chapter 1

Security function
(HDD initialization+
encryption)

==>

USB Application Interface Board-D1

Expansion Bus-B1
iR Security Kit-A2
iR System Expansion Kit-A1

1-5

Chapter 1

1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View
0008-8229

[2]
[3]
[1]

[4]
[5]

[18]
[17]

[6]
[7]

[16]

[8]

[15]

[9]
[10]

[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-1-5

[1] ADF reading glass retainer

[2] DADF (optional)
[3] Reader cover (front)
[4] Control panel
[5] Support cover (right)
[6] Support cover
[7] Delivery tray right cover
[8] Delivery tray
[9] Inside right cover
[10] Front cover unit
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[13] Left cover (lower)
[14] Left cover
[15] Inside base cover
[16] Left cover (rear)
[17] Output tray rear cover (lower)
[18] Output tray rear cover
[19]

[20]

[21]
[28]
[22]

[27]

[23]

[26]

[25]

[24]
F-1-6

1-6

Chapter 1
[19] Reader cover (right)
[20] Platen glass
[21] Reader cover (rear)
[22] Face cover
[23] Rear cover
[24] Right cover (rear)
[25] Manual feed pickup tray
[26] Right cover (lower front)
[27] Right door unit
[28] Delivery cover
[29] Right cover (upper)

1.2.1.2 Cross-Section
0007-9223

iR2270/iR2270F/iR2870/iR2870F Model
iR2230/iR2830/iR3530/iR2280F Model

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[29]
[12]
[13]
[28]

[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[27]

[26]

[25]

F-1-7

iR3570/iR3570F/iR4570/iR4570F Model

1-7

Chapter 1

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[7]

[6]

[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[29]
[12]
[13]
[28]

[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[27]

[26]

[25]

F-1-8
T-1-8

[1]

CIS unit

[16]

[2]

ADF reading glass

[17]

Manual feed pickup roller

Pickup roller (cassette 1)

[3]

Platen glass

[18]

Vertical path roller 1

[4]

Toner bottle

[19]

Feed roller (cassette 1)

[5]

Drum unit

[20]

Separation roller (cassette 1)

[6]

Drum cleaning unit

[21]

Vertical path roller 2

[7]

Delivery roller

[22]

Feed roller (cassette 2)

[8]

Fixing outlet roller

[23]

Separation roller (cassette 2)

[9]

Fixing film unit

[24]

Pickup roller (cassette 2)

[10]

Pressure roller

[25]

Primary charging roller

[11]

Duplex feed roller

[26]

Developing unit

[12]

Photosensitive drum

[27]

Laser scanner unit

[13]

Duplex feed roller 2

[28]

Dust-blocking sheet

[14]

Transfer roller

[29]

Sub hopper

[15]

Registration roller

1.2.2 Using the Machine

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch
0007-3138

The machine possesses 2 power switches: main power switch and control power switch. Normally (i.e., unless the machine is in a sleep state), the machine
will be supplied with power when you turn on its main power switch.

1-8

Chapter 1

ON/OFF

[1]

123

[2]

[3]
F-1-9

iR4570/3570, 2870/2270

1-9

Chapter 1

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-1-10

iR4530/3530/2830/2230
[1]Control panel power switch
[2]Main power lamp
[3]Main power switch
Never turn off the main power while the display shows the progress bar, indicating that the HDD is being accessed. Otherwise, the HDD may suffer a
fault (E602). This caution does not apply to models not equipped with a HDD.

Starting up. Please wait.

F-1-11

1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch

0007-3160

Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch
When Using the Print Function/When Receiving or Transmitting a Fax
Before using the main power switch, check to be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off. (Turning off the main power switch while
an operation is under way can cause loss of data.)

1-10

Chapter 1

9
0
C
Start/Memory

Error

Main Power

F-1-12

At Time of Downloading
Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way. Otherwise, the machine may not be able to operate normally.

ON

/O

FF

F-1-13

1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0009-1736

Before turning off the main power switch, you must first press the control panel power switch.
When the Printer Unit Is in Operation or a Fax Is Being Received

1-11

Chapter 1
Check to be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off.
(Otherwise, the data being processed may be lost.)

F-1-14

While Downloading Is Taking Place

Do not turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch.
(Otherwise, the machine may fail to operate.)

1-12

Chapter 1

O
/O
N
F
F

F-1-15

1.2.2.4 Control Panel

0008-8219

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]
1

[6]
[7]
[8]

[20]

[19]

[18] [17] [16]

[15][14] [13][12] [11] [10] [9]

F-1-16

T-1-9

[1] Copy key

[11] Execute/Memory key

[2] Fax key

[12] Clear key

[3] Box key

[13] Keypad

[4] Extension key

[14] ID key

[5] Control panel power switch

[15] Image contrast adjustment dial

[6] Check Counter key

[16] Interrupt key

[7] Stop key

[17] User mode key

1-13

Chapter 1

[8] Start key

[18] Help key

[9] Main power lamp

[19] Reset key

[10] Error lamp

[20] Touch panel

1.2.3 User Mode Items

1.2.3.1 Common Settings
0009-2469

*Factory default.
**Indicated in the presence of appropriate accessories.
T-1-10
Mode

Description

set initial function

select initial function: *copier/transmit/box

use Initial screen for 'system status screen': ON/*OFF
give priority to 'device' of 'system status screen': *ON/OFF

function after auto clear

*use previous/do not use previous

enable/disable buzzer

input sound: *ON/OFF

Input invalid sound
supply pre-alert: ON/*OFF
alert: *ON/OFF
job end: *ON/OFF

inch input

ON/*OFF (if US, *ON)

enable/disable cassette auto

selection

copier/printer/box/other (manual feed: ON/*OFF + individual cassettes: ON/

OFF) (if printer, no manual feed), consider copy/paper type: (toggle) ON/*OFF

register envelop cassette

ENV.1/ENV.2
COM10/Monarch/DL/ISO-B5/ISO-C5/No. 4
default: Env.1 No. 4 (Japan), COM10 (outside Japan), Env.2 COM10 (both
Japan and outside Japan)

register paper type

cassette 1/cassette 2/cassette 3/cassette 4/cassette 5 (paper deck): plain paper,

recycled paper, colored paper, punched paper

power consumption in sleep

*low/high

select special tray**

(w/ finisher)

w/ tray 3
tray A: machine middle tray
tray B: tray 3
tray A: *copier/box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: *receive/fax 1/fax 2
w/ Inner Tray
tray A: machine middle tray (lower)
tray B: machine cent tray (upper)
tray A: *copier/*box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: *receive/fax 1/*fax 2
w/ inner tray + tray 3
tray A: machine middle tray (lower)
tray B: machine middle tray (upper)
tray C: tray 3
tray A: *copier/box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/fax*/other*
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray C: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2

1-14

Chapter 1

Mode

Description
*Fin-S1 + optional tray
tray A= Fin optional tray
tray B= Fin output tray
tray A: *copier/*box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
Fin-S1 + tray 3
tray A= Fin output tray
tray B= tray 3
tray A: *copier/*box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/printer/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
Fin-S1 + optional tray + tray 3
tray A= Fin optional tray
tray B= Fin output tray
tray C= tray 3
tray A: *copier/*box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray C: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
w/ Fin-Q3/Q4
tray A= Fin output tray (upper)
tray B= Fin output tray (lower)
tray C= machine middle tray
tray A: *copier/*box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)
tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray C: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
- if w/o fax
'receive fax' -> 'receive'
- if fax only
'receive/fax' -> 'fax'
- detail setup (review/fax)
applies if w/ fax
- if single-line fax,
'fax 1/fax 2' -> 'fax'
*If Fin-S1 (not equipped with an output accessory), the special tray is not
indicated.
w/ output optional tray
tray A: machine middle tray
tray A: *copier/*box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
(There is only one output target and, therefore, the special tray is not indicated.)

print priority

copier: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
box: 1/2/*3
fax/fax: 1/2/*3
other: 1/2/*3

manual feed paper standard

register mode

ON (paper size select/paper type select)/*OFF

pickup method switchover

manual feed; cassette 1 through 5 icons and paper type

priority on speed/priority on print side

1-15

Chapter 1

Mode

Description

local print standard mode

paper select: *auto/cassette 1 through 5

number of prints: *1 to 9999
sorter: sort/group/staple sort/*shift sort/shift group/rotation sort/rotation group/
punch hole/z-fold
w/o finisher, w/ inner 2-way tray: non-sort/sort*/rotation sort/group/rotation
group
duplex print: ON (open like book/open like calendar) *OFF
delete file after printing: ON/*OFF
merge file: ON/*OFF

switch display language:

ON/*OFF

reverse screen color:

ON/*OFF

indicate print wait time:

copier/box/other (for each, ON/*OFF)

mix paper in output tray**:

*ON/OFF

prompt for cleaning of reader

unit***:

*ON/OFF

function limit mode:

ON/*OFF

shut-down mode:

execute key

reset common settings

Do you really want to reset?: yes/no

1.2.3.2 Setting the Timer

0009-2474

*Factory default.
T-1-11
Mode

Description

fine-tune time

set date/time (12 numerals)

time zone: GMT - 12:00 ~ GMT + 12:00 - GMT + 9:00*
daylight saving: ON/OFF*

auto sleep time:

10 sec; 1.2*, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; 1 hr; 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr

auto clear time:

0= none; 1, *2, ..., 9 min (in 1-min increments)

set weekly timer:

between 00:00 and 23:59 from Sun to Sat (in 1-min increments)

1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning

0009-2479

*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-12
Mode

Description

zoom fine-adjust

XY independent: -1.0% to +1.0% (in 0.1% increments), *0%

density correction

copier/box, transmit (each in 9 steps; at time of shipment, set to '5')

feeder cleaning***

Start key

1.2.3.4 Printing Out a Report

0009-2485

*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-13
Mode

Description

transmit (specifications
settings)***

transmission result report: *only when error/ON/OFF

transmission original display: *ON/OFF
transmission original display for encryption PDF: ON/*OFF
communication control report
print automatically every 100 communications: *ON/OFF
print at specified time: ON/*OFF
set time: *00:00~23:59
separate transmit and receive: (toggle) ON/*OFF

fax
(specifications settings)***

1-16

fax transmission result report: *only if error/ON/OFF

transmission original display: *ON/OFF

Chapter 1

Mode

Description
fax communication control report
print automatically every 40 communications: *ON/OFF
print at specified time: ON/*OFF
set time: *00:00~23:59
separate transmit and receive: (toggle) ON/*OFF
fax receive result report: only if error/ON/*OFF
fax box review report: *ON/OFF

list print
(transmit)***

address book list: print list

print list
(fax)***

user data list: Do you want to print the user data list?: yes/no

List print
(network)

user data list: Do you want to print the user data list?: yes/no

user data list: Do you want to print the user data list?: yes/no

PCL: Configuration Page,Font List

PS: status print, font list
LIPS/emulation: status print, font list, LIPS utility (status print, overlay list, overlay
print, font list, macro list, form list, color sample), N201 utility (status print, overlay
print), ESC/P utility (status print, overlay print), i5577 utility (status print, overlay
print), HP-GL utility (status print, sample print)

1.2.3.5 System Control Settings

0007-3168

*Factory settings.
**Indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
***If iR5570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-14
Mode

Description

set system
administrator info

system administrator group ID: 7 characters max

system administration ID: set (7 characters)
system administrator name: 32 bytes
mail address: 64 bytes
contact: 32 bytes
comment: 32 bytes

group ID control

group ID control: ON/*OFF

register ID No.: register, edit, delete, limit function
count control: reset, count print, all clear
print without known ID: *ON/OFF
scan without known ID: *ON/OFF

set communications
control

e-mail/**i-fax setup
transmission data size upper limit: 0: none; 1 through 99 MB, *3 MB
abbreviation name: 40 characters; *attached image
full mode transmissions time-out: 1 to 99 hr; *24 hr
MDN/DSN reception print: ON/*OFF
notify always if error: *ON/OFF
user server route: ON/*OFF
fax setup***
transmission start speed: *33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
reception start speed: 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
reception password: 20 characters max.
FIS switch: ON/*OFF
system Box setup
system box ID No.***: 7 characters
use fax memory reception: ON/*OFF
use i-fax memory reception: ON/*OFF
memory reception start time***: everyday/day of week/*none
memory reception end time***: everyday/day of week/*none

enable/disable remote
UI

*ON/OFF
use SSL: ON/OFF

1-17

Chapter 1

Mode

Description

limit addresses***

address book ID No.: 7 characters max.

address book access No. control: ON/*OFF
limit new addresses: ON/*OFF

set device info

device name: 32 characters

installation site: 32 characters

transfer setup***

reception method, conditions ON/OFF, register, register transfer without condition, email priority, detail/edit, delete, list print

delete bulletin

delete

auto online/offline
shift***

auto on-line shift: ON/*OFF

auto on-line shift: ON/*OFF
date/time setup: set (12 numeric characters)
time zone: GMT - 12:00 to GMT + 12:00.GMT + *9:00
daylight saving time: ON/*OFF

register LDAP
server***

register, detail/edit, delete, print list

register license

24 characters

set print

ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
date: ON/*OFF
character: ON/*OFF

MEAP setup

use HTTP: *ON/OFF

use SSL: ON/OFF
print system info: print

set device info

distribution

register recipient: auto search/register, register, detail info, delete

auto distribution setup: everyday, day of week, *none
user mode setting: ON/*OFF
network setting: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book : ON/*OFF
manual distribution setup: user mode setting: ON/*OFF
network setup: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
user mode sync level: ON/*OFF
recover data: user mode settings, group ID, address book
limit reception by function: user mode setting: ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
distribution/reception history: detail info

1.2.3.6 System Control Settings

0009-2488

*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-15
Mode

Description

set system
administrator
information

system administrator ID: 7 characters max.

system administration ID: set (7 characters)
system administrator name: 32 characters
mail address: 64 characters
contact: 32 characters
comment: 32 characters

group ID control

group ID control: ON/*OFF

register ID No.: register, edit, delete, limit function
count control: clear, count print, all clear
print job w/ unknown ID: *ON/OFF
scan job w/ unknown ID: *ON/OFF

set
communication
control

fax setup*

transmission start speed: *33600bps,14400bps,9600bps,

7200bps,4800bps,2400bps
reception start speed: 33600bps*,14400bps,9600bps,
7200bps,4800bps,2400bps

1-18

Chapter 1

Mode

Description
reception password: 20 characters max.
FIS switch: ON/*OFF
system box setup
system box ID No.***: 7 characters
use fax memory reception***: ON/*OFF
use i-fax memory reception**: ON/*OFF
Memory reception start time***: every day, day of week, *no specification
memory reception time***: every day, day of work, *no specification

enable/disable
remote UI
limit target***

*ON/OFF
use SSL: ON/OFF
address book ID No.: 7 characters max.
address book access No. control: ON/*OFF
limit new target: ON/*OFF

set device
information

device name: 32 characters

transfer settings***

reception method, enable/disable condition, register, register for unconditional transfer,

importance of e-mail, detail/edit, delete, list print

delete bulletin

delete

installation site: 32 characters

auto shift to on-line/ shift to auto on-line: ON/*OFF

off-line
shift to auto off-line: ON/*OFF
date/time setting: set (12 numerals)
time zone: GMT - 12:00 to GMT + 12:00 - GMT + *9:00
daylight saving: ON/*OFF
register license

24 characters

set print increase:

ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
date: ON/*OFF
text: ON/*OFF

1.2.3.7 Copy Settings

0007-3169

*Factory settings.
**Items indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
T-1-16
Mode

Description

preference key 1

none, individual modes

preference key 2

none, individual modes

auto sort**

*ON/OFF

auto vertical/horizontal rotation

*ON/OFF

print photo mode

ON/*OFF

change standard mode

register/reset (at time of shipment: 1 set, auto paper, auto density, auto image
quality, local printer)

reset copy settings

Do you really want to reset? yes/no

(auto sort: on; face-down delivery: on; preference key: none)

1.2.3.8 Transmission/Reception Settings

0007-3170

*Factory settings.
**Items indicated in the presence of a specific category.
***If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the pence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-17
Mode

Description

set common
communications
settings

register source name***: 01 to 99; register/edit (24 characters max.), delete

register user abbreviation***: 24 characters max.
permit non-ASCII code for FTP**:
delete error file***: (*ON/OFF)
transfer error processing (always print/save/print/*off)
film photo mode***: OFF (ON/*OFF)
number of retries***: *3 times (0 to 5 times)

1-19

Chapter 1

Mode

Description
change standard mode for transmission function***:
read mode: black-and-white machine default :
*black 200 dpi/black 300 dpi/black 600 dpi/black 400 dpi
(if fax only, black 200x100*/black 200x; 200/black 200x400/black 400x400)
file format: *TIFF/PDF/PDF(OCR)
divide by page: ON/*OFF (toggle)
DONE stamp: ON/*OFF (toggle)
register routine task button***: (register/edit, delete M1 through M9)
register: Do you want to register? yes/no
name: 10 characters x 2 lines (max.)
confirm transmission of coded PDF file: (ON/*OFF)
PDF (OCR setup)***
original orientation auto detection: (*ON/OFF)
number of OCR characters for file name: (1 through *24)
initial transmission screen***: routine task button/one-touch button/*new address
source record***: *add/do not add
display location: inside image/*outside image display target abbreviation: (*ON/OFF)
telephone No. mark: *FAX/TEL
communication mode: G3-G4/*G3 only
switch character code for e-mail/i-fax transmission: *GB2312/GB18030
reset transmission function settings: Do you want to reset? yes/no

set common
reception
settings***

duplex record (ON/*OFF)

cassette selection
switch A: (*ON/OFF)
switch B: (*ON/OFF)
switch C: (*ON/OFF)
switch D: (*ON/OFF)
image reduction
image reduction: (*ON/OFF)
reduction mode: *auto mode/fixed mode
rate of reduction in fixed mode: E210to: 75% to 97% (in 1% increments)/*90%
direction of reduction: vertical and horizontal, *vertical only
2-on-1 record: (ON/*OFF)
reception info record: add/*do not add

set fax basic

settings

register user telephone No.***:

telephone No.: 20 characters max.
sub address: 19 characters max.
sub address incoming: ON/*OFF
source No. notice: ON-OFF/*abbreviate
select line type***:
120V, 230V: *push tone, dial pulse, 10 PPS
100 V: *20 pps/10 pps/push tone
100V: *20pps/10pps/push tone
volume control
alarm sound level: 0 to 8 (*4)
0 to 8(*4)
off-hook alarm: (*ON*/OFF)

set fax
transmission
function

ECM transmission (*ON/OFF)

set pause length: (*1 to 15 sec/4 to 11 sec/3 to 6 sec)
auto re-dial: (*ON/OFF)
number of redials: 100V: 1-15 (*2), 120V: 1-10 (*2), 230V: 1-10 (*2)
intervals for redials (min): 2-99 (*2)
redial at communication error: 1st page and error page/all pages/off
communication mode: *G4-G3/G3 only
check dial tone before transmission: (*ON/OFF)

set fax reception

settings***

ECM reception: (*ON/OFF)

select reception mode
fax/tel switchover: call start time: 0 to 30 sec (*8)
call length: 15 to 300 sec (*17)
operation after call: end/*receive
audio response: ON/*OFF
auto reception
modem dial-in fax/tel switchover
incoming ring: on (number of rings: 0 to N times)/*OFF
remote reception: on (remote reception ID: 00 to 99, 25)/*OFF
auto reception switch-over: on (length of ring: 1 to n sec)/*OFF
source record (G4): *add/do not add
source record position: inside image/*outside image

1-20

Chapter 1

Mode

Description

set fax expansion

line

register user telephone No.: 20 characters max.

register user abbreviation: 24 characters max.
select line type: *20 pps/10pps push tone
select transmission line:
line 1: *priority on transmission/prohibit transmission
line 2: priority on transmission/prohibit transmission

1.2.3.9 Transmission/Reception Settings

0009-2501

*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-18
Mode

Description

set common
settings

register sender***: 01 to 99: register/edit (24 characters max), delete

register user abbreviation***: 24 characters max.
permit non-ASCII code for FTP transmission***: (ON/*OFF)
delete error file***: (*ON/OFF)
handle transfer error file***: print always/save/print/*OFF
print photo mode***: (ON/*OFF)
number of retries***: (*3 (0 to 5 times))
change transmission function standard mode***
read mode, file format, separate for page, SENT stamp
register routine task button***: register/edit, delete (18 items)
PDF (OCR setting)***
original rotation auto detection: (*ON/OFF)
number of characters for file OCR: (1 to *24)
initial display of transmission scan***: routine task button/one-touch button/*new address
source record***: *keep/do not keep
transmission function setting reset***: Do you really want to reset? yes/no

set common
duplex recording (ON/*OFF)
reception function cassette selection
settings***
switch A: (*ON/OFF)
switch B: (*ON/OFF)
switch C: (*ON/OFF)
switch D: (*ON/OFF)
image reduction
image reduction: (*ON/OFF)
reduce mode: *auto mode/fixed mode
fixed mode reduction rate: E210 and up: 75% to 97% (in 1% increments), *90%
reduction direction: vertical and horizontal, *vertical only
2-on-1 record: (ON/*OFF)
reception information record: keep/*do not keep
set fax basic
settings***

register user telephone No.

telephone No.: 20 characters max.
line type selection:
*push (tone)/dial (pulse) 10 PPS
volume control
alarm volume: 0 to 8(*4)
communication volume: 0 to 8(*4)

fax transmission ECM transmissions (*ON/OFF)

function setup*** pause length setting: (1 to 15 sec; 2 sec*)
auto redial: (*ON/OFF)
pre-transmission dial tone check: (*ON/OFF)
fax reception
function
setting***

ECM reception: (*ON/OFF)

reception mode section
fax/tel switch, auto reception*
incoming ring: ON/*OFF
remote reception: ON/*OFF
auto reception switchover: ON/OFF

1.2.3.10 Box Settings

0007-3171

*Factory settings.

1-21

Chapter 1
*If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-19
Mode

Description

set up/register user box

select box: 0 to 99
register box name: 24 characters max.
ID NO.: 0 to 99999999
file auto delete: 0: no, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr; 1, 2, *3, 7, 30 days
URL transmissions setup: select e-mail address
reset

print photo mode

(ON/*OFF)

standard mode for read setup

register/reset

set/register fax box***

select box: 0-49

register box name: 24 characters max.
ID No.: 0 to 9999999
URL transmission setup: select e-mail address
reset

1.2.3.11 Box Settings

0009-2504

*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-20
Mode

Description

set/register user box

select box: 0-99

register box name: 24 characters max.
ID No.: 0-9999999
file auto delete: 0: no; 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr; 1, 2, *3, 7, 30 days
URL transmission setting: e-mail address selection
reset

print photo mode

(ON/*OFF)

read setting standard mode

register/reset

set/register fax box***

register box: 0-49

register box name: 24 characters max.
ID No.: 0-9999999
URL transmission setting: e-mail address selection
reset

1.2.3.12 Printer Settings

0007-3172

*Factory settings.
**Indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
T-1-21
Mode
settings

Description
number of copies: 1 to 9999 (*1)
duplex: duplex/*simplex
pickup
default paper size: *A4 (additional 12 possible)
default paper type: plain (additional 8 possible)
paper size replacement: replace/*do not replace
adjust print
super smooth: *use/do not use
**toner density: 1 to 9 (*5)
toner save: enable/*disable
layout
bind position: *long side/short side
bind margin: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
horizontal correction/vertical correction: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
auto error skip** skip/*do not skip
secure print delete time length: *1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24 hr
timeout: 5 to 300 (*15 sec)/disable
RIP: yes/*no
sorter**: *do not use/sort/rotation sort/rotation group/shift sort/shift group/staple sort
punch**: *disable/top/bottom/left/right

1-22

Chapter 1

Mode

Description
booklet print**: *disable/open to left/open to right
middle bind**: enable/*disable
transparency interleaf: *disable/white sheet/printed sheet
print in sets
print in sets: enable/*disable
print position: *5 locations/upper left/lower left/upper right/lower right
print start character: 1 to 9999 (*1)
print size: small at 12-point/medium at 24-point/large at 36-point
density: 1 to 5 (*3)
printer operating mode: *auto (additional 6 settings possible)
priority emulation** (*none/4 additional settings possible)
auto switchover**
LIPS: *enable/disable
ESC-P: *enable/disable
15577: *enable/disable
HP-GL: *enable/disable
connection recognition: *enable/disable
printer settings rest: yes/no

1.2.3.13 Address Book Settings

0007-3173

*Factory settings.
*If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-22
Mode
fax (register target)

Description
register name: 24 characters
register name: 24 superscript characters
telephone No.: 120 characters max. (+, pause, tone, <, >, backspace, space, ISDN sub
address, F-Net, DT, R, PIN, sub settings)
Sub Settings
F code: 20 characters max.
password: 20 characters max.
ECM transmission: *ON/OFF
transmission speed: 33600 bps*/14400bps/9600 bps/4800 bps
international transmission: *domestic/international transmission (1)/international
transmission (2)/international transmission (3)
communication mode: G4 to G3*/G3 only

e-mail (target
registration)

register name: 24 characters

register name: 24 superscript characters
e-mail address: 128 characters

i-fax (target
registration)

register name: 24 characters

register name: 24 superscript characters
select mode: *Simple/Full
i-fax address: 128 characters
server route: ON/*OFF
fixed sentence 1: 40 characters
fixed sentence 2: 16 characters
fine settings
paper size: A4/LTR+ B4,A3/11x17
compression method: MH+ MR/MMR
resolution: 200x100dpi,200x200dpi+200x400dpi/300x300dpi/400x400dpi/600x600dpi

file (register address) register name: 24 characters

register name: 24 superscript characters
protocol: *FTP/Windows(SMB)/Netware(IPX)
host name: 128 characters
path to folder: 128 characters
user name: FTP,Netware(IPX) : 24 characters
Windows(SMB): 15 characters
password: FTP,Netware(IPX): 24 characters
Windows(SMB): 14 characters

1-23

Chapter 1

Mode

Description

group (register target) register name: 24 characters

register name: 24 superscript characters
address book: existing in Address Book: select fax, e-mail, i-fax, remove file system, Jet
Send, Box, local printer
stored in Box: select Box: 00- to 99
delete
register target
(server)
(register target)

simplified search
server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered)
(search condition): name: 128 characters
e-mail: 128 characters
fax: 128 characters
fine search
server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered)
search conditions): *name/email/fax/organization/organization-based
*including next/not including next/identical to next/not identical to next/starts with next/
ends with next
name, organization, organization-based: 128 characters
e-mail, fax: 128 characters
(combinations of conditions): *OR/AND
search results
address type: all e-mail/fax
register e-mail as i-fax: ON/*OFF (toggle)

register address book register name: 16 characters

register one-touch
button

register address/edit: register/edit, delete

one-touch name: 12 characters long

1.2.4 Maintenance by the User

1.2.4.1 Cleaning
0007-4601

- Copyboard Glass, Copyboard Cover (back; copyboard cover type H)

Advise the user to clean the surface of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month.
Cleaning Procedure
Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent, wipe the surface of the copyboard glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover [2];
thereafter, dry wipe the surfaces with a dry, soft cloth.

F-1-17

1-24

Chapter 1

F-1-18

1.2.4.2 Inspection
0007-4603

- Checking the Operation of the Leakage Breaker

Advise the user to check the leakage breaker once or twice a month on a regular basis. Be sure also to ask the user to keep a record of checks.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Push he test button [1] of the leakage breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2].
3) Check to make sure that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power is cut.

F-1-19

4) Turn off the main power switch.

5) Shift the breaker switch [1] back to the ON position.

F-1-20

If the breaker switch has stopped between ON and OFF, be sure to shift it to OFF first and then back to ON.

1-25

Chapter 1

F-1-21

F-1-22

6) Turn on the main power switch.

1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light
0007-3174

Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its
light will not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.

1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations

0007-3175

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August
2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are sold in the United States.

F-1-23

A different description may be used for a different product.

1-26

Chapter 1

1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit

0007-3176

If you must service the area around the machine's laser unit, be sure to take full care to avoid exposure to laser light: do not insert a tool (e.g., screwdriver
or those with a high reflectance) into the laser path; also, remove watches, rings, and the like before starting the work, as they reflect laser light.
The machine's laser light is red in color, and an appropriate label ([1], [2]) is attached to all covers that can reflect laser light. Keep also in mind that the
machine's laser unit cannot be adjusted in the field.

[1]

[2]

F-1-24

1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner

0007-3177

The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin
1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
2. Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.

1.2.6 Product Specifications

1.2.6.1 Product Specifications
0007-2862

Copyboard

stream reading, fixed reading

Body

desktop

Light source type

LED array (CIS)

Photosensitive medium

OPC drum (30-mm dia.)

Image reading method

CCD (CIS)

Reproduction method

indirect electrostatic

Exposure method

by laser light

Charging method

by AC charging roller

Development method

1-component toner projection

Transfer method

by transfer roller

Separation method

by curvature + static eliminator

1-27

Chapter 1

Cassette pickup method

retard

Multifeeder pickup method

dual processing

Drum cleaning method

by cleaning blade

Fixing method

on-demand

Delivery method

face-down

Reproduction ratio

25% to 400%

Warm-up time

iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: 30 sec or less; iR 3870,

iR4570, iR3530: 40 sec or less

Image margin (leading edge) 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (single-sided); 2.5 +/-2.0 mm (doubles-sided)
Image margin (trailing edge) B4 or smaller: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm; B4 or larger: 3.5 +0.6, -2.8
mm; free-side: 5.5 +1.5, -45. mm (single-sided), 0.5 mm or
more (double-sided)
Image margin (left/right)

left edge: 2.5 +1.5 mm (single-sided), 2.5 mm +2.0 (doublesided); right edge: 0.5 mm or more (single-sided), 0.5 mm or
more (double-sided)

Non-image width (leading

edge)

2.5 +/-1.5 mm or less

Non-image width (trailing

edge)

B4 or smaller: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm; B4 or larger: 3.5 +0.6, -2.8

mm; free-size: 5.5 +1.5, -4.5 mm

Non-image width (left/right) 2.5 +/-1.5 mm or less

1-28

Number of gradations

256 gradations

Reading resolution

600 x 600 dpi

Copying resolution

1200 dpi (equivalent) x 600 dpi

Printing resolution

2400 dpi (equivalent) x 600 dpi

First print time

iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: 4.9 sec or less; iR 3870,

iR4570, iR3530: 3.9 sec or less

Cassette capacity

550 sheets (80 g/m2)

Multifeeder tray capacity

50 sheets (80 g/m2)

Continuous reproduction

1 to 999

Toner level detection

function

keys

Toner type

magnetic negative toner

Original type

sheet, book

Maximum original size

297 x 431.8 mm

Original size detection

function

by reflection type sensor

Duplex method

without tray

Sleep mode

yes

Option

See the system configuration chart.

Operating environment
(temperature range)

15 to 27.5 deg C

Operating environment
(humidity range)

25% to 75%

Operating environment
(atmospheric pressure)

0.6 to 1.0 atm

Noise

iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: standby, 40 dB; in operation,

66 dB
iR 3870, iR4570, iR3530: standby, 50 dB; in
operation, 71 dB

Power supply rating

100/120/230 V

Power consumption
(maximum)

1350 W or less

Power consumption

iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: standby, 36 Wh (reference

only) / continuous printing: 543 Wh (reference only) iR 3570,
iR4570, iR3530: standby, 37 Wh (reference only) / continuous
printing: 823 Wh (reference only)

Ozone

max.: 0.02 ppm or less; avr: 0.01 ppm or less

Dimensions

565 mm x 700 mm x 761.4 mm (WxDxH)

Weight

body: 61.6 kg; reader unit: 8.7 kg; ADF: 8.5 kg

Chapter 1

1.2.7 Function List

1.2.7.1 Printing Speed
0007-7885

Max/Min (max when the machine has fully cooled)

A value in brackets [ ] represents the iR2270/2230.
T-1-23
Paper size
Plain paper

Heavy paper

OHP
Envelope

Single-sided

Auto duplexing

cassette feed

manual feed

cassette feed

A4

28[22]

25[22]

manual feed
7

A5R

17/14

17/14

7
7

B5

27[22]

25[22]

B5R

17/14

17/14

A4R

17/14

17/14

5
4

B4

24/13

13

A3

14

14

STMTR

17/14

17/14

LTR

28[22]

25[22]

LTRR

17/14

17/14

LGL

13

13

LDR

14

14

free

13

A4

25

A5R

13

B5

23[22]

B5R

13

A4R

13

B4

11

A3

12

STMTR

13

LTR

25[22]

LTRR

13

LGL

11

LDR

12

Postcard

12/8

free

11

A4

25[22]

LTR

25[22]

Monarch

10/6

COM10

10/6

ISO-B5

10/6

ISO-C5

10/6

DL

10/6

YOGATA
No.4

10/6

1.2.7.2 Types of Paper

0009-4747
T-1-24
Source
Type
Plain paper, eco paper,
recycled paper

Size

Manual feed
tray

Cassette

A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, LTRR,

B5, EXE, A5R, STMTR, B5R

yes

yes

A4, LTR

yes

yes

1-29

Chapter 1

Source
Type
Special
paper

1-30

Size

Manual feed
tray

Cassette

Heavy paper A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, LTRR,

B5, EXE, A5R, STMTR, B5R,
A4, LTR

yes

yes

OHP

A4, LTR

yes

yes

Postcard

postcard A6R modified; doublepostcard A5R modified

yes

no

4-plane
postcard

A4 modified

yes

no

Label paper

A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR

yes

no

3-hole paper

same as plain

yes

yes

Tracing
paper

A3, B4, A4

yes

yes

Envelope

Com10, Monarch, DL, ISOC5ISO-B5

yes

yes

Chapter 2 Installation

Contents

Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V) ................................................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................................2-4

2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials .................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.4 Securing the Copier Main Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.5 Connecting the Cable ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.6 Stirring Toner............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.7 Setting the Cassettes .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.8 APVC Correction of the Drum .................................................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.2.9 Adjusting the Image Position..................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.10 Attaching Other Parts............................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.11 If Not Connected to a Network ................................................................................................................................................ 2-13

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ....................................................................................................................2-14

2.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.2 Using the PING Function........................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address........................................................................................................................ 2-14

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ......................................................................................................................................2-15

2.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address............................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-15

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations .................................................................................................................................2-16

2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation............................................................................................................................... 2-16

2.6 Installing the Card Reader............................................................................................................................................2-17

2.6.1 Points to Note............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.6.2 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.6.3 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.6.4 Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment........................................................................................................ 2-21

2.7 Installing the NE Controller .........................................................................................................................................2-22

2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1................................................................................................................................................. 2-22

Chapter 2

2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation
0010-2889

Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler,
humidifier, or refrigerator:
Humidity (%RH)

80
75
60

40

25
20
10
0
(32)

10
(50)

15
(59)

20
(68)

27.5 30
(81.5)(86)

Temperature
F-2-1

3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may
find its odor to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.)
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
- Without a Finisher Installed

1,158 mm

100 mm min.

1,035 mm

F-2-2

- With a DADF-N1 and Finisher S1 Installed

2-1

Chapter 2

1087mm

1169mm

100mm min.

1035mm
1178mm
182mm
1360mm
F-2-3

7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the
room.

2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V)

0010-3071

Points to Make Before Installation

Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the
machine is fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of
droplets of water on the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor)
around the object.)
2) The machine weighs about 80 kg. Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons when lifting it.
Checking the Contents

F-2-4

2-2

Chapter 2
T-2-1

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

Drum unit
Lower right cover
Adjusting screw
Covering rubber
Service book case
Cassette size label

1
1
2
1
1
2

[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]

Dial label
Shut-down warming label A
Shut-down warming label B
Toner bottle warning label
Power cable
Ferrite core

2
1
1
1
1
1

Check the documentation and CD against the following table:

T-2-2

- 230V EUR model

Operators manual: Reference Guide

Operators manual: Copying/ Mail Box Function Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/ RUI Guide
Easy Operation Guide
WEEE Caution sheet

2-3

Chapter 2

2.2 Unpacking and Installation

2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging
Materials
0006-6724

1) Unpack and remove the plastic bags.

- When installing a pedestal to the copier at the same time, unpack it in
the same way.
2) When installing the copier on the 2-cassette Pedestal-Y2, open the
right door [1] of the pedestal.
3) Hold the recesses [2] of the copier with 4 or more people, and place
it on the pedestal.

F-2-7

8) Open the right door [1].

F-2-5

The maximum weight of the copier is approx. 80kg (including the

DADF), so be sure to lift it with 4 or more people.

F-2-8

9) Remove the fixing assembly release cover [1].

Reference
To facilitate the work, try detaching it from the front top [2] of the fixing
assembly release cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Memo: When placing the copier on the cassette pedestal, be sure to align
the two positioning pins [1] to the holes on the base plate of the copier.

F-2-6

4) Close the right door of the pedestal (in the case of the 2-cassette
Pedestal-Y2).
5) Remove the packaging tapes and materials from each unit.
- Front door
- Right door
- Manual feeder unit
- Cassettes 1 and 2
- Inside the cassettes 1 and 2
- DADF (In the case of the model with a DADF)
- Platen glass
6) When installing the copier to the 2-cassette Pedestal-Y2, follow the
installation procedure for the 2-cassette Pedestal-Y2.
7) Remove the optical system fixing screw [1] at the outside of the right
cover in the reader unit. (Keep the optical system fixing screw for
future relocation of the copier.)

2-4

F-2-9

If you turn on the machine without detaching the fixing assembly

release cover, the fixing heater can suffer damage.
10) Close the right door.

2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle

0007-4955

1) Open the front cover [1].

Chapter 2

F-2-10

2) Lift the lock lever [1].

F-2-14

Be sure to shift down the locking lever until it is fully horizontal;

otherwise, no supply of toner will be made.

2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit

0006-6766

1) Remove the two screws [1] and detach the front cover unit [2] as
sliding it to the left.

F-2-11

3) Unpack the toner bottle and remove the cap [1].

F-2-15

2) Remove the waste toner box [1].

F-2-12

4) Mount the toner bottle [1] on the copier.

F-2-16

3) Open the right door [1].

F-2-13

5) Push down the lock lever [1] so that the toner bottle is secured.

2-5

Chapter 2

F-2-17

4) Remove the lock screw[1] of the developing assembly pressure lever.

F-2-21

7) Remove the package of the drum unit, which is provided with the
product, and remove the two drum pressure release blocks [1].

F-2-18

5) Turn the developing assembly pressure lever [1] to the left and release
the pressure.

F-2-22

- Do not touch the photosensitive drum surface.

- Do not expose the photosensitive drum surface to light for a long
period of time.
- Do not touch the rowel of the drum.
8) Mount the drum unit [1], which is provided with the product, to the
copier.

F-2-19

6) Remove the one screw [1] and take out the dummy drum [2].

F-2-23

Be careful where you hold the drum unit.

F-2-20

2-6

Chapter 2

F-2-27

12) Close the right door.

13) Mount the waste toner box [1].

F-2-24

9) Secure the drum unit with the one screw [1] with which the dummy
drum has been secured.

F-2-28

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

F-2-25

10) Push down the developing assembly pressure lever [1] and apply
pressure.

F-2-29

14) Mount the front cover unit [3] with the two screws [2] and mount the
covering rubber [1], which is provided with the product.

F-2-26

11) Secure the developing assembly pressure lever with the one screw
[1].

2-7

Chapter 2

F-2-30

Reference
Mounting the Front Cover
1) Fit the 2 claws [2] of the front cover unit [1] into the claw holes [3] of
the machine.

F-2-33

15) Close the front cover [1].

F-2-31

2) While matching the top [4] of the front cover unit against the
machine, fit the lower left claw [2] of the front cover unit [1] in the
claw hole [3] of the machine.
F-2-34

2.2.4 Securing the Copier Main Unit

0006-6767

- With a pedestal installed

1) Move the copier to the location where it will be installed, and then
secure it with the 4 adjuster wheels of the pedestal.
- Without a pedestal installed
1) Remove the cassettes 1 and 2 and tighten the adjusting screws [1] at
the base plate temporarily until the screw legs touch the bottom
slightly.

F-2-32

3) While matching the 2 claws [2] of the front cover unit [1], slide the
front cover unit [1] to the right.

2-8

Chapter 2
2) Connect the power plug to the power outlet.

1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.

2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure that the main
power switch is off.
3) Turn on the main power switch.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that it is loading programs.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that its printer is getting
ready for a job.

Turning Off the Main Power

Whenever you have to turn off the main power, be sure to go through the
following to avoid damage to the hard disk:
1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2. Go through the instructions for the shut-down sequence shown on the
display so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3. Turn off the main power switch.

F-2-35

2) Check if the machine wobbles while it is lying on the desk or the

floor, and tighten the adjusting screws if necessary.
- When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow A, tighten the
screw at the right side in the above picture.
- When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow B, tighten the
screw at the left side in the above picture.

[B]

[A]

[A]

2.2.6 Stirring Toner

0007-5062

1) Enter the Service Mode. (Press "*" first, and "2" and "8" at the same
time, and then "*.")
2) Select COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL> TONER-S.
3) Press the OK key.
- Toner stirring time is approx. 6 minutes. After counting up, it stops
automatically.
- Make the cassette settings before toner stirring is completed. (See
Setting the Cassettes.)

2.2.7 Setting the Cassettes

[B]

0007-5065

1) Press the cassette release button, and draw out the cassette to the
front.
2) Check the paper series that the user is going to use, and verify whether
or not the paper series selection switch [1] in the cassette matches
that of the user's selection. If not, change the paper size series to the
appropriate one.
3) Set the paper size selection dial [2] to the paper size of the paper to be
placed.

F-2-36

3) Mount the cassettes 1 and 2.

2.2.5 Connecting the Cable

0010-2913

1) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the lattice connector

cover, and fit the lattice connector [1] of the cassette pedestal to the
machine.
[1]

F-2-38

F-2-37

4) Hold the lever [1] of the side guide plate, and set the side guide plate
to the appropriate size.
5) Turn the end guide plate [2] to the right and detach it. Following the
instructions given on the base plate of the cassette, set the end guide
plate to the appropriate size.

2-9

Chapter 2
1) Using the cassettes 1 and 2 and the manual feeder as the source of
paper, make copies, and check to be sure that the left margin L1 is 2.5
+/-1.5 mm.

image

L1

[1]

F-2-41

[1]Paper feed direction

*If the margin is not as indicated when the cassette 1 or 2 is used as the
source of paper, make the following adjustments:
2) In the case of a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2, open its right door [1].
3) Open the lower right cover [2], and remove the 2 screws to detach the
cover (lower right front).

F-2-39

6) Affix the appropriate cassette size label [1] to the front side of the
cassette.

[2]
[3]

[1]

F-2-42

[1]

4) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2.

5) Check the position of the index [1] on the adjusting plate.

F-2-40

7) Place sheets in the cassette, and then push the cassette into the
machine.
8) Do the same operation to the other cassette.
9) If a cassette pedestal is installed, make the cassette settings with
performing the same operation.

2.2.8 APVC Correction of the Drum

0007-5071

1) Enter the Service Mode. (Press "*" first, and "2" and "8" at the same
time, and then "*.")
2) Select COPIER >FUNCTION > DPC> D-GAMMA.
3) Press the OK key.
- Paper is fed from the cassette 1 (regardless of size of paper in the
cassette).
- If there is no paper in the cassette 1, paper is fed from the lower
cassette.
- That paper is delivered as it remains blank, and APVC correction is
automatically completed.
4) Press the Reset key twice to exit the Service Mode.

There are cases where a small amount of toner, which is spilled inside
the machine due to toner stirring, is attached to test copies (at the rear
surface). It is solved after making about three test copies.

2.2.9 Adjusting the Image Position

0008-2475

- Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical)

2-10

F-2-43

*Adjusting the Cassette 1

6) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1] in the
direction of the arrow.

Chapter 2

F-2-47

F-2-44

[1]

image

L1

7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].

8) While referring to the index you checked in step 5), move the
adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the
rear of the machine will increase the left margin L1 of the image.

F-2-48

F-2-45

image

L1

[1]

[1]Paper feed direction

8) Tighten the fixing screw.
9) Fit the cassette 2 back in.
10) Make a copy, and check to see that the left margin of the image on
paper picked up from the cassette 2 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
11) Attach the right front cover of the machine.
*If the left margin on paper picked up from the manual feeder is not as
indicated, make the following adjustments:
2) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
3) Loosen the fixing screw [1] of the manual feed tray upper cover.
4) While referring to the index you checked in step 1), move the manual
feed tray upper cover back and forth. Moving the manual feed tray
upper cover toward the rear of the machine will increase the left
margin of the image L1.

F-2-46

[1]Paper feed direction

9) Tighten the fixing screw.
10) Fit the cassette 1 back in.
11) Make a copy, and check to be sure that the left margin of the image
on paper picked up from the cassette 1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
12) Fit the grip (right front) back in.
13) Attach the right cover of the machine.
*Adjusting the Cassette 2
6) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].
7) While referring to the index you checked in step 5), move the
adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the
rear of the machine will increase the left margin L1 of the image.

F-2-49

image

L1

[1]

F-2-50

2-11

Chapter 2
[1]Paper feed direction
5) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray upper cover.
6) Put paper in the manual feed tray.
7) Make a copy, and check to make user that the left margin of the image
on paper picked up from the manual feed tray is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)
Make adjustments separately for both small paper and large paper:
small paper: A4, B5, and the like whose length in feed direction is shorter than LTR.
large paper: A3, A4R, B5R, and the like whose length in feed direction
is longer than LTR.
1) Put small paper in the cassette 1 and large paper in the cassette 2.
2) Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 1, and check to be sure
that the left margin L1 of the image on the 2nd side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

L1

F-2-53

2.2.10 Attaching Other Parts

image

L1

[1]

0010-2915

- Service Book Holder

1) Remove release paper of the double-sided tape on the rib of the
service book folder [1], and attach the holder to the bottom plate of
the pedestal.

F-2-51

[1]Paper feed direction

3) If not as indicated, change the small paper 2nd side horizontal
registration setting.
small paper: service mode COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REF
An increase of '1' will increase the left margin of the image by 0.1 mm.
4) Enter the new value (obtained as the result of the foregoing
adjustment) as the large paper 2nd side horizontal registration
setting.
Large paper: service mode COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REL.
5) Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 2, and check to make
sure that the left margin of the image on the 2nd side is 2.5 +/-2.0
mm.

image
F-2-54

L1

[1]

F-2-52

[1]Paper feed detection

6) If not as indicated, change the large paper 2nd side horizontal
registration adjustment setting.
large paper: service mode COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
An increase of '1' will increase the left margin of the image by 0.1 mm.
- Leading edge margin
Make a copy using the cassette 1, and check to be sure that the leading
edge margin L1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. If not, be sure to make the following
adjustments
1) Make the following in service mode: COPIER >ADJUST >FEEDADJ >REGIST.
2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change of '1' made to the
setting will cause a move of 0.1 mm. A lower setting will move the
image toward the leading edge.)

2-12

Locations where the service book folder cannot be attached.

- Inside the machine (Inner side of the front cover)
- Locations where the louver is blocked.
- Locations where the grips are blocked.
Memo:
Attach the service book holder to the left cover of the machine if the pedestal is not installed.

- Lower right cover

1) Attach the lower right cover [1]. (Perform this step when attaching the
machine to the 2-level cassette pedestal Y2 or more.)

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
F-2-58

- Ferrite Core (230V model only)

1) Fit the ferrite core [1] to the network cable [2].

F-2-55

- Shut-Down Warning Label

1) Attach the Shut-Down warning label [1] of the appropriate language
to the right cover (rear) of the machine (i.e.,. on the left inside [2] of
the main power supply.).

Be sure to fit the ferrite core as follows to protect against noise:

- Be sure to fit it as close to the joint between the machine and the
network cable as possible.
- The harness must be wound around the ferrite core once before the core
is fixed in place.
- The harness is not trapped by the ferrite core.

[1]
[2]

[2]

[1]

F-2-56

- Toner Bottle Warning Label

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-2-59

When installing the machine newly or when replacing the harness,

be sure not to leave behind the ferrite core.

2.2.11 If Not Connected to a Network

0007-6496

F-2-57

Reference
If the machine is not connected to a network, its control panel will indicate the message "Check the Connection to the Network." To disable the
message, turn off the following user mode item:
system setup>network>Ethernet driver setup>auto detect

2) Attach the Toner Bottle warning label [1] of the appropriate language
behind [2] the front cover.

2-13

Chapter 2

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Overview
0007-5605

The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network.
If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to make sure that the network settings are correct.
If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, such a check need not be made.

2.3.2 Using the PING Function

0007-5600

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.

2) Enter the correct IP address using the control panel keypad, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If successful, the indication will be 'OK'. If the attempt fails, however, 'NG' will be indicated.

< 1/1 >

<NETWORK>

<READY >

0. 0. 0. 0

PING

[2]

[1]

+/-

OK

F-2-60

[1] Result (OK/NG)

[2] IP address input

2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address

0007-5603

You can use a remote host address in combination with the PING function to check the connection to the network.
The term "remote host address" refers to the IP address of a PC that is connected to the TCP/IP network to which the machine is connected.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the network connection using the PING function.
2) Ask the system administrator for the appropriate remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address for PING.
4) If the result is 'OK', the connection to the network is correct.
5) If the result is 'NG', the connection to the network is not correct; start the following troubleshooting work:

2-14

Chapter 2

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Overview
0007-5609

The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network.
If an attempt to connect to the network fails, the following may be suspected:
a.the connection between the machine and the network is faulty.
b.the machine's TCP/IP setting is faulty.
c.the user's network is faulty.
d.the main controller PCB is faulty.
Make checks by referring to the following detailed instructions:

2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address

0007-5612

A loopback address will return before it reaches the network controller. When you execute PING using a loopback address, you can find out whether the
machine's TCP/IP setting is correct.
1) Enter the appropriate loopback address (127.0.0.1) for PING.
- If 'NG', check the machine's TCP/IP setting once again, and execute PING once again.
- If 'OK', go to the next check.

2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

0007-5614

A local host address is the IP address of the machine. When you execute PING using the address, it will return after it has reached the network controller
so that you will be able to find out whether the network controller (main controller PCB) is free of a fault or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine for PING.
If 'NG' is indicated, perform the following, and execute PING once again:
- if the IP address of the machine is faulty, check to be sure that the IP address setting is correct or, as necessary, report to the system administrator to see
if the IP address is valid.
- if the main controller PCB is faulty, replace the PCB.
If 'OK' is indicated, suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator for appropriate remedial action.

2-15

Chapter 2

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations

2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation
0007-5619

1) Place the Test Chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper; then, check the output images.
- be sure that there is no abnormal sound.
- be sure that the images are correct at all reproduction ratios.
- be sure that as many copies as specified are made normally.
2) Make settings (e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
- press the User Mode key, press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, press the User Mode key once again
4) Make specifications-related settings to suit the needs of the user: COPIER>OPTION>USER.
5) Make test prints by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
6) Put the output [1] in the Service Book case for storage.

F-2-61

7) Press the Reset key twice to stop service mode.

8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the form in the Service Book.

2-16

Chapter 2

2.6 Installing the Card Reader

2.6.1 Points to Note
0007-2705

The card reader must be used in combination with the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1.

2.6.2 Checking the Contents

0007-2707

<Card Reader-C1>
T-2-3

[1]

Card Reader-C1

[2]

RS tightening screw (M4x10)

1 pc.
1 pc.

[3]

Toothed washer

1 pc.

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-62

<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1>

T-2-4

[1]

Card reader base

1 pc.

[2]

Relay harness

1 pc.

[3]

TP screw (M4x25)

1 pc.

[4]

TP screw (M4x8)

1 pc.

[5]

Toothed washer

2 pc.

2-17

Chapter 2

F-2-63

2.6.3 Installation Procedure

0007-2709

When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, make the following selections, COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD, and enter the card number you
will be using; otherwise, the card will not be recognized upon insertion.

Be sure to go through the following steps on the host machine before starting the work:
1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2. Go through the shutdown sequence as instructed on the screen so that you may turn off the main power switch.
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Disconnect the power cable (from the wall outlet).

[1]

ON
/OF
F

[2]

[3]
F-2-64

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

2-18

[4]

Chapter 2

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-2-65

4) Remove the face plate [2] from the right cover (rear) [1] using nippers.

[2]

[1]

F-2-66

5) Connect the relay cable [1] to the connector of the host machine.

F-2-67

6) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.

7) Mount the card reader [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw (M4x8) [4]. Be sure to use the washer [3] when doing so.

2-19

Chapter 2

F-2-68

8) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle [1].

F-2-69

9) Connect the cable [1] of the machine and the relay cable [2] of the card reader.
[1]

[2]

F-2-70

10) While making sure that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card reader [1] using a TP screw (4x25) [3] fitted with a washer [2].

2-20

Chapter 2

F-2-71

11) Connect the power cable to the wall outlet, and turn on the main power switch. See that the machine is in a standby state, and start service mode.
12) Make the following selections in the machine's service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD); then, enter the appropriate card number (1
to 2001).
-Use the number that is the lowest of all the numbers that the user will be using.
-As many as 1000 cards may be used starting with the number entered.
13) Turn off the control panel power switch.
14) Turn off and then on the main power switch.

2.6.4 Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment

0007-2764

1) Make the following selections in user mode: system control setup>group ID control>count control; then, see that the following numbers are available:
ID00000001 to ID00001000. (If you entered '1' in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.)
2) Make the following selections in user mode: system setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address. Set the following: 'IP address', 'gateway address',
'subnet mask'.

Unless you have set 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register card to device' as part of NSA setup work.
3) In user mode, enter numbers of your choice for 'system control ID' and 'system control ID No.' as part of system administrator information.
4) Turn off the control panel power switch.
5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.

2-21

Chapter 2

2.7 Installing the NE Controller

2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1
0007-5625

When installing the NE Controller-A1 to its host machine, take note of the following:
1. be sure to perform the work in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country in question.
2. be sure that the host machine has properly been installed before starting the work.
3. be sure to disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work.
4. be sure to identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. be sure the settings data are ready on the PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the top cover [1], and detach the cover.
[1]

[2]

[2]

F-2-72

2) Connect the connector [1] of the power supply unit to the connector [2] as shown.
[2]

[1]

F-2-73

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's rear cover.

F-2-74

4) Connect the cable [1] to the connector [2] of the host machine (intended for an NE controller).

2-22

Chapter 2

F-2-75

5) Secure the controller [1] to the host machine's rear cover using 4 screws [2].

F-2-76

6) Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller; bundle the excess length on the controller side, and fix it in place using
a harness guide [1].

[1]

F-2-77

7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-4) found on the PCB of the controller to ON (so that the communication mode between the host machine and the
controller will be IPC).

2-23

Chapter 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[1]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-78

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8) If IC6 [1] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP swish [2] (SW2-7) to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [2] (SW2-7) to OFF.

[2]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

[1]

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-79

If IC6 [1] is not found, you need not mount any.

If you are mounting a ROM (IC6) [1] or replacing it for upgrading the connector, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [2] (SW2-7) to ON.
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW3) on the PCB as indicated in the table.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[1]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-80

2-24

SW4

Chapter 2
T-2-5

Switch
notation

SW3-1

Setting

SW3-5
SW3-6

SW3-2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

see right OFF

SW3-2
SW3-3
SW3-4

SW3-1

sets the modem signal transmission level to

-16 dBm.
sets the modem signal transmission level to
-14 dBm.
sets the modem signal transmission level to
-12 dBm.
sets the modem signal transmission level to
-10 dBm.

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-

function

ON

keep at OFF at all times.

selects push pulse for controller line setting.
selects dial pulse for controller line setting.
selects 20PPS for dial pulse speed.
selects 10PPS for dial pulse speed.
not used

10) Connect the power supply unit to the power outlet, and check to see that LED1 [1] (green) on the PCB goes on.
[1]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-81

11) Execute RAM initialization.

Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW-2) on the PC as indicated in the table; then, press the push switch [2]. A press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will
causes LED5 [3] (red) to go on.
T-2-6

bits of SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

SW2-3

ON

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5

OFF

SW2-6

OFF

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW2-8

OFF

2-25

Chapter 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[1]

[3]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

[2]

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-82

12) After making sure that LED5 [3] (red) has gone on, set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW2) on the PCB as indicated in the table; then, press the push
switch [2] (SW4).
A press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will cause LED5 [3] (red) to go off, indicating that the RAM has been initialized.

T-2-7

bits of SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

SW2-3

OFF

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5

OFF

SW2-6

ON

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW-8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[1]

[3]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

[2]

IC6

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-83

13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF.

2-26

SW4
2
CN4

Chapter 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[1]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-84

14) Connect the telephone line to the controller.

If you are using the controller on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector [1] (LINE) of the controller.
If you are using the extension function, connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector [2] (TEL), and connect the telephone line to the connector
[1] (LINE) of the controller.

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

[2]

CN2

[1]
F-2-85

15) Call the service station, and ask for initial settings for the controller. (When a call comes in, LED 4 [1] (red) will start to flash.)
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

[1]
CN3

CN2

F-2-86

16) Call the service station, and check to make sure that the initial settings have correctly been made.
If failed, execute RAM initialization (steps 1) through 12)), and make initial settings once again.

Be sure to check with the service station to see that the settings are correct once again.
17) Check to find out if the controller is capable of placing a telephone call to the PC in the service station.
Press the push switch [1] (SW4) on the PCB.
A press on the push switch [1] (SW4) will cause LED6 [2] (red) to go on; when the transmission is done, LED6 [2] (red) will go off. If it has failed,
LED6 [2] (red) will start to flash.
A press on the push switch [1] (SW4) while LED6 [2] is flashing will start transmission once again.
A press on the push switch [3] (SW1) while LED6 [2] is flashing will cancel the request for transmission.

2-27

Chapter 2

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

[2]

SW3
SW4

[1]

IC6

SW1

CN4

[3]
CN3

CN2

F-2-87

18) Check to make sure that the communication between the host machine and the controller is correct.
Connect the power plug of the host machine, and turn on its power switch to see that LED2 [1] (orange) flashes.
[1]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-88

19) Press the Start key on the host machine, and see that LED3 [1] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered.
[25]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-89

20) Attach the switch settings label [1] on the top cover of the controller, and record the settings of the switches.
21) Secure the top cover [2] of the controller in place using 2 screws [3]. When doing so, check to be sure that the cable of the power supply unit is held
in place by the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top cover [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]

F-2-90

2-28

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Contents

Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On.................................................................................................................................. 3-3

Chapter 3

3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
0008-0985

The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: general control system, original exposure system, reader control system, printer
control system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feed system, fixing/delivery system. For detailed discussions of the individual
blocks, see the chapters that follow.
[B]
[C] R-CON
[G]
[1]

[A]
MN-CON
[2]

[8]

[F]

[7]

[4]
[3]

[E]

[D]
DC-CON

[6]

[5]

[9]

[H]

[10]

[11]

F-3-1
T-3-1
[A] General Control System
main controller PCB
[B] Original Exposure System
[C] reader Control System
reader controller PCB
[D] Printer Control System
DC controller PCB
[E] Laser Exposure System
[F] Image Formation System

[1] HDD
[2] accessories PCB
[3] photosensitive drum
[4] charging
[5] developing
[6] transfer
[7] fixing
[8] delivery/reversal/duplex assembly
[9] pickup control

[G] Fixing/Delivery System

[10] cassette 1

[H] Pickup/Feed System

[11] cassette 2

3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram

0008-0984

The following is a wiring diagram showing the relationship among major PCBs:

3-1

Chapter 3

[1]
J501
J502
J6801
J6802
J1110
J1111

[13]

[2]

[12]

J1113

J1

[4]
[3]

J603

J601

J511
J1018A
J1018B

J1016

J316

J318

J301

J1029

J307A

[5]
[6]

J311
J310
J321
J1021
J1020
J1027

J315

J404

[7]
J211
J219
J640

J218

J647

[9]

J216
J217

[11]
J203
J210

[8]

J1302
J1303

J1301

[10]

J831

J3128

J832

J3129

[15]

J3130

[14]

J212

J250
J254

[16]

F-3-2
T-3-2
[1]

Reamer controller PCB

[9]

[2]

Control panel CPU PCB

[10]

Accessories power supply PCB

Printer power supply PCB

[3]

Control panel inverter PCB

[11]

Controller power supply PCB

[4]

Keypad PCB

[12]

BD PCB

[5]

Main controller PCB

[13]

Laser drive PCB

[6]

DC controller PCB

[14]

Cassette size relay PCB

[7]

High-voltage PCB

[15]

Upper cassette size PCB

[8]

AC drive PCB

[16]

Lower cassette size PCB

Memo:The arrows in the diagram indicate the wring between PCBs, and do not indicate the direction of individual signals.

3-2

Chapter 3

3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0008-1235

1. Reader Unit
Shading
correction
Main power
switch ON

CIS output
offset correction
SREADY

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position

Shading
position

CIS output
offset correction

- LED intensity adjustment

(when lit in each color)
- CIS output gain adjustment
(when lit in all colors)

Shading
position

: forward
: reverse

F-3-3

2. Printer Unit
If any of the cassettes (1 through 4) is in low position, the lifter is moved up until the top of the stack of sheets is detected.

3-3

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Contents

Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Construction and Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................................................................................................................4-3

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.4 HDD (optional) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

4.3 Start-Up Sequence..........................................................................................................................................................4-9

4.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence ...................................................................................................................................................4-12

4.4.1 Overview (w/ HDD) .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.4.2 Flow of Operation (w/ HDD)..................................................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.5 Image Processing .........................................................................................................................................................4-13

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module .......................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Module .......................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.4 Reader Unit Input Image Processing ......................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ....................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.6 Compression/Expansion/Edit Block .......................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.7 Printer unit Output Image Processing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-16

4.6 Flow of Image Data......................................................................................................................................................4-17

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions ................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function ............................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................................................. 4-18
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................................................. 4-18
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function ............................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function ............................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission .......................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function ........................................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.9 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function ................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function .............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function .............................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function .............................................................................................................................. 4-24

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................4-25

4.7.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-25
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................................................................4-25
4.7.1.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................................4-25

4.7.2 SDRAM ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-26

4.7.2.1 Removing the Face Cover .............................................................................................................................................................................4-26
4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM .................................................................................................................................................................................4-26

4.7.3 Boot ROM.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-26

4.7.3.1 Removing the Face Cover .............................................................................................................................................................................4-26
4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM .............................................................................................................................................................................4-26

4.7.4 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-26

4.7.4.1 Removing the Face Cover (optional) ............................................................................................................................................................4-26
4.7.4.2 Removing the Counter PCB (optional) .........................................................................................................................................................4-27
4.7.4.3 Removing the HDD (optional)......................................................................................................................................................................4-27

Chapter 4

4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms
0006-6582

The machine's main controller block consists of the following and has the following functions:
T-4-1

Item

Description

Main controller PCB

Controls system operation, memory, printer unit

output, image processing, printer unit image
input processing, rendering, color LCD
controller, card printer unit interface, fax image
processing, etc.

SRAM

Retains service mode settings (by SRAM), HDD

management information

Image memory (SDRAM)

Temporarily retains image data (256 MB; 512

MB max.)

BOOTROM

Stores boot program

HDD

Stores system software, retains image data for

Box/Fax function (20 GB)

USB port

USB2.0 interface

Ethernet port (10/100Bsae-T) Ethernet interface

Reader unit

DC controller PCB

Main controller PCB

Image memory (SDRAM)

Riser board
USB port

Ethernet
10/100BASE-T

SRAM

Boot ROM

Hard disk drive

F-4-1

4.1.2 Construction and Functions

0008-8054

The machine's main controller block consists of the following components arranged as shown:

4-1

Chapter 4
T-4-2

Item

Description

Main controller PCB

controls system; controls memory; controls printer

output image
processing control, reader image input processing,
rendering processing; controls color LCD controller,
card reader interface; controls fax image processing

SRAM

retains service mode settings and HDD management

information (SRAM)

Image memory (SDRAM)

temporarily retains image data

128 MB (256 MB max.)

BOOTROM

stores boot program

HDD (optional)

stores system software

stores image data for Box/Fax functions
20 GB

USB port

USB2.0 interface

Ethernet port
(10/100 Base-T)

Ethernet interface

Reader Unit

DC controller PCB

Main controller PCB

Image memory (SDRAM)

USB port

Ethernet
10/100BASE-T

SRAM

F-4-2

4-2

Boot ROM

Hard disk drive

(optional)

Chapter 4

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB
0006-6592

The following is a diagram showing the major control mechanisms of the main controller according to connectors:
J1014

J1004
J1016
J1028
J1003
J1029
IC1005
IC1010

J1018

J1017

J1024
IC1084
J1006
IC1008

J1013
IC1009
IC1004
IC1100
J1061

J1062
IC1003

BATTERY
IC1001

J1010
IC1006
J1026

J1023
IC1002
J1022

J1060

J1030
J1020

J1005

J1059
J1021

J1027

F-4-3
T-4-3

Connector
J1003
J1004
J1005
J1010
J1013
J1014
J1017
J1018
J1020
J1026

Description
SDRAM connection slot
SDRAM connection slot
Fax connector (2-port)
Boot ROM connector slot
Riser board connection slot
Scanner DDI
USB port
Control panel connector
Power supply connector
Hard disk connector

J1029

Printer DDI

J1030
J1061

Fax connector (1-port)

Ethernet port (10/100BaseT)

4-3

Chapter 4

4.2.2 Main Controller PCB

0009-0473

The machine's main controller PCB has the following functions (shown according to connectors):
J1014

J1004
J1016
J1028
J1003
J1029
IC1005
IC1010

J1018

J1017

J1024
IC1084
J1006
IC1008

J1013
IC1009
IC1004
IC1100
J1061

J1062
IC1003

BATTERY
IC1001

J1010
IC1006
J1026

J1023
IC1002
J1060

J1022
J1030
J1020

J1005

J1059
J1021

J1027

F-4-4
T-4-4

Connector
J1003
J1004
J1005
J1010
J1013
J1014
J1017
J1018
J1020
J1026

Description
SDRAM connection slot
SDRAM connection slot
fax connector (2-line; not used)
Boot ROM connection slot
Riser board connection slot
scanner DDI
USB port
control panel connector
power supply connector
hard disk connector

J1029

printer DDI

J1030
J1061

fax connector (1-line)

Ethernet pot (10/100Base-T)

4.2.3 HDD
0008-4957

The HDD is divided into 11 partitions (blocks), each assigned with specific functions.

4-4

Chapter 4
T-4-5

Partition

Description

FSTDEV

Collects compressed image data.

TMP_GEN

Stores temporary files, log data.

TMP_PSS

PDL spool

TMP_FAX

Ensures fax reception.

APL_SEND

Stores user data (address book, transfer settings).

APL_MEAP

Stores MEAP applications.

APL_GEN

Mode memory data, standard mode data

History (e.g., print job history)
iFax image data
Fax image data
Other

IMG_MNG

Stores file management table, profile.

PDL_DEV

Stores PDL font, etc.

BOOTDEV

Stores execution module, message data file, RUI content, etc.

FSTCDEV

Chasing (not used)

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS

HDD

TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV

F-4-5

The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:

T-4-6

System software

Description

Location

System

System module (controls

mechanism as a whole)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

Remarks

Language

Language module (controls

LCD indications)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

RUI

Remote user interface module HDD (BOOTDEV)

Boot

Starts up the machine

BootROM

DIMM (FAX
board)

G3FAX

Controls G3 Fax

HDD (BOOTDEV)

1-line

Dcon

Controls the DC controller

DC controller PCB

Mask ROM
(soldered)

Rcon

Controls the printer unit

controller

Printer unit controller PCB

Flash ROM
(soldered)

Meapcont

Controls MEAP applications

HDD (BOOTDEV)

4-5

Chapter 4

RCON

Reader unit

DCON

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
BOOT

HDD

SYSTEM
Language
RUI
MEAP
G3FAX

BOOTDEV

F-4-6

4.2.4 HDD (optional)

0008-8061

The HDD is divided into 11 partitions (blocks), each assigned with specific functions.
T-4-7

4-6

Partition

Description

FSTDEV

Collects compressed image data.

TMP_GEN

Stores temporary files, log data.

TMP_PSS

PDL spool

TMP_FAX

Ensures fax reception.

APL_SEND

Stores user data (address book, transfer settings).

APL_MEAP

Stores MEAP applications.

APL_GEN

Mode memory data, standard mode data

History (e.g., print job history)
iFax image data
Fax image data
Other

IMG_MNG

Stores file management table, profile.

PDL_DEV

Stores PDL font, etc.

BOOTDEV

Stores execution module, message data file, RUI content, etc.

FSTCDEV

Chasing (not used)

Chapter 4

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS

HDD

TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV

F-4-7

The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:

T-4-8

System software

Description

Location

System

System module (controls

mechanism as a whole)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

Remarks

Language

Language module (controls

LCD indications)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

RUI

Remote user interface module HDD (BOOTDEV)

Boot

Starts up the machine

BootROM

DIMM (FAX
board)

G3FAX

Controls G3 Fax

HDD (BOOTDEV)

1-line

Dcon

Controls the DC controller

DC controller PCB

Mask ROM
(soldered)

Rcon

Controls the printer unit

controller

Printer unit controller PCB

Flash ROM
(soldered)

Meapcont

Controls MEAP applications

HDD (BOOTDEV)

4-7

Chapter 4

RCON

Reader unit

DCON

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
BOOT

HDD

SYSTEM
Language
RUI
MEAP
G3FAX

F-4-8

4-8

BOOTDEV

Chapter 4

4.3 Start-Up Sequence

4.3.1 Overview
0006-6702

The system software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD.
When the machine is started, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD according to the instructions of the boot ROM
boot program, and writes it to the image memory (SDRAM) of the controller PCB.
While the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the image memory (DRAM), the control panel shows the following screen, using a progress
bar to indicate the progress of the start-up sequence.

Progress bar

F-4-9

Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated, as access is being made to the HDD. Turning off the power can cause a fault on the
HDD (identified by E602).

4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence

0006-6703

<Boot ROM Area>

-Self Diagnosis Program (interval 1)
The self-diagnosis program is run by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on.
The program is used to check the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD.
The machine will indicate an error code if it finds a fault while running the program.
-Boot Program (interval 2)
When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program.
The program is used to read the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory (SDRAM).
<Image Memory (SDRAM) Area> (interval 3)
The system software written by the boot program initializes the various functional blocks (e.g., I/F settings of the main controller).
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept a job
(i.e., the control panel shows the Operation screen, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green).

4-9

Chapter 4

Progress bar

F-4-10

- While the Self-Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed

Image memory (SDRAM)

System
area

Image data
area

CPU

HDD
Self diagnosis
program

Boot
program

BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution
: access for checking
F-4-11

4-10

Chapter 4

- While the Boot Program Is Being Run

Image memory (SDRAM)

System area

Image data
area

System
software

CPU

Self-diagnosis
program

Boot
program

HDD

BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution.
: flow of the system program.
F-4-12

4-11

Chapter 4

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence

4.4.1 Overview (w/ HDD)
0008-8064

If the main power switch is turned off while the machine is accessing its HDD, damage can well occur on the HDD. To avoid such damage, the machine
is provided with a shut-down sequence.

4.4.2 Flow of Operation (w/ HDD)

0008-8065

The following diagram shows the flow of shut-down operation:

Press on the control panel
power switch (3 sec or more)

Moves to the shut-down sequence.

HDD
protection check mode

Indicates the job being executed, and informs the

user that it will start the shut-down sequence.

HDD
protection execution mode

Cancels any job on wait in print mode.

Cancels any job on wait in print mode.
Cancels any job being executed in fax mode.

Main power switch off

F-4-13

4-12

Chapter 4

4.5 Image Processing

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow
0006-6704

The following shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's functions:
Other iR machine
Original

A
Copy

Scan

Image data

Print output

-SEND
-FAX
-PullScan
-E-Mail
-PDL Print
-BOX

PC
F-4-14

4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module

0006-6706

The machine's major image processing is executed by the main controller PCB.
The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing:
Reader unit

Reader unit controller PCB

Reader unit input image processing block

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit.

Printer unit output image

processing block
Processes image data for
output to the printer unit.

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

SDRAM

HDD
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)

F-4-15

4-13

Chapter 4

4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Module

0009-1739

Principal image processing is executed by the machine's main controller PCB.

The following shows the construction of modules associated with image processing:
Reader unit

Reader unit controller PCB

Reader unit input image processing block

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit.

Printer unit output image

processing block
Processes image data for
output to the printer unit.

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

SDRAM

HDD
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)

(optional)

F-4-16

4.5.4 Reader Unit Input Image Processing

0006-6712

The image data colleted by the contact image sensor is processed by the main controller PCB.

4-14

Chapter 4

Reader unit

Main controller PCB

Enlargement/reduction

Edge emphasis

-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Text mode
Text/photo/film photo mode

Film photo mode

Binary processing (error diffusion)

Binary processing (screen processing)

To compression/expansion/editing block
F-4-17

4.5.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block

0006-6714

Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing.

Main controller PCB

Printer unit image
processing block

PDPDL image
processing block

SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction

Compression

Rotation

Expansion
HDD

Integration

to printer unit output image processing block

F-4-18

4.5.6 Compression/Expansion/Edit Block

0009-1741

In this block, machine executes compression, expansion, and editing tasks.

4-15

Chapter 4

Main controller PCB

Reader image
processing block

PDL image
processing block

SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction

Compression

Rotation

Expansion

HDD
(optional)

Integration

to printer unit output image processing block

F-4-19

4.5.7 Printer unit Output Image Processing

0006-6715

The main controller processes the image data coming from the printer unit for output to the printer unit.
Main controller PCB
Compression/expansion/editing block

Binary density conversion

Enlargement/reduction

Smoothing

Thickening

To DC controller PCB
F-4-20

4-16

For PDL data,

when fine line
processing is ON

Chapter 4

4.6 Flow of Image Data

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions
0006-6746

The following is the flow of image data when the Copy Function is in use:

Printer unit

Main control PCB

Image processing block for printer unit

SDRAM
Data rotation

Data compression
HDD
Data expansion

Image processing block for printer unit

DC controller PCB
F-4-21

4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function

0009-1743

The following shows the flow of image data when the copy function is in use:

4-17

Chapter 4

Reader unit

Main control PCB

Reader image processing block

SDRAM
Data rotation

Data compression

HDD
(option)

Data expansion

Printer image processing block

(raw data)
DC controller PCB
F-4-22

4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function

0006-6747

The following is the flow of image data when the Box function is in use:

Printer unit

Main controller PCB

Image processing block for printer unit

SDRAM

Data rotation
HDD

Data compression

F-4-23

4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function

0009-1744

The following shows the flow of image data when the BOX function is in use:

4-18

Chapter 4

Reader unit

Main controller PCB

Reader image processing block

SDRAM

Data rotation

HDD
(optional)

Data compression

F-4-24

4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

0006-6749

The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use.

Printer unit

Main controller PCB

Image processing block for printer unit

SDRAM

Data expansion
Data rotation
HDD
Resolution conversion

Ethernet port

(compression data)
To network
F-4-25

4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

0009-1745

The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use:

4-19

Chapter 4

Reader unit

Main controller PCB

Reader image processing block

SDRAM
Data expansion

Data rotation

HDD
(optional)

Resolution conversion

Ethernet port
(compression data)

To network
F-4-26

4.6.7 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission

0006-6750

The following is the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use:

Reader unit
Main controller PCB

Image processing block for reader unit

SDRAM

Compression
Compression
HDD

Expansion

Image processing block for fax

Resolution conversion

Super G3 Fax Board

F-4-27

4-20

Chapter 4

4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function

0009-1746

The following shows the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use:

Reader unit

Main control PCB

Reader image processing block

SDRAM
Compression

Rotation

HDD
(optional)

Expansion

Fax image processing block

Super G3 fax board

F-4-28

4.6.9 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

0006-6751

The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use:

4-21

Chapter 4

Super G3 Fax Board

Main controller PCB

Image processing block for fax

SDRAM

Data rotation
Data compression
HDD

Data expansion

Image processing block for printer unit

DC controller PCB
F-4-29

4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

0009-1747

The following shows the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use:

4-22

Chapter 4

Sure G3 fax board

Fax image processing block

SDRAM

HDD
(optional)

DC controller PCB
F-4-30

4.6.11 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

0006-6752

The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use:
Ethernet
Main controller PCB

PDL

Rendering processing block

SDRAM

Compression/expansion
/editing block

HDD

Processing block for printer unit

DC controller PCB
F-4-31

4-23

Chapter 4

4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

0009-1748

The following shows the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use:
Ethernet
Main controller PCB

PDL

Rendering processing block

SDRAM

Compression/expansion/
edit block

Printer image processing block

DC controller PCB
F-4-32

4-24

HDD
(optional)

Chapter 4

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure

4.7.1 Main Controller PCB
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6401

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

[3]

[1]

[1]

F-4-35

[1]

[1]

2) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB [2].

[1]
[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[1]

F-4-36

[2]

F-4-33

4.7.1.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB

0007-6417

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

Points to Note When Replacing the Main Controller PCB

Remove the following components of the detached main controller
PCB. Thereafter, be sure to mount them to the new main controller
PCB.
[1] Boot ROM
[2] Hard disk
[3] SDRAM
[4] FRAM

F-4-34

Freeing the Flexible Cable

To free the flexible cable [1], shift up the lock first as shown.
F-4-37

4-25

Chapter 4

4.7.2 SDRAM

2) Loosen the 2 screws [2].

4.7.2.1 Removing the Face Cover

0007-6411

1) Remove the 4 screws [1].

2) Loosen the 2 screws [2].
[1]

[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-41

[1]

3) Pull off the face cover [1] in upward direction.

[2]
F-4-38

3) Pull off the face cover [1] in upward direction.

[1]

[1]
F-4-42

4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM

0007-6414

1) Push the locking lever [1], and detach the boot ROM [2].
F-4-39

4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM

0007-6412

1) Release the 2 locking levers [1], and detach the SDRAM [2].

F-4-43

4.7.4 HDD
F-4-40

4.7.4.1 Removing the Face Cover (optional)

4.7.3 Boot ROM

0009-2005

1) Remove the 4 screws [1].

2) Loosen the 2 screws [2].

4.7.3.1 Removing the Face Cover

0007-6413

1) Remove the 4 screws [1].

4-26

Chapter 4

[1]

F-4-47

[1]
[2]
F-4-44

3) Pull off the face cover [1] in upward direction.

[1]

F-4-45

4.7.4.2 Removing the Counter PCB (optional)

0009-2006

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the counter PCB [2].

F-4-46

4.7.4.3 Removing the HDD (optional)

0009-2007

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the HDD [2] in the direction of
the arrow.

4-27

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Contents

Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3

5.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................5-5

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On.................................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original) ................................................ 5-5
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original ) ............................................... 5-6

5.3 Various Control..............................................................................................................................................................5-7

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor .........................................................................................................................................................................5-7

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-8

5.3.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor...........................................................................................................................................5-9

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-10

5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction ............................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction.................................................................................................................................5-10

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .................................................................................................................................................. 5-11

5.3.4.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification ........................................................................................................................................................................5-12

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-13

5.3.5.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-13

5.3.6 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5.3.6.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output .........................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output.............................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline).........................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction........................................................................................................................................................................................5-17

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................5-18

5.4.1 Copyboard glass......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass ...............................................................................................................................................................5-18

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-19

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ..............................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover of the machine ......................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.2.5 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.2.6 Removing the Reader Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................................................5-20
5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM.................................................................................................5-21

5.4.3 Scanner Motor............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-22

5.4.3.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................................................5-22

5.4.4 Contact sensor ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-22

5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover ...............................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................5-23
5.4.4.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................5-23
5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ..................................................................................................................................................5-24
5.4.4.5 After Replacement of the CIS .......................................................................................................................................................................5-25

Contents

5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 5-25

5.4.5.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-25
5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front/rear).............................................................................................................. 5-25

5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-26

5.4.6.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass............................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 5-27

5.4.7 Original Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-27

5.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Glass ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.7.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-28

5.4.8 Reader Heater (option)............................................................................................................................................................... 5-29

5.4.8.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right)............................................................................................................................................................. 5-29
5.4.8.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass............................................................................................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left) ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-30

Chapter 5

5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0006-5712

The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's original exposure system are as follows:

T-5-1

Item
Original exposure
Original scan

Read resolution
Gradation
Scanning speed (in
ADF mode)

Description
by LED array, indirect (LED + photoconducting body)
in book mode: scan by moving contact image sensor (CIS)
in ADF mode: by original stream reading with contact image sensor
(CIS) fixed in position
600 (main scanning) x 600 (sub scanning) dpi
256
45 ipm (single-sided, A4/LTR)

Carriage position
detection

by contact image sensor (CIS), HP sensor (PS503)

Magnification

25% to 400%
Main Scanning
by main controller PCB (image processing)
Direction
Sub Scanning
Direction
in book mode: by changing carriage travel speed; by
processing images on reader controller PCB; by
processing images on main controller PCB*1

in ADF mode: by changing original feed speed; by image

processing on reader controller PCB; by image
processing on main controller PCB*1
Lens
CCD

CIS drive control

Original size
identification

rod lens array

number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of effective pixels: 7180)
maximum original read width: 304 mm
by reader motor (M501)
[1]Book Mode
in main scanning
direction:

by reflection type sensor (AB/Inch)

in sub scanning
direction:

by reflection type sensor (AB/Inch)

[2]ADF Mode
width:

by original width value in ADF

by photo sensor in ADF
The particulars of control differ depending on the selected magnification. For details, see
"Changing the Magnification."
length:

5.1.2 Major Components

0006-5714

The machine's original exposure system consists of the following major components:

5-1

Chapter 5

[5]
[4]

[6]

[3]
[2]

[7]

[1]

[8]

[12]
[9]
[7]
[11]
[10]
F-5-1
T-5-2

Item

Notation

Description

[1]

Original cover open/

closed sensor (rear)

PS501

photo interrupter: detects the state (open/closed)

of the copyboard cover; starts original size
indication when the original cover is at 25 deg.

[2]

Reader controller PCB

controls the drive of the reader unit, and controls

image processing

[3]

Original sensor 3

PS506

helps identify original size (for all destinations)

[4]

Original sensor 4

PS507

helps identify original size (AB, Inch/AB)

[5]

Original sensor 5

PS508

helps identify original size (Inch/A)

[6]

Reader motor

M501

pulse motor: controls the drive of the carriage

[7]

Reader heater*

prevents condensation on the copyboard glass

[8]

Original sensor 1

PS504

helps identify original size (AB, Inch/A, Inch/

AB)

[9]

Original sensor 2

PS505

helps identify original size (AB, A, Inch/AB)

[10]

Contact image sensor

(CIS)

uses LEDs for indirect exposure (LED +

photoconducting body)

[11]

CIS HP sensor

PS503

photo interrupter: detects CIS home position

[12]

Cupboard cover open/

closed sensor

PS502

ends original size identification with the

copyboard cover at 5 deg.

*Optional. (100/230-V model only).

5.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0006-5715

The machine's control system is constructed as follows:

5-2

Chapter 5

J5
/5 03
04

[4]

[1]
2
J5
01
J5
05 J5
0

J5
0

1
J5

0
J5

0
J5
7

0
J5

[10]

[8]

F-5-2

[1] Connection to ADF

[2] Connection to printer body
[3] Printer body (connected to main controller PCB)
[4] Connection to ADF
[5] Reader controller PCB
[6] Reader motor drive control
[7] Reader motor (M501)
[8] Contact image sensor
[9] Image signal
[10] CIS HP sensor (PS503)
[11] Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (front: PS502)
[12] Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (rear: PS503)

5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB

0006-5718

The machine's reader controller PCB has the following functional construction:

5-3

Chapter 5

DC24V
DC13V

J500

J501
J502

J504

J505
IC505

J503
J513

IC513
IC518
IC519

IC501
IC520
IC529

J506
IC530

IC522
CPU

J510
IC520

IC531

J507

J508

J512
F-5-3

T-5-3

5-4

Jack No.

Description

J500

supplies power to the ADF.

J501

receives power from the machine body (printer unit).

J502

communication with the machine body (printer unit).

J503

communication with the ADF.

J504

communication with the ADF.

J505

connects to the main motor.

J506

copyboard cover open/closed sensor; connects to the CIS HP sensor

J507
J508

connects to original sensor 1, original sensor 2.

connects to original sensor 3, original sensor 4.

J510

connects to the contact image sensor (CIS).

J512
J513

for use at factory

for use at factory

Chapter 5

5.2 Basic Sequence

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0006-5719
Shading
correction
CIS output
offset correction

Main power
switch ON

SREADY

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position

Shading
position

CIS output
offset correction

Shading
position

- LED intensity adjustment

(when lit in each color)
- CIS output gain adjustment
(when lit in all colors)

: forward
: reverse

F-5-4

CIS HP
sensor

Shading
position

HP

Original
leading edge

1.CIS position check

2.Shading adjustment

3.Move to standby point

F-5-5

5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original)
0006-5720
Only if 1 sec or more
has passed since previous
rotation
Shading correction
start key
ON
STBY

SCFW

SCRW

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading position

Copy board read

start position

Original trailing edge

Shading position

Shading position
forward
reverse

F-5-6

5-5

Chapter 5

CIS HP
sensor

Copyboard glass read

start position

Original
leading edge

Shading
position

HP

Original
trailing edge

*1
1.CIS position check

*1

2.After shading correction,

move to start position
3.Original scan
4.Move to standby point

*1:Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation

F-5-7

5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original )
0006-5721
Only if 1 min or more
passed since previous
rotation
Shading correction

Start key
ON
STBY

SREADY

SCRW

SCFW

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position

Shading
position

Stream reading
start position

Original
trailing edge

Shading
position

Shading
position
forward
reverse

F-5-8

CIS HP
sensor

Stream reading
start position

Original glass
read start position

Shading
position

HP

*1
1.CIS position check

*1

2.Original scan

*1:Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation

F-5-9

5-6

Chapter 5

5.3 Various Control

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
5.3.1.1 Outline
0006-5722

The machine's scanner system consists of the following components:

Reader motor

Reader controller PCB

Carriage drive belt

[1]
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS501)

Sensor
light-blocking
plate
forward

[3]
[2]

reverse

Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS502)

Cartridge
Contact image
sensor CIS

CIS HP sensor (PS503)

Guide shaft
F-5-10

[1] Reader Motor (M501) Drive Signal

turns on/off the motor, and controls its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) HP Sensor (PS503) Detection Signal
checks if the contact image sensor (CIS) is at home position.
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS501) Detection Signal
detects the state (open/close) of the copyboard cover.

5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor

0006-5723

The reader motor driver turns on/off the reader motor and controls the direction/speed of its rotation according to the signals from the CPU.
Reader controller PCB
3.3V

+5V +24V

OPT_MCK
CCW
MD_POW

CPU

M_ENABLE

Motor
driver

RETURN
M_VREF

J505
1
2
3
4

B*
B
A
A*

M501

F-5-11

<Memo>
The scanning speed of this machine is as follows:
During copying (100%): 236 mm/sec
In SEND mode (600 dpi x 600 dpi):236 mm/sec

5-7

Chapter 5
a.Forward Movement When Scanning an Image
To scan an image, the machine moves the contact image sensor (CIS) as follows by controlling the following motors:

Start position

Original
trailing edge

Original leading edge

Acceleration

Stop
Deceleration

Normal speed

Shift
speed
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Shift distance
[1] used until the sensor reaches a speed suited to the selected mode.
[2] used as a margin to ensure a stable speed.
[3] used for reading the image at a specific speed.
[4] used for prompt deceleration and suspension once the image end is reached.

F-5-12

b.Reverse Movement After Scanning an Image

After scanning an image, the machine moves the contact image sensor (CIS) to shading position at a specific speed (147 mm/sec).

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

5.3.2.1 Outline
0006-5927

The machine uses a contact image sensor (CIS) to expose and read an image, and the image is read on a line-by-line basis.

T-5-4

Item

5-8

Description

LED

serves as the source of light used to expose the original.

Light guide

directs the light from LEDs to the entire length of a single image line
of the original.

Rod lens array

collects light reflected by the original.

CCD array

collects the reflected light coming through the rod lens array.

Chapter 5

Image read line

Light guide
LED (R/G/B)

Copyboard glass

Rod lens array

scanning direction
CCD array

LED (R/G/B)
Light guide

Rod lens array

Light guide

LED

CCD

LED

F-5-13

5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor

0006-5928

The contact image sensor (CIS) is used to control analog image processing in the following flow of work:
The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array;
the light is then collected by the CCD array;
the light is converted into an electric signal by the CCD array (photo-conversion) for output.
The CCD array consists of a total of 8 channels (units). Each channel possesses its own output correction table used to process an input intensity signal for
gain correction for output of an image signal.

5-9

Chapter 5

Ideal output characteristics

Output
CCD channel x 8

Actual output characteristics

1

Input
4
it
5
ircu
rc
ive
Dr
6

ls

93

e
pix

7
8

F-5-14

Be sure to correct the output among the channels using the following service mode items:
-if you have replaced the contact image sensor (CIS) and, as a result, a discrepancy occurs in the output of image density among channels; or
-if the setting of CCD-LUT is other than '0' and you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
<Service Mode>
for CIS unit gain correction data
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT
for CCD gain correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
(using the D-10 Chart)

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction
0006-5724

In Book Mode/ADF Mode

The image is read at 100% in main scanning direction, and the magnification is varied by processing the data on the main controller PCB.

5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

0006-5725

To vary the magnification in sub scanning direction, the machine operates as follows depending on the selected method of reading the original and the
selected rate of magnification:
1. In Book Mode
To suit the selected rate of magnification, the speed at which the original is read is varied and the data is processed by the reader controller PCB/main
controller PCB.
EX: for reduction to 25%, the original is read at 236 mm/sec and the data is varied for 50% reduction by the reader controller PCB (skipping data for 1/2)
and for 50% reduction by the main controller PCB (skipping data for 1/2).
EX: at 100%, the original is read at a speed of 236 mm/sec.
T-5-5

Operation

Magnification
25% to 49%

50% to 99%

100% to 400%

236 to 120

236 to 119

236 to 59

Processing the data (digital; %) by the

reader controller PCB

50

50

100

Processing the data (digital; %) by the

main controller PCB

50

100

100

Varying the speed of reading the original

(mm/sec)

2. In ADF Mode
To suit the selected rate of magnification, the speed at which the original is read is varied and the data is processed by the reader controller PCB/main
controller PCB.
EX: for reduction to 25%, the original is read at 236 mm/sec, and the data is processed for 50% reduction (skipping for 1/2) by the reader controller PCB
and for 50% (skipping for 1/2) by the main controller PCB.
EX: for enlargement to 400%, the original is read at a speed of 118 mm/sec, and the data is processed for 200% enlargement (doubling) by the main control

5-10

Chapter 5
PCB.
T-5-6

Magnification

Operation

25% to 42% 43% to 84% 85% to 170% 171% to 400%

Varying the speed at which the original

is read (mm/sec)

236 to 168

274 to 140

277 to 139

276 to 118

Processing the data (digital; %) by the

reader controller PCB

50

50

100

100

Processing the data (digital; %) by the

main controller PCB

50

100

100

200

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals

5.3.4.1 Outline
0006-5731

The machine identifies the size of the original with reference to the presence/absence of output levels of the reflecting type sensors; specifically,
-the machine identifies the absence of paper if it finds a change in the output of the reflection type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed/opened.
-the machine identifies the presence of paper if it does not find a change in the output of the reflection type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed/
opened.
The machine uses the following sensors; and the sensors are arranged as shown in the following figure:
-for main scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations; Inch-configuration, 1 location).
-for sub scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations; Inch-configuration, 2 locations)

AB-Configuration
Sub scanning direction
Butting position

Index plate

Main scanning direction

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4

B5R
A4R
Original sensor 1
B5

B4

Original sensor 2 A4

A3

Inch-Configuration
Sub scanning direction
Index plate

Butting position

Main scanning direction

Original sensor 3

Original sensor 5

STMT-R

LTR-R

LGL

Original sensor 1
LTR

11"

17"

F-5-15

5-11

Chapter 5

5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification

0006-6792

-In Bk Mode
1 original (A4R), copyboard cover (copyboard cover/ADF) is closed
1. Standby State
original sensor: off

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Copyboard over
Reader unit

Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2 Copyboard glass

F-5-16

2. The copyboard cover is opened (with cover angle at 25 deg or more).

original sensor: off

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4

Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2

F-5-17

3. The copyboard cover is closed (with cover angle at 25 deg).

original sensor: on (original size identification processing 1)

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
25

Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2

Original sensor 3/4

Original sensor 1/2

F-5-18

4. Copyboard cover is closed (with cover angle at 5 deg or more but less than 25 deg).
Original sensor: on (original size identification 2)

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
5

Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2

Original sensor 3/4

Original sensor 1/2

F-5-19

5. The copyboard cover is closed (5 deg or less).

size identified
original sensor: off
In identifying the size of an original, the data from original size identification processing 1 and data from original size identification processing 2 are compared, and the difference between these 2 sets of data is checked.
If any of the following is true, the output of the sensors may not show any change, preventing the machine from correctly identifying the size:
-the original is an A3 black original
-the original is a book (its thickness may not allow the copyboard cover to close fully, thus preventing the detection of a change in the sensor level).
-the copyboard cover is not closed fully (when a time-out condition occurs, there will be no detection of a change in the sensor level).

5-12

Chapter 5

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Change absent
Change present

F-5-20

The machine uses the following in reference to changes occurring in the sensor output as found in original size identification processing 1 and original size
identification processing 2:
AB-Configuration
Original Original
size sensor 1

Inch-Configuration

Original Original Original

sensor 2 sensor 3 sensor 4

Original Original Original Original

size
sensor 1 sensor 3 sensor 5

A3

11"X17"

A4

LTR

B4

LGL

B5

LTR-R

A4R

No original

B5R
No original
:No original
:change absent

F-5-21

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control

5.3.5.1 Outline
0006-5929

The machine changes the original read point depending on the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass or the platen roller of the ADF, or it
may execute image correction to prevent the dust from showing up in the output. These operations are carried out only when the ADF is in use and, in
addition, is closed:
<Timing of Control>
-at the end of a job
-between sheets (for each reading of a sheet)
-at the start of a job (only when any of the following conditions is true)
1st job after power-on
dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job
dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job (e.g., ADF opened)

Main power switch

ON
WMUPR

Start key
ON
STBY

1st
SCAN

2nd
SCAN

Dust detection control

Dust detection control
Dust detection control
F-5-22

<Particulars of Control>
-At the End of a Job (dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller of the ADF at the read point for the presence/absence of dust.
Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order. The point where least dust is detected will be used as the read position for the next job.
The point selected here will be used as the read position for the next job.
- For control at the end of a job, if an original is placed in the ADF with dust detected at all points (A, B, C), the machine will indicate a message on its
control panel to prompt cleaning of the glass surface. The Start key will remain invalid until this message is cleared.
-At the Start of a Job (dust bypass)
Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order in the same manner as at the end of the job. Read will take place at the point where least
dust is detected.

5-13

Chapter 5

F-5-23

-Between Sheets
The machine does not move the contact image sensor (CIS) for dust detection between sheets. It reads the original using the position determined at the end
or start of a job; if the presence of dust is detected, however, the machine will execute image correction.
T-5-7

5-14

Point

Discription

read reference position

about 0.5 mm from the reference position to the

inner side of the roller

about 1.0 mm from the reference position to the

inner side of the roller

Chapter 5

Platen roller
0.5mm

0.5mm

A B C

ADF
reading
glass

Lens

LED

Contact image sensor

F-5-24

<Service Mode>
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1)
(used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1)
(used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job)

5.3.6 Image Processing

5.3.6.1 Outline
0006-5930

The following shows the major specifications and functions of the machine's image processing system:
T-5-8

CCD

number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of effective
pixels: 7180)
size of pixel: 32 x 46.9 ym

Shading correction

shading correction: executed for each job

shading adjustment: executed at power-on

Contact image
sensor (CIS)

CCD

Reader controller PCB

Analog image
Digital image
processing block
processing block
Analog
image
processing

A/D
conversion

Shading
processing

Controller block

F-5-25

The following shows the functions of the PCBs used by the machine's image processing system:

5-15

Chapter 5
T-5-9

Reader controller PCB

CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D

conversion, shading correction

The machine uses the reader controller PCB to process images for every single image line; specific functions are as follows:
1) Analog Image Processing
-CCD drive
-CCD output gain correction, offset correction
-CCD output A/D conversion
2) Digital Image Processing
-shading correction
Contact image sensor

CIS)

CCD(1 line)

Reader controller PCB

Analog
image
signal
CCD
drive control

Analog image
processing
-gain correction
-offset correction

CCD
control signal
Gain
correction
data

EEP-ROM
CPU

Target value
SRAM

A/D
conversion

Digital
image signal
10

Shading
correction

Digital
image signal

J502

CCD/AP circuit
F-5-26

5.3.6.2 CCD Drive

0006-5931

The machine's CCD sensor is a 1-line linear image sensor consisting of 7488 photocells. After completion of photoelectric conversion in the light-receiving
block, the signals are output to the AP circuit in the reader controller circuit board in parallel for each channel (total eight channels) of the CCD array.

CCD8

CCD7

CCD6

CCD5

CCD2

CCD1

Light-receiving block

output
L

L H H L H L

H H H L

F-5-27

5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output

0006-5932

The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level (gain correction); moreover, the output voltage occurring in
the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific level (offset correction).

5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output

0006-5933

The analog video signal is further converted into a digital signal that is suited to the voltage level of individual pixels by the A/D converter.

5-16

Chapter 5

5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline)

0006-5936

The output of the CCD is not necessarily even for the following factors even when the density of the original is uniform:
1) Variation in the Sensitivity Among Pixels of the CCD
2) Variation in the Intensity of the Rod Lens Array
The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the CCD. Shading correction may be shading adjustment executed at power-on or shading correction executed for each job.

5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment

0006-5937

In this adjustment, the machine measures the density of the standard while plate, and stores the results in memory as density data. It then performs computations on the shading data, and uses the result as the target value for shading correction.

5.3.6.7 Shading Correction

0006-5938

The machine executes this correction for every scan made in main shading unit. It measures the density of the standard white plate, and compares the result
against the target value stored in the shading correction circuit; the difference between the two will be held as the shading correction value for use in correcting variation among CCD pixels when scanning the original, thus evening out the density levels of the image.

CCD output

Target value

Characteristics after correction

Characteristics before correction

Measurement

White
Original density
Standard white plate
F-5-28

5-17

Chapter 5

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

5.4.1 Copyboard glass
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0006-9714

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

F-5-29

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

F-5-30

5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0006-9730

1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].

F-5-31

When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface.The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images.
If dirt is found, be sure to clean it using lint-free paper moistened with

5-18

Chapter 5
alcohol.

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB

[2]
[1]

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

0007-0740

If an ADF is used, be sure to execute P-PRINT of service mode to obtain

its printout:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT

5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover

0007-0742

1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if equipped with an

ADF)

[1]

F-5-34

5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover

0007-3566

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the flexible cable cover [2].
2) Disconnect the flexible cable [3] on the reader controller PCB.

[3]
[1]
F-5-32

2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-5-35

5.4.2.5 Removing the Copyboard Glass

0007-3420

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

[1]

[2]

F-5-33

5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover of the machine

0007-3565

1) Remove the 14 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2] of the
machine.

F-5-36

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

5-19

Chapter 5

[2]

[1]
F-5-39

3) Remove the 8 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-5-40

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and detach the 3 wire saddles [2];
then, remove the 2 screws [3].

[2]

[1]

F-5-37

5.4.2.6 Removing the Reader Controller PCB

0007-0745

1) Remove the cover [1].

[1]

[3]
F-5-41

5) Go to the back of the machine, and free the cable from the 5 wire
saddles [1]; then, disconnect the connector [2].

F-5-38

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flexible cable [2].

5-20

Chapter 5

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[1]
F-5-42

[1]

6) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-5-46

10) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader controller PCB [2].

[1]

[2]

F-5-43

7) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the cover [2].

[1]

[2]

F-5-47

5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or

After Initializing the RAM
0007-0746

F-5-44

8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the cable from the wire
saddle [2].

- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to generate the

latest P-PRINT printout.
<if you are initializing the RAM of the reader controller without
replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the reader controller backup data; after
initializing the RAM, download the data, thus eliminating the need
for the following adjustment.
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustment
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-CON; then, press the OK key to
initialize the RAM. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate values using the following service mode items:
a. service label (behind reader unit left cover) values
a-1. CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2. main scanning direction position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3. shading position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4. main/sub scanning direction MTF value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the
reader controller PCB: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT.

F-5-45

9) Remove the 2 screws [1], and pull out the reader controller PCB base
[2].

Set a value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments using the D-10 Chart.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
2. ADF-Related Adjustment
The machine keeps ADF-related service mode data in the RAM of the
reader controller; as such, you will have to make the appropriate
adjustments if you have replaced the reader controller or initialized
the RAM.

5-21

Chapter 5

1) Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have

previously generated for the following:
a. main scanning direction position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER>ADJSUT>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
b. original stop position adjustment
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
c. original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED
2) Make adjustments using the following items:
a. tray width adjustment
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR
b. CIS read position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRD-POS
c. white level adjustment
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2
When you have finished the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book cassette
to replace the old P-PRINT printout.

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-5-50

5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor

0006-9746

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, disconnect the connector [2], and
detach the 2 wire saddles [3].

F-5-48

5.4.3 Scanner Motor

5.4.3.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
0007-3432

1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if equipped with an

ADF)

F-5-51

2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the scanner motor [2].

[1]
F-5-49

2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].

F-5-52

5.4.4 Contact sensor

5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover
0006-9758

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer
(right) [2].

5-22

Chapter 5

[1]
F-5-56

2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].

F-5-53

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer
(left) [2].

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-5-57

5.4.4.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass

F-5-54

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader front cover [2].

0007-3421

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

F-5-55
F-5-58

5.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover

0007-3433

1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if equipped with an

ADF)

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

5-23

Chapter 5

F-5-61

3) Remove the flexible cable [1], and detach the contact image sensor
(CIS) [2].

[1]

[2]

F-5-62

When detaching the contact sensor unit, take care not to touch the light
guide assembly and the lens assembly.
F-5-59

Light guide

5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

0006-9762

1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the
contact image sensor (CIS) [2] will move where it is shown in the
figure.

Rod lens array

F-5-63

When mounting it, be sure to connect the flexible cable [1] before fitting
the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] to the machine.

F-5-60

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the plate [2].

5-24

Chapter 5

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-5-64

F-5-66

5.4.4.5 After Replacement of the CIS

2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].
0006-9764

Be sure to enter the value indicated on the CIS label attached to the contact image sensor (CIS) using the following service mode item:

[1]

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
(main scanning direction MTR correction value)

[1]

XX

[2]

F-5-67

5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed

Sensor (front/rear)
0007-0753

MTF-MG

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then,
detach the sensor base [3].

F-5-65

Be sure also to update the value indicated on the service label found behind the left cover of the reader unit so that it is identical to the value
indicated on the CIS label.
Reference:
At time of shipment from the factory, no CIS label is attached.

5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor

5.4.5.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
0007-3437

1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if equipped with an

ADF)

F-5-68

2) Detach the 2 sensors [1] from the sensor base.

5-25

Chapter 5

F-5-69

5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor

5.4.6.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0007-3439

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

F-5-70

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

F-5-71

5.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0007-3426

1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].

F-5-72

When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface.The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images.
If dirt is found, be sure to clean it using lint-free paper moistened with

5-26

Chapter 5
alcohol.

5.4.7 Original Size Sensor

5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position

Sensor

5.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover

0007-0751

1) Pull the drive belt [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact
image sensor (CIS) [2] is where indicated in the figure.

0007-3440

1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if equipped with an

ADF)

[1]
F-5-76
F-5-73

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the CIS home position
sensor [3].

2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear cover [2].

[1]

When detaching the sensor, do so as if to push it under the claw [2]

found at the rear.

[1]

[2]

F-5-77

5.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Glass

0007-3425
F-5-74

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

After replacing the sensor, pull the drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction
of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is returned to the
farthest left.

F-5-78

F-5-75

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:

5-27

Chapter 5
- glass surface
- standard white plate

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flexible cable [2].

[2]

The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

[1]
F-5-81

3) Remove the 8 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-5-82

4) Free the hook [1], and detach the original sensor [2].

[1]

F-5-79

[2]

5.4.7.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor

0006-9774

1) Remove the cover [1].

[1]
F-5-83

5) Disconnect the connector [1].

6) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].
7) Free the hook [4], and detach the original size sensor [5].

F-5-80

5-28

Chapter 5

[1]

[5]

[4]
[3]

[2]
F-5-84

5.4.8 Reader Heater (option)

5.4.8.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0007-3423

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then,
detach the copyboard glass [3].

F-5-86

5.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right)

0007-0757
F-5-85

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the wire saddle
[2].
2) Remove the screw [3], and detach the reader heater (right) [4].

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

F-5-87

5-29

Chapter 5

5.4.8.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0007-3427

1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].

After replacing the reader heater, pull the drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor is returned to the
farthest left.

F-5-91
F-5-88

When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface.The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images.
If dirt is found, be sure to clean it using lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.

5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left)

0007-0760

1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the
contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is where it is indicated in the figure.

F-5-89

2) Peel the protective sheet [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Free the cable from the wire saddle [3], and remove the screw [4];
then, detach the reader heater (left) [5].

F-5-90

5-30

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

Contents

Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions .................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................6-5

6.2.1 Basic Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.3 Various Controls ............................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing..................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light ................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control .............................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ...................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.3.2.1 APC Control....................................................................................................................................................................................................6-7

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor..............................................................................................................................................................6-7

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter....................................................................................................................................................... 6-8

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ..........................................................................................................................................................................6-8

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................6-10

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit....................................................................................................................................................................6-10
6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover..............................................................................................................................................................................6-10
6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-10

Chapter 6

6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions
0006-9404

Laser Light
T-6-1

Number of laser beams

Output

5mW (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
10mW (iR3570/4570/3530)

Wave length

785 nm - 800 nm (infrared light)

Scanner Motor
T-6-2

Type of motor

DC brushless motor

Number of revolutions

16000 rpm (approx.; single control)

(iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
27000 rpm/16000 rpm (approx.; double control)
(iR3570/4570/3530)

Type of bearing

Oil

Polygon Mirror
T-6-3

Number of facets

6 (40-mm dia.)

Control Mechanism
T-6-4

Synchronous control

Main scanning direction

Light intensity control

APC

Others

Laser activation/deactivation
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control

6-1

Chapter 6

6.1.2 Major Components

0006-5970

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]
F-6-1
T-6-5

Name

Description

[1] Laser unit

Generates laser light

[2] Polygon mirror

Scans laser light in main scanning direction.

[3] BD mirror

Reflects laser light in the direction of the BD PCB.

[4] BD PCB

Generates the BD signal.

6.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0006-5971

The laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the DC controller PCB.

iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F/2230/2230F/2830

6-2

Chapter 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213

J601

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J604

[3]

1 2 3

J603

[4]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213

J601

[2]

J602

POLYGON FG
+24V
P ACC
P DEC
GND

[3]

J603

GND
+5V
PWCHG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

VDO1
GND
/VDO1
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
/VDO2
GND
VDO2

1 2 3

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J318

iR2270/iR2270F/iR2870/iR2870F

[4]

[2]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
321

J316

J317

[1]

+3.3V
BD
GND

F-6-2

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J318

iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F/3530
iR3570/iR3570F/iR4570/iR4570F

VDO1
GND
/VDO1
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
/VDO2
GND
VDO2
GND
+5V
PWCHG

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
321

J316

J317

[1]
STAND BY
FG PULSE DETECT
POLYGON FG
+24V
P ACC
P DEC
GND

+3.3V
BD
GND

F-6-3

[1]DC controller PCB

[2]Laser driver PCB

6-3

Chapter 6
[3]Scanner motor PCB
[4]BD PCB
T-6-6

Single
VDO1
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
VDO2
PWCHG
FG PULSE DETECT
POLYGON FG
P ACC
P DEC
BD

6-4

Description
Image data single input
Laser driver control signal
Laser driver control signal
Laser driver control signal
Image data signal input
Light intensify switchover signal
FG PULSE detecting signal
FG output signal
Motor acceleration signal
Motor deceleration signal
BD output level single

Chapter 6

6.2 Basic Sequence

6.2.1 Basic Sequence
0006-5972

When the control panel power switch is turned on, the laser scanner starts to rotate; when the motor rotation reaches its target revolution, the machine turns
on the laser unit. Thereafter, when the Start key is turned on, the machine generates the image request signal (PVREQ) on the printer side, and turns on the
laser beam with reference to the generated signal.
A4, 1 Copy

STBY

INTR

PRINT

Laser A
BD detention/APC control ON

BD

STBY

PVREQ

BD detection/APC control ON

APC control ON

F-6-4

6-5

Chapter 6

6.3 Various Controls

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light
0006-5973

The laser light is turned on and off according to the combination of laser control signals (CNT0/1/2) from the DC controller PCB.
T-6-7

Laser control signal

Laser status

CNT1

CNT0

Laser A

Laser B

ON (for APC control)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON (for APC control)

OFF

OFF

Video signal input enabled

Video signal input enabled

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON (for APC control)

OFF

OFF

J318

CNT0
CNT1
CNT2

CNT2

DC-CON

F-6-5

6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control

0006-5974

The synchronous control in the main scanning direction is performed in the synch circuit based on the BD synch signal.
Using the BD signal generated based on the light from laser A, the DC controller PCB generates the BD synch signal for laser A and the BD synch signal
for laser B.
The image data written to line memory is read out by the readout enable signal (RE_A, RE_B) generated based on the BD synch signal (BD_A, BD_B)
for output to the laser driver PCB.

6-6

Chapter 6

BD

[6]

J318

J316

BD_A
RE_A

[3]
J301

[1]

BD_B

[2]

RE_B

[3]

MN-CON
[4]

[5]

DC-CON
F-6-6

[1] Sync circuit

[2] Delay circuit
[3] Line memory
[4] VDO
[5] VDO signal processing block
[6] Laser driver PCB
BD_A/B : BD synch signal
RE_A/B : readout enable signal
Memo:
The BD sensor of the BD PCB receives light from laser A only, and is free of light from laser B, i.e., the BD signal is generated based on the light from
laser A.

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

6.3.2.1 APC Control
0006-5976

The laser light hitting the photodiode included in the laserdiode is monitored and is controlled so that it remains a specific level at all times.

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
0006-5978

The laser scanner motor is controlled with reference to the laser scanner motor revolution signal (FG signal).
The revolution of the laser scanner motor is controlled by means of the acceleration signal (ACC signal) and the deceleration signal (DEC signal).

6-7

BD

ACC
DEC
FG

Chapter 6

J316

J317

DC-CON
F-6-7

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter
0006-5979

When the right door is opened, the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the cover causes the laser shutter to move down, thus blocking the path
of the laser light. If the machine identifies the front cover or the right door as having been opened, it will turn off the laser scanner motor and the laser output.

6-8

Chapter 6

[1]

[2]
DOOR CLOSED
[3]

DOOR OPEN
[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-6-8

[1] Laser shutter

[2] Laser shutter link (operates in conjunction with front cover)
[3] Laser unit

6-9

Chapter 6

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

0007-8350

6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit

0007-8348

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-6-12

F-6-9

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

F-6-10
F-6-13

6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

0007-8349

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-6-14

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.

[1]
[1]
F-6-11

6-10

Chapter 6

F-6-15

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

6-11

Chapter 7 Image Formation

Contents

Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Image Formation Process...............................................................................................................................................7-3

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) .............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) .............................................................................................................................. 7-4

7.3 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................7-5

7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying) ................................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying) ................................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation) .......................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation) .......................................................................................................................................... 7-7

7.4 Image Stabilization Control ...........................................................................................................................................7-8

7.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.2 APVC Control.............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.4.3 ATVC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-8

7.5 Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................7-9

7.5.1 Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias...........................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................7-9

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit.......................................................................................................................................................7-10

7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 7-10

7.7 Developing Unit...........................................................................................................................................................7-11

7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11

7.8 Toner Container ...........................................................................................................................................................7-12

7.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply............................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.8.4 Toner Supply Control ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.8.5 Recovery Sequence .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.8.6 Toner Level Detection ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-14

7.9 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.9.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias..................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control .........................................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.9.3 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.9.4 Separation Mechanism............................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias ..........................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.10 Transfer Mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................7-17

7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control .......................................................................................................................................................................7-17

7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning...................................................................................................................................7-18

7.11.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box ............................................................................................................................................... 7-18

7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure.....................................................................................................................................7-19

7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-19

Contents

7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-19

7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.12.1.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper Tray .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-22
7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp............................................................................................................................................................. 7-22

7.12.2 Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-22

7.12.2.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-22
7.12.2.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-23
7.12.2.3 Removing the Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-23

7.12.3 Hopper Assembly..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24

7.12.3.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-24
7.12.3.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-24
7.12.3.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.12.3.4 Removing the Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.12.3.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.12.3.6 Removing the Upper Tray .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.12.3.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-27
7.12.3.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp............................................................................................................................................................. 7-27
7.12.3.9 Removing the Left Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.12.3.10 Removing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.12.3.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-29

7.12.4 Sub Hopper .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-30

7.12.4.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-30
7.12.4.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-30
7.12.4.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.12.4.4 Removing the Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.12.4.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-32
7.12.4.6 Removing the Upper Tray .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.12.4.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-33
7.12.4.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp............................................................................................................................................................. 7-33
7.12.4.9 Removing the Left Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-34
7.12.4.10 Removing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-34
7.12.4.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.12.4.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor .................................................................................................................................................... 7-36
7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub Hopper........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-36

7.12.5 Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-37

7.12.5.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-37
7.12.5.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-38
7.12.5.3 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-38

7.12.6 Developing Cylinder................................................................................................................................................................ 7-39

7.12.6.1 Detaching the Developing Cylinder ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-39

7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-41

7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer Roller .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41

7.12.8 Waste Toner Box ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41

7.12.8.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-41
7.12.8.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-42

7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-42

7.12.9.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-42
7.12.9.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................................................................................ 7-42
7.12.9.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.12.9.4 Removing the Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.12.9.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.12.9.6 Removing the Upper Tray .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-45
7.12.9.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-45
7.12.9.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp............................................................................................................................................................. 7-45
7.12.9.9 Removing the Left Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.12.9.10 Removing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.12.9.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-47

Contents

7.12.9.12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor............................................................................................................................................................7-48

7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-48

7.12.10.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit................................................................................................................................................................7-48
7.12.10.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ..............................................................................................................................................................7-48
7.12.10.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge..................................................................................................................................................................7-48
7.12.10.4 Removing the Drum Unit..........................................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.12.10.5 Removing the Developing Assembly........................................................................................................................................................7-50
7.12.10.6 Removing the Upper Tray.........................................................................................................................................................................7-51
7.12.10.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover.......................................................................................................................................................7-51
7.12.10.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ...........................................................................................................................................................7-51
7.12.10.9 Removing the Left Cover..........................................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.12.10.10 Removing the Laser Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.12.10.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................7-53
7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor...................................................................................................................................................7-54

7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator........................................................................................................................................................ 7-54

7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator ................................................................................................................................................................7-54

Chapter 7

7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System
0006-6168
T-7-1

Drum Unit Specifications

Photosensitive drum
Drum type

OPC

Drum diameter

30 mm

Cleaning mechanism

by cleaning blade

Process speed

230 mm/sec (iR3570/4570/3530)

137 mm/sec (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)

Primary charging
Charging method

by roller (AC + DC)

Charging roller diameter

16 mm

Cleaning mechanism

by brush roller (reciprocating mechanism)

Transfer charging
Charging method

by roller (DC)

Charging roller diameter

16 mm
T-7-2

Pre-Exposure Unit Specifications

LED

12 pc.

Timing of light emission

in response to drum rotation

T-7-3

Developing Unit Specifications

Developing cylinder
diameter

20 mm

Development method

by dry, single-component toner projection method (application of AC

+ DC)

Toner

single-component insulating magnetic toner

Toner level detection

by toner level sensor (inside sub hopper and developing assembly)

T-7-4

Toner Cartridge Specifications

Toner level detection
Toner variable resistor

none
1220 g (iR3570/4570/3530)
1060 g (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
T-7-5

Others
separation method

by static eliminator + curvature

Waste toner

collection to waste toner case

7-1

Chapter 7

7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System

0006-5981

[7]

[8]

[1]

[4]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[6]
F-7-1

[1] Toner cartridge

[2] Sub hopper
[3] Developing unit
[4] Photosensitive drum
[5] Transfer roller
[6] Primary charging roller
[7] Drum unit
[8] Drum cleaning unit

7-2

Chapter 7

7.2 Image Formation Process

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline)
0006-5983
[D]

[C]

[1]

[7]

[6]

[2]
[5]
[3]
[B]
[4]

[A]

F-7-2
T-7-6

Item

Description

[1]Pre-exposure

removes residual charges from the drum.

[2]Primary charging

charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform

negative potential.

[3]Laser exposure

forms a latent static image on the drum.

[4]Development

forms a visible image on the drum.

[5]Transfer

transfers images from the drum to paper.

[6]Separation

separates paper from the drum.

[7]Drum cleaning

removes toner from the drum.

[A]Pickup
[B]Registration
[C]Fixing
[D]Delivery

7-3

Chapter 7

7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)

0006-6411

F-7-3

[1] The difference in potential between the drum surface and the developing sleeve causes toner to adhere to the latent static image on the drum, turning
the image into a visible image.
[2] The bias voltage applied to the transfer roller causes the toner to move from the drum to paper.
[3] The cleaning blade in contact with the drum scrapes off the residual toner from the drum.

7-4

Chapter 7

7.3 Basic Sequence

7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)
0006-6865

The sequence of operation of initial rotation is as follows:

Pickup from the Cassette
Registration
ON

Pickup motor

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-4

Pickup from the Manual Feeder

Multifeeder
ON

Registration
ON

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-5

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)

0006-6867

The following is the sequence of operation of initial rotation:

Pickup from the Cassette
Registration
ON

Pickup motor

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-6

Pickup from the Manual Feeder

7-5

Chapter 7

Multifeeder
ON

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

Registration
ON

[1]

F-7-7

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying)

0006-6868

The sequence of operation during copying is as follows:

Registration
ON

Image write
end

Image formation sequence

(1st sheet)

Registration
ON

Sheet-to-sheet sequence

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

Image formation sequence

(2nd sheet and later)

[1]

F-7-8

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying)

0006-6869

The sequence of operation during copying is as follows:

Registration
ON

Image write
end
Image sequence
(1st sheet)

Sheet-to-sheet sequence

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-9

7-6

Registration
ON
Image formation sequence
(2nd sheet and later)

Chapter 7

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

0006-6870

The sequence of operation of last rotation is as follows:

Image write
end

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-10

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

0006-6871

The sequence of operation of last rotation is as follows:

Image write
end

Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

[1]

F-7-11

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.

7-7

Chapter 7

7.4 Image Stabilization Control

7.4.1 Overview
0006-5986

At times, changes in the environment or wear on the machine can cause its image output to become unstable. To make sure that its output will remain stable
at all times, the machine uses the following control mechanisms:
T-7-7

[1] Drum film thickness detection control

corrects the development contrast.

[2] Developing contrast control

determines the appropriate primary charging DC

bias and developing DC bias.

[3] ATVC control

corrects the transfer bias.

BK

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-7-12

7.4.2 APVC Control

0006-5987

The term APVC stands for "auto primary voltage control," and it is a mechanism used to control the primary charging application voltage (DC component)
to suit the film thickness of the machine's photosensitive drum. APVC is performed every 500 sheets while the machine is in operation. It is forcibly performed when the drum unit is replaced.

7.4.3 ATVC Control

0006-5989

The machine is provided with a constant current control mechanism that can be enabled or disabled in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TRANSSW.

7-8

Chapter 7

7.5 Drum Unit

7.5.1 Charging Mechanism
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias
0006-5991
T-7-8

Primary Charging Bias

AC bias

2700 Vp-p (max.)

DC bias

-450 V to -850 V

These AC and DC biases are applied between sheets while an image is being formed (until the end of the ongoing job).

7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism

0006-5992

The machine uses a brush [3] to clean the primary charging roller [2], which remains in contact with the photosensitive drum [1]. The brush has a reciprocating mechanism and is driven by a cam [4], operating while the photosensitive drum is being driven.

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-7-13

7-9

Chapter 7

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit

7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
0007-5224

The cleaning blade is kept in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum. It serves to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer to paper
for collection in the waste toner box.

7-10

Chapter 7

7.7 Developing Unit

7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias
0006-6032
T-7-9

Developing Bias
AC bias

800 Vp-p

DC bias

-450 V to -650 V

Both these AC and DC biases are applied while an image is being formed, but are not applied between sheets.

7-11

Chapter 7

7.8 Toner Container

7.8.1 Overview
0006-6323

The toner cartridge is constructed as shown in the following figure. The cartridge is filled with 1-component insulating magnetic toner (if iR3570/4570,
1220 g; if iR2270/2870, 1060 g). When the sub hopper requests a supply of toner, the cartridge itself rotates to feed toner. The machine's toner cartridge
serves as a hopper (as it is found in past models).
iR3570 / iR4570

F-7-14

iR2270 / iR2870

F-7-15

Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the toner stop comes
off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may be resulted if the
toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down.

7-12

Chapter 7

[1]

F-7-16

7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply

0006-6363

When the user fits the toner cartridge [1] in place, toner is temporarily stored in the sub hopper [2], inside which is a sensor that makes sure that the amount
of toner remains at a specific level at all times. When the developing assembly [4] requests a supply of toner, the machine rotates the feedscrew [3] to move
toner from the sub hopper to the developing assembly.
The machine's toner cartridge serves as a hopper (as found in past models).
[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]
F-7-17

7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge

0006-5996

When a request is made for a supply of toner, the toner cartridge drive motor rotates in the direction shown in the following figure; its drive is transmitted
from the drive motor to the toner cartridge, thus rotating the toner cartridge.

7-13

Chapter 7

F-7-18

7.8.4 Toner Supply Control

0006-5995

Supply of Toner from the Toner Bottle to the Sub Hopper

If the "absence of toner inside the sub hopper" is detected while the main motor is rotating, the bottle motor is rotated intermittently (on for 3 sec, off for
2 sec), and the length of time during which the absence is detected is checked using a counter that increases its count for each on-off cycle. When the count
reaches 20 (about 100 sec), the machine will assume that the sub hopper has become empty, and will indicate the Add Toner message on its control panel.
The counter is reset when the presence of toner inside the sub hopper is detected during any on-off cycle.
If the "absence of toner inside the developing assembly" is detected while the main motor is rotating and the developing clutch is on, the machine rotates
the sub hopper feedscrew motor intermittently (on for 1 sec, off for 1 sec). The rotation is monitored by a counter that increases its count when the developing sensor state is off during a single on-off cycle; when its reading reaches 20 (about 40 sec), the machine will assume that its developing assembly is
more or less empty (i.e., there is a possibility of the ongoing generating black prints if printing continues), and will issue a No Toner error, suspending
image formation operation. The counter is reset when the presence of toner is detected inside the developing assembly.
E020-0000
If the absence of toner is detected by the developing assembly toner level sensor and the presence of toner is detected by the hopper toner level sensor, the
route of supply from the sub hopper to the developing assembly may be clogged or the output of these toner sensors may be faulty.
This error code will be indicated when the soft counter reaches 194 (about 388 sec). The counter is designed to increase its count when the hopper sensor
level is on during a single on-off cycle while toner is being supplied from the sub hopper to the developing assembly.

7.8.5 Recovery Sequence

0007-5234

The machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect the replacement of its toner cartridge, but is designed to execute toner recovery sequence in response to the following, assuming that the cartridge has been replaced:
1. the front cover has been opened and closed after the machine has detected the absence of toner inside the toner cartridge and the developing assembly.
2. the machine has been turned off and then on after it has detected the absence of toner inside the toner cartridge and the developing assembly.
The machine's recovery sequence is as follows:
1. the machine rotates the toner cartridge motor. (intermittently by rotating it for 3 sec and stopping it for 2 sec)
2. if the toner level sensor inside the sub hopper detects the "presence of toner," the machine stops the recovery sequence.
3. after repeating the foregoing intermittent operation 20 times and if the toner level sensor inside the sub hopper still does not detect the "presence of
toner," the machine will assumes that the toner cartridge has not been replaced and cause the toner cartridge motor to stop.

7.8.6 Toner Level Detection

0006-6350

Detecting the Level of Toner Inside the Sub Hopper

The machine checks the level of the toner sensor located inside the sub hopper every 100 msec, and will assume the presence of toner inside the sub hopper
if the sensor goes on twice or more continuously (200 msec or more).
If the machine detects the absence of toner 100 times or more (10 sc or more) as the result of its check on the sensor level made every 100 msec, the machine
will assume that there is no toner inside the sub hopper.
The machine executes the foregoing detection at all times regardless of the state (on or off) of the main motor and the developing clutch.
Detecting the Level of Toner Inside the Developing Assembly
1. The machine samples the output of the toner level sensor located inside the developing assembly every 100 msec (only if the developing clutch is on).
2. The machine uses a period of 1.5 sec (15 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit of measurement: if the presence of
toner is detected 3 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the developing assembly; if the presence of toner is detected less than 3 times,
on the other hand, it will assume that there is no toner inside the developing assembly.
However, in the case of the iR3570/iR4570 Series machines, the drive of the main motor is controlled to 2 different speeds, and the toner inside the developing assembly is driven by the main motor (using a clutch), requiring a switchover of methods of detection as follows:
Normal Speed Mode
The machine uses a period of 1.5 sec (25 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit of measurement: if the presence of toner

7-14

Chapter 7
is detected 3 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the developing assembly.
Low-Speed Mode
The machine uses a period of 2.5 sec (42 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit of measurement: if it detects the presence
of toner 5 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the developing assembly.
The machine converts the number of samplings and the number of times toner detection has been executed when switching over methods of detection.
(The conversion is based on the speed-to-amount relationship.)

7-15

Chapter 7

7.9 Transfer Unit

7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
7.9.1.1 Outline
0006-5997

The transfer unit [1] consists of the transfer roller and the static eliminator.
The transfer roller rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum.
Bias is applied to the static eliminator so that sheets can be separated from the drum.

F-7-19

7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias

7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control
0006-5998

The machine changes the output depending on the site environment (absolute moisture content), paper type, paper width, and source of paper.
Environment: 5 settings according to absolute moisture content
Paper type: plain paper, envelope, heavy paper, tracing paper, transparency, bond paper, label sheet
Paper width: size boundaries as defined by 2 points
Source of paper: if from cassette (including pedestal); if from multi-feeder, i.e., 1st side (half-speed), 2nd side (half-speed)
Transfer bias
Transfer bias: 1000 to 6000 V
Transfer bias for cleaning: -2600 V
The transfer bias is used at time of image formation, while a voltage of a specific level is applied between sheets for cleaning of the transfer roller.

7.9.3 Cleaning
7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism
0006-6318

The machine uses the transfer roller cleaning mechanism to return the toner sticking to the transfer roller back to the photosensitive drum by applying a
cleaning bias to the roller.
Once the toner reaches the drum, it is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaning blade for collection in the waste toner box.

7.9.4 Separation Mechanism

7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias
0006-6001

Static Eliminator Bias

1st side: -2300 V
2nd side: -3000 V
A DC bias is applied between sheets while an image is being formed. (It is applied until the ongoing job is over.)

7-16

Chapter 7

7.10 Transfer Mechanism

7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias
7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control
0007-5295

To prevent soiling of the transfer guide with toner or the photosensitive drum with toner images, the following transfer guide bias is applied to the transfer
guide. The surface of the transfer guide is covered with an insulating sheet.
Transfer guide bias
1st side: -570 V
2nd side: -740 V

7-17

Chapter 7

7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning

7.11.1 Outline
0006-6033

The photosensitive drum cleaning mechanism uses the photosensitive drum cleaning blade to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer; the
toner thus collected is moved to the waste toner box.

7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner

0006-6034

The waste toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved by the waste toner feedscrew to the waste toner box found at the front of the machine. The
waste toner feedscrew is operated by the drive from the drum flange.

7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box

0006-6036

To prevent leakage of waste toner from the waste toner box or to prevent overloading the waste toner feedscrew, the machine is equipped with a waste
toner detection mechanism. The waste toner box can hold about 2043 cc of toner, and the machine identifies the waste toner box as being full when there
is about 1766 cc of toner or when the toner comes to weigh about 1050 g.
When the weight of waste toner increases, the waste toner case itself lowers on its own, thus causing the machine to assume that the case has become full.

F-7-20

E190-0000
When the machine identifies the waste toner full sensor as being continuously on for 2000 sheets, it will indicate a warning; if it then detects the activation
of the sensor for 100 sheets continuously, it will indicate 'E190-000'. (The count is increased coinciding with delivery.)

7-18

Chapter 7

7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure

7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp
7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8024

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-24

7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0007-8342

1) Shift up the lever [1].

F-7-21

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-25

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

F-7-22

7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8031

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-26

Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.
F-7-23

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

7-19

Chapter 7

[1]

F-7-31

F-7-27

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum Unit

0007-8343

1) Open the right door [1].

F-7-32

F-7-28

Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-29

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-7-33

7.12.1.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

0007-8344

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-30

4) Remove the screw [1].

7-20

Chapter 7

F-7-34

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-7-37

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

F-7-35

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-38

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.

F-7-36

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

F-7-39

7-21

Chapter 7

7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8345

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

F-7-43

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
F-7-40

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-7-44

F-7-41

7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8346

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].

F-7-45

7.12.2 Drum Unit

7.12.2.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8023

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-42

7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8347

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

F-7-46

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].

7-22

Chapter 7
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-50

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-47

7.12.2.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8030

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-51

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-7-48

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

F-7-52

4) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-49

7.12.2.3 Removing the Drum Unit

F-7-53

0007-8341

1) Open the right door [1].

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

7-23

Chapter 7

F-7-57

F-7-54

7.12.3.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

0007-8017

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-58

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

F-7-55

7.12.3 Hopper Assembly

7.12.3.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8006

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-59

7.12.3.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0007-8351

1) Shift up the lever [1].

F-7-56

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

7-24

Chapter 7

F-7-63
F-7-60

2) Remove the screw [1].

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

F-7-64
F-7-61

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.

F-7-65

4) Remove the screw [1].

[1]

F-7-62

7.12.3.4 Removing the Drum Unit

F-7-66

0007-8352

1) Open the right door [1].

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

7-25

Chapter 7

F-7-70

F-7-67

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].
Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

F-7-68
F-7-71

7.12.3.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

0007-8353

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-72
F-7-69

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

7-26

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

Chapter 7

F-7-75

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-7-73

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.
F-7-76

7.12.3.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8355

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].

F-7-74
F-7-77

7.12.3.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8354

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

7.12.3.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8357

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

7-27

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

F-7-78

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-81

7.12.3.10 Removing the Laser Unit

0007-8359

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

F-7-79

F-7-82

F-7-80

7.12.3.9 Removing the Left Cover

0007-8358

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-83

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

7-28

Chapter 7

F-7-84
F-7-87

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.

3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the harness [3] through the
hole [2] in the plate.

F-7-88

4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2].

F-7-85

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

7.12.3.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly

0007-8360

1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2].

F-7-89

When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.

F-7-86

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector
[2] found at the rear.

7-29

Chapter 7

F-7-90
F-7-93

7.12.4 Sub Hopper

7.12.4.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8020

1) Open the front cover [1].

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

F-7-91

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-92

0007-8386

1) Shift up the lever [1].

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

0007-8027

7-30

7.12.4.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

F-7-95

7.12.4.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-94

Chapter 7

F-7-96

F-7-99

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.
Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge
1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.

F-7-100

4) Remove the screw [1].

[1]

F-7-97

7.12.4.4 Removing the Drum Unit

0007-8387

1) Open the right door [1].

F-7-101

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

F-7-98

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-102

Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

7-31

Chapter 7

F-7-103

7.12.4.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

F-7-106
0007-8388

1) Remove the screw [1].

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

F-7-107
F-7-104

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-7-105

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].

7-32

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

Chapter 7

F-7-110

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-7-108

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.
F-7-111

7.12.4.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8390

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].

F-7-109
F-7-112

7.12.4.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8389

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

7.12.4.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8391

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

7-33

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

F-7-113

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-116

7.12.4.10 Removing the Laser Unit

0007-8393

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

F-7-114

F-7-117

F-7-115

7.12.4.9 Removing the Left Cover

0007-8392

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-118

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

7-34

Chapter 7

F-7-119
F-7-122

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.

3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the harness [3] through the
hole [2] in the plate.

F-7-123

4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2].

F-7-120

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

7.12.4.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly

0007-8394

1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2].

F-7-124

When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.

F-7-121

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector
[2] found at the rear.

7-35

Chapter 7

7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub Hopper

0007-8396

1) Remove the 2 screws [2] from the back of the sub hopper [1].

F-7-125

7.12.4.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor

0007-8395

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

F-7-129

2) Check the phase of the gear [1] shown in the figure.

F-7-126

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner feedscrew motor
assembly [2].

F-7-130

F-7-127

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner feedscrew motor [3] from
the base.

F-7-128

7-36

3) Remove the 3 screws [1].

Chapter 7
7) Disconnect the connector [1].

F-7-135

8) Detach the sub hopper [1] from the bottom.

F-7-131

4) Free the cable from the edge saddle [1].

F-7-136

7.12.5 Developing Assembly

7.12.5.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
F-7-132

5) Remove the screw [1], and release the arm [2].

F-7-133

6) Remove the bushing unit [2] from the sub hopper [1].

0007-8022

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-137

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-134

7-37

Chapter 7

F-7-138

F-7-141

7.12.5.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8029

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-142

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-139

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

F-7-140

7.12.5.3 Removing the Developing Assembly

0007-8034

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-143

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

7-38

Chapter 7

7.12.6 Developing Cylinder

7.12.6.1 Detaching the Developing Cylinder
0008-0013

F-7-144

When you remove a developing cylinder from the developing

assembly housing, be careful with the following points.
1. Lots of self-tapping screws are used in the developing unit. Be careful
not to damage tapped holes by tightening self-tapping screws.
2. Remove the developing cylinder after detaching the blade unit with
the developing blade.
3. Mount the developing cylinder on the developing assembly housing
before attaching the blade unit.
4. Do not touch nor give a shock to the developing cylinder.
1) Unscrew 5 self-tapping screws [1] and a washer screw [2], and detach
the top cover [3].

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

F-7-147

2) Slide out the sleeve front guide [2] in the direction of the arrow while
releasing the claw [1].

F-7-145

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.

F-7-148

3) Unscrew a self-tapping screw [1] and a washer screw [2], and remove
the angle
adjustment plate [3].

F-7-149

4) Remove the E-ring [1], a washer [2], a bearing [3], a gear [4], and a
dowel pin [5].

F-7-146

7-39

Chapter 7

F-7-153

F-7-150

5) Unscrew a screw [1] and remove the gear unit [2].

8) Unscrew 4 screws [1] which fix the sleeve holders (front/rear).

9) Push up the developing cylinder [2] and remove it along with a roller
or others.

F-7-151

6) Remove a sleeve bushing [1], a gear [2], and a dowel pin [3].

F-7-154

10) Remove a push-on roller [1], a sleeve holder [2], a bearing [3], and
a sleeve holder (rear)
[3] from the developing cylinder.

[3]
[2]
[1]

F-7-155

F-7-152

11) Remove a grip ring [1], a washer [2], a push-on roller [3], a sleeve
holder (front) [4] and
a bearing [5] from the developing cylinder.

When mounting the sleeve bushing, be careful with the following

points.
Match the projection [4] of the sleeve bushing to the depression of the
gear unit side plate to mount. (If mounting in the wrong direction, the
projection of the sleeve bushing might come into contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum.)
Pay attention to the mounting direction of the sleeve bushing. (Mount
the sleeve bushing with longer projection on the developing cylinder. If
the mounting direction is wrong, the gear unit cannot be attached.)
7) Unscrew 2 screws [1], and detach the blade unit [2].

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-156

7-40

Chapter 7

7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller

nator [2].

7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer Roller

0007-8431

1) Open the right door [1].

F-7-161

Be sure that the spring [1] of the holder is against the butting point [2].
F-7-157

2) Pull off the pin [1] toward the front.

F-7-162

F-7-158

3) Remove the holder [1] from the front of the transfer roller.

7.12.8 Waste Toner Box

7.12.8.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8008

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-159

4) Remove the transfer roller [1] toward the front.

F-7-163

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-160

Points to Note When Attaching the Transfer Roller

Be sure that the top of the holder [1] is on the inside of the static elimi-

7-41

Chapter 7

F-7-164
F-7-167

7.12.8.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8015

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-165

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-7-168

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

7.12.9.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8025

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-169
F-7-166

7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor

7.12.9.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8018

1) Open the front cover [1].

7-42

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

Chapter 7

[1]

F-7-173
F-7-170

7.12.9.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0007-8364

7.12.9.4 Removing the Drum Unit

1) Shift up the lever [1].

0007-8365

1) Open the right door [1].

F-7-174

F-7-171

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-175

F-7-172

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.
Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge
1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.

F-7-176

4) Remove the screw [1].

7-43

Chapter 7

F-7-177

F-7-180

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-7-178

F-7-181

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].

Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

F-7-179

7.12.9.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

F-7-182
0007-8366

1) Remove the screw [1].

7-44

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

Chapter 7

7.12.9.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8367

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

F-7-183

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

F-7-186

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-7-187

7.12.9.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8368

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].
F-7-184

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.

F-7-188

7.12.9.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8369

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

F-7-185

7-45

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

F-7-189

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-192

7.12.9.10 Removing the Laser Unit

0007-8371

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

F-7-190

F-7-193

F-7-191

7.12.9.9 Removing the Left Cover

0007-8370

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-194

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

7-46

Chapter 7

F-7-195
F-7-198

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.

3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the harness [3] through the
hole [2] in the plate.

F-7-199

4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2].

F-7-196

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

7.12.9.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly

0007-8372

1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2].

F-7-200

When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.

F-7-197

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector
[2] found at the rear.

7-47

Chapter 7

F-7-204

F-7-201

7.12.10.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

7.12.9.12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor

0007-8373

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then,
detach the toner sensor [3].

0007-8026

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-7-205

F-7-202

7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor

7.12.10.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8019

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-7-206
F-7-203

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

7-48

7.12.10.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0007-8375

1) Shift up the lever [1].

Chapter 7

F-7-210
F-7-207

2) Remove the screw [1].

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

F-7-211
F-7-208

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.

F-7-212

4) Remove the screw [1].

[1]

F-7-209

7.12.10.4 Removing the Drum Unit

F-7-213

0007-8376

1) Open the right door [1].

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

7-49

Chapter 7

F-7-217

F-7-214

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].
Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

F-7-215
F-7-218

7.12.10.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

0007-8377

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-219
F-7-216

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

7-50

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

Chapter 7

F-7-222

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-7-220

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.
F-7-223

7.12.10.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8379

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].

F-7-221
F-7-224

7.12.10.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8378

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

7.12.10.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8381

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

7-51

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

F-7-225

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-228

7.12.10.10 Removing the Laser Unit

0007-8383

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

F-7-226

F-7-229

F-7-227

7.12.10.9 Removing the Left Cover

0007-8382

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

F-7-230

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

7-52

Chapter 7

F-7-231
F-7-234

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.

3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the harness [3] through the
hole [2] in the plate.

F-7-235

4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2].

F-7-232

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

7.12.10.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly

0007-8384

1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2].

F-7-236

When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.

F-7-233

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector
[2] found at the rear.

7-53

Chapter 7

7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator

7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator
0007-8428

1) Open the right door [1].

F-7-237

7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor

0007-8385

F-7-241

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-7-238

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner feedscrew motor
assembly [2].

F-7-242

3) Detach the static eliminator [1] to the front.

F-7-243
F-7-239

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner feedscrew motor [3] from
the base.

F-7-240

7-54

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

Contents

Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.3 Paper Path (printer unit on its own) ............................................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.4 Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray)........................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.1.5 Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray) .......................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.6 Arrangement of Sensors............................................................................................................................................................... 8-6

8.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................8-7

8.2.1 Basic Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2 Acceleration Intervals .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-7

8.3 Detecting Jams ...............................................................................................................................................................8-9

8.3.1 Stationary Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.1.1 Common Stationary Jam .................................................................................................................................................................................8-9
8.3.1.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On............................................................................................................................................................................8-9

8.3.2 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.2.1 Door Open Jam ...............................................................................................................................................................................................8-9

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..................................................................................................................................................8-10

8.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.3 Identifying the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.4 Setting Up the Universal Cassette.............................................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................................8-16

8.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-17

8.6 Registration Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-19

8.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration.............................................................................................................................................. 8-19

8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit ....................................................................................................................................................8-20

8.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.7.2 Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.7.3 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)......................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.7.4 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option) ............................................................................................................................................ 8-27

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................8-33

8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)..................................................................................................................................................................8-33
8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door .............................................................................................................................................................................8-33
8.8.1.3 Removing the Right Door .............................................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.8.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ......................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ................................................................................................................................................................8-34

8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-35

8.8.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)..................................................................................................................................................................8-35
8.8.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ......................................................................................................................................................8-35
8.8.2.3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ................................................................................................................................................................8-35

8.8.3 Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-35

8.8.3.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................................8-35

8.8.4 Sensor Mount ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-36

8.8.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)..................................................................................................................................................................8-36
8.8.4.2 Removing the Right Door .............................................................................................................................................................................8-36

Contents

8.8.4.3 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-37

8.8.4.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...................................................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.8.4.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-37
8.8.4.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2................................................................................................................................................................ 8-38
8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1........................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.8.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-39
8.8.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-39
8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-40
8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2........................................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.8.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-40
8.8.6.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-40
8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-41
8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.8.7.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.8.7.2 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-42
8.8.7.3 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-43
8.8.7.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...................................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2................................................................................................................................................................ 8-43
8.8.7.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-44
8.8.7.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-44

8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-45

8.8.8.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-45
8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-45
8.8.8.3 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-46
8.8.8.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...................................................................................................................................................... 8-46
8.8.8.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-47
8.8.8.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2................................................................................................................................................................ 8-47
8.8.8.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-47
8.8.8.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 8-48

8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-48

8.8.9.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-48
8.8.9.2 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-48
8.8.9.3 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-49
8.8.9.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...................................................................................................................................................... 8-49
8.8.9.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-50
8.8.9.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2................................................................................................................................................................ 8-50
8.8.9.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.8.9.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ 8-51

8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B).......................................................................................................................................... 8-51

8.8.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.8.10.3 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.8.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front).................................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.8.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-53
8.8.10.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-53
8.8.10.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-53
8.8.10.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................................................................................................................................... 8-54

8.8.11 Slide Resistor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-54

8.8.11.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-54
8.8.11.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-54
8.8.11.3 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-55
8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 8-56
8.8.11.5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-56
8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide Resistor....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-57

8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid......................................................................................................................................................... 8-57

8.8.12.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-57
8.8.12.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-57

Contents

8.8.12.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-58

8.8.12.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ....................................................................................................................................................8-59
8.8.12.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-59
8.8.12.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-59
8.8.12.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid.....................................................................................................................................................8-59

8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 8-60

8.8.13.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-60
8.8.13.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-60
8.8.13.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-61
8.8.13.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ....................................................................................................................................................8-61
8.8.13.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-61
8.8.13.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-62
8.8.13.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB .........................................................................................................................................8-62

8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly............................................................................................................................................................ 8-62

8.8.14.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-62
8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-63
8.8.14.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-63
8.8.14.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................................8-64
8.8.14.5 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly...............................................................................................................................................8-65

8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-65

8.8.15.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-65
8.8.15.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-65
8.8.15.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-66
8.8.15.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................................8-67

8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-68

8.8.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-68
8.8.16.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-68
8.8.16.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-69
8.8.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................................8-69
8.8.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller .................................................................................................................................................8-70

8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-70

8.8.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-70
8.8.17.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-71
8.8.17.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-71
8.8.17.4 Removing the Rear Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-72
8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch .............................................................................................................................................................8-72
8.8.17.6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ................................................................................................................................................8-73

8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-73

8.8.18.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-73
8.8.18.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-73
8.8.18.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-74
8.8.18.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................................8-75
8.8.18.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller .................................................................................................................................................8-75
8.8.18.6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad ...............................................................................................................................................8-76

8.8.19 Registration Clutch .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-76

8.8.19.1 Removing the Rear Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-76
8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly..........................................................................................................................................................8-76
8.8.19.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly..........................................................................................................................................................8-77
8.8.19.4 Removing the Registration Clutch ..............................................................................................................................................................8-77

8.8.20 Feeding Roller.......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-77

8.8.20.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ......................................................................................................................8-77

8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller.................................................................................................................................................................. 8-78

8.8.21.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)................................................................................................................................................................8-78
8.8.21.2 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-78
8.8.21.3 Removing the Right Door ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-79
8.8.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ....................................................................................................................................................8-79
8.8.21.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-79
8.8.21.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-80
8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate.........................................................................................................................................................8-80
8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller .............................................................................................................................................................8-80

8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-81

Contents

8.8.22.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-81

8.8.22.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-81
8.8.22.3 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-82
8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-82

8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-83

8.8.23.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.8.23.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.8.23.3 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-84
8.8.23.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-85

8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-85

8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-85
8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch............................................................................................................................................................. 8-85

8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-86

8.8.25.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-86
8.8.25.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-86
8.8.25.3 Removing the Delivery Tray ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-86
8.8.25.4 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-86
8.8.25.5 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-87
8.8.25.6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit........................................................................................................................................................ 8-88
8.8.25.7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-89

8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................................ 8-89

8.8.26.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-89
8.8.26.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-89
8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-89
8.8.26.4 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-89
8.8.26.5 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-90
8.8.26.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 8-92

8.8.27 Separation Roller ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-92

8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller...................................................................................................................... 8-92

Chapter 8

8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions
0009-2977

The major specifications, controls, and functions of the pickup/feeding system are as follows:
T-8-1
Item

Description

Paper compartment

front loading

Pickup method

cassette

separation retard

manual feeder

separation pad

Paper reference

center

Paper volume

cassette 1/2

550 sheets (80 g/m2 )

manual feed tray

50 sheets (80 g/m2)

cassette 1

B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4R, B5R, LTRR, A5R.
STMTR,

cassette 2

A3, B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, LDR, A4R, B5R, LTRR,
A5R, STMTR

manual feed tray

A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, A4R, B5R, LTRR, A5R,
STMTR, EXE, postcard, envelope, free size

cassette 1/2

64 to 80 g/m2 (single-sided)

manual feed tray

64 to 128 g/m2 (if double-sided, manual feeding only; no

auto duplexing)

Paper size

Paper weight

64 to 80 g/m2 (auto double-sided)

Paper size switchover

cassette 1/2

by the user

manual feed tray

by the user

Duplexing method

through path
envelopes:
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
postcard: A6R non-default, A5R non-default, A4 non-default

Speed of process

iR2230/2830

137 mm/sec

iR3530

230mm /sec (nomal mode)

137mm /sec (low speed mode: manual feeding)

Delivery accessory

3 Way Unit-A1 (standard with iR4570/3570 model)

Inner 2-Way Tray-D1
Copy Tray-J1
Finisher-S1
Buffer Path Unit-E1
Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1

Pickup accessory

Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1

8-1

Chapter 8

8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers

0006-7402

[25] [24] [23] [22]

[21]

[20]

[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]

[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]

[9]

[1]

[2] [3]
F-8-1

[1] Pickup roller (cassette 1)

[2] Feeding roller (cassette 1)
[3] Separation roller (cassette 1)
[4] Pickup roller (cassette 2)
[5] Feeding roller (cassette 2)
[6] Separation roller (cassette 2)
[7] Vertical path roller 2
[8] Vertical path slave roller 2
[9] Vertical path roller 1
[10] Vertical path slave roller 1
[11] Manual feed pickup roller
[12] Registration roller (inside)
[13] Registration roller (outside)
[14] Duplexing/feed roller 2
[15] Duplexing/feeding member 2
[16] Transfer roller
[17] Drum
[18] Duplexing/feed roller 1
[19] Duplexing/feeding member 1
[20] Pressure roller
[21] Fixing outlet roller
[22] Fixing outlet member
[23] Fixing film
[24] Delivery roller
[25] Delivery member

8-2

[4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

Chapter 8

8.1.3 Paper Path (printer unit on its own)

0009-2978

[5]

[4]

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-2

[1] Pickup from cassette 1

[2] Pickup from cassette 2
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (optional)
[4] Pickup from manual feeder
[5] Delivery to output tray 1

8-3

Chapter 8

8.1.4 Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray)

0009-2980

[7]
[6]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-3

[1] Pickup from cassette 1

[2] Pickup from cassette 2
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option)
[4] Pickup from manual feeder
[5] Delivery to output tray 1
[6] Delivery to output tray 2 (optional)
[7] Delivery to output tray 3 (optional)

8-4

Chapter 8

8.1.5 Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray)

0009-2982

[6]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-4

[1] Pickup from cassette 1

[2] Pickup from cassette 2
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (optional)
[4] Pickup from manual feeder
[5] Delivery to Finisher-S1 (optional)
[6] Delivery to output tray 3 (optional)

8-5

Chapter 8

8.1.6 Arrangement of Sensors

0006-7408

[14]

[13]

[12]

[11]

[10]

[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-8-5

[1] Cassette 1 paper level sensor B (PS4)

[2] Cassette 1 paper level sensor A (PS3)
[3] Cassette 2 paper level sensor B (PS6)
[4] Cassette 2 paper level sensor A (PS5)
[5] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS2)
[6] Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
[7] Cassette 1 paper sensor (PS1)
[8] Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
[9] Manual feeder paper sensor (PS7)
[10] Registration sensor (PS9)
[11] Duplexing/feed sensor (PS17)
[12] Fixing/delivery paper sensor (PS13)
[14] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14)
[15] Delivery paper full sensor 1 (PS15)

8-6

[4]

[5]

Chapter 8

8.2 Basic Sequence

8.2.1 Basic Sequence
0007-2658

- Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints

Print Start
PRINT
*1

*3

*2

Cassette 1 pickup motor

(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor (M2)
Registration sensor
(PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing/delivery paper
sensor (PS13)
No.1 delivery motor
(M4)
Delivery sensor 1
(PS14)

*1
*2
*3

cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper

F-8-6

8.2.2 Acceleration Intervals

0009-2984

The machine accelerates the speed of paper movement over specific intervals.
These intervals are as shown and differ according to the presence of specific accessories:
In the Absence of an Output Accessory

[1]

F-8-7

8-7

Chapter 8
[1]Pickup acceleration interval
The machine accelerates the speed to about 1.5 times as high as its process speed.
(No acceleration occurs if the pickup is from the manual feeder. In the case of the 1s side of a sheet picked up from cassette 1, the movement will be about
twice as fast.)
In the Presence of the Finisher-S1

[2]

[1]

F-8-8

[1]Pickup acceleration interval

The machine accelerates the speed to about 1.5 times as high as its process speed.
(No acceleration occurs if the pickup is from the manual feeder. In the case of the 1st side of a sheet picked up from cassette 1, the movement will be about
twice as fast.)
[2]Reversal acceleration interval
The machine accelerates the speed to about 3.4 times as high as its process speed. (No acceleration will occur if the delivery is to tray 3.)

8-8

Chapter 8

8.3 Detecting Jams

8.3.1 Stationary Jams
8.3.1.1 Common Stationary Jam
0007-2665

The sensor N does not go off within a specific length of time after the sensor has gone on.
Start key ON
or PRINT set

INTR
L+A

PRINT
L+A

Jam Check
Normal

Sensor N

Error

(L =paper length feed distance A = specific feed length)

F-8-9
T-8-2

Sensor

Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)

Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS9)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)

8.3.1.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On

0007-2666

The machine makes a check to see that there is no paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotation at power-on:
T-8-3

Sensor
Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS9)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)

8.3.2 Other Jams

8.3.2.1 Door Open Jam
0007-2668

A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is making copies/prints.
T-8-4

Sensor
Front cover open sensor (PS22)
Right cover open sensor (PS18)

8-9

Chapter 8

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

8.4.1 Overview
0007-2121

The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface
of paper. The pickup roller is moved down when the pickup solenoid goes on.
The feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the feed path, and the paper is moved as far as the
registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller.
The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor.
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

[8]

[10]

[9]

F-8-10

[1] Cassette paper sensor

[2] Pickup roller (roller A)
[3] Feed roller (roller B)
[4] Separation roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup vertical path roller
[6] Cassette retry paper sensor
[7] Vertical path guide
[8] Lower right cover
[9] Holding plate
[10] Lifter plate

8.4.2 Basic Sequence

0007-7947

- Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints

8-10

Chapter 8

Print Start
PRINT
*1

*3

*2

Cassette 1 pickup motor

(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor (M2)
Registration sensor
(PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing/delivery paper
sensor (PS13)
No.1 delivery motor
(M4)
Delivery sensor 1
(PS14)

*1
*2
*3

cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper

F-8-11

8.4.3 Identifying the Paper Size

0007-8700

The size of paper inside the cassette is detected by the cassette size dial, and is communicated to the cassette size detection PCB.
As may as 15 positions may be detected with reference to the combinations of on and off states of the array of 4 actuators mounted to the cassette size
detection PCB on the printer side and operating in conjunction with the cassette size dial.
In the absence of a cassette, all 4 actuators are off, causing the machine to assume there is no cassette.
AB/Inch Switch
The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations; the cassette size detecting switch will detect the
configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine.

[2]
[1]

INCH

SW3
SW2
SW1
SW0
SW4

SW4-ON=INCH
F-8-12

[1] AB/Inch switch

[2] Cassette size dial
[3] Cassette size detection PCB
T-8-5

AB-configuration
Size

SW0

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

8-11

Chapter 8

AB-configuration
(no cassette)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A5R

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

A4

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

A4R

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

A3

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

B5

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

B5R

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

B4

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

U1

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

U2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Envelope

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON/OFF

SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in
the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the
control panel; when the cassette in question is selected, the machine will indicate a
message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.

T-8-6

Inch-configuration

Size
(no cassette)
STMTR
LTR
LTRR
LGL
11X17
EXEC
U3
U4
Envelope

SW0
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

SW1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

SW2
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

SW3
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

SW4
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON/OFF

SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in
the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the
control panel; when the cassette in question is selected, the machine will indicate a
message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.

8.4.4 Setting Up the Universal Cassette

0007-8701

The following are default sizes the machine will assume when U1 through U4 are detected:
T-8-7

U1
U2
U3
U4

8-12

G-LTR
FLSC
G-LGL
A-LTR

Chapter 8
The following is a list of sizes that may be assigned in addition to default sizes in service mode:
T-8-8

Universal U1 Through U4
Size
FLSC
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-OFI
M-OFI
FOLI
A-FLS
G-LTR
G-LGL
A-LTR (LTR)
A-LTRR (LTRR)

8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor

0007-8702

The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors:
T-8-9

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Paper level sensor A

PS3

PS5

Paper level sensor B

PS4

PS6

Paper sensor

PS1

PS2

8-13

Chapter 8

[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

[8]

F-8-13

[1] Flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor
[3] Lifter clutch
[4] Cassette paper level sensor A
[5] Cassette paper level sensor B
[6] Paper level sensor flag
[7] Lifter gear
[8] Tray

8-14

Chapter 8

View from the Front

of the Machine
When full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B

Paper

OFF OFF
When half full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B

Paper

OFF ON
When there is little paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B

Paper

Cassette paper
level sensor A

ON ON

Cassette paper sensor

Flag
Paper tray

When there is no paper

F-8-14

T-8-10

Paper level
sensor A

Paper level
sensor B

Paper sensor

Paper level

OFF

OFF

OFF

100% to 50% of capacity

ON

OFF

OFF

50% to 50 sheets (approx.)

ON

ON

OFF

50 sheets or less (approx.)

---

---

ON

No paper

Control panel
indication

8-15

Chapter 8

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

8.5.1 Overview
0007-2123

The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup guide plate; the manual feed
pickup roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine:
(1) the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times, and does not require drive for pickup operation.
(2) multi-pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M2) through the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1).
[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[10]

[7]

[5]

[8]

[6]
F-8-15

[1] Upper guide

[2] Stopper plate
[3] Side guide
[4] Manual feed pickup tray
[5] Pressure spring
[6] Holding plate
[7] Manual feed paper sensor flag
[8] Separation pad
[9] Manual feed pickup roller
[10] (to registration roller assembly)
REF
The machine's manual feed pickup unit is not equipped with a sensor that may detect the last sheet of paper.

8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation

0007-2124

The multi-pickup roller starts to rotate when the manual pickup clutch (CL1) goes on to start upper separation to pick up a single sheet of paper. When the
leading edge of the sheet reaches the registration sensor (PS26) and is moved a specific distance, the manual pickup clutch goes off, causing the sheet to
arch in the registration roller area.
When the registration clutch (CL2) goes on, the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) once again goes on to pick up paper. The manual feed pickup clutch
(CL1) goes off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the manual feed pickup roller; thereafter, the registration roller serves to pull off
the paper.
Print start
PRINT

LSTR

Manual feed pickup

clutch ( L1)
Registration
clutch ( L2)
Registration
sensor (PS26)

F-8-16

8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size

0007-2187

The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1), which operates in conjunction with the movement of the side
guide.
The side guide in the manual feed tray is set when the user moves it to place paper in the cassette.

8-16

Chapter 8

[2]
[1]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-8-17

[1] Side guide (rear)

[2] Stop arm
[3] Center gear
[4] Side guide (front)
[5] Variable resistor (SVR1)
[6] Manual feed tray

8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism

0007-2189

The holding plate of the machine's cassette is fixed in position at all times, and does not move up/down at time of pickup, and must temporarily be released
when paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller. It is linked to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide; to prevent the
user from placing paper without opening the upper guide, the guide is equipped with a stopper plate.
1. When the upper guide is closed,
the holding plate is locked in place,
and the stopper plate prevents the user from placing paper.

F-8-18

2. When the upper guide is open,

the holding plate is freed,
and the stopper plate opens, permitting the user to place paper.

8-17

Chapter 8

F-8-19

3. When the upper guide is closed once again,

the holding plate becomes locked in position once again.

F-8-20

8-18

Chapter 8

8.6 Registration Unit

8.6.1 Overview
0007-2213

The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M2).

In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (SL2), servicing to turn on and off the registration roller so that the paper
will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.

J314

J313

DC controller PCB

M2

CL2
F-8-21

8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration

0007-2214

The machine does not have a mechanism to check horizontal registration for both 1st and 2nd sides of a print. The point of horizontal registration for the
2nd side may be adjusted in service mode (i.e., the image write start position).
The degree of arching for registration on the 2nd side of a double-sided print must be adjusted separately from the adjustment for the 1st side to accommodate the fact that different feed paths are used up to the registration roller for 1st and 2nd sides.
Service Mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the 2nd side of small-size double-sided prints.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the 2nd side of large-size double-sided prints.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>LOOPREFE
Use it to adjust the degree of arching for the 2nd side of double-sided prints.
Reference:
small-size: A4, B5, and the like, whose side in paper feed direction is shorter than that of LTR.
Large-size: A3, A4R, B5R, and the like, whose side in feed direction is longer than that of LTR.
The term "2nd side of a double-sided print" as used in relation to the machine's service mode refers to the side that receives an image second in order; in
other words, it corresponds to the 1st side of the original.

8-19

Chapter 8

8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit

8.7.1 Overview
0007-2218

Inside the duplexing assembly are found two sets of rollers that are driven by the main motor (M2) and the duplexing clutch (CL6).
Different sets of rollers are used to turn over the sheet for duplexing depending on whether or not the machine is equipped with a delivery accessory*:
If a delivery accessory is present, the reversing rollers are used to turn over the sheet.
If no delivery accessory is present, the delivery rollers are used to turn over the sheet.
*3 Way Unit-A1
Configuration of Components If Without a Delivery Accessory
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]
[6]

F-8-22

[1] Delivery roller

[2] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14)
[3] Reversing flapper
[4] Duplexing feeding roller 1
[5] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
[6] Duplexing feeding roller 1

8-20

Chapter 8
Configuration of the Components If With a Delivery Accessory
[1]

[2]

[3]
[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

F-8-23

[1] Reversing roller

[2] Reversal sensor (PS4A)
[3] Duplexing inlet sensor (PS3A)
[4] Duplexing inlet roller
[5] Duplexing feeding roller 1
[6] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
[7] Duplexing feeding roller 2

8.7.2 Sequence of Image Formation

0007-2223

The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double-sided copies/prints:

8-21

Chapter 8
- Configuration Without an Accessory Installed
A4/LTR
4 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

4-1

A4/LTR
5 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

5-1

A4/LTR
6 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

6-2

A3/LDR
3 sheets

1-2

1-1

2-2

2-1

3-2

5-1

6-1

3-1

1-1

1-2
F-8-24

- Configuration with an Accessory Installed

A4/LTR
4 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

4-1

A4/LTR
5 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

5-1

A4/LTR
6 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

6-2

A3/LDR
3 sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

5-1

6-1

3-1

1-1

1-2
F-8-25

However, in the case of delivery to tray 3 (outside), the machine uses single-sheet circulation.
5 sheets

1-2

1-1

2-2

2-1

3-2

3-1

4-2

4-1

1-1

indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet

1-2

indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet

5-2

5-1

F-8-26

8.7.3 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)

0007-3125

A4/LTR, 5 Sheets

8-22

Chapter 8
A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side.

F-8-27

The 1st sheet is picked up.

F-8-28

An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

1
2

F-8-29

The 1st sheet is turned over and moved to duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.

8-23

Chapter 8

1
3

F-8-30

The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

1
1
3
2

F-8-31

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.

F-8-32

The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th
sheet is picked up.

8-24

Chapter 8

1
2
2
4
3

F-8-33

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.

2
1

3
5

F-8-34

The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again. The 5th
sheet is picked up.

2
1
3
3
5

F-8-35

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing.

8-25

Chapter 8

3
2

F-8-36

The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again.

3
2

1
4
4

F-8-37

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

4
3

F-8-38

The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.

8-26

Chapter 8

4
3

5
5

F-8-39

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.

5
4

F-8-40

The 5th sheet is delivered.

8.7.4 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option)

0007-3126

A4/LTR, 5 Sheets, Delivery to Tray 1/2

A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side.

F-8-41

The 1st sheet is picked up.

8-27

Chapter 8

F-8-42

An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

F-8-43

The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.

1
3

F-8-44

The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

8-28

Chapter 8

1
1
3
2

F-8-45

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.

2
4

F-8-46

The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The
4th sheet is picked up.

1
2
2
4
3

F-8-47

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.

8-29

Chapter 8

3
5

F-8-48

The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again. The
5th sheet is picked up.

2 1
3
3
5
4

F-8-49

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

3
2 1

F-8-50

The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again.

8-30

Chapter 8

2 1

5
4
4

F-8-51

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

4
3

2 1

F-8-52

The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.

2 1

5
5

F-8-53

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.

8-31

Chapter 8

5
4

2 1

F-8-54

The 5th sheet is delivered.

8-32

Chapter 8

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedure

8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1
8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6551

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-58

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

F-8-59

[1]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-55

8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6552

1) Open the right door.

F-8-60

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-8-56

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-57

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-33

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-61

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-64

8.8.1.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7329

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6553

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-62

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]
F-8-65

8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6554

F-8-63

Attaching the Right Door

8-34

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

Chapter 8
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

[2]

F-8-66

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

[1]

[4]

[3]
F-8-69

8.8.2.3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6557

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

F-8-67

8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2

8.8.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6555

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-70

8.8.3 Pickup Roller

8.8.3.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/
Separation Roller
[3]

0007-6569

1) Slide out the cassette.

2) Open the right door (in the case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of the individual rollers, and detach the pickup roller [1],
feed roller [2], and separation roller [3].

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-68

8.8.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6556

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)

F-8-71

8-35

Chapter 8
from the right door.
Point to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller 1
The collar (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black.

8.8.4 Sensor Mount

8.8.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6558

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-75

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-76

[2]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

[1]
F-8-72

8.8.4.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6563

1) Open the right door.

F-8-77

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-8-73

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-74

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]

8-36

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-78

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-81

8.8.4.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7331

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.4.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6562

1) Open the right door [1] of the pedestal (if a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is
installed).
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the right cover (lower front) [3].

F-8-79

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

[2]
[3]

[1]

F-8-82

8.8.4.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6564

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].
F-8-80

Attaching the Right Door

8-37

Chapter 8

F-8-83

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-86

Pickup Unit 1

F-8-84
F-8-87

8.8.4.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6565

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then, detach the sensor base
[5].

F-8-85

8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate

0007-6567

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear
of the pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].

F-8-88

8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate

0007-6568

Take care not to orient the pickup unit facing down when mounting the
sensor base; otherwise, the gears will fall out.
1) After fitting the bushing [1] to the frame, mount the gear shaft [2].

8-38

Chapter 8

8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1

8.8.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6571

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

[3]

F-8-89

2) Fit the 6 points [A] indicated in the figure in the holes of the base;
then, mount the sensor base [2] using 4 screws [1].

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[1]

F-8-90

[2]

3) Mount the gear [1] and the E-ring [2].

Be sure not to leave out the pickup solenoid [1]. When mounting it, be
sure that the stop [2] is fully engaged with the cam gear [3].

F-8-92

8.8.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

0007-6988

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

[3]
[3]
F-8-91

[4]

Try turning the gears to be sure that they turn without resistance.

[2]

[1]
F-8-93

8-39

Chapter 8

8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base

0007-6983

1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].

F-8-94

2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord base [2].

F-8-98

8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2

8.8.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6598

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.
F-8-95

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-8-96

[1]

4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup motor base [2].

[1]

[2]

F-8-99

8.8.6.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

0007-6599

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-97

8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1

0007-6578

1) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the cassette pickup motor 1 [2].

8-40

Chapter 8

[3]

[3]

F-8-103

[3]

4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup motor base [2].

[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-100

8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base

0007-6990

1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].

F-8-104

8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2

0007-6601

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cassette pickup motor 2 [2].

F-8-101

2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord base [2].

F-8-105
F-8-102

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor

8.8.7.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6602

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

8-41

Chapter 8

[3]

F-8-109

[3]

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-106

8.8.7.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6603

1) Open the right door.

F-8-110

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-107

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].
F-8-111

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-108

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-42

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-112

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-115

8.8.7.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7332

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.7.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6606

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-113

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]
F-8-116

8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6608

F-8-114

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

Attaching the Right Door

8-43

Chapter 8

F-8-117
F-8-120

8.8.7.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6609

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

2) Disconnect the connector from the cassette size sensor relay PCB (in
the case of the size sensor 1, disconnect the connector [1]; in the case
of the size sensor 2, disconnect the connector [2]).
3) Free the harness from the clamp (in the case of the size sensor 1, the
2 clamps [3]; in the case of the size sensor 2, the 4 clamps [3] and
[4]).

F-8-118

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].
F-8-121

4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cassette size sensor together
with the PCB [2] (in the case of the size sensor 1, together with the
size sensor 2; in the case of the size sensor 2, remove the sensor on
its own).

F-8-119

8.8.7.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor

0007-6610

1) Remove the snap stop, and detach the PCB cover [1].

F-8-122

5) Detach the cover [1] from the PCB.

8-44

Chapter 8

F-8-126

F-8-123

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

6) Detach the size sensor [1] from the PCB.

F-8-127

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-124

8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

8.8.8.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6611

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-128

[3]

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-129

F-8-125

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6612

1) Open the right door.

8-45

Chapter 8
door.

F-8-130

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-133

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-131

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.8.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7337

1) Open the right door.

F-8-134

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.8.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6613

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-132

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-46

Chapter 8

[2]
F-8-138

8.8.8.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate

[1]

0008-1508

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear
of the pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].
[4]

[3]
F-8-135

8.8.8.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6614

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect that 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2
wire saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

F-8-139

Pickup Unit 1

F-8-136

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-140

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then, detach the sensor base
[5].
F-8-137

8.8.8.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6615

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

8-47

Chapter 8

8.8.9.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6658

1) Open the right door.

F-8-144

F-8-141

8.8.8.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

0007-6617

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the cassette retry paper
sensor [2].

F-8-145

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.
F-8-142

8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor

8.8.9.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6618

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-146

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

F-8-147

[1]
F-8-143

8-48

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

Chapter 8
door.

F-8-148

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-151

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-149

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.9.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7339

1) Open the right door.

F-8-152

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.9.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6620

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-150

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-49

Chapter 8

[2]
F-8-156

8.8.9.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate

[1]

0007-6625

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear
of the pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].
[4]

[3]
F-8-153

8.8.9.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6623

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

F-8-157

Pickup Unit 1

F-8-154

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-158

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then, detach the sensor base
[5].
F-8-155

8.8.9.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6624

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

8-50

Chapter 8

8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6656

1) Open the right door.

F-8-162

F-8-159

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

8.8.9.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor

0007-6626

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the cassette paper sensor
[2].

F-8-163

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.
F-8-160

8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)

8.8.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6627

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-164

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

F-8-165

[1]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-161

8-51

Chapter 8
door.

F-8-166

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-169

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-167

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.10.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7340

1) Open the right door.

F-8-170

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6632

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-168

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-52

Chapter 8

[2]
F-8-174

8.8.10.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate

[1]

0007-6637

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear
of the pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].
[4]

[3]
F-8-171

8.8.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6634

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

F-8-175

Pickup Unit 1

F-8-172

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-176

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then, detach the sensor base
[5].
F-8-173

8.8.10.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6635

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

8-53

Chapter 8

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-177

[2]

8.8.10.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/

B)
0007-6639

1) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and detach the cassette
power level sensor (A/B) [2].

[1]
F-8-179

8.8.11.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6657

1) Open the right door.

F-8-180

F-8-178

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

8.8.11 Slide Resistor

8.8.11.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6641

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-181

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-54

Chapter 8

F-8-182

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

F-8-185

F-8-183

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.11.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7343

1) Open the right door.

F-8-184

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-186

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-187

Attaching the Right Door

8-55

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

[1]

[2]
F-8-190

3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

F-8-188

[1]

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit

F-8-191

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual feed unit [3].

0007-6644

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss
[3]).
[1]

[2]

F-8-192

[3]
F-8-189

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed guide [1].

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-8-193

8.8.11.5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit

0007-6648

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

8-56

Chapter 8
2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].

[1]

[2]
F-8-197

F-8-194

8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid

3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].

8.8.12.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

0007-6652

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

[3]

F-8-195

8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide Resistor

0007-6651

1) Remove 2 screws [1], and detach the manual feed tray upper cover
[2].
[3]

If possible, mark the position of the point of horizontal registration before removal.

[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-198

8.8.12.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6654

1) Open the right door.

F-8-196

2) Remove the slide resistor [1] (connector [2]).

F-8-199

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

8-57

Chapter 8

F-8-200

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-204

F-8-201

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.12.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7344

1) Open the right door.

F-8-202

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.
F-8-205

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-203

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-8-206

Attaching the Right Door

8-58

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-209

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-207

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.12.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

F-8-210
0007-6659

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

8.8.12.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6662

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

[2]
F-8-211

[1]

8.8.12.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid

0007-6664

[4]

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach
the cassette pickup solenoid [3].

[3]
F-8-208

8.8.12.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6661

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

8-59

Chapter 8

F-8-215

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-212

8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB

8.8.13.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6667

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-216

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]

F-8-217

F-8-213

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

8.8.13.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6668

1) Open the right door.

F-8-218

F-8-214

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

8-60

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-219

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-222

8.8.13.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7347

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.13.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6669

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-220

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]
F-8-223

8.8.13.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6670

F-8-221

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

Attaching the Right Door

8-61

Chapter 8

F-8-224

F-8-227

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

2) Remove the cassette size sensor relay PCB [2] (3 connectors [2], 2
clamps [3]).

F-8-225

8.8.13.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

F-8-228
0007-6671

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly

8.8.14.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6697

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

F-8-226

8.8.13.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB

0007-6672

[3]

1) Remove the PCB cover [1] (snap-on).

[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-229

8-62

Chapter 8

8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6698

1) Open the right door.

F-8-234

F-8-230

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-231

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-235

F-8-232

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.14.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7348

1) Open the right door.

F-8-233

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-236

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-63

Chapter 8
door.
[1]

[2]

[3]
F-8-237

F-8-239

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed guide [1].

[1]

[2]
F-8-240

3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

F-8-238

[1]

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-241

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual feed unit [3].

8.8.14.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit

0007-6699

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss
[3]).

F-8-242

8-64

Chapter 8

[3]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

F-8-243

[3]

8.8.14.5 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly

[4]

0007-6703

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].

[2]

[1]
F-8-246

8.8.15.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6707

1) Open the right door.

F-8-244

3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].

F-8-247

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-245

8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit

8.8.15.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

F-8-248
0007-6705

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-65

Chapter 8

F-8-249

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

F-8-252

F-8-250

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.15.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7352

1) Open the right door.

F-8-251

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-253

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-254

Attaching the Right Door

8-66

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

[1]

[2]
F-8-257

3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

F-8-255

[1]

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.15.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit

F-8-258

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual feed unit [3].

0008-1017

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss
[3]).
[1]

[2]

F-8-259

[3]
F-8-256

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed guide [1].

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-8-260

8-67

Chapter 8

8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller

8.8.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6709

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-264

[3]

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-265

F-8-261

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

8.8.16.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6710

1) Open the right door.

F-8-266

F-8-262

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-263

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-68

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-267

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-270

8.8.16.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7354

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit

0007-6994

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss
[3]).
[1]

[2]

F-8-268

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.
[3]
F-8-271

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed guide [1].

F-8-269

Attaching the Right Door

8-69

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]
F-8-272

F-8-276

3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the manual feed pickup roller [3]
together with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and detach the manual feed pickup
roller from shaft. Take care not to drop the parallel pin.

[1]
F-8-273

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-8-277

8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch

8.8.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6675

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-274

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]

[2]

[3]

[2]

F-8-275

8.8.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

0007-6713

1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1] (snap-on).

8-70

[1]
F-8-278

Chapter 8

8.8.17.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6676

1) Open the right door.

F-8-283

F-8-279

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-280

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-284

F-8-281

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.17.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7355

1) Open the right door.

F-8-282

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-285

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-71

Chapter 8
door.
[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
F-8-286

[1]

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
[2]

F-8-288

8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch

0007-6679

1) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the main power switch [2].
(snap-on type)

F-8-287

F-8-289

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.17.4 Removing the Rear Cover

0007-6677

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

8-72

When connecting the 4 fastons, be sure that they are located as indicated
by their specific location numbers.

Chapter 8

[3]

[3]
[3]

F-8-290

[4]

8.8.17.6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

0007-6681

1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1].

2) Free the clutch cable [2] from the wire saddle [3].
3) Remove the fixing plate [4]. (2 screws [5])

[2]

[1]
F-8-293

8.8.18.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6715

1) Open the right door.

F-8-291

4) Pull out the manual feed pickup clutch [1].

F-8-294

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-292

8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad

8.8.18.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

F-8-295
0007-6714

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-73

Chapter 8

F-8-296

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

F-8-299

F-8-297

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.18.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7358

1) Open the right door.

F-8-298

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-300

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-301

Attaching the Right Door

8-74

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

[1]

[2]
F-8-304

3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

F-8-302

[1]

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.18.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit

F-8-305

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual feed unit [3].

0007-6716

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss
[3]).
[1]

[2]

F-8-306

[3]
F-8-303

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed guide [1].

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-8-307

8.8.18.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

0007-6717

1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1] (snap-on).

8-75

Chapter 8
also have been removed.

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

F-8-308

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the manual feed pickup roller [3]
together with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and detach the manual feed pickup
roller from shaft. Take care not to drop the parallel pin.

[1]
[1]

[2]

F-8-311

8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly

0007-6733

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire
saddle.
F-8-309

8.8.18.6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad

0007-6719

1) Remove the holding plate [5].

2) Remove the separation pad [6].

F-8-312

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].

F-8-310

8.8.19 Registration Clutch

8.8.19.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6720

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should

8-76

Chapter 8

F-8-313

F-8-315

Do not touch the screws that are glued in place.

8.8.19.4 Removing the Registration Clutch

8.8.19.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly

1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1], and free the cable from the edge
saddle [2] and the 3 wire saddles [3].
2) Remove the E-ring [4], and detach the registration clutch [5].

0007-6723

0007-7530

1) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1].

2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2].
3) Remove the re-use band [3].

F-8-316

8.8.20 Feeding Roller

8.8.20.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/
Separation Roller
0008-3154
F-8-314

4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].

1) Slide out the cassette.

2) Open the right door (in the case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of the individual rollers, and detach the pickup roller [1],
feed roller [2], and separation roller [3].

8-77

Chapter 8
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-320

F-8-317

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.
Point to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller 1
The collar (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black.

8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller

8.8.21.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6736

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-321

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

F-8-322

[1]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-318

8.8.21.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6737

1) Open the right door.

F-8-323

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-8-319

8-78

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-324

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-8-327

8.8.21.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7359

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)

0007-6739

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the right cover (lower front) [4].

F-8-325

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]
F-8-328

8.8.21.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1

0007-6740

F-8-326

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire
saddles [2] and the 2 clamps [3].

Attaching the Right Door

8-79

Chapter 8

F-8-329

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2].

F-8-332

Pickup Unit 1

F-8-330
F-8-333

8.8.21.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2

0007-6741

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the guide;
then, remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then, detach the sensor base
[5].

F-8-331

8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate

0007-6742

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear
of the pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].

F-8-334

8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller

0007-6743

1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear; then, detach the gear and
the bushing [2].

8-80

Chapter 8

8.8.22.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6746

1) Open the right door.

F-8-335

2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front; then, shift it to the
rear, and lift the vertical path roller [2] to detach.

F-8-338

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-339

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.
F-8-336

8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2

8.8.22.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6744

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-8-340

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-341

[2]

[1]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-337

8-81

Chapter 8
door.

F-8-342

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-345

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-343

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.22.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7362

1) Open the right door.

F-8-346

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2

0007-6748

1) Free the coil spring [1] and, at the same time, remove the E-ring [2]
to pull out the shaft [3]; then, detach the duplex feed frame [4].

F-8-344

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-82

Chapter 8

[3]

[3]
[3]

F-8-347

[4]

2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the one-way gear [2].
[2]

[1]
F-8-350

8.8.23.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6751

1) Open the right door.

F-8-348

3) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex feed roller 2 [2].

F-8-351

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-349

8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor

8.8.23.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-6750

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

F-8-352

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

8-83

Chapter 8

F-8-353

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

F-8-356

F-8-354

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.23.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7366

1) Open the right door.

F-8-355

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-357

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-358

Attaching the Right Door

8-84

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-361

8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch

8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-7324

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

F-8-359

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

[3]

[1]

[1]

8.8.23.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor

0007-6976

[1]

[1]

1) Remove the 2 screws (w/ collar) [1], and detach the transfer frame [2].

[1]
[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[1]

[2]

F-8-360

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the duplex feed sensor [2].
F-8-362

8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch

0007-7325

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then,
detach the clutch fixing plate [3].

8-85

Chapter 8

F-8-363

F-8-366

2) Remove the duplex feed clutch [1].

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-8-364

8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1

F-8-367

8.8.25.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

8.8.25.3 Removing the Delivery Tray

0008-1512

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

0007-6765

1) Loosen the screw [1].

2) Remove the screw [2].
3) Detach the delivery tray [3].

[3]

[3]
F-8-368

[3]

8.8.25.4 Removing the Right Door

[4]

0007-6766

[2]

1) Open the right door.

[1]
F-8-365

8.8.25.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit

0007-6763

1) Open the front cover [1].

8-86

Chapter 8

F-8-373
F-8-369

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-370

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-374
F-8-371

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.25.5 Removing the Right Door

0007-7363

1) Open the right door.

F-8-372

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-8-375

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

8-87

Chapter 8
door.

F-8-378
F-8-376

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

2) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [3], and detach the 2 re-use
bands.
3) Disconnect the connector [1] from the machine terminal.

F-8-379

4) Open the Extension Delivery Kit [1].

5) Remove the 2 screws [3].
6) Remove the 2 screws [2], and close the Extension Delivery Kit.

F-8-377

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.25.6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit

0007-6767

1) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the upper inside cover
[2].

F-8-380

7) Pull out the Extension Delivery Kit [1] from the machine.

F-8-381

8-88

Chapter 8

8.8.25.7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1

0007-6776

1) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3 screws [2]; 2 stepped screws

on the left)

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-8-385
F-8-382

8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray

8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly

0007-6783

1) Loosen the screw [1].

2) Remove the screw [2].
3) Detach the delivery tray [3].

8.8.26.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

0008-1513

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

F-8-386

8.8.26.4 Removing the Right Door

[3]

0007-6785

[3]

1) Open the right door.

[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-383

8.8.26.2 Removing the Front Cover Unit

0007-6781

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-8-387

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-8-384

8-89

Chapter 8

F-8-388

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-8-392

F-8-389

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

8.8.26.5 Removing the Right Door

0007-7327

1) Open the right door.

F-8-390

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.
F-8-393

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-8-391

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-8-394

Attaching the Right Door

8-90

Chapter 8
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-8-397

2) Disconcert the 3 connectors [1].

F-8-395
F-8-398

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

3) Remove the 4 screws [1].

8.8.26.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1

0007-6787

1) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3 screws [2]; 2 stepped screws

on the left)

F-8-399

4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front.

F-8-396

8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing Unit

0007-8721

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-8-400

When mounting the harness cover [1], be sure to keep the harness [2]
within the space [3] indicated in the figure so that the harness [2] will
not come into contact with the gear [4].

8-91

Chapter 8
2) Disconnect the connector [1] of the harness, and free the harness from
the cable clamp [2].

F-8-404

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/delivery drive

assembly 1 [2].

F-8-401

Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly.

F-8-405

8.8.27 Separation Roller

8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/
Separation Roller
0008-3155

1) Slide out the cassette.

2) Open the right door (in the case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of the individual rollers, and detach the pickup roller [1],
feed roller [2], and separation roller [3].

F-8-402

8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly

0007-6792

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-8-406

Point to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller 1

The collar (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black.

F-8-403

8-92

Chapter 9 Fixing System

Contents

Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................9-2

9.2.1 Power-On Sequence..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.2 Down Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................9-3

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film .................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature ...........................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed..................................................................................................................................................................9-3

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature.................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature...................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature ............................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up ......................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control ........................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature.............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy............................................................................................................9-4
9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size ...........................................................................................................................9-4

9.3.3 Cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................................................................9-4

9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper .......................................................................................................................................................................9-5

9.4 Protective Functions.......................................................................................................................................................9-6

9.4.1 Protective Functions..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.2 Detecting an Error........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-6

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure.........................................................................................................................................9-8

9.5.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.5.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)....................................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.1.2 Removing the Right Door ...............................................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.1.3 Removing the Right Door ...............................................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.5.1.4 Removing the Fixing Unit...............................................................................................................................................................................9-9

9.5.2 Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10

9.5.2.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)..............................................................................................................................................9-10
9.5.2.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ............................................................................................................................................9-12
9.5.2.3 Removing the Grounding Plate .....................................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.5.2.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover .................................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2.5 Removing the Left Side Plate .......................................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2.6 Releasing the Locking Plate..........................................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.5.2.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................9-15
9.5.2.8 Removing the Inlet Guide .............................................................................................................................................................................9-15
9.5.2.9 Removing the Pressure Roller.......................................................................................................................................................................9-16

9.5.3 Cleaning Roller .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16

9.5.3.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)..............................................................................................................................................9-16
9.5.3.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ............................................................................................................................................9-18
9.5.3.3 Removing the Cleaning Roller......................................................................................................................................................................9-18

9.5.4 Fixing Film................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-19

9.5.4.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)..............................................................................................................................................9-19
9.5.4.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new) ............................................................................................................................................9-21
9.5.4.3 Removing the Grounding Plate .....................................................................................................................................................................9-21
9.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover .................................................................................................................................................................9-21
9.5.4.5 Removing the Left Side Plate .......................................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.5.4.6 Releasing the Locking Plate..........................................................................................................................................................................9-23
9.5.4.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................9-23

Contents

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-24

9.5.5.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ............................................................................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.5.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)............................................................................................................................................ 9-26
9.5.5.3 Removing the Grounding Plate..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.5.5 Removing the Left Side Plate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.5.6 Releasing the Locking Plate ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.5.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.5.8 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-29

9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-29

9.5.6.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old) ............................................................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.6.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)............................................................................................................................................ 9-31
9.5.6.3 Removing the Grounding Plate..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-31
9.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-32

Chapter 9

9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0006-6002

The machine's fixing system has the following major functions:

T-9-1

Item

Description

Fixing method

by fixing film + pressure roller

Fixing heater

plate-type heater

Control temperature

180 deg C (at PSTBY)

Fixing drive control

by control of fixing film speed

Fixing temperature
detection

by main thermistor

Protective mechanism

by sub thermistor

Cleaning method

by cleaning roller

9.1.2 Major Components

0006-6003

The machine's fixing system has the following major components:

[6]

[7]

[8]

[2]
[3]
[5]

[4]
[1]

F-9-1

[1] Fixing heater

[2] Fixing film unit
[3] Pressure roller
[4] Power supply brush
[5] Film sensor
[6] Delivery roller
[7] Fixing inside delivery sensor flag
[8] Cleaning roller

9-1

Chapter 9

9.2 Basic Sequence

9.2.1 Power-On Sequence
0006-6005

If the thermistor detection temperature is less than 100 deg C when the power is turned on or the sleep mode is released, the control described below is
performed.
1. Increases the speed of the fixing motor in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).
2. Performs the start-up current control.
3. Performs the temperature control at 200 deg C for 10 sec.
4. Stops the fixing motor. When the fixing motor is stopped, the fixing temperature control is also stopped, and the machine enters the stand-by mode.
When the print preparation request is received during wait time, the control described below is performed.
1. Increases the speed of the fixing motor in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).
2. Performs the start-up current control.
3. Starts measuring the time passed after the machine reaches the target temperature T deg C.
Target temperature T deg C = 200 deg C (iR3570/iR4570): 190 deg C (iR2270/iR2870)
4. Starts feeding in the case of printing in plain paper mode.
5. Starts feeding when 5 sec have passed after the machine reached the target temperature in the case of printing in special paper mode.

9.2.2 Down Sequence

0006-6007

Down sequence is to prevent the machine from operating when the temperature of the end portion of the fixing film exceeds a specific temperature as when
using small-size paper continuously. The details of the control are described below:
1. The sub thermistor detection temperature is 275 deg C or more.
2. Reduces the number of sheets passed by increasing the paper interval.
3. Returns the number of sheets to the normal when the sub thermistor detection temperature is 265 deg C or less.

9-2

Chapter 9

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature
0006-6037

As in the morning, driving the fixing film in a low-temperature environment without warm-up could cause the film to become displaced. In consideration
of this fact, the fixing motor is started up in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).

9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed

0007-5124

The rotation cycle of the fixing film is monitored to control the fixing motor to a specific speed.
When the fixing film rotates and, as a result, the reflecting member positioned in the loop of the film approaches the speed sensor, the machine detects the
rotation of the fixing film.
[1]

[2]
[3]

[A]

[4]

[B]

Off
On

[C]
F-9-2

[1]Speed sensor
[2]Reflecting member
[3]Fixing film (driven by fixing motor)
[4]Pressure roller
[A]Paper feed direction
[B]Speed sensor output
[C]1 rotation of fixing film
Timing of Control
The speed of fixing film rotation is monitored at all times after the fixing motor goes on and its speed reaches a specific value. The speed of the fixing
motor is then controlled so that it remains at a specific level at all times.

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature

9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature
0007-5125

In a low temperature environment, the heater is supplied with power before the fixing film is driven so as to soften the grease applied to the fixing film.
The mechanism of control is as follows:
If the temperature of the fixing film detected by the thermistor is lower than a specific level, the heater is supplied with power for a specific period of time
before a normal start-up mechanism is initiated.
If the temperature of the fixing film detected by the thermistor is higher than a specific level, the normal start-up mechanism is imitated.

9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature

0007-5401

In a low temperature environment, the feeding timing is changed according to the temperature detected by the environment sensor so as to enhance the
fixing capability. The details are described below.
When the environment sensor detection temperature is 13 deg C or less, the feeding timing is delayed by 5000 msec.
In thick paper mode, the feeding timing is not changed even if the environment sensor detection temperature is 13 deg C or less.

9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up

0006-6583

When the thermistor detection temperature is 180 deg C or less, the power control to compensate for the heater, (varying according to input voltage and a
heater resistor value) is performed so as to raise the temperature of the fixing unit to the required temperature for fixing in a short time.
1. starts 65% power supply.
2. uses thermistor reading = T1 (deg C) occurring 400 msec after the start of 65% power supply.
3)uses thermistor reading = T2 (deg C) occurring 500 msec after the start of 65% power supply.
4. computes the difference between T2 and T1, refers to a power supply ratio table to compute a power supply ratio X (%), and uses the result.
5. uses the thermistor reading = T3 (deg C) occurring 200 msec after the start of X (%) power supply.
6. uses the thermistor reading = T4 (deg C) occurring 300 msec after the start of the X (%) power supply.
7. computes the difference between T4 and T2, refers to a power supply ratio table, computes a power supply ratio Y (%), and uses the result.

9-3

Chapter 9
8. repeats step 5 through 7 until the start-up control target temperature is reached.
9. when the start-up control temperature is reached, shifts to copying temperature control.

A
180

85

400ms

200ms

500ms

300ms

F-9-3

A: start-up control
B: copying temperature control
C: 65 (%) power supply
D: X (%) power supply
E: Y (%) power supply

9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control

0006-6584

The machine uses this mechanism to control the temperature of the fixing heater to an optimum level while a recording medium is passing through the
fixing film assembly; specifically,
1.the machine varies the power ratio in relation to the difference between the temperature detected by the thermistor and the target control temperature.
2.if the temperature detected by the thermistor is higher than the target control temperature for a specific period of time (0.6 sec), the machine will decrease
the power ratio; if lower, it will increase the power rate.

9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature

0007-5452

When a fixing failure occurs or creases appear, the fixing film control temperature can be changed in the service mode as shown below.
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TEMP-CON (to switch the fixing temperature mode for heavy paper)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TEMPCON2 (to switch the fixing temperature mode)
0: OFF (default), 1: -10 deg C, 2: -6 deg C, 3: -3 deg C, 4: +3 deg C, 5: +6 deg C, 6: +10 deg C, 7: 15 deg C

9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy

0007-5453

The second side of an automatic double-sided copy requires lower control temperature in comparison with the first side. For this reason, the control temperature is lowered for the second side of an automatic double-sided copy so as to prevent adverse effects such as rises in temperature.

9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size

0007-5454

The machine has a function to switch the paper size during continuous mode such as in rotation sort. When small-size paper is qenerated continuously, the
temperature of the end portion of the fixing film rises. Immediately thereafter, if large-size paper is passed, high-temperature offset might occur at the end
portion where the temperature is likely to have risen. To prevent high-temperature offset, the control temperature is changed when the paper size chanqes.

9.3.3 Cleaning
9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning
0007-5300

Purpose
In the event of a jam or when wear on the fixing film advances, the fixing film is rotated idly for collection of toner from both the film and the pressure
roller to the cleaning roller.
The timing of control is as follows:
1. If the reading of the cleaning counter has exceeded the interval (expressed in terms of the number of sheets), the machine starts cleaning with the fixing
motor rotating at 1/4 speed. The length, timing, and intervals of cleaning may be set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-CLN. Further,
the cleaning counter reading is reset at the end of cleaning.
T-9-2

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-CLN

0 (default)

9-4

Cleaning control temperature 0

225

225

225

Cleaning control time

60

60

60

Chapter 9

Cleaning intervals

0 (default)

500

200

100

If a copy or print job arrives while cleaning is under way, the machine will not pick up paper until the ongoing cleaning ends.
If last rotation is under way in response to a rise in temperature at the film edge, the machine will hold cleaning until the end of the ongoing last rotation.
2. If a jam has been removed, the machine starts cleaning at time of recovery, at 220 deg C and for 10 sec.

9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper

9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper
0006-6014

The paper passage detection configuration in the fixing unit is shown below.

PSR OUT PD
J303-2

DC controller PCB

PS13
Fixing delivery sensor
F-9-4

When a delay jam of the fixing delivery sensor (PS13) occurs, the fixing motor is stopped immediately so as to prevent paper from wrapping around the
fixing roller.
The pressure of the fixing film and the pressure roller is released when a jam occurs so that jammed paper can be taken out easily.

9-5

Chapter 9

9.4 Protective Functions

9.4.1 Protective Functions
0006-6009

As part of its protective mechanism, the machine has a thermo switch, triacs, and a relay. Protective measures according to location are described below:
1. When the thermistor is out of order
Software detects a failure, and the triac and the relay are turned off.
The thermo switch is turned off.
2. When the CPU goes out of control
The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise, and the relay is turned off.
The thermo switch is turned off.
3. When the triac short-circuits
Software detects failure, and the relay is turned off.
The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise, and the relay is turned off.
The thermo switch is turned off.
Protective Circuit Block Configuration Diagram
DCON

and

CPU

and
and

A/D

and
Tr

S_TH

M_TH

AC driver

SW

F-9-5

9.4.2 Detecting an Error

0006-6013

As part of its protective mechanism, the machine checks for the following error conditions:
T-9-3

9-6

Error
code

Detail
code

Symptom

Description

E000

0000

The fixing temperature In the course of start-up control, the thermistor

fails to increase.
reading is less than 30 deg C 1 sec after the start
of power supply or is less than 70 deg C 2 sec
after the start of power supply; the machine will
identify an error condition if any of the foregoing
continues for 200 msec or more.

E001

0000

The thermistor detects

overheating.

The thermistor detects 235 deg C for 200 msec or

more continuously.

0001

A hardware circuit
detects overheating.

A hardware circuit detects overheating in

relation to the thermistor (main or sub).

0002

The sub thermistor

detects overheating.

The thermistor detects 295 deg C or more for 200

msec or more continuously.

Chapter 9

Error
code

Detail
code

Symptom

Description

E002

0000

The fixing temperature In the course of start-up control, the thermistor

fails to reach a specific detects a temperature lower then 115 deg C for
200 msec continuously after it has detected 100
level.
deg C; the thermistor detects a temperature less
than 150 deg C for 200 msec or more
continuously after it has detected 140 deg C; or,
the thermistor detects a temperature lower than
165 deg C for 20 msec or more continuously 1
sec after it has detected 160 deg C.

E003

0000

The fixing temperature In the course of normal temperature control, the

thermistor detects a temperature lower than 140
has dropped to an
abnormally low level. deg C for 20 msec or more continuously.

E007

0000

The fixing film rotates

in an abnormal way.

The reading of the main thermistor is in excess of

100 deg C with the fixing motor in a locked state
and, in addition, the machine fails to detect the
marker signal for 6 sec.

E014

0000

The machine detects a

fixing motor error.

During operation, the machine detects an

overload condition continuously for 3 sec or
more.

9-7

Chapter 9

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

9.5.1 Fixing Unit
9.5.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
0007-7874

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
F-9-9

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

F-9-10

[1]

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-9-6

9.5.1.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-7879

1) Open the right door.

F-9-11

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
F-9-7

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-9-8

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

9-8

Chapter 9
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-9-12

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

F-9-15

9.5.1.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7882

1) Open the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

9.5.1.4 Removing the Fixing Unit

0007-7884

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-9-13

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-9-16

2) Disconcert the 3 connectors [1].

F-9-14

Attaching the Right Door

F-9-17

3) Remove the 4 screws [1].

9-9

Chapter 9

F-9-18

4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front.

F-9-21

9.5.2 Pressure Roller

9.5.2.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)
0007-7910

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
Old inside delivery cover unit does not have a grip ring [1] at hinge. In
this case, detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-19

When mounting the harness cover [1], be sure to keep the harness [2]
within the space [3] indicated in the figure so that the harness [2] will
not come into contact with the gear [4].

[1]
F-9-22

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-20

Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly.

F-9-23

Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit

9-10

Chapter 9
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure. Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit.

[d] [2]
[1]

[c]
[e]

[2]
[1]

F-9-24

Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery
cover unit.
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing support feeder mount
[1]. At this time, hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of
the duplexing support feeder mount.

[1]

[2]
[1]
[a]

[b]
F-9-26

3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the spring-hook area [2] of
the inside delivery cover.
[A]

[2]

F-9-25

2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder mount [2]. At this
time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into [c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the
torsion spring is outside the guide.

9-11

Chapter 9

F-9-29

9.5.2.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)

[1]

0009-9173

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
New inside delivery cover unit has a grip ring [1] at hinge. In this case,
detach the cover following the procedure below.

[2]

F-9-27

Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B.
Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery
cover unit. After attaching, make sure that the guide [1] rotates
smoothly.

[1]
F-9-30

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-28

2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and fix the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-31

9.5.2.3 Removing the Grounding Plate

0007-7911

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

9-12

Chapter 9

F-9-32

9.5.2.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover

0007-7912

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the self-tapping screw [2]; then,
detach the fixing film cover [3].
F-9-35

F-9-33

F-9-36

9.5.2.5 Removing the Left Side Plate

0007-7913

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left side plate cover [2].
F-9-34

When mounting the fixing film cover unit, be sure to check that it has
not ridden over the emboss [1] indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw.

F-9-37

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

9-13

Chapter 9

9.5.2.6 Releasing the Locking Plate

0007-7914

1) Turn the locking gear [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
locking roller.

F-9-38

3) Slide the left side plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
F-9-42

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-9-39

F-9-43

F-9-40

Do not touch the screw [1] used to keep the fixing assembly in place.
Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly,
which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of
the fixing assembly.

When mounting the left side plate, be sure that it is correctly positioned
so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged. (See the figure.)

F-9-44

3) Turn the locking plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to release it.

F-9-41

9-14

Chapter 9

F-9-49

F-9-45

5) Free the relay connector [1] of the signal cable from the connector
holder [2].

9.5.2.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

0007-7915

1) While pushing down the release lever (front) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].

F-9-50

6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the relay connector [1].

F-9-46

2) While pushing down the release lever (rear) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].

F-9-51

7) Remove the fixing film unit [1].

F-9-47

3) Remove the screw [1], and free the AC harness [2].

F-9-52

9.5.2.8 Removing the Inlet Guide

F-9-48

4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2].

0007-7916

1) Slide the inlet guide [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.

9-15

Chapter 9
ing bush.

F-9-53

9.5.2.9 Removing the Pressure Roller

0007-7918

1) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the drive gear [2].

F-9-57

The insulating bush may be of 2 different shapes: one for the iR3570/
4570 and the other for the iR2270/2870. If the machine is an iR2270/
2870, be sure to pay attention to the direction of the protrusion of the insulating bush.

F-9-54

2) Lift the front of the pressure roller [1].

F-9-55

3) Push in the bush [1] found at the rear in the direction of the arrow to
free it; then, detach the pressure roller.
F-9-58

9.5.3 Cleaning Roller

9.5.3.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)
0007-7890

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
Old inside delivery cover unit does not have a grip ring [1] at hinge. In
this case, detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-56

Be sure to pay attention to the position and the orientation of the insulat-

9-16

Chapter 9
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing support feeder mount
[1]. At this time, hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of
the duplexing support feeder mount.

[1]

[A]

[1]

[2]

F-9-59

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-62

2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder mount [2]. At this
time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into [c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the
torsion spring is outside the guide.

[d] [2]
[1]

[c]
F-9-60

[e]

Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure. Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit.

[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
[a]

[b]
F-9-61

Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery
cover unit.

F-9-63

3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the spring-hook area [2] of
the inside delivery cover.

9-17

Chapter 9

F-9-66

9.5.3.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)

[1]

0009-9172

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
New inside delivery cover unit has a grip ring [1] at hinge. In this case,
detach the cover following the procedure below.

[2]

F-9-64

Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B.
Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery
cover unit. After attaching, make sure that the guide [1] rotates
smoothly.

[1]
F-9-67

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-65

2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and fix the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-68

9.5.3.3 Removing the Cleaning Roller

0007-7891

1) Remove the 2 self-tapping screws [1], and detach the cleaning roller
together with the cleaning roller holder [2].

9-18

Chapter 9

F-9-69
F-9-72

2) Remove the cleaning roller holder [1].

Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure. Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit.

F-9-70

The foregoing steps assume that the fixing unit has already been removed from the machine. The cleaning roller may also be removed
without first removing the fixing unit from the machine in the same way.

9.5.4 Fixing Film

9.5.4.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)
0007-7898

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
Old inside delivery cover unit does not have a grip ring [1] at hinge. In
this case, detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-73

Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery
cover unit.
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing support feeder mount
[1]. At this time, hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of
the duplexing support feeder mount.

[1]

[1]
F-9-71

[A]

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

[2]

F-9-74

9-19

Chapter 9
2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder mount [2]. At this
time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into [c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the
torsion spring is outside the guide.

[d] [2]
[1]

[c]
[e]

[1]
[2]

[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
[a]

F-9-76

Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B.
Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery
cover unit. After attaching, make sure that the guide [1] rotates
smoothly.

[b]
F-9-75

3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the spring-hook area [2] of
the inside delivery cover.

F-9-77

2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and fix the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

9-20

Chapter 9

F-9-78

F-9-81

9.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover

9.5.4.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)
0009-9174

0007-7900

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the self-tapping screw [2]; then,
detach the fixing film cover [3].

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
New inside delivery cover unit has a grip ring [1] at hinge. In this case,
detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-82

[1]
F-9-79

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-83

When mounting the fixing film cover unit, be sure to check that it has
not ridden over the emboss [1] indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw.

F-9-80

9.5.4.3 Removing the Grounding Plate

0007-7899

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

9-21

Chapter 9

F-9-87

3) Slide the left side plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.

F-9-84

F-9-88

F-9-85
F-9-89

9.5.4.5 Removing the Left Side Plate

0007-7901

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left side plate cover [2].

When mounting the left side plate, be sure that it is correctly positioned
so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged. (See the figure.)

F-9-86

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-9-90

9-22

Chapter 9

9.5.4.6 Releasing the Locking Plate

0007-7902

1) Turn the locking gear [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
locking roller.

F-9-94

9.5.4.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

F-9-91

0007-7909

1) While pushing down the release lever (front) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-9-95

2) While pushing down the release lever (rear) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].
F-9-92

Do not touch the screw [1] used to keep the fixing assembly in place.
Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly,
which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of
the fixing assembly.

F-9-96

3) Remove the screw [1], and free the AC harness [2].

F-9-93

3) Turn the locking plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to release it.

F-9-97

4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2].

9-23

Chapter 9

F-9-98

5) Free the relay connector [1] of the signal cable from the connector
holder [2].

[1]
F-9-102

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-99

6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the relay connector [1].

F-9-103

Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure. Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit.
F-9-100

7) Remove the fixing film unit [1].

F-9-101

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor

9.5.5.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)
0007-7923

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
Old inside delivery cover unit does not have a grip ring [1] at hinge. In
this case, detach the cover following the procedure below.

9-24

F-9-104

Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery
cover unit.

Chapter 9
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing support feeder mount
[1]. At this time, hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of
the duplexing support feeder mount.

[1]

[A]

[2]

[1]
[2]
F-9-105

2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder mount [2]. At this
time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into [c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the
torsion spring is outside the guide.

[d] [2]
F-9-107

[1]

[c]
[e]

Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B.
Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery
cover unit. After attaching, make sure that the guide [1] rotates
smoothly.

[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
[a]
F-9-108

2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and fix the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

[b]
F-9-106

3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the spring-hook area [2] of
the inside delivery cover.

9-25

Chapter 9

F-9-109

F-9-112

9.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Film Cover

9.5.5.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)
0009-9175

0007-7925

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the self-tapping screw [2]; then,
detach the fixing film cover [3].

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
New inside delivery cover unit has a grip ring [1] at hinge. In this case,
detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-113

[1]
F-9-110

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-114

When mounting the fixing film cover unit, be sure to check that it has
not ridden over the emboss [1] indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw.

F-9-111

9.5.5.3 Removing the Grounding Plate

0007-7924

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

9-26

Chapter 9

F-9-118

3) Slide the left side plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.

F-9-115

F-9-119

F-9-116
F-9-120

9.5.5.5 Removing the Left Side Plate

0007-7926

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left side plate cover [2].

When mounting the left side plate, be sure that it is correctly positioned
so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged. (See the figure.)

F-9-117

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-9-121

9-27

Chapter 9

9.5.5.6 Releasing the Locking Plate

0007-7927

1) Turn the locking gear [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
locking roller.

F-9-125

9.5.5.7 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

F-9-122

0007-7929

1) While pushing down the release lever (front) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-9-126

2) While pushing down the release lever (rear) [1], pull out the heater
contact [2].
F-9-123

Do not touch the screw [1] used to keep the fixing assembly in place.
Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly,
which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of
the fixing assembly.

F-9-127

3) Remove the screw [1], and free the AC harness [2].

F-9-124

3) Turn the locking plate [1] in the direction of the arrow to release it.

F-9-128

4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2].

9-28

Chapter 9

F-9-129

F-9-133

5) Free the relay connector [1] of the signal cable from the connector
holder [2].

2) Remove the front latch [2] of the inside delivery sensor [1]; then,
detach the inside delivery sensor.

F-9-130

6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the relay connector [1].

F-9-134

9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor

9.5.6.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (old)
0007-7895

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
Old inside delivery cover unit does not have a grip ring [1] at hinge. In
this case, detach the cover following the procedure below.

F-9-131

7) Remove the fixing film unit [1].

[1]
F-9-135

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-132

9.5.5.8 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor

0007-7932

1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the harness [1].

9-29

Chapter 9
2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder mount [2]. At this
time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into [c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the
torsion spring is outside the guide.

[d] [2]
[1]

[c]
[e]

F-9-136

Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure. Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit.

[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
[a]

[b]
F-9-139
F-9-137

Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery
cover unit.
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing support feeder mount
[1]. At this time, hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of
the duplexing support feeder mount.

[1]

[A]

[2]

F-9-138

9-30

3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the spring-hook area [2] of
the inside delivery cover.

Chapter 9

F-9-142

9.5.6.2 Removing the inside delivery cover unit (new)

[1]

0009-9176

The difference between new and old inside delivery cover unit:
New inside delivery cover unit has a grip ring [1] at hinge. In this case,
detach the cover following the procedure below.

[2]

F-9-140

Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide [1] in
the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B.
Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery
cover unit. After attaching, make sure that the guide [1] rotates
smoothly.

[1]
F-9-143

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and detach the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-141

2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and fix the inside
delivery cover unit [3].

F-9-144

9.5.6.3 Removing the Grounding Plate

0007-7896

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

9-31

Chapter 9

F-9-145

9.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor

0007-7897

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-9-146

2) Detach the harness [1] from the guide [2].

F-9-147

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the fixing film sensor [2].

F-9-148

9-32

Chapter 10 External and Controls

Contents

Contents
10.1 Control Panel..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.3 Adjustment of the LCD Contact .............................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU........................................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2 Counters .....................................................................................................................................................................10-2

10.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count ............................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................................10-4

10.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.2 2-Speed Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.3 Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-4

10.4 Power Supply System ................................................................................................................................................10-6

10.4.1 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit .......................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.4.1.2 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit .....................................................................................................................................................10-7
10.4.1.3 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit..........................................................................................................................................................10-7
10.4.1.4 Connections to Various Accessories...........................................................................................................................................................10-7

10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................................... 10-8

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB....................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB.................................................................................................................................10-9
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................................................................10-9

10.4.3 Protection Function .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-9

10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms ...............................................................................................................................................................................10-9

10.4.4 Backup Battery......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-9

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-10

10.4.5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power ..............................................................................................................................................................10-10

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure...................................................................................................................................10-12

10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.5.1.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly........................................................................................................................................................10-12

10.5.2 Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-12

10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) .............................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.5.2.3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................................................10-13
10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply ...........................................................................................................................................................10-13

10.5.3 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-14

10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel .....................................................................................................................................................................10-14

10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-15

10.5.4.1 Removing the Control Panel .....................................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover..................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame ..........................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD PCB....................................................................................................................................................10-16

10.5.5 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-17

10.5.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................................10-17

10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 10-18

10.5.6.1 Removing the Control Panel .....................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.6.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover..................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame ..........................................................................................................................................................10-18

Contents

10.5.6.4 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB............................................................................................................................................... 10-19

10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 10-19

10.5.7.1 Removing the Control Panel..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.7.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-20
10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.8.1 Removing the Control Panel..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-21
10.5.8.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10-22
10.5.8.3 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................................ 10-22

10.5.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 10-23

10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.10.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)........................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-24
10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.10.5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 10-24

10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 10-24

10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)........................................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-25
10.5.11.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-26

10.5.12.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case............................................................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.5.12.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.5.12.4 Removing the Drum Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.5.12.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp......................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.5.12.12 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.12.13 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.12.14 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.5.12.15 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-33
10.5.12.16 Removing the Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.5.12.18 Removing the High-Voltage PCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-35

10.5.13 Exhaust Fan.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-35

10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-36

10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly........................................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.5.14.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-37
10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-37
10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.5.14.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-38

10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor............................................................................................................................................................. 10-39

10.5.15.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-39
10.5.15.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-39
10.5.15.3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-40

10.5.16 Right Door ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-40

10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.5.16.2 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.5.16.3 Removing the Right Door....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-41

10.5.17 Circuit Braker....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-42

10.5.17.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-42

Contents

10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................................................................................10-42

Chapter 10

10.1 Control Panel

10.1.1 Overview
0006-6163

The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel:
The major functions of the control panel are as follows:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hardware key input
from Controller Unit

A18
4
J1118
1
14

B1

A1
J511

B18
1

J1116
16

Touch Panel

16

J6802

Control Panel Key

Switch PCB

J1119

Control Panel CPU PCB

1

14

LCD Panel
J1117

14
4
J956
1

3
J955
1

J6801
1

1
J1121
3
1

J1120

Control Panel
Inverter PCB
to Foot Switch

F-10-1

10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing

0006-6164

The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the program.
The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the LCD.

10.1.3 Adjustment of the LCD Contact

0006-6165

The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR2) on its keypad PCB for use by the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen.

10.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU

0006-6166

- Monitoring the Key Inputs

It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Monitoring the Touch Panel Input
It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Controlling the Buzzer Sound
- Controlling the Control Panel LED
Memo:
the LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals.

10-1

Chapter 10

10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Overview
0006-5378

The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of printouts according to the type of printer unit. The counters are indicated in response to a press
on the Check key on the control panel. The following shows the functions of the counter as set at time of shipment from the factory.
T-10-1

Counter 1

Counter 2

Counter 4

Counter 5

Counter 6

total 1

not
not
indicated** indicated**

not
indicated**

not
indicated**

not
indicated**

101

000

000

000

000

000

Japan*1 ****

total 2

copy (total
2)

total A (total not

2)
indicated**

not
indicated**

not
indicated**

102

202

127

000

000

120VTW *2

total 1

total (large) copy (total

1)

copy (large) not

indicated**

101

103

203

120V UL *3

total 1

total (large) copy (total

1)

copy (large) not

indicated**

101

103

203

230V *4

total 1

total (large) copy (total

1)

copy (large) not

indicated**

not
indicated**

101

103

203

000

Japan*1 ***

240V EUR *5 total 1

240V CA *6

Counter 3

000

201

201

201

000

000

000

total (large) total (small) scan (total 1) not

indicated**
104

000

000
not
indicated**
000

not
indicated**

101

103

total 1

total (large) copy (total

1)

copy (large) not

indicated**

not
indicated**

101

103

203

000

201

501

not
indicated**

000

000

<Guide to Symbols>
large: large-sized paper (in feed direction, 364 mm or longer; count x 1)
small: small-sized paper (in feed direction, 364 mm or less).
total: all (C + P); count x 1.
double-sided: in auto double-side copying count x 1; feed.
- The 3-digit symbol in the Counter column indicates the setting in the following service does item:
1 through 6 under COUNTER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER.
- Counters 2 through 6 may be changed in the following service mode mode item:
COPIER>OPTION>USER.
*1 :F14-3213/ 3223/ 3218/ 3211/ 3228/ 3221/ 3318/ 3311/ 3328/ 3321/ 3319/ 3312/ 6718/ 6711/ 6728/ 6721/ 6719/ 6712
*2 :None in particular
*3 :F14-3338/ 3331/ 6738/ 6731/ 5438/ 5431
*4 :F14-3248/ 3241/ 3348/ 3341/ 6748/ 6741/ 5448/ 5441
*5 :F14-3298/ 3291/ 3398/ 3391/ 6798/ 6791/ 5498/ 5491
*6 :F14-3268/ 3261/ 3368/ 3361/ 6768/ 6761/ 5468/ 5461
** by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
*** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USE>CNT-SW.
**** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.

10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count

0006-5385

The timing at which the count is increased differs depending on the printing mode (single-sided or double-sided), target of delivery, and type of accessory:
1. Singe-Sided Printing, 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print
In single-side printing or for the 2nd side of a double-sided print, the count is increased when the trailing edge of the sheet is discharged outside the machine
in relation to the output of the following sensors:
T-10-2

Condition

Finisher absent

Finisher present

10-2

Target of delivery

Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3

Sensor

Delivery sensor (PS14)

No. 2 delivery sensor (PS1A)
No. 3 delivery sensor (PS5)
Delivery sensor of the finisher

Chapter 10
2. 1st Side of a Double-Sided Print
When the double-sided print feed sensor (PS17) goes on, the machine will assume that printing on the 1st side has been completed, thereby increasing the
count.

10-3

Chapter 10

10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Overview
0006-5388

The names and the functions of the fans used in the machine are as follows:
T-10-3
Notation

Name

Filter

2-speed control Description

FM1

Heat discharge fan (rear)

Present

Used

Cools the fixing assembly.

FM2

Heat discharge fan (front)

Present

Used

Cools the fixing assembly.

FM1

FM2

F-10-2

10.3.2 2-Speed Control

0006-5389

The rotation of the 2 fans used in the machine is controlled to 2 different speeds by the voltage switchover circuit of the individual fans.
DC controller PCB

24V

13V
24V or 13V

Full-speed
signal

CPU

Voltage
Half-speed
switching circuit

Clock signal

signal

Fan

F-10-3

10.3.3 Sequence of Operation

0006-5390

1. Standby Mode, Sleep Mode

In standby mode or sleep mode, the heat discharge fan (front, rear; FM1/2) is at rest.
2. Printing
While printing is under way, the fans are switched between full speed and half speed depending on whether the machine is in full speed mode or half speed
mode and the reading of the environment sensor (HU1).
- Double-Side Printing
T-10-4

10-4

Environment sensor (HU1) reading

Full speed, half speed

25 deg C or more

Full speed

Chapter 10

Less than 25 deg C

Half speed

- Single-Sided Printing
T-10-5

Environment sensor (HU1) reading

Full speed, half speed

30 deg C or ore

Full speed

Less hand 30 deg C

Half speed

Note 1:
While the machine is in continuous printing mode, the insertion of one or more double-sided prints will start the control used for double-sided printing.
Note 2:
The printing interval covers the interval up to when the fixing motor (M3) stops rotation.

10-5

Chapter 10

10.4 Power Supply System

10.4.1 Power Supply
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit
0008-8136

The machine's power is supplied by the printer power supply PCB. The DC power to accessories is supplied by the accessories power supply PCB.
The functions of the individual power supply PCBs are as follows, shown together with the distribution of power:
T-10-6

Name

Description

Printer power supply

PCB
Accessories power
supply PCB
Main switch
Door switch
Leakage breaker
High-voltage power
supply PCB
AC driver PCB

Remarks

generates DC power (24 V, 13 V). supplies DC

power to controller PCB, cassette pedestal
supplies DC power to finisher.
turns on/off AC power to AC driver PCB.
turns on/off DC power to DC driver PCB.
cuts off power in the event of error.
generates various high voltage.

supplies AC power to printer power supply PCB,

accessories power supply PCB, uninterrupted
power supply PCB. Fixing drive.
Controller power supply supplies DC power to 3way unit-A1, fax board,
PCB
controller, DC controller PCB, HVT.
generates DC power (5 V, 3.3 V).

Uninterruptive power
supply PCB

generates and supplies uninterruptive power (3

VB).

Reader heater(H5)

Heater switch
SW5

DADF
-N1

Reader heater(H6)

HVT
High-voltage
power supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Pickup
heater
mounting
kit

2 4VU2

13VA1

24VU1

5VA

3VA

Printer power supply block

24VU2

13VA2

Cassette pedestal(H1C)

24VU1

Printer
unit

Deck heater(H7)

SW2
Front cover
open/close switch

Heater
switch PCB
Main switch
SW1

24VU2

Cassette heater(H4)
ELCB2

13VA2

Leakage breaker

Fixing main heater(H1)

AC driver PCB

Printer
power
supply PCB

Fixing sub heater(H2)

24VU1

Controller power supply PCB

24VU2
13VA1
13VA2

Thermal switch(TP1)

3VB

13VB

5VA: non-all night

F-10-4

10-6

Super G3 Fax
Board-Q1

3VA: non-all night

3VB: all night

24VU2

13VA

13VB

5VA

Controller
PCB

To Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

13VA1: non-all night

13VA2: non-all night
13VB: non-all night

13VA2

To 3-Way Unit-A1

24VU1: non-all night

24VU2: non-all night
24VA: non-all night

13VA2

3VB

To 3-Way Unit-A1

To Finisher-S1

3VB

3VA

Accessories
All-night
power
power
supply PCB supply PCB

13VA1

24VA
24VU2

To Finisher-S1

Chapter 10

10.4.1.2 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit

0006-5393

The printer unit controller PCB generates the following DC voltages using the 13 VDC supplied by the printer unit:
- 24 VDC (for motor drive)
- 13 VDC (for LED array)
- 5 VDC (for sensor drive)
- 3.3 VDC (for IC drive/for CCD drive)
24 VDC power is used to drive the motors, while 13 VDC power is used to turn on the LED array for illumination of originals.
To printer unit
(scanner PCB)
100 VAC
From printer unit

DC24V
DC13V
DC13V/3.3V
To DF

AC100V

24 VDC, 13 VDC
From printer unit
To DF

04

J5

DC24V
J5

00

J5

0
J5

01

J5

05

J5

03
J5

10

AC100V
Printer unit
controller PCB

Generates 5 VDC from 13 VDC

Generates 3.3 VDC from 13 VDC

F-10-5

10.4.1.3 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit

0006-5394

The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC/1.3 VDC by the printer unit at such times as described below.
Sleep mode
Scan
Standby

Main power switch ON

Power plug content
to outlet

PSTBY

SCAN

DC 13V/24V
F-10-6

10.4.1.4 Connections to Various Accessories

0008-8143

The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the supply of power:

10-7

Chapter 10

[1]

[A]

[B]

[4]
[C]

[2]
[3]

[D]
F-10-7

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

DADF I/F cable

Pickup heater cable
Cassette pedestal I/F cable
AC input

[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]

DADF-N1
Reader unit
Printer unit
Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB
0006-5642

The following are the ratings and the tolerances of the printer unit power supply PCB:
T-10-7

Output

13VA1

13VA2

13VB

All-night/non-all
night

non-all
night

non-all
night

24VU1

24VU2

non-all night

non-all night

Rated output

13.2V

13.2V

13.2V

24V

Power supply
tolerance

+/-3%

+/-3%

+/-3%

+5, -5% (0.1 to 8A)

+8%, -6% (from 0A to
0.1 A, from 8A to
10A)

10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB

0006-5643

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the controller power supply PCB:
T-10-8

Output
All-night/non-all night

10-8

3VA
non-all night

5VA
non-all night

Chapter 10

Output
Rated output
Power supply tolerance

3VA
3.4V
+/-4%

5VA
5.1V
+/-3%

10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB

0006-5644

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the accessories power supply PCB:
T-10-9

Output
All night/non-all night
Rated output
Power supply tolerance

24VA
non -all night
24V
+/-5% (from 0.1A to 6.5A)
+8%,-6% (from 0A to 0.1A, from 6.5 to 12A)

10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB

0006-5646

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the all-night power supply PCB:
T-10-10

Output
All-night/non-all night
Rated output
Power supply tolerance

3VB
all night
3.4V
+/-3%

10.4.3 Protection Function

10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms
0006-5396

The machine's DC power supply PCB and accessories power supply PCB are equipped with an over-current protective mechanism and an over-voltage
protective mechanism that will automatically shut off the output voltage to protect its electrical circuitry in the event of a short circuit or other fault in any
of its loads causing over-current.
In the event of a fault in the 3 VB power (all-night power supply), all supplies of power will be shut off. A fault in other power supplies will shut off power
to all loads except for 3 VB.
If a malfunction occurs in 3VB (all-night power supply), it is necessary to turn off the main power switch of the printer unit, remove the cause triggering
the protection circuit, and replace the all-night power supply PCB. (The fuse of the all-night power supply PCB is likely to have blown.)
For other cases than above, the protection circuit can be reset by turning off the main power switch of the printer unit, removing the cause triggering the
protection circuit, leaving the printer unit alone for more than 3 min, and tuning on the power again.

10.4.4 Backup Battery

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery
0008-0861

The controller PCB and the DC controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) to serve as a source of power, backing up various data in
the even of power failure.
T-10-11

Controller PCB

manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh)

DC controller PCB

lithium battery (3 V, 600 mAh)

Life

DC controller PCB: 7 yr or less

Controller PCB: 8.8 yr or more
(with the power plug disconnected)

Replacement

The batteries cannot be replaced on their own in the field.

Be sure to exercise care whenever you have to replace the battery. In certain cases, it may explode.
Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated (same name, or equivalent).

10-9

Chapter 10
Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer.

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function

10.4.5.1 Overview
0006-5741

1. Standby Mode
When the machine is in standby mode, all its power supplies are provided with power, and the machine is ready for immediate operation.
2. Sleep Mode
2-1. Sleep 1
When the machine is in sleep mode 1, its control panel remains off, and the polygon motor (M1) will not rotate even when any of the control panel keys
is pressed. In this mode, the machine is provided with power as in standby mode.
2-2. Sleep 3
When the machine is in sleep mode 3, only 3 VB is available. The machine will move to standby mode from sleep 3 in response to any of the following:
- print job
- press on the control panel power switch
- incoming fax
The following shows the sections of the machine that are provided with power in sleep 3:

Main controller PCB

LAN
controller
block

SDRAM
CPU

Image
processing
block

Scanner unit

Control panel
power switch
Fax
reception
detector

Hard disk drive

Printer unit

powered in sleep 3
not powered in sleep 3
F-10-8

3. AC Off Mode
When the machine is in AC off mode, its power swish is off. All its power supplies and its heater control mechanism are off.

10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power

0006-6167

- Standby Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode

T-10-12
Stand-by
mode

Reader unit
DC controller PCB

Main controller
PCB

10-10

Sleep mode

AC off mode

Remote 1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Remote 2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

13VA2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

all night

3VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

12VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Chapter 10

Stand-by
mode
Fax

Sleep mode

AC off mode

all night

5VS

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Memo:
The power supply output state is determined according to combinations of remote 1 and 2. States, i.e., remote 1 and 2, are output from the main controller
PCB.

10-11

Chapter 10

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly
10.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6423

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[1]

F-10-11

10.5.2 Power Supply Unit

[2]

10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover

0007-6375

F-10-9

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

10.5.1.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly

0007-7367

1) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1].

2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2].
3) Remove the re-use band [3].

F-10-10

4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].

10-12

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
F-10-14

[1]

2) Remove the 6 connectors [1], and free the harness from the cable
clamp [2].

[1]
[1]

[2]

F-10-12

10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)

0007-6376

1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 [1].

2) Remove the 4 screws [2] and the other screw [3]; then, detach the left
cover (lower) [4].

F-10-15

3) Remove the 5 binding screws [1], and detach the accessories power
supply PCB [2].

If the rear cover has already been detached, the screw [3] should also
have been removed.

[4]
F-10-16

[3]

10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply

0007-6379

1) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the finisher connector [2].

[2]

[1]
[2]
F-10-13

10.5.2.3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB

0007-6378

1) Disconnect the connector J640 [1].

F-10-17

2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the pedestal connector [2].

10-13

Chapter 10

F-10-18
F-10-22

3) Free the harness [1] of the pedestal connector from the lamp [2].

10.5.3 Control Panel

10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel
0009-2836

1) Open the right door [1].

F-10-19

4) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], and free the harness from the 4
clamps [2].

F-10-23

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-10-20

5) Free the harness [1] from the clamp [2].

F-10-24

3) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.

F-10-21

6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main power supply [2].

F-10-25

10-14

Chapter 10
5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel.

F-10-29
F-10-26

5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel.

10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit

10.5.4.1 Removing the Control Panel
0009-2846

1) Open the right door [1].

F-10-30

10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover

0009-2847
F-10-27

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel base cover [2].

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-10-31
F-10-28

3) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.

10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame

0009-2848

1)Disconnect the flat cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.

2)Move the connector stopper [2] in the direction of the arrow, and
disconnect the flat cable [3].

10-15

Chapter 10

F-10-36
F-10-32

3)Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control Panel Frame

1.Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed [1] as shown in the
figure.

F-10-33

4)Free the harness from the 3 clamps [1].

F-10-37

2.After mounting the control panel frame, be sure to route the inverter
harness through the edge saddle [1].

F-10-34

5)Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the control panel hook [2].
F-10-38

10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD PCB

0009-2849

1)Disconnect the connector [1] from the control panel inverter PCB.
2)Remove the 3 self-tapping screws [2], and detach the control panel
LCD PCB [3].

F-10-35

6)Remove the self-tapping screws [1] and the flat-head screw [2]; then,
detach the control panel frame [3].

10-16

Chapter 10

F-10-39

10.5.5 DC Controller PCB

10.5.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover

F-10-41
0007-7370

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].
How to Remove the Flexible Cable [1]
If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-10-42

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the DC controller PCB.

[1]
[1]
[1]

[2]

F-10-40
F-10-43

10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0007-6398

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB
Be sure to remove the boot ROM [1] from the exiting DC controller
PCB, and mount it to the new DC controller PCB.

10-17

Chapter 10
5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel.

F-10-44

10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB

F-10-48

10.5.6.1 Removing the Control Panel

10.5.6.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover

0009-2841

1) Open the right door [1].

0009-2842

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel base cover [2].

F-10-45

F-10-49

10.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

0009-2843

1)Disconnect the flat cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.

2)Move the connector stopper [2] in the direction of the arrow, and
disconnect the flat cable [3].

F-10-46

3) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.

F-10-50

3)Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-10-47

10-18

Chapter 10

F-10-51

4)Free the harness from the 3 clamps [1].

F-10-55

2.After mounting the control panel frame, be sure to route the inverter
harness through the edge saddle [1].

F-10-52

5)Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the control panel hook [2].

F-10-56

10.5.6.4 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB

0009-2844

1)Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

2)Remove the 2 self-tapping screws [2], and detach the control panel
inverter PCB [3].

F-10-53

6)Remove the self-tapping screws [1] and the flat-head screw [2]; then,
detach the control panel frame [3].

F-10-57

10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB

10.5.7.1 Removing the Control Panel
0009-2851

1) Open the right door [1].

F-10-54

Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control Panel Frame

1.Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed [1] as shown in the
figure.

10-19

Chapter 10

F-10-62

F-10-58

10.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel Frame

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

0009-2853

1)Disconnect the flat cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.

2)Move the connector stopper [2] in the direction of the arrow, and
disconnect the flat cable [3].

F-10-59

3) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.

F-10-63

3)Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-10-60

5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel.

F-10-64

4)Free the harness from the 3 clamps [1].

F-10-65

F-10-61

10.5.7.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover

0009-2852

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel base cover [2].

10-20

5)Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the control panel hook [2].

Chapter 10

10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB

0009-2854

1)Remove the 5 self-tapping screws [1], and detach the control panel
key switch PCB [2].

F-10-66

6)Remove the self-tapping screws [1] and the flat-head screw [2]; then,
detach the control panel frame [3].

F-10-70

10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB

10.5.8.1 Removing the Control Panel
0009-2837

1) Open the right door [1].

F-10-67

Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control Panel Frame

1.Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed [1] as shown in the
figure.

F-10-71

2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-10-68

2.After mounting the control panel frame, be sure to route the inverter
harness through the edge saddle [1].

F-10-72

3) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.

F-10-69

10-21

Chapter 10

F-10-73

5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel.

F-10-76

3)Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-10-77
F-10-74

4)Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel CPU PCB [2].

10.5.8.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover

0009-2838

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel base cover [2].

F-10-78

10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB

10.5.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover

F-10-75

0007-6385

10.5.8.3 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB

0009-2839

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

1)Disconnect the flat cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.

2)Move the connector stopper [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach
the flat cable [3].
If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

10-22

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

[1]
[1]

[3]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[1]

[2]

F-10-79

10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power Supply PCB

0007-6386

[2]

1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1].

F-10-82

10.5.10.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)

0007-6381

1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 [1].

2) Remove the 4 screws [2] and the other screw [3]; then, detach the left
cover (lower) [4].

If the rear cover has already been detached, the screw [3] should also
have been removed.

F-10-80

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the all-night power supply PCB
[2].

[4]

[3]

F-10-81

10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB

[2]

10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover

[1]
[2]

0007-6380

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

F-10-83

10-23

Chapter 10

10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)

10.5.10.5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB

0007-6382

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the left cover (rear) [2].

0007-6384

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

F-10-84

10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB

0007-6383

1) Disconnect the connector J640 [1].

F-10-88

2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the controller power supply PCB
[2].

F-10-85

2) Remove the 6 connectors [1], and free the harness from the cable
clamp [2].

F-10-89

10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB

10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6370

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.
F-10-86

3) Remove the 5 binding screws [1], and detach the accessories power
supply PCB [2].

F-10-87

10-24

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-10-92

10.5.11.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB

[1]
[1]

0007-6373

[1]

1) Disconnect the connector J640 [1].

[2]

F-10-90

10.5.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)

0007-6371

1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 [1].

2) Remove the 4 screws [2] and the other screw [3]; then, detach the left
cover (lower) [4].

F-10-93

2) Remove the 6 connectors [1], and free the harness from the cable
clamp [2].

If the rear cover has already been detached, the screw [3] should also
have been removed.

[4]

F-10-94

3) Remove the 5 binding screws [1], and detach the accessories power
supply PCB [2].

[3]

[2]

[1]
[2]
F-10-91

10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)

0007-6372

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the left cover (rear) [2].

F-10-95

10-25

Chapter 10

10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB

10.5.12.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit
0007-8021

1) Open the front cover [1].

F-10-99

10.5.12.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0007-8400

1) Shift up the lever [1].

F-10-96

2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].

3) Remove the binding screw [2].
4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the
arrow.

F-10-100

2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].

F-10-97

10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case

0007-8028

1) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-10-101

F-10-98

Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle

After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to make sure that the lever is moved
smoothly. Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.

10-26

Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers
or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the
toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it
comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner
stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above, toner scattering may
be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side
down.

Chapter 10

[1]

F-10-106

F-10-102

5) Remove the drum unit [1].

10.5.12.4 Removing the Drum Unit

0007-8401

1) Open the right door [1].

F-10-107

F-10-103

Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.

2) Remove the screw [1].

F-10-104

3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-10-108

10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

0007-8402

1) Remove the screw [1].

F-10-105

4) Remove the screw [1].

10-27

Chapter 10

F-10-109

2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing
assembly.

F-10-112

Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.

F-10-110

3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then,

disconnect the connector [2].

F-10-113

When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine.
Thereafter, slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the developing
assembly matches [B] of the rail.

F-10-111

4) Remove the developing assembly [1].

F-10-114

10-28

Chapter 10

10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray

0007-8403

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2].

F-10-118

2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure
lamp [2].
F-10-115

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward
the front.

F-10-119

F-10-116

10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover

0007-8404

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].

F-10-120

10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover

0007-8407

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

F-10-117

10.5.12.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp

0007-8405

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2].

10-29

Chapter 10

[2]

[1]

F-10-124

4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.
[1]
[1]
F-10-121

10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit

0007-8409

1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2].

F-10-125

F-10-122

When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch
the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with
a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with
the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)

10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly

When you have disconnected the connector [1], be sure to take care so
that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment
variable resistor. Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

0007-8411

1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2].

F-10-126

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector
[2] found at the rear.
F-10-123

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].

10-30

Chapter 10

F-10-130

10.5.12.12 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

F-10-127

3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the harness [3] through the
hole [2] in the plate.

0007-8412

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

[3]
F-10-128

[3]

4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2].

[4]
[2]

[1]
F-10-131

10.5.12.13 Removing the Right Door

0007-8413

1) Open the right door.

F-10-129

When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.

F-10-132

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

10-31

Chapter 10

F-10-133

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-10-137

F-10-134

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

10.5.12.14 Removing the Right Door

0007-8416

1) Open the right door.

F-10-135

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.
F-10-138

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-10-136

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

10-32

F-10-139

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

Chapter 10

F-10-140

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

F-10-143

F-10-141

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

10.5.12.15 Removing the Right Door

0007-8417

1) Open the right door.

F-10-142

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-10-144

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right
door.

F-10-145

Attaching the Right Door

10-33

Chapter 10
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-10-149

4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front.

F-10-146

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

10.5.12.16 Removing the Fixing Unit

0007-8419

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-10-150

When mounting the harness cover [1], be sure to keep the harness [2]
within the space [3] indicated in the figure so that the harness [2] will
not come into contact with the gear [4].

F-10-147

2) Disconcert the 3 connectors [1].

F-10-151

F-10-148

3) Remove the 4 screws [1].

10-34

Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly.

Chapter 10

F-10-155

2) Slide the guide [1] as shown to detach.

[B]

[C]

F-10-152

10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear

[A]
0007-8420

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the gear cover [2].
F-10-156

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the latch [2] and 3 screws
[3]; then, detach the high-voltage PCB [4].

F-10-153

2) Remove the gear [1].

F-10-157

F-10-154

10.5.12.18 Removing the High-Voltage PCB

0007-8422

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing member [2].

F-10-158

10.5.13 Exhaust Fan

10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan
0007-6433

1) Open the right door.

10-35

Chapter 10

F-10-163
F-10-159

10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

0007-7531

1) Open the right door.

F-10-160

3) Remove the feed guide [1].

F-10-164

2) Remove the 2 self-tapping screws [2], and detach the upper right
cover [1].

F-10-161

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the feed guide (lower) [2].
F-10-165

3) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the feed guide [2].

F-10-162

5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the heat discharge fan [2].

F-10-166

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the feed guide (lower) [2].

10-36

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
F-10-167

[1]

5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the heat discharge fan [2].

[2]

F-10-169

10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly

0007-6418

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire
saddle.
F-10-168

10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly

10.5.14.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-7368

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

F-10-170

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].

10-37

Chapter 10

F-10-173

Adjusting the Tension of the Main Drive Motor

1) Temporarily fix the main drive motor in place to the main motor base.
2) So that the motor gear [1] and the teeth [2] of the pulley mesh
correctly, move the motor in the direction of the arrow.

F-10-171

Do not touch the screws that are glued in place.

F-10-174

3) Tighten the screws [1] of the main drive motor in the order indicated.

10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor

0007-6421

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive motor [2].

F-10-175

10.5.14.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor

0007-7369

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

F-10-172

Points to Note During the Work

Be sure that the 2 timing belts [2] are fitted to the shaft [1] of the main
drive motor as shown.

10-38

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-10-176

[1]

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main dive motor [2].

[1]

[2]

F-10-178

10.5.15.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0007-6404

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

F-10-177

10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor

10.5.15.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6403

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

F-10-179

How to Remove the Flexible Cable [1]

10-39

Chapter 10

F-10-180

F-10-183

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the DC controller PCB.

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing drive motor [2].

F-10-181
F-10-184

10.5.16 Right Door

Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB
Be sure to remove the boot ROM [1] from the exiting DC controller
PCB, and mount it to the new DC controller PCB.

10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear)

0007-7020

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette
Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

F-10-182

10.5.15.3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor

[3]
[3]

0007-6405

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

[4]
[2]

[1]
F-10-185

10.5.16.2 Removing the Right Door

0007-6444

1) Open the right door.

10-40

Chapter 10

F-10-190
F-10-186

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.

F-10-187

3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2]
from the right door.

F-10-191
F-10-188

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening).

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

10.5.16.3 Removing the Right Door

0007-7050

1) Open the right door.

F-10-189

5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door.

F-10-192

2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and detach the right

10-41

Chapter 10
door.
[3]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
F-10-193

[1]

Attaching the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the
lug.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook
found on the side plate.
[2]

F-10-195

10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit Breaker

0007-6389

1) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-10-196

2) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the circuit breaker [2].

F-10-194

When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to
close the right door first.

10.5.17 Circuit Braker

10.5.17.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0007-6388

1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach
the rear cover [3].

If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should
also have been removed.

F-10-197

10-42

Chapter 10

Points to Note When Mounting

When mounting the circuit breaker, be sure that the AC harness is identified correctly by color as shown.

F-10-198

10-43

Chapter 11 MEAP

Contents

Contents
11.1 MEAP.........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 MEAP Counter......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform........................................................................................................................................ 11-1

Chapter 11

11.1 MEAP
11.1.1 Overview
0008-1396

The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs
and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java
applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS (Service Management
Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC. As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to
the device in the field.

11.1.2 MEAP Counter

0008-1397

In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by
making the following selections on the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP
counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question.
A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when the application sends instructions; or,
it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-11-1

Type
forced

Count item
total
total (black-and-white 1)
total (black-and-while large)
scan (total 1)
black-and-white scan (total 1)

in response to instructions from application

black-and-white scan 1
black-and-white scan 2
black-and-white scan 3
black-and-white scan 4

application-independent

free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
free 12

MEMO:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.

11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform

0008-1398

In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP
content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the
device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content, calling for special care. (In the case of a
mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in
conjunction with the system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:

11-1

Chapter 11

[5]

[7] [8]

[1]
[6]
[4]

[2]
[3]
F-11-1

[1] User Interface Control Bock

installed as part of the system software
[2] Device Control Block
installed as part of the system software
[3] Operating System
installed as part of the system software
[4] Java VM
installed as part of the system software
[5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO)
installed as part of MEAP content
[6] Device Control Class Library
installed as part of MEAP content
[7] internally developed application
[8] externally developed application

11-2

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

Contents

Contents
12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................................12-2

12.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................................................................................................................12-4

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit................................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit ................................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures .................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing........................................................................................................................ 12-6

12.4 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................................12-9

12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide ........................................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide .............................. 12-9
12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator .............................................................................................................................. 12-16
12.4.4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator .............................................................................................................................. 12-23

Chapter 12

12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

12.1.1 Overview
0007-4595

The machine has parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of functional performance. (The loss of the function of any of
these parts will significantly affect the machine performance, regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage.)
If possible, schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit.
The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit.

12.1.2 Reader Unit

0007-4596

The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.

12.1.3 Printer Unit

0007-9108

The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.

12-1

Chapter 12

12.2 Durables and Consumables

12.2.1 Overview
0007-4598

The machine has parts that may require replacement once or more during the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as
needed by referring to their indicated estimated lives.
- Checking the Timing of Replacement
Use the following service mode item to check the timing of replacement:
- Copier
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
- Accessory
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2

12.2.2 Reader Unit

0007-4599

The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.

12.2.3 Printer Unit

0007-4600
T-12-1
As of Dec. 2004

Ref.

Parts name

Parts No.

Q'ty

Life

[1]

Transfer roller

FC6-2911-000

150,000
prints

[2]

Static eliminator holder

FL2-0247-000

150,000
prints

[3]

Developing cylinder

FL2-0290-000

480,000
prints

[4]

Fixing film unit

FM2-0293-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830 100V

Fixing film unit

FM2-0358-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830 115V

Fixing film unit

FM2-0359-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830 230V

Fixing film unit

FM2-1792-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530
100V

Fixing film unit

FM2-1793-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530
115V

Fixing film unit

FM2-1794-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530
230V

Pressure roller

FC6-2942-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830

Pressure roller

FC5-7207-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530

Waste toner box

FM2-0303-000

75,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830

Waste toner box

FM2-0303-000

85,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530

Fixing heat discharge

roller

FB5-4931-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830

Fixing heat discharge

roller

FB5-4931-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530

[8]

Pickup roller

FB6-3405-000

120,000
prints

[9]

Feed/separation roller

FC5-6934-000

120,000
prints

[10]

Manual feed separation

pad

FC5-0488-000

240,000
prints

[11]

Manual feed pickup roller FB1-8581-000

240,000
prints

[5]

[6]

[7]

12-2

Remarks

Chapter 12

As of Dec. 2004

Ref.

Parts name

Parts No.

Q'ty

Life

Remarks

[12]

Heat discharge fan filter

FC5-1546-000

150,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830

Heat discharge fan filter

FC5-1546-000

240,000
prints

iR3570/4570/3530

Pressure roller bushing

RS5-1446-000

300,000
prints

iR2270/2870/
2230/2830

[13]

The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The parts number
may change because of changes in design.

[13] [5]

[7]

[13]

[12]

[11]
[12]

[4]

[10]

[2]
[1]
[9]

[9]

[3]
[8]
[9]

[9]

[8]

[6]
F-12-1

12-3

Chapter 12

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit
0007-5055

The reader unit does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit.

12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit

0007-5176

Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.

T-12-2

Transfe
r
assemb
ly

Location

Transfer/feed guide assembly

Task

clean:(dry wiping)

Interval

120,000 prints

Remarks

[1]Feed guide
[2]Transfer guide
Develo Location
ping
assemb Task
ly
Interval
Remarks

[1]Photosensitive drum butting spacer

[2]Feed guide

12-4

Photosensitive drum butting spacer/

feed guide
clean:(dry wiping)
120,000 prints

Chapter 12

Fixing Location
assemb Task
ly
Interval

Fixing inlet guide

clean:(dry wiping/alcohol)
120,000 prints

Remarks

[1]Fixing inlet guide

Location

Film bias static eliminator

Task

clean

Interval

150,000 prints (iR2270/2870)

240,000 prints (iR3570/4570)

Remarks

[1]Film bias static eliminator

Laser
scanner
assemb
ly

Location

Dust-blocking glass

Task

clean:(dry wiping or alcohol)

Interval

120,000 prints

Remarks

[1]Dust-blocking glass

The foregoing values are estimates only, and are subject to change depending on future data.

12-5

Chapter 12

12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures

0007-5173

- As a rule, perform scheduled servicing every 120,000 prints.

- Before setting out on a scheduled visit, check with the Service Book, and take parts for which replacement is expected.
- If the power plug is exposed to dust, humidity, or oily smoke, the resulting buildup can prove to be a fire hazard. (The buildup of dust, for instance, can
absorb moisture and suffer insulating failure.) Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis, and remove any buildup of dust and dirt with a
dry cloth.
<Work Procedure>
1) Report to the person in change, and have an understanding of the situation.
2) Record the counter reading, and check the faulty prints.
3) Check the following items, and adjust or clean the parts as needed.
T-12-3

Item
Test copy

image density
background (for soiling)
characters (for clarity)
margin
fixing

misregistration, soiled back

margin (single-sided)

leading edge:2.51.5mm

margin (double-sided)

leading edge:2.52.0mm

left:2.51.5mm
left edge:2.52.0mm
Laser exposure
system

dust-blocking glass (cleaning)

Feeding system

toner/feed guide

Developing system

developing butting spacer

fixing inlet guide

4) Check the waste toner collection case.

If the case is half full or more, empty it in an appropriate bag for collection. Or, replace the waste toner collection case.

- When disposing of the waste toner, be sure to follow all applicable regulations of the local government.
- Do not dispose of waste toner in fire. (Doing so can cause an explosion.)
5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
6) Make test copies.
7) Make sample copies.
8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker.
While the machine is supplied with power (power switch ON), press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if the breaker operates normally (i.e., the
lever will shift to OFF to cut off the power).
If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally, replace the breaker, and make a check once again.
<Resetting>
When you have checked the operation of the leakage breaker, turn off the power switch, shift the lever to ON, and turn on the power switch.
9) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine.
10) Record the latest counter readings. At this time, be sure to also record the settings of the following: 'FX-UP-RL' and 'DV-UNIT-K'.
11) Fill out the form in the Service Book, and report to the person in charge. be sure also to indicate the check on the leakage breaker in the history of checks.

12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing

0007-5177

- If you used solvent, be sure that it has dried before putting the part back into the machine.
- Unless otherwise indicated, do not use a cloth moistened with water.
- Be sure to provide scheduled servicing at specific intervals.

12-6

Chapter 12

[1]

[5]
[8]
[3]

[2]

[6]
[4]

[2]

[7]
F-12-2

[1]Copyboard glass, reading glass (clean, using water or mild detergent)

[2]Transfer/feed guide (clean; dry wiping)
[3]Fixing inlet guide (clean; dry wiping; alcohol)
[4]Photosensitive drum butting spacer (clean; dry wiping)
[5]Dust-blocking glass (clean; dry wiping or with alcohol)
[6]Waste toner collection case (check)
[7]Leakage breaker (check)
[8]Film bias static eliminator (clean)

12-7

Chapter 12

12-8

Chapter 12

12.4 Cleaning
12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide
0007-5129

1) Open the right door.

F-12-3

2) Clean (dry wipe) the feed guide [1] and the transfer guide [2].

F-12-4

3) Close the right door.

12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide
0007-5128

A. Preparatory Work
1) Open the upper front cover [1].

F-12-5

2) Remove the face rubber [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, slide the front cover unit [3] to the left to detach.

12-9

Chapter 12

F-12-6

3) Remove the waste toner box [1].

F-12-7

4) Open the right door [1].

F-12-8

5) Remove the locking screw [1] of the pressure lever.

F-12-9

6) Shift the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the left to release the developing assembly.

12-10

Chapter 12

F-12-10

7) Remove the screw (M5) [1].

F-12-11

8) Remove the drum unit [1].

F-12-12

- Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.

- Do not expose the surface of the photosensitive drum to light more than necessary.
- Do not touch the spur of the drum unit.
9) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the developing assembly [2].

12-11

Chapter 12

F-12-13

B. Cleaning the Developing Spacer and the Feed Guide

1) Clean the developing assembly spacer [1] and the feed guide [2]. (Dry wipe them using lint-free paper.)

F-12-14

C. Cleaning the Dust-Blocking Glass

1) Clean the dust-blocking glass [1]. (Dry wipe it, or use alcohol.)

F-12-15

D. Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide

1) Remove the screw (w/ washer) [1], and detach the fixing inlet guide (upper) [2].

12-12

Chapter 12

F-12-16

2) Clean the fixing inlet guide (upper) [1] with alcohol. Be sure to completely remove all toner sticking to the fixing inlet guide (upper).

[1]
F-12-17

3) Clean the fixing inlet guide (lower) [1] using lint-free paper.

F-12-18

4) Mount the fixing inlet guide (upper) using a screw (w/ washer).
E. After the Work
1) Put the drum unit [1] in the machine.

F-12-19

2) Secure the drum unit in place using a screw (M5) [1].

12-13

Chapter 12

F-12-20

3) Put the developing unit in the machine.

3-1) Place segment A of the developing assembly on segment B of the developing assembly rail.
3-2) By sliding the base [2] of the developing assembly [1] along the developing assembly rail [3], fit the assembly in place inside the machine.

F-12-21

4) Connect the connector [1], and push the developing assembly [2] all the way in.

F-12-22

5) Shift back the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the right to lock the assembly in place.

12-14

Chapter 12

F-12-23

6) Fit and tighten the screw [1] of the locking lever.

F-12-24

7) Close the right door.

8) Fit the waste toner box [1].

F-12-25

9) Mount the front cover unit [3] using 2 screws [2], and fit the face rubber [1].

At this time, be sure to slide it to the right so that the claw of the front cover matches the machine.

12-15

Chapter 12

F-12-26

10) Close the upper front cover [1].

F-12-27

12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator

0007-8642

A. Removing the Right Door

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if w/ Cassette Feeding Unit)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-12-28

4) Open the right door.

12-16

Chapter 12

F-12-29

5) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].

F-12-30

6) Remove the joint shaft [1], and detach the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door.

F-12-31

7) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening) [3].

F-12-32

8) Free and detach the right door [1] from the hinge assembly [2].

12-17

Chapter 12

F-12-33

B. Removing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-12-34

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-12-35

3) Remove the 4 screws [1].

F-12-36

4) Remove the fixing unit [1] toward the front.

12-18

Chapter 12

F-12-37

C. Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

F-12-38

2) Clean the film bias static eliminator [1] found behind the grounding plate (to remove the cake of toner, if any, that may have collected on the static
eliminator).
[1]

F-12-39

3) Mount the grounding plate [2] with 2 screws.

F-12-40

D. Mounting the Fixing Assembly

1) Mount the fixing unit [1] to the machine frame.

12-19

Chapter 12

F-12-41

2) Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws [1].

F-12-42

3) Connect the 3 connectors [1].

F-12-43

4) Mount the harness cover [2] using a screw [1].

F-12-44

E. Mounting the Right Door

1) Match the hole [1] of the right door bottom and the pin [2].

12-20

Chapter 12

F-12-45

2) Match the mounting plate [1] of the right door top against the hook [2], and mount the right door.
3) Secure the mounting plate [1] using 3 screws [3].
4) Connect the connector [4], and fit the reuse band [5] in place.

F-12-46

5) Open the expansion delivery kit [1].

6) Lift the expansion delivery kit [1] slightly to match it against the right door [2].

F-12-47

When matching the position, take care so that the expansion delivery kit will not open wider than 80 deg.
7) Push in the pin [1] through the hole [2] until it stops; then, connect the expansion delivery kit [3] to the right door [4].

12-21

Chapter 12

F-12-48

F-12-49

Check to be sure that the joint pin is fully fitted as shown in the figure.
8) Using the self-tapping screw [1] you removed in step A-5), fix the joint plate [2] in place.

Check to be sure that the protrusion [3] of the joint plate is fully in the mounting hole.

F-12-50

10) Mount the right cover (rear) using 5 screws.

Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (rear).

12-22

Chapter 12

F-12-51

11) Close the right door.

12.4.4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator

0008-2928

A. Removing the Right Door

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-12-52

4) Open the right door.

F-12-53

5) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
6) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening) [3]; then, detach the right door.

12-23

Chapter 12

F-12-54

B. Removing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].

F-12-55

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-12-56

3) Remove the 4 screws [1].

F-12-57

4) Slide out the fixing unit [1] toward the front.

12-24

Chapter 12

F-12-58

C. Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].

F-12-59

2) Clean the film bias static eliminator [1] found on the back of the grounding plate. (Be sure to remove the cake of toner that may have collected on the
static eliminator.)
[1]

F-12-60

3) Fix the grounding plate [2] in place using 2 screws [1].

F-12-61

D. Mounting the Fixing Assembly

1) Fit the fixing unit [1] to the machine frame.

12-25

Chapter 12

F-12-62

2) Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws [1].

F-12-63

3) Connect the 3 connectors [1].

F-12-64

4) Mount the harness cover [2] using a screw [1].

F-12-65

E. Mounting the Right Door

1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the protrusion.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found at the top of the right door on the hook on the machine side plate.

12-26

Chapter 12

F-12-66

3) Fix the mounting base [1] in place using 2 screws [3].

4) Connect the connector [4], and fit the reuse band [5] in place.

F-12-67

5) Mount the right cover (rear) using 5 screws.

Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (re).

12-27

Chapter 12

F-12-68

6) Close the right door.

12-28

Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments

Contents

Contents
13.1 Image Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Cassette .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray .................................................................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-3

13.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................................13-5

13.2.1 After Replacement of the CIS.................................................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM..................................................................................... 13-5

13.3 Laser Exposure System ..............................................................................................................................................13-6

13.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................................. 13-6

13.4 Image Formation System ...........................................................................................................................................13-7

13.4.1 After Replacing the Developing Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.4.2 After Replacing the Drum Unit (APVC correction) ................................................................................................................ 13-7

13.5 Electrical Components ...............................................................................................................................................13-8

13.5.1 After Replacing the HDD ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.5.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.5.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB............................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB............................................................................................................................ 13-8

13.6 Pickup/Feeding System............................................................................................................................................13-10

13.6.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Cassette ................................................................................... 13-10
13.6.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit............................................................................. 13-11
13.6.3 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration ................................................................................................. 13-11
13.6.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.............................................................................................................................. 13-12

Chapter 13

13.1 Image Adjustments

1.Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin

Adjust the registration in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST

13.1.1 Standards for Image Position

0007-4812

A print made at a magnification of 100% must meet the following standards for image margin/non-image width:

Decrease the REGIST setting.

(a decrease of '10' will
increase the margin by 1 mm)
1st side of copy : 2.5 1.5mm

Paper
leading edge

- Margin Along the Leading Edge

Increase the REGIST setting.

(an increase of '10' will
increase the margin by 1 mm)

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 2.0mm

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

F-13-5

2. Adjusting the Left/Right Image (1st side)

Mechanical Horizontal Registration Adjustment
3. Adding the Left/Right Image Margin (2nd side)
Adjust the horizontal registration in service mode.

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

- Small Size
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

F-13-1

- Left/Right Image Margin

Image left edge

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 2.0mm

Decrease the
AD-J-REFE setting.
(a decrease of '10' will
decrease the non-image
width by 1 mm)

Increase the
ADFJ-REFE value.
(an increase of '10' will
increase the non-image
width by 1 mm)
2nd side of
small-size
double-sided
copy : 2.5 2.0mm

2
4
5
6
8

0
10

F-13-2

4
5
6

- Leading Edge Non-Image Width

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

10

F-13-6

- Large Size (longer than A4/LTR in feed direction)

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-RE-L

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Paper left edge

F-13-3
Decrease the
ADJ-RE-L setting
(a decrease of '1' will
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm)

- Left/Right Non-Image Width

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

Increase the
ADJ-RE-L setting.
(an increase of '1' will
decrease the margin
by 0.1 mm)

2nd side of large-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6

0
2

4
5
6

10

F-13-4

13.1.2 Adjusting the Image Position

10

0007-4813

Using the source of paper indicated, make 10 prints each to see if the image margin and the non-image margin are as indicated:
[1] Cassettes
[2] Manual feed tray
[3] Side paper deck

F-13-7

4. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width

Use service mode to make adjustments:
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X

If not as indicated, adjust the image position as follows:

13-1

Chapter 13

Decrease the ADJ-X setting.

(a decrease of '10' will decrease
the non-image width by 1 mm)
1st side : 2.5 1.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided copy
: 2.5 1.5mm)

Image leading
edge
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20
Increase the ADJ-X setting.
(an increase of '10' will
increase the non-image
width by 1 mm)

F-13-8

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width

Use service mode to make adjustments:
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y

F-13-11

A-1. Adjusting the Cassette 1 (left/right image margin; 1st side)

4) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1].

Image edge
Decrease the value of ADJ-Y.
(a decrease of '10' will
decrease the non-image
width by 1 mm)

Increase the ADJ-Y setting.

(an increase of '10' will
increase the non-image
width by 1 mm)

2.5 1.5mm
(2nd side of
double-sided copy
: 2.5 1.5mm)

0
2
4
5
6
8

F-13-12

10

F-13-9

13.1.3 Cassette
0007-4907

A. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (1st side)

5) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the horizontal registration adjusting

plate [1] of the cassette.
6) While referring to the index you checked in step 3), move the
horizontal registration adjusting plate back and forth. (Moving the
plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left/right image
margin along the image front.)

1) Open the pedestal lower right cover [1] and lower right color [2];
then, remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the cover (lower front) [4].

[2]
[1]

[4]

7) Loosen the fixing screw.

8) Put the cassette 1 back in place.
9) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper, and check to
make sure that the marking is as indicated.
10) Fit the grip (right front) in place.
11) Mount the right front cover of the machine.

[3]

F-13-10

2) Take out the cassette 1 or 2.

(in the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, the cassette 3 or 4)
3) Check the index [1].
(the same applies to a 2-cassette pedestal.)

13-2

F-13-13

A-2. Adjusting the Cassette 2 (left/right image margin; 1st side)

4) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the horizontal registration adjusting
plate [1] of the cassette.
5) While referring to the index you checked in step 3), move the
horizontal registration adjusting plate back and forth. (Moving the
plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left/right image
margin along the image front.)

Chapter 13

Paper left edge

Decrease the
ADJ-REF-L setting.
(a decrease of '1'
will increase the
margin by 0.1 mm)

Increase the
ADJ-REF-L setting.
(an increase of '1'
will decrease the
margin by 0.1 mm)

2nd side of large-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6

F-13-14

6) Tighten the fixing screw.

7) Put the cassette 2 back in place.
8) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper, and check to
make sure that the margin is as indicated.
9) Mount the right front cover of the machine.
B. Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin (2nd side)
B-1. 2nd Side of Small-Size Paper (left/right image margin)
1) If the margin is not as indicated, change the setting of the 2nd side
left/right image margin of the cassette 1:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
An increase of '1' will decrease the left/right image margin along the
front side by 0.1 mm.

Paper left edge

Decrease the
ADJ-REFEsetting.
(a decrease of
'1' willdecrease
the margin by 0.1 mm)

Increase the ADJ-EFE setting.

(an increase of '1' will
increase the margin by
0.1 mm)

2nd side of small-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm

8
10

F-13-16

4) Record the new setting on the service label:

- ADJ-REFE
- ADJ-RE-L
5) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray

0007-4910

A. Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin (1st side; mechanical)

1) Put paper in the manual feed tray.
2) Make a copy using the manual feeder as the source of paper, and
check to be sure that the left/right image margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, make the following adjustments:
3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the upper over of the manual feed d
tray.

0
2
4
5
6
8
10

F-13-15

B-2. 2nd Side of Large-Size Paper (left/right image margin)

1) Enter the same ADJ-REFE:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
2) Make a double-sided copy using large-size paper, and check to make
sure that the marking is as indicated.
3) If not as indicated, change the adjustment value for the 2nd side right/
left image margin for large-size paper:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
An increase of '1' will decrease the left/right image margin on the front
side by 0.1 mm.

F-13-17

5) So that the margin is as indicated, move the top cover of the manual
feed tray back and forth.
Moving the top cover of the manual feed tray toward the rear of the
machine will decrease the left/right image margin along the front
side.
6) Tighten fixing screw on the top cover of the manual feed tray.
7) Put paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make a copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper, and
check to make sure that the margin is as indicated.

13.1.5 Side Paper Deck

0007-4911

1) Check to make sure that the 4 adjusters [1] of the pedestal of the host
machine are in contact with the floor.

13-3

Chapter 13

[1]

[1]
F-13-18

2) Connect the power plug of the host machine, and turned on the power
switch.
3) When the host machine has completed its wait period, open the machine using the paper deck as the source of paper to make sure that the
operation is normal.
A. Adjusting the Let/Right Image Margin (1s side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the paper deck as the source of paper, and check
to make sure that the left/right image margin in the image front direction
is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, go through the following:
2) Slide out the compartment.
3) Turn the 2 screws [2] to adjust the mounting position of the latch plate
[1] of the deck open solenoid (SL2D) found at the left rear.
At this time, use the index [3] of the latch plate as a reference.
[1]

F-13-19

13-4

[3]

[2]

Chapter 13

13.2 Scanning System

13.2.1 After Replacement of the CIS
0007-9838

Be sure to enter the value indicated on the CIS label attached to the contact image sensor (CIS) using the following service mode item:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
(main scanning direction MTR correction value)

1) Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the

P-PRINT page you have previously printed out.
@a. main scanning direction position adjustment (for stream reading)
@@COPIER>ADJSUT>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
@b. original stop position adjustment
@@FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
@c. original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
@@FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED
2)@Make adjustments using the following service mode items:
@a. Tray Width Adjustment
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR
@b. CIS Read Position Adjustment (for stream reading)
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRD-POS
@c. White Level Adjustment
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2
When you have made all the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
page [1] in the service book case, and dispose of the previous
printout.

XX

MTF-MG
F-13-20

Be sure also to update the value indicated on the service label found behind the left cover of the reader unit so that it is identical to the value
indicated on the CIS label.
Reference:
At time of shipment from the factory, no CIS label is attached.

13.2.2 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or

Initializing the RAM

F-13-21

0007-9839

- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to print out the
latest P-PRINT page.
<if you are executing RAM initialization for the reader controller without replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader controller, and
download it after initializing the RAM so that you need not perform the
following:
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>LEARN>R-CON. Then, press the OK key to initialize the RAM;
thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the following values in service mode:
@a. values indicated on the service label (found behind the left cover
of the reader unit)
a-1. CIS read position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2. main scanning direction position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3. shading position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4. main scanning direction MTF
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
If a value other than '0' is set before replacement of the reader
controller PCB (COPIER>FUNCTION>BODY>CCD-LUT), set a
value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments
using the D-10 Chart.
@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
2. ADF-Related Adjustments
The machine is designed to retain ADF-related service data in its
reader controller RAM. As such, if you have replaced the reader
controller or initialized the RAM, you will also have to make ADFrelated adjustments.

13-5

Chapter 13

13.3 Laser Exposure System

13.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
0007-5178

Enter the values recorded on the label on the laser scanner unit for the
following in service mode:
- COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY

13-6

Chapter 13

13.4 Image Formation System

13.4.1 After Replacing the Developing Unit
0007-5179

1) Execute the following service mode items:

- COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STIR-K
2) Initialize the following service mode items:
- COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DVG-CYL

A test copy that is made right after the toner has been stirred can be
soiled on its back with a small amount of stray toner. The symptom
will likely disappear when 3 or so copies are made.

13.4.2 After Replacing the Drum Unit (APVC

correction)
0007-5181

1) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main
power unit.
2) In the host machine's service mode, make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA.
3) Press the OK key.
- The machine will pick up paper from cassette 1 (regardless of the size
of the paper inside the cassette).
- If no paper exists in cassette 1, the machine will try to find paper in the
lower cassettes in order.
- The paper will be discharged blank to end APVC correction.
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

13-7

Chapter 13

13.5 Electrical Components

data from NSA once again to permit NSA to perform statistical operations.
If you have formatted the HDD and downloaded the system software,
you will have to go through a specific set of steps:

13.5.1 After Replacing the HDD

0007-8275

1) Format the HDD.

Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., while holding down the 2 and 8
keys, turn on the main power).
Using the HD format function of the SST, format all partitions ($); for
details, see the descriptions given for upgrading.
2) Download the system software.
Using the SST, download the following: LANGUAGE, RUI, PSFRONT, OCR dictionary, SSL coding key, SSL CA certificate,
MEAP content.
Keep in mind that the machine may take about 5 min to start up after
downloading.

13.5.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB

0007-4922

- Before replacing the DC controller PCB, print out the latest P-PRINT
page.
@@@COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software.
2) Using the following service mode item, initialize the memory of the
DC controller PCB:
@COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON
3) Using the following service mode items, enter the values indicated on
the P-PRINT page:
- COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY/ LA-OFF/ POWER
- COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST

1) Format the HDD.

2) Download the system software.
3) Make the following selections:
@COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
4) Enter a card No.
@Enter the first of the numbers that will be used for group control, and
press the OK key (e.g., if you are planning to use cards from No. 1 thorough No. 100, enter '1').
5) turn off and then on the main power.
6) Check the count control mechanism in user mode.
@system control setup>group ID control>count control
check to see as many as 'ID00000001 through ID00001000' have been
prepared.
7) Set the IP address in user mode.
@system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address
Set 'IP address', 'gateway address', and 'sub net mask'.
8) Enter a number of your choice in user mode.
@system administrator info setup>system control group ID>system
control ID No.
9) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
10) Go through the instructions on the control panel for shut-down sequence so that the main power switch may be turned off.
11) Turn off the main power switch. Wait for 3 sec or more, and turn it
back on.
Unless you have registered 'system control group ID' and 'system
control ID No.', you will not be able to register cards for the device in
the course of Net Spot Accountant setup work.

- COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ all items under

12) Download the card ID.

@Keep the machine in a standby state < and download the card ID to
be used from the NSA>
13) Check the count control particulars in user mode.
@system control setup>group ID control>count control
See that only the downloaded ID data is shown.
14) Check to see that the operation is normal.
Make copies using a user card that has been registered using the NSA,
and check to see that the count of the card in question has been incremented correctly.

- COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING all items under

13.5.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

- COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-T/BLANK-B
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-RPRI>OFST-DC/ OFST-AC
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR all items under
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ all items under

- COPIER>ADJUST>MISC all items under

4) Execute the following service mode items:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > D-GAMMA

0007-9843

13.5.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB

0007-5188

If you are replacing the main controller PCB, be sure to transfer the
following components from the old to new PCB:
[1]@boot ROM
[2]@HDD
[3]@image memory (SDRAM)
[4]@counter memory PCB

- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to print out the
latest P-PRINT page.
<if you are executing RAM initialization for the reader controller without replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader controller, and
download it after initializing the RAM so that you need not perform the
following:
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>LEARN>R-CON. Then, press the OK key to initialize the RAM;
thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the following values in service mode:
@a. values indicated on the service label (found behind the left cover
of the reader unit)
a-1. CIS read position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2. main scanning direction position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3. shading position adjustment (for fixed reading)
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4. main scanning direction MTF
@@@COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG

F-13-22

If the user uses NetSpot Accountant (NSA) in Combination with a

Card Reader
The SDRAM of the main controller retains card ID used by NSA. If you
have replaced the main controller, you will have to download the card

13-8

If a value other than '0' is set before replacement of the reader

controller PCB (COPIER>FUNCTION>BODY>CCD-LUT), set a
value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments
using the D-10 Chart.
@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
2. ADF-Related Adjustments
The machine is designed to retain ADF-related service data in its
reader controller RAM. As such, if you have replaced the reader
controller or initialized the RAM, you will also have to make ADFrelated adjustments.

Chapter 13

1) Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the

P-PRINT page you have previously printed out.
@a. main scanning direction position adjustment (for stream reading)
@@COPIER>ADJSUT>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
@b. original stop position adjustment
@@FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
@c. original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
@@FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED
2)@Make adjustments using the following service mode items:
@a. Tray Width Adjustment
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR
@@FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR
@b. CIS Read Position Adjustment (for stream reading)
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRD-POS
@c. White Level Adjustment
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1
@@COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2
When you have made all the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
page [1] in the service book case, and dispose of the previous
printout.

F-13-23

13-9

Chapter 13

13.6 Pickup/Feeding System

13.6.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When
Replacing the Cassette
0007-4923

- 1st Side Adjustment (mechanism)

1) Make a copy using the cassette 1/2, and check to make sure that the
front margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If the value is not as indicated for the cassette 1 or 2, make the following adjustments:

(-)

(+)
F-13-26

- Adjusting the Cassette 1

6) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1].
0
2
4
6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-13-24

2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2 is installed, open the right door [1] of the

pedestal.
3) Open the lower right cover [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the cover (lower front) [4].

F-13-27

7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].

8) While referring to the index you check in step 5), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the
machine will increase the margin along the image front.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]

F-13-25

4) Take out the cassette 1 or 2.

5) Check the index [1] of the adjusting plate.

F-13-28

9) Tighten the fixing screw.

10) Put the cassette 1 back into the machine.
11) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5
mm.
12) Fit the grip (right front) in place.
13) Mount the right front cover of the machine.
- Adjusting the Cassette 2
6) Loosen the fixing screws [2] on the horizontal registration adjusting
plate [1] of the cassette.
7) While referring to the index you checked in step 5), move the adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of
the machine will increase the margin along the image front.

13-10

Chapter 13

(-)

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10
F-13-29

2.52.0mm

8) Tighten the fixing screw.

9) Put the cassette 2 back in place.
10) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper, and check
to make sure that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5
mm.
11) Mount the right front cover.
- margin adjustment (2nd side; small-size)

F-13-31

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value for 2nd
side horizontal registration for large-size.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
An increase of '1' will decrease the margin on the front by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new setting on the service label.
- ADJ-RE-L

1) Make a double-sided copy (small-size) using the cassette you have

adjusted for the 1st side as the source of paper, and check to make sure
that the front margin is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

13.6.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When

Replacing the Duplex Unit

(-)

1) Make double-sided small- and large-size copies, and check to make

sure that the front margin is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm. A sheet is large-size if its
length in feed direction is longer than A4/LTR.

0007-4924

(+)

(-)

(+)

0
2
4

0
2

6
8
10

4
6

2.52.0mm
8
10

F-13-30

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the 2nd
side horizontal registration for small-size.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
An increase of '1' will decrease the margin at the front by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new setting on the service label.
- ADJ-REFE
- margin adjustment (2nd side; large-size; A4/LTR or longer in feed
direction)
1) Make a double-sided copy (large-size) using the cassette you have adjusted for the 1st side as the source of power, and check to make sure
that the front margin is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

2.52.0mm
F-13-32

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the 2nd
side horizontal registration for small-/large-size.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE(small-size)
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L(large-size)
An increases of '1' will decrease the margin at the front by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new setting on the service label.
- ADJ-REFE
- ADJ-RE-L

13.6.3 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal

Registration
0007-4925

- 1st Side (mechanical)

1) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
For instructions on how to place paper, see the label attached to the manual feeder assembly.
2) Make a copy using the manual feeder as the source of paper, and
check to make sure that the front margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

13-11

Chapter 13

(-)

3) Register the paper width basic value for A4 as follows:

3-1) Mach the manual feed guide against the A4 marking.
3-2) In service mode, select 'manual feed A4 width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4
3-3) Press the OK key to save the new A4 width.

(+)

4) Register the paper width basic value for A6R as follows:

4-1) Match the manual feed side guide against the A6R marking.
4-2) In service mode, select 'register A6R width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R
4-3) Press the OK key to save the new A6R width.

0
2
4

5) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

6) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
7) Go through the steps for the shut-down sequence shown on the control panel so that the main power switch may be turned off.
8) Turn off the main power switch.
9) Wait for 3 sec or more; then, turn the main power switch back on.
10) Print out the latest P-ROINT page in service mode.
11) Put the printed P-PRINT page [1] in the service book case, and dispose of the previous printout.

6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-13-33

- If the value is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:

3) Remove paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the top cover of the manual feed tray.
5) While referring to the index you checked in step 2), move the top
cover of the manual feed tray back and forth. Moving the top cover
of the manual feed tray toward the rear of the machine will increase
the front margin.

F-13-36

F-13-34

6) Tighten the fixing screw on the top cover of the manual feed tray.
7) Put paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make a copy using the manual feeder as the source of paper, and
check to make sure that the margin along the front is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

13.6.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value

0007-4926

1) Turn on the main power switch.

2) Register the paper width basic value for A4R as follows:
2-1) Match the manual feed side guide [1] against the A4R marking.

[1]

[1]
F-13-35

2-2) Start service mode, and select 'register manual feed d A4R width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4R
2-3) Press the OK key to save the new A4R width.

13-12

Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images

Contents

Contents
14.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items ............................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems ........................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.7 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2

14.2 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................14-3

14.2.1 Image Faults............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density ...........................................................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.2.1.1.1 Uneven Density in Sub Scanning Direction........................................................................................................................................14-3
14.2.1.1.2 Uneven Density Caused by Irregular Rotation of the Main Motor.....................................................................................................14-3
14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked..............................................................................................................................................................................14-4
14.2.1.2.1 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Dust on top cover of Developing Assembly .....14-4
14.2.1.2.2 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Foreign substances adhere to edge of Feeder Guide
14-5
14.2.1.2.3 Horizontal Line/Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm ........................................................................................................................14-5
14.2.1.2.4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction..............................................................................................................................................14-6
14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked.......................................................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.2.1.3.1 Stray Toner Along Fine Lines.............................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.2.1.3.2 Soiled Image Leading Edge ................................................................................................................................................................14-8
14.2.1.3.3 Black Dots ...........................................................................................................................................................................................14-9
14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory ..........................................................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.2.1.4.1 Ghost .................................................................................................................................................................................................14-10

14.2.2 Malfunction............................................................................................................................................................................ 14-11

14.2.2.1 No Power...................................................................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.2.2.1.1 Upon installation, machine does not start up / LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up: Poor
connection of ROM/RAM.............................................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.2.2.2 Noise .........................................................................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.2.2.2.1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette.......................................................................................................................................14-11

14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related........................................................................................................................................................ 14-12

14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem...............................................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.3.1.1 Latter half of image is lost when scanning and sending A3-size original from DF..........................................................................14-12

14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ.................................................................................................................................................... 14-12

14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.1 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts ......................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.2 Settings for not displaying "Mail Box" tab on LCD .........................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.3 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts..................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.4 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although same copy
ratio is set ......................................................................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.5 Applicable paper sizes.......................................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.6 How to clear "system administrator" password ................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.7 Applicable paper types ......................................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.4.1.8 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button...............................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.1.9 Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4: Necessary options when installing finisher .................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.1.10 Necessary options when expanding iR Security Kit-A2.................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.1.11 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as standard mode for stack bypass ...........14-13
14.2.4.1.12 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T ......................................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications .....................................................................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.2.1 Address cannot be deleted.................................................................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.3.1 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report........................................................................................................................14-13
14.2.4.3.2 How to output System Dump List.....................................................................................................................................................14-13

Contents

14.2.4.3.3 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary......................................................................................................................... 14-13

14.2.4.3.4 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once .................................................................. 14-14

14.3 Outline of Electrical Components ........................................................................................................................... 14-15

14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-15
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-15

14.3.2 Motor...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-15

14.3.2.1 Motors ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-15

14.3.3 Fan.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-17

14.3.3.1 Fans ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-17

14.3.4 Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-18

14.3.4.1 Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-18

14.3.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-21

14.3.5.1 Switches .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-21

14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................................................... 14-22

14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-24

14.3.7 PCBs ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-26

14.3.7.1 PCBs ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-26
14.3.7.2 PCBs ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-28

14.3.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................... 14-30
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ............................................................................................. 14-30
14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker .............................................................................................................................................. 14-30
14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 14-31

Chapter 14

14.1 Making lnitial Checks

14.1.1 Site Environment
0007-9383

a. There must be a source of power whose voltage is as specified (+/-10%). The power plug must never be disconnected day and night.
b. The machine must not be in an area subject to high humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier). The site must not be too cold or subject to
dust. The machine must not be near a source of fire.
c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
d. The machine must not be exposed to the rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be provided.
e. The area must be well ventilated. The machine must be on a level floor.
In addition, be sure that there is a source of power that can be used by the machine at all times.

14.1.2 Checking the Paper

0007-9384

a. Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon.

b. Be sure that the paper is not moist. Try using paper fresh out of package.

14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper

0007-9385

a. There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited within a specific limit.
b. If transparencies are used, be sure that they are placed in the manual feed tray in the correct orientation.

14.1.4 Checking the Durables

0007-9386

Refer to the table of durables, and replace those that have reached the end of their lives.

14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items

0007-9387

Refer to the periodical servicing chart and the table of periodically replaced parts. As necessary, clean or replace parts.

14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems

0007-9388

Reader Unit
- Check the scanner unit (contact sensor, white plate, copyboard glass) for scratches, dirt, and foreign matter.
- Check the contact sensor unit to see if it moves smoothly and if it is free of dirt.
- Check to see if the contact sensor is free of flickering.
- Check to see that the scanner system is free of condensation.
Process Components
- Check to see that the drum unit and the developing unit are properly fitted.
- Check to see that the photosensitive drum is free of scratches and dirt.
Transfer Components
- Check to see that the transfer roller is free of wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
Fixing Assembly
- Check to see if the fixing film and the pressure roller are free of wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check to see that the fixing thermistor is free of an open circuit.
- Check to see if the thermal switch is free of disruption in its electrical continuity.
Paper Feed System
- Check to make sure that there is no paper lint or foreign matter.
- Check to make sure that there is no buildup of paper around the pickup, feed, and separation rollers. See that they are free of wear, scratches, dirt, and
deformation.
- Check to make sure that the paper is free of a bent leading edge and is free of curling, waving, and excess moisture.
- Try using paper and transparency of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem is corrected.
Mechanical
- Check to make sure that the load imposed on the drive system is not more than permitted.
- Check to make sure that the gears are free of wear and chipping.
Cassette
- Check to see that the cassette is correctly fitted. Check to see that the paper size is correctly set. Try replacing with a fault-free cassette to see if the problem
is corrected.
- Check to see that the movement of the holding plate of the cassette is normal and the plate is free of deformation.
- Check to see that the side guide plate and the rear guide plate of the cassette are fitted correctly.
- Check to see if the switch of the cassette heater is turned on (only if a cassette heater is mounted).
Service Mode
- Check to see that the various adjustment settings of the CCD are as indicated on the service label.
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check to see if registration adjustment is executed.
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED>ADJ>REGIST)
- Check to see if the image read start position adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y)
- Check to see if the setting of ADJUST/OPTION is identical to that indicated on the service label.
- Check to see if all errors have been reset.

14-1

Chapter 14
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR-ERR)
General
- Check to see if the power plug is securely connected.
- Check to see if the power outlet provides a specific level of AC voltage.
- Check to see that that the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids are operating normally and all connectors are connected securely. (Be sure to check
the power supply and signal routes by referring to the general circuit diagram.)
- Check to see that the leakage breaker and circuit breaker are operating normally.
- Check to see that there is no biting of wires and loosening of screws.
- Check to see that all external panels and covers have been correctly fitted.
- Check to see that the main power switch and the control panel power switch are turned on.
- Check to see that the power and signal cables are correctly routed.
- Check to see that the operation of the cover switch is normal.
- Check to see that none of the fuses on the PCBs have an open circuit.
- Check to see that the user has a correct understanding of how to use the machine and is using it correctly.

14.1.7 Others
0007-9389

If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems.
a. condensation on the BD sensor is likely to cause problems associated with E100
b. condensation on the dust-proof glass is likely to cause poor image density in sub scanning direction
c. condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause light images
d. condensation on the pickup or feed guide can cause paper feed problems
If the problem given in d. above has occurred, dry wipe the units in the feed system. Do not open the package containing a toner cartridge, developing unit,
or drum unit right after it has been brought in from a cold to warm place to avoid condensation. Be sure to leave it alone for a while (1 to 2 hr), opening it
after it has become fully used to the temperature of the site.

14-2

Chapter 14

14.2 Troubleshooting
14.2.1 Image Faults
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density
14.2.1.1.1 Uneven Density in Sub Scanning Direction
0007-7464

<Description>
This fault can occur when the machine is left alone for about 10 min to 5 hr without removing a paper jam.
<Cause>
When a paper jam occurs, the machine forces the main motor to stop, thus stopping the operation without removing charges from the surface of the photosensitive drum. If the machine is left alone for a long time with the surface potential of its photosensitive drum uneven, potential memory tends to occur
within a layer of the photosensitive drum, ultimately resulting in uneven density in sub scanning direction.
<Field Remedy>
To rid the surface of the photosensitive drum of potential memory, leave the machine alone for 30 min after removing the jam. There is no specific instructions as to how it may be left alone.
<Image Sample>

F-14-1

14.2.1.1.2 Uneven Density Caused by Irregular Rotation of the Main Motor

0007-9967

<Symptom>

14-3

Chapter 14
Uneven density at specific intervals tends to occur in sub scanning direction (from leading edge to trailing edge in relation to paper movement) when the
main motor starts to rotate irregularly.
- iR2270/2870
intervals of about 3.5 mm
- iR3570/4570
intervals of about 6.3 mm
To facilitate a check, use a halftone test pattern.
<Remedy>
Replace the main motor.

14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked

14.2.1.2.1 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Dust on top cover of Developing Assembly
0008-3408

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Description
As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because the laser light was intercepted by dust on the top cover of the developing assembly.
If the symptom occurs, remove the developing assembly and clean its top cover referring to the Service Manual [Maintenance and Inspection > Cleaning
> Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide].

F-14-2

14-4

Chapter 14
14.2.1.2.2 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Foreign substances adhere to edge of Feeder
Guide
0008-3472

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Description
As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because foreign substances on the edge of the feed guide of the developing assembly came
into contact with the surface of the drum. If the symptom occurs, clean the feed guide referring to the Service Manual [Maintenance and Inspection > Cleaning > Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide].

F-14-3

14.2.1.2.3 Horizontal Line/Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm

0007-7091

<Cause>
The coefficient of friction on the surface of the photosensitive drum where the edge of the cleaning blade remains in contact tends to change, causing uneven rotation and thus blurring.
This problem tends to occur during the initial period of use (less than 10K), when the coefficient of friction is relatively even, or when a halftone image is
generated after leaving the machine alone for 1 to 2 days. This problem, on the other hand, tends to disappear when about 10 printouts are made.
This problem can also occur when the drum unit is taken out of and put back in the machine, with the edge of the cleaning blade forcing itself against the
surface of the photopositive drum and increasing the friction.
<Field Remedy>
Make about 10 copies of the Test Chart.
<Image Sample>

14-5

Chapter 14

F-14-4

14.2.1.2.4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction

0007-7465

<Cause>
The presence of foreign matter inside the developing assembly can make its way to the developing cylinder, preventing toner from being evenly deposited
on the cylinder and, thus causing white lines.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the Developing Assembly
<Image Sample>

14-6

Chapter 14

F-14-5

<Note>
If you remove the right door or the drum unit when replacing the fixing assembly and work with the developing assembly inside the machine, the developing cylinder will remain exposed and become subjected to dust or other foreign matter. For this reason, it is important to remove the developing assembly
as well as the drum unit when disassembling and assembling the image formation or fixing system. This, however, does not apply if you are simply replacing the drum unit.
If you have removed the developing assembly, be sure to place it on a clean sheet of paper to protect it from dust.

14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked
14.2.1.3.1 Stray Toner Along Fine Lines
0007-7083

<Cause>
The moisture held in paper evaporates in response to the heat from the fixing assembly, thus causing toner to fly astray. This problem tends to occur when
paper has low resistance and in a high temperature/high humidity environment.
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias, thus suppressing the symptom:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-SMR
0: default
1: decrease the developing bias by a single step (-20 V)
2: decrease the developing bias by 2 steps (-40 V)
If '2' is selected, the lines can become thinner.
<Image Sample>

14-7

Chapter 14

F-14-6

14.2.1.3.2 Soiled Image Leading Edge

0007-7089

<Cause>
This problem occurs when paper moves between the photosensitive drum and the transfer roller. When the photopositive surface comes close to or into
contact with the toner-coated surface of paper, the toner layer can become shifted toward the trailing edge of the paper. This problem tends to be conspicuous when the toner layer is relatively high against the width of lines (about 0.2 to 0.6 mm) and, in addition, when the lines are at a right angle to the feed
direction (axial direction of the photosensitive drum).
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias, thus suppressing the symptom:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-SMR
0: default
1: decrease the developing bias by a single step (-20 V)
2: decrease the developing bias by 2 steps (-40 V)
If '2' is selected, the lines can become thinner.
<Image Sample>

14-8

Chapter 14

F-14-7

14.2.1.3.3 Black Dots

0007-7093

<Cause>
On some types of paper (especially those with a high calcium carbonate content), toner offset to the fixing film can start to cake, moving from the fixing
film or the pressure roller to the face or back of paper.
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to change the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-CLN
0: disable cleaning (default)
1: execute cleaning during last rotation every 500 printouts
2: execute cleaning during last rotation every 200 printouts
3: execute cleaning during last rotation every 100 printouts
<Image Sample>

14-9

Chapter 14

F-14-8

14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory
14.2.1.4.1 Ghost
0007-7096

<Cause>
This problem tends to occur when there are both residual toner and fresh toner on the developing cylinder and, thus, difference in charge between these
two kinds of toner.
<Field Remedy>
Make several copies of a solid image.
<Image Sample>

14-10

Chapter 14

F-14-9

14.2.2 Malfunction
14.2.2.1 No Power
14.2.2.1.1 Upon installation, machine does not start up / LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up:
Poor connection of ROM/RAM
0008-3477

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Field Remedy
In inspection, reinsertion of the ROM corrected the symptoms. If any of the symptoms mentioned above occurs during installation, reinsert the BOOTROM
or the RAM.

14.2.2.2 Noise
14.2.2.2.1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette
0007-7052

<Cause>
When double-feeding occurs at time of pickup, the contact between the sheets and the feed roller and the separation roller cause the separation roller assembly to vibrate.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the roller with a sponge retard roller (FB5-0873; to be used as needed; cassette only).

14-11

Chapter 14

14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related
14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem
14.2.3.1.1 Latter half of image is lost when scanning and sending A3-size original from DF
0009-2432

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Description
As a result of inspection, the following was found: When an A3-size original with sharp folds is set in the document feeder (DF), the machine detects
it as A4-size and scans the corresponding area. This is because the latter half of the original is folded and fails to come into contact with the document
length sensor flag on the DF, consequently preventing the length sensor from detecting the original as large size.
When scanning an original with sharp folds from the DF, remove the folds or place it on the copyboard glass. Moreover, the use of the Preview
button on the LCD before scanning enables you to check whether the full image of the original is scanned. Please explain these to your customer.

14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ

14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications
14.2.4.1.1 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0009-2407

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts are calculated from the following equation: (L x D / C) - D
D: Days between installation of the host machine (or part replacement) and to date, C: Counter, L: Limit (life of the parts)
Note that the remaining days are just reference because they are predicated on that the host machine will be continuously used at the same pace as
before.
14.2.4.1.2 Settings for not displaying "Mail Box" tab on LCD
0009-2408

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
You can select in service mode whether or not the operation panel for the mail box functions is displayed. In order not to display it, change the
setting in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-BOX], set it to "0" (not display). Then, turn the control panel switch OFF and
turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
14.2.4.1.3 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0009-2409

[ Manual-related ]
Description
In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC] and [COPIER> Counter> DRBL-1/DRBL-2], the rightmost reading for each consumable parts
indicates how many days are left before the next replacement.
14.2.4.1.4 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although same
copy ratio is set
0009-2412

[ Manual-related ]
Description
In the "Zoom by Percentage" function, originals can be reduced or enlarged in an integer magnification which is set on the LCD. In the "Preset Zoom"
function, on the other hand, all the preset buttons on the LCD show an integer: however, rescale of the original is done at the decimal level. This is
the reason why the size of the output image differs between those functions. This is true for other models.
14.2.4.1.5 Applicable paper sizes
0009-2414

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper sizes that can be loaded in each paper input:
a. Cassette: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
b. Manual Feed Tray: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, Postcard A6R Modified, Double Postcard A5R
Modified, A4 Modified, Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
c. Side Paper Deck-Q1: A4, LTR
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Introduction > Product Specifications > Function List > Types of Paper].
14.2.4.1.6 How to clear "system administrator" password
0009-2416

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR], press the OK key. Then, turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power
OFF/ON.
14.2.4.1.7 Applicable paper types
0009-2418

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper types that can be loaded in each paper input:
a. Cassette: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), Heavy Paper (81-128g), OHT, 3-Hole Paper, Tracing Paper, Envelope
b. Manual Feed Tray: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), Heavy Paper (81-128g), OHT, Postcard, 4-Plane Postcard, Label Paper, 3Hole Paper, Tracing Paper, Envelope
c. Side Paper Deck-Q1: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), 3-Hole Paper

14-12

Chapter 14
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Introduction > Product Specifications > Function List > Types of Paper].
14.2.4.1.8 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button
0009-2419

[ Manual-related ]
Description
If [Stack Bypass Standard Settings] is set at [On], the button [Stack Bypass Settings] does not work. In such a case, in user mode [Common Settings>
Stack Bypass Standard Settings], select [Off].
14.2.4.1.9 Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4: Necessary options when installing finisher
0009-2422

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following options are necessary depending on model when installing the finisher.
230V machine of iR2870/2270
- Buffer Path Unit-E1
- Accessories Power Supply-P2
- 3 Way Unit-A1
230V machine of iR4570/3570 and 120V machine of all models
- Buffer Path Unit-E1
- Accessories Power Supply-P2
14.2.4.1.10 Necessary options when expanding iR Security Kit-A2
0009-2424

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following options are necessary when expanding the iR Security Kit-A2 (License).
- Expansion Bus-B1
- USB Application Interface Board-D1
14.2.4.1.11 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as standard mode for stack bypass
0009-2426

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings> On> Register], select any paper size and paper type.
Once the above setting is done, it is unnecessary to select the size and type for stack bypass. So, it is convenient if the customer always uses paper
of the same size and same type for stack bypass.
14.2.4.1.12 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T
0009-2428

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Ethernet Driver Settings> Auto Detect], select [Off]. Then, select [10BASE-T] for [Ethernet
Type].

14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications

14.2.4.2.1 Address cannot be deleted
0009-2405

[ Manual-related ]
Description
An address cannot be deleted if it is registered in one-touch button or as a group. In such a case, delete the address from one-touch button or the
group in advance.

14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications

14.2.4.3.1 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report
0009-2410

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> SSSW> SW01> bit0], set it at "1".
14.2.4.3.2 How to output System Dump List
0009-2411

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> REPORT> DUMP], press the OK key to output the system dump list.
14.2.4.3.3 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary
0009-2425

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When you want to print the FAX Activity Report at a timing other than the specified times or every 40 transmissions,
select [Send screen > System Monitor > Fax > Log] and press "Print List."

14-13

Chapter 14
14.2.4.3.4 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once
0009-2429

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ADRS-BK > OK], then turn the control panel power switch off and switch on the main power
of the machine again.

14-14

Chapter 14

14.3 Outline of Electrical Components

14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids
0007-6833

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a clutch or solenoid.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-1
Notation
CL1

Name

Description

Remarks

manual feed pickup clutch

drives the manual feed pickup

roller

CL2

registration clutch

drives the registration roller

CL3

developing sleeve clutch

drives the developing sleeve

CL6

duplex feed clutch

drives the duplex roller 1/2

SL1

cassette 1 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 1 pickup roller

SL2

cassette 2 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 2 pickup roller

iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F

T-14-2
Notation

PART-CHK

DC controller PCB

CL1

FH6-5076

Parts No.

CL>1

J306

CL2

FH6-5075(iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F)
FK2-0361(iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F)

CL>2

J313

CL3

FK2-0404

CL>3

J313

CL6

FH6-5005

CL>4

J306

SL1

FK2-0408

SL>1

J308

SL2

FK2-0408

SL>2

J318

CL3

CL2
CL6
CL1

SL1
SL2
F-14-10

14.3.2 Motor
14.3.2.1 Motors
0007-6835

<Reader Unit>

14-15

Chapter 14
T-14-3
Notation

Name

M501

Description

reader motor

drives the carriage

T-14-4
Notation

Parts No.

Reader controller
PCB

Error

M501

FH5-1028

J505

E202

M501

F-14-11

<Printer Unit>
T-14-5
Notation

Name

Description

Remarks

M1

polygon motor

drives the laser scanner

M2

main motor

drives the major components of the

printer unit

M3

fixing motor

drives the fixing assembly

M4

delivery motor 1

drives the delivery roller

M5

bottle rotation motor

drives the rotation of the bottle

M6

cassette 1 pickup motor

drives the pickup unit 1

M7

cassette 2 pickup motor

drives the pickup unit 2

M10

duplex feed motor

drives the duplex roller 1/2

M12

hopper motor

drives the hopper

iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F

T-14-6

14-16

Notation

Parts No.

PART-CHK

DC controller
PCB

M1

scanner unit
FM2-0276(iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F)

MTR>1

J316

E110

M2

FK2-0385(iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0362
(iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F)

MTR>2

J312

E010

M3

FK2-0367

MTR>3

J311,J319

E014

M4

FK2-0365

MTR>4

J305

M5

FK2-0015

MTR>5

J302A

M6

FK2-0377

MTR>6

J307A

M7

FK2-0377

MTR>7

J307A

M10

FL2-3266

MTR>8

306

Error

E025

Chapter 14

Notation
M12

Parts No.

PART-CHK

DC controller
PCB

MTR>9

J302A

FK2-0379

Error
E025

M3

M10
M2
M6
M7
M5

M4

M12

M1

F-14-12

14.3.3 Fan
14.3.3.1 Fans
0007-6836

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a fan.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-7
Notation

Name

Description

FM1

heat discharge fan (front)

discharges heat from the fixing unit

FM2

heat discharge fan (rear)

discharges heat from the fixing unit

T-14-8
Notation

DC controller PCB

Error

FM1

FK2-0360

Parts No.

P020-6

I/O
1:ON

J307B

E805

FM2

FK2-0360

P023-2

1:ON

J307B

E805

14-17

Chapter 14

FM2
FM1

F-14-13

14.3.4 Sensor
14.3.4.1 Sensors
0007-6837

<Reader Unit>
T-14-9
Notation

Name

Description

PS501

copyboard cover open/closed

sensor (rear)

detects the state (open/closed) of the

copyboard cover

PS502

copyboard cover open/closed

sensor (front)

detects the state (open/closed) of the

copyboard cover

PS503

CIS HP sensor

detects the CIS home position

PS504

original sensor 1

detects original size (AB, Inch/A, Inch/AB)

PS505

original sensor 2

detects original size (AB, A, Inch/AB)

PS506

original sensor 3

detects original size (for all countries)

PS507

original sensor 4

detects original size (AB, Inch/AB)

PS508

original sensor 5

detects original size (Inch/A)

CIS1

CIS

reads originals

T-14-10
Notation

14-18

Parts No.

I/O

Reader controller
PCB

Jam/error code

PS501

WG8-5624

P006-7

1: copyboard cover closed

J506

PS502

WG8-5624

P006-5

1: copyboard cover closed

J506

0090, 0091

PS503

WG8-5624

P006-6

1: HP

J506

E202

PS504

FH7-7569

P004-0

0: original present

J507

PS505

FH7-7569

P004-1

0: original present

J507

PS506

FH7-7569

P004-2

0: original present

J508

PS507

FH7-7569

P004-3

0: original present

J508

PS508

FH7-7569

P004-3

0: original present

J508

CIS1

FL2-2997

J510

E225

Chapter 14

PS508
PS507
PS506
PS502
PS501
PS504
PS505
CIS1
PS503

F-14-14

<Printer Unit>
T-14-11
Notation
PS1

Name

Description

cassette 1 paper sensor

detects the presence/absence of cassette 1

PS2

cassette 2 paper sensor

detects the presence/absence of cassette 2

PS3

cassette 1 paper level sensor A

detects paper level A in cassette 1

PS4

cassette 1 paper level B sensor

detects paper level B in cassette 1

PS5

cassette 2 paper level A sensor

detects paper level A in cassette 2

PS6

cassette 2 paper level B sensor

detects paper level B in cassette 2

PS7

manual feeder paper sensor

detects paper in the manual feeder

PS8

fixing film speed sensor

detects the speed of the fixing film

PS9

pre-registration sensor

detects paper before registration

PS10

cassette 1 retry sensor

detects pickup retry in cassette 1

PS11

cassette 2 retry sensor

detects pickup retry in cassettes 2

PS13

fixing outlet sensor

detects paper at the fixing outlet

PS14

No. 1 delivery sensor

detects delivery

PS15

No. 1 delivery full sensor

detects a delivery full condition

PS16

waste toner sensor

detects a waste toner full condition

PS17

duplex feed sensor

detects duplex feed

PS18

feed cover sensor

detects the feed cover state

PS22

front cover sensor

detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover

HU1

environment sensor

detects the machine inside temperature

TS1

developing assembly toner sensor

detects the toner inside the developing assembly

TS2

sub hopper toner sensor

detects the tone inside the sub hopper

TH1

fixing main thermistor

detects the temperature of the fixing heater

TH2

fixing sub thermistor

detects the temperature of the fixing heater

TH3

drum thermistor

detects the temperature of the drum

TP1

thermal switch

cuts off the power to the heater in response to overheating

T-14-12
I/O

DC controller
PCB

Notation

Parts No.

PS1

FH7-7312

P028-5

1: paper absent

J308

PS2

FH7-7312

P019-5

1: paper absent

J318

JAM

14-19

Chapter 14

DC controller
PCB

Notation

Parts No.

PS3

FH7-7312

P028-6

1: level about 50% or less

J308

PS4

FH7-7312

P028-7

1: level about 50 sheets or

less

J308

PS5

FH7-7312

P019-6

1: level about 50% or less

J318

FH7-7312

P019-7

1: level about 50 sheets or

less

J318

PS7

FH7-7312

P021-0

0: paper present

PS8

FM2-2769

PS6

I/O

JAM

J307B
J303

PS9

FK2-0149

P027-1

1: paper present

J313

xx05

PS10

FH7-7312

P030-4

1: detected

J308

xx01

PS11

FH7-7312

P019-4

1: detected

J318

xx02

PS13

FK2-0149

P029-2

1: paper present

J303

xx07

PS14

FK2-0149

P029-0

1: paper present

J305

xx08

PS15

FK2-0149

P029-1

0: paper present

J305

PS16

FK2-0149

P023-4

0: full

J302B

PS17

FK2-0149

P021-2

1: paper present

J307B

PS18

FH7-7312

J308

PS22

FK2-0149

J302B

HU1

FK2-0160

J302A

TS1

FK2-0358

J302B

TS2

FK2-0358

J302A

T-14-13
Notation
TH1,TH2
TP1

Parts No.
fixing film unit
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F
FM2-0293(100V)
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-0359(230V)

DC controller PCB

J202

iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F
FM2-1792(100V)
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-1794(230V)
TH3

14-20

FM2-2776

AC driver PCB

J304

J302A

Chapter 14

PS8

TH3

TS2

TH1, TH2
TP1
PS13

PS10

PS1
PS22
PS3

TS1

PS4
PS14

PS18

PS15
PS11
PS17

PS2
PS5
PS6

PS7

PS16

PS9
HU1

F-14-15

14.3.5 Switch
14.3.5.1 Switches
0007-6838

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a switch.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-14
Notation

Name

Description

SW1

main power switch

turns on/off the main power switch

SW2

door switch

checks the right door

SW5

environment heater switch

turns on/off the environment heater (option)

T-14-15
Notation

Parts No.

SW1

FK2-0140

SW2

FK2-0384

SW5

WC1-5182

DC controller PCB

AC driver PCB
J201

J309

14-21

Chapter 14

SW1
SW5

SW2

F-14-16

14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
0007-6839

<Reader Unit>
T-14-16
Notation

Name

Parts No.

Description

H5

reader heater (left)

NPN

prevents condensation on the reading glass

H6

reader heater (right)

NPN

prevents condensation on the copyboard glass

LCD panel

FL2-1092

display on the control panel (touch panel)

LCD1

H6
H5

LCD1

F-14-17

<Printer Unit>
T-14-17
Notation

14-22

Name

Description

H1

fixing main heater

fixing main heater

H2

fixing sub heater

fixing sub heater

Chapter 14

Notation

Name

Description

H4

cassette heater

prevents absorption of moisture by the paper inside the cassette

H7

deck heater

prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck

ELCB1

leakage breaker (100V)

leakage breaker

ELCB2

leakage breaker (230V)

leakage breaker

LA1

pre-exposure lamp

removes residual charges from the drum

VA1

varistor

varistor

HDD1

hard disk

stores programs and image data

SVR1

paper width detecting VR

detects the width of paper in the manual feeder

speaker

speaker (fax unit)

SP1

T-14-18
Notation

H1,H2

Parts No.
fixing film unit
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F
FM2-0293(100V)
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-0359(230V)

H4

FK2-0375(100V)
FK2-0376(230V)

H7

NPN(100V)
FH7-4585(230V)

ELCB1

FH7-7626

ELCB2

FH7-7625

fixing film unit

iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F
FM2-1792(100V)
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-1794(230V)

T-14-19
Notation

Parts No.

LA1

FK2-0368

VA1

FL2-3265

HDD1

WM2-5216

SVR1

FM2-2768

SP1

FM2-0342

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
J302B

J1026
J302B

14-23

Chapter 14

H7

HDD1

H1, H2
LA1
ELCB1
ELCB2

SVR1

H4

VA1
SP1

F-14-18

14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

0009-2918

<Reader Unit>
T-14-20
Notation

Parts No.

Name

Description

H5

Reader heater (left)

NPN

Prevents condensation on the reading glass

(100, 230 V)

H6

Reader heater (right)

NPN

Prevents condensation on the platen board

glass (100, 230 V)

LCD panel

FH6-0735

Control panel indication (touch panel)

LCD1

H6
H5

LCD1

F-14-19

<Printer Unit>
T-14-21
Notation
H1

14-24

Name
Fixing main heater

Description
Fixing main heater

Chapter 14

Notation
H2

Name

Description

Fixing sub heater

Fixing sub heater

H4

Cassette heater

Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette

H7

Deck heater

Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck

ELCB1

Leakage breaker (100 V)

Leakage breaker

ELCB2

Leakage breaker (230 V)

Leakage breaker

LA1

Pre-exposure lamp

Removes residual charge from the drum

VA1

Varistor

Varistor

HDD1
*1

Hard disk

SVR1

Paper-width detection volume

Manual feed paper-width detection

Speaker

Speaker(FAX unit)

SP1

Program, Image storage

*1 A hard disk(HDD1) is an optional in iR2230/2830/3530.

T-14-22
Name

H1,H2

H4

Parts No.
Fixing film unit
iR2230/2230F/2830
FM2-0293(100V)
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-0359(230V)

Fixing film unit

iR3530
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-1794(230V)

FK2-0375(100V)
FK2-0376(230V)

ELCB1

FH7-7626

ELCB2

FH7-7625

T-14-23
Notation

Parts No.

LA1

FK2-0368

VA1

FL2-3265

HDD1

WM2-5216

SVR1

FM2-2768

SP1

FM2-0342

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB
J302B

J1026
J302B

14-25

Chapter 14

HDD1

H1, H2
LA1
ELCB1
ELCB2

SVR1

H4

VA1
SP1

F-14-20

14.3.7 PCBs
14.3.7.1 PCBs
0007-9881

<Reader Unit>
T-14-24
Name
[1]

Part No.

Description

reader controller PCB

FG3-3765

controls the reader unit/ADF

[2]

control panel CPU PCB

FG6-8938

controls the control panel

[3]

control pen key PCB

FG3-2834

controls the inputs from the keypad keys

[4]

control panel inverter PCB

FG6-8939

controls the activation of the backlight of

the LCD

[1]

[3]
[4]
[2]

F-14-21

<Printer Unit>
T-14-25
Name
[2]

14-26

cassette 1 size detection PCB

Parts No.
FM2-2770

Description
detects the size of cassette 1

Chapter 14

Name

Parts No.

[3]

cassette 2 size detection PCB

FM2-2770

Description
detects the size of cassette 2

[4]

cassette size detection relay PCB

FM2-2771

relays data for cassette size

[5]

pseudo-CI PCB

FM2-2773

generates the pseudo CI signal

[6]

BD PCB

scanner unit
FM2-0276(iR2270/
2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/
3570F/4570/4570F)

generates the BD signal

[7]

NCU PCB

FM2-2790

controls the line switching operation

[9]

fax board PCB

FM2-2789

control the fax unit

[10]

laser driver PCB

scanner unit
FM2-0276(iR2270/
2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/
3570F/4570/4570F)

controls the laser unit drive

[11]

G3 fax power supply PCB

FM2-0860

G3 fax power supply

[12]

modular PCB

FM2-0343

line I/F

[13]

high-voltage power supply PCB

FM2-0261

high-voltage power supply

[14]

printer power supply PCB

main power supply PCB printer power supply

unit
FM2-0245

[15]

controller power supply PCB

FM2-2764

[16]

AC driver PCB

main power supply PCB AC drive

FM2-0245

[17]

accessories power supply PCB

FK2-0339

accessorizes power supply

[18]

environment switch PCB

FG3-2797

heater power supply switch

[19]

DC controller PCB

FM2-2767

controls the printer unit/accessory

[20]

main controller PCB

FM2-3226

processes output image data for the

printer unit
connection interface

controller PCB

[21]

expansion bus PCB

FM2-2804

[22]

USB board

FM2-3010

USB interface

[23]

all-night power supply PCB

FK2-0341

supplies power thorough day and night

14-27

Chapter 14

[2]
[3]
[10]
[11]
[9]

[4]
[6]

[20]
[5]
[7]

[19]

[22]
[13]
[21]

[12]

[18]
[15]

[23]
[17]
[16]
[14]

F-14-22

14.3.7.2 PCBs
0009-2934

<Reader Unit>
T-14-26
Ref.

14-28

Name

Parts No.

Function

[1]

Reader controller PCB

FG3-3765

Controls the reader unit/ADF.

[2]

Control panel inverter PCB

FM2-2753

Controls the activation of the LCD back

light.

[3]

Control panel CPU PCB

FM2-2754

Controls the control panel.

[4]

Control panel key PCB

FG6-8939

Controls the keypad inputs.

Chapter 14

[1]

[4]
[3]

[2]

F-14-23

<Printer Unit>
T-14-27
Ref.

Name

Parts No.

Description

[1]

Arrestor PCB (100 V)

FM2-2973

Protects against high voltage.

[2]

Cassette 1 size detection PCB

FM2-2770

Cassette 1 size detection

[3]

Cassette 2 size detection PCB

FM2-2770

Cassette 2 size detection

[4]

Cassette size detection relay PCB

FM2-2771

Cassette size detection relay

[5]

Pseudo CI PCB

FM2-2773

Pseudo CI signal generation

[6]

BD PCB

Scanner unit
FM2-0276(iR2230/2230F/
2830)
FM2-0334(iR3530)

BD signal generation

[7]

NCU PCB

FM2-2790

Line switch control

[9]

Fax board PCB

FM2-2789

Fax unit control

[10]

Laser driver PCB

Scanner unit
FM2-0276(iR2230/2230F/
2830)
FM2-0334(iR3530)

Laser unit drive control

[11]

G3 fax power supply PCB

FM2-0860

G3 fax power supply

[12]

Modular PCB

FM2-0343

Line I/F

[13]

High-voltage power supply PCB

FM2-0261

High-voltage power supply

[14]

Printer power supply PCB

Main power supply PCB unit

FM2-0260(100/115V)
FM2-02458(230V)

Printer power supply

[15]

Controller power supply PCB

FM2-2764

Controller power supply

[16]

AC driver PCB

Main power supply PCB unit

FM2-0260(100/115V)
FM2-02458(230V)

AC drive

[17]

Accessories power supply PCB

FK2-0338(100/115V)
FK2-0339(230V)

Accessories power supply

[18]

Environment switch PCB (100, 230 FG3-2797

V)

Heater power switch

[19]

DC controller PCB

FM2-2767

Controls the printer unit/accessories.

[20]

Main controller PCB

FM2-3226

Processes image data for output to

the printer unit.

[21]

Expansion bus PCB

FM2-2804

Interface

[22]

USB board

FM2-3010

USB interface

[23]

Uninterruptive power supply PCB

FK2-0340(100/115V)
FK2-0341(230V)

Supplies uninterruptive power.

14-29

Chapter 14

[11]

[2]

[9]

[3]
[10]
[5]

[4]

[7]

[6]

[20]

[19]

[22]
[13]
[21]

[12]

[18]
[15]

[23]
[17]

[1]
[16]
[14]

F-14-24

14.3.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
0007-6841

Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins found in the machine, those that are needed when servicing the machine in the
field are discussed.
- Some LEDs carry current and emit light when they are off; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
- Take note of the following:
...VR that may be used in the field.
...VR that must not be used in the field.

14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker

0007-7795

Points to Note When Checking the Output of a PCB

Normally, an AC voltage is applied to the terminal of the leakage breaker [1].
Take care not to touch it when making a check.

14-30

Chapter 14

F-14-25

14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB

0007-6843

J691

J692 J693

VR201

J601

F-14-26
T-14-28

Notation

Description

VR201

for factory use

14-31

Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis

Contents

Contents
15.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Error Code................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.2 Error Code Details .....................................................................................................................................................15-3

15.2.1 Error Code Details ................................................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.2 E602 in Detaill ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.2.3 Error Code Detailstest for A4 size................................................................................................................................... 15-14

15.3 Error Code (SEND)..................................................................................................................................................15-19

15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis....................................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.3.2 Error Codes ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-20

15.4 Jam Code..................................................................................................................................................................15-25

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-25
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related).................................................................................................................................................... 15-25

15.5 Alarm Code ..............................................................................................................................................................15-26

15.5.1 Alarm Code ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-26

15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes ......................................................................................................................15-27

15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher) ................................................................................................................................ 15-27
15.6.2 Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher) .................................................................................................................................... 15-41

15.7 DADF Error Codes ..................................................................................................................................................15-47

15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF) ...................................................................................................................................................... 15-47

Chapter 15

15.1 Error Code Table

15.1.1 Error Code
0008-0942
T-15-1

Code
E000
E001
E002
E003
E007
E010
E014
E019
E020
E024
E025
E032
E064
E100
E110
E191
E202
E225
E227
E248
E261
E315
E400
E490
E500
E503
E505
E514
E519
E520
E530
E531
E532
E535
E537
E540
E542
E577
E584
E590
E591
E592
E593
E5F0
E5F1

Error name/description
fixing overheating
fixing assembly overheating
fixing assembly low temperature
post-standby fixing low temperature
fixing film rotation error
main motor rotation error
fixing motor rotation error
waste toner case full, waste toner case full sensor error
toner clogging between sub hopper and developing
assembly
developing assembly connector disconnection
hopper motor, bottle motor error
NE controller counter error
power supply voltage error (high-voltage)
BD interval error
scanner motor error
communication error for high voltage power supply
CIS home position detection error
CIS light intensity error
reader unit power supply error
backup memory error
zero-cross signal error
image data error
feeder communication error
wrong DF type
finisher communication error
finisher internal communication error
finisher backup memory error
stack delivery/trailing edge assist motor error
gear change motor error
off-set motor error

rear alignment error

stapling error
stapler shift error
swing error
front alignment error
stack tray ascent error/upper tray ascent error
lower tray ascent error
paddle error
shutter error
punching error
puncher dust sensor error
punch horizontal registration sensor error
punch shift error
saddle paper positioning error
saddle paper folding error

15-1

Chapter 15

Code
E5F2
E5F3
E5F4
E5F5
E5F6
E5F8
E5F9
E602
E604
E609
E610
E674
E710
E711
E713
E716
E717
E719
E730
E732
E733
E740
E743
E744
E745
E746
E748
E805

15-2

Error name/description
saddle guide error
saddle alignment error
saddle rear stapling error
saddle front stapling error
saddle butting error
saddle connector error
saddle switch error
hard disk error
image memory error/shortage
hard disk error
herd disk coding key fault
fax board communication error
IPC initialization error
IPC communication error
communication error for finisher
communication error for pedestal/ communication
error for 3-way unit-A1
communication error for NE controller
coin vendor error
PDL software error
scanner communication error
printer communication error
Ether board error
DDI communication error
language file/boot ROM error
TokenRing board error
accessories board wrong model error
controller board and SDRAM size mismatch
fan error

Chapter 15

15.2 Error Code Details

15.2.1 Error Code Details
0008-1078
T-15-2
Code
E000

Cause

Remedy

The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

0001 While startup control is under way, the reading of Reset the condition in service mode:
the main thermistor is less than 30 deg C
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
continuously for 200 msec or more 1 sec after the main thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
start of power supply.
While startup control is under way, the reading of
the main thermistor is less than 70 deg C
continuously for 200 msec or more 2 sec after the
start of power supply.
While startup control is under way, the reading of
the main thermistor is less than 120 deg C
continuously for 200 msec 6 sec after the start of
power supply.
The startup control does not end 30 sec after the
start of power supply.

E001

The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

0000 The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C Reset the condition in service mode:
or more continuously for 200 msec.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
main thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
0001 The hardware circuit detects overheating of the
main or sub thermistor for 200 msec.

Reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
DC controller PCB.

0002 The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or Reset the condition in service mode:
more continuously for 200 msec.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
sub thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
E002

The rise in temperature of the fixing assembly is faulty.

0000 While startup control is under way, the reading of Reset the condition in service mode:
the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has
main thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
indicated 100 deg C.
While startup control is under way, the reading of
the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C
continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has
indicated 140 deg C.

E003

The fixing temperature is too low after a standby state.

0000 While regular temperature control is under way, Reset the condition in service mode:
the reading of the main thermistor is less than 140 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
deg C continuously for 400 msec or more.
main thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E007

The rotation of the fixing film is faulty.

0000 While the fixing motor is rotating, the marker
Reset the condition in service mode:
signal is not detected for 6 sec with the reading of COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the
the main thermistor indicating 100 deg C or more. main thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E010

E014

E019

The rotation of the main motor is faulty.

0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the
start of motor rotation; however, the drive
detection signal is absent for 2 sec.

Replace the main motor. Replace the DC controller

PCB.

0002 During motor rotation, detection is executed

every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is
absent 5 times in sequence.

Replace the main motor. Replace the DC controller

PCB.

The rotation of the fixing motor is faulty.

0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the
start of motor rotation; however, the drive
detection signal is absent for 2 sec.

Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC controller

PCB.

0002 During motor rotation, detection is executed

every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is
absent 5 times in sequence.

Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC controller

PCB.

The waste toner case is full, or the waste toner case full sensor is faulty.
0000 When the waste toner case is identified as being Replace the waste toner sensor. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
full for 2000 prints continuously, an alert is
issued; thereafter, the case is identified as being
full continuously for 100 prints.

E020

The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.

15-3

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

Remedy

0000 The developing assembly toner sensor detects the Replace the developing assembly toner sensor.
absence of toner, while the sub hopper toner
Replace the sub hopper toner sensor. Replace the DC
sensor detects the presence of toner. With the
control PCB.
developing clutch turned on, the hopper
feedscrew motor is rotated for 1 sec intermittently
194 times; still, the developing assembly toner
sensor does not detect the presence of toner.
E024

The developing assembly connector is disconnected/Disconnection of Toner sensor.

0000 The connection detection signal is absent
continuously for 100 msec.

Replace the developing assembly toner sensor.

Connect the connector. Replace the DC controller
PCB.

0001 Disconnection of the wire used for detecting the Correct the cable. Replace the sensor.
connection of the toner level sensor is found.
When the disconnection of the wire used for
detecting the connection of the toner level sensor
has been detected for 7.5 min without
interruption (12.5 min in the manual /envelop
cassette feeding).
When the disconnection of the wire used for
detecting the connection of the toner level sensor
has been detected for 12.5 min without
interruption.
-iR4570/3570/3530
When the disconnection of the wire used for
detecting the connection of the toner level sensor
has been detected for 7.5 min without
interruption (12.5 min in the manual /envelop
cassette feeding).
-iR2870/2270/2230
When the disconnection of the wire used for
detecting the connection of the toner level sensor
has been detected for 12.5 min without
interruption.

E025

The hopper motor or the bottle motor is faulty.

0000 The sub hopper toner sensor connection detection Replace the sub hopper toner sensor. Connect the
signal is absent for 100 msec 10 times in
connector. Replace the detection PCB.
sequence.
0001 While the hopper motor is rotating, the motor
Replace the hopper motor. Replace the bottle motor.
error lock signal is detected continuously 4 times Replace the DC controller PCB.
every 56 msec. Or, while the bottle motor is
rotating, the motor error lock signal is detected 22
times in sequence every 10 msec.

E032

The NE controller counter malfunctions.

0001 An open circuit is detected for the count pulse
signal.

E064

Turn off the main power, and check the cable for an
open circuit; then, turn the main power back on.

The voltage of the power supply is faulty (high-voltage error).

0001 The value read from the EEPORM is outside a
specific range.

Turn off and then back on the main power. Replace

the EEPROM.

0002 While output is being generated, the AD value of Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the
the primary DC voltage is 230 (DEC) or more for DC controller PCB.
100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after
output, it is not detected for 100 msec.)
0003 While output is being generated, the AD value of Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the
the developing DC voltage is 224 (DEC) or more DC controller PCB.
for 10 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after
output, it is not detected for 100 msec.)
0004 While output is being generated, the AD value of Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the
the transfer output current is 205 (DEC) or more controller PCB.
for 100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However,
after output, it is not detected for 100 msec.)
0005 While output is being generated, the AD value of Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the
the transfer output voltage is 0 (DEC) for 100
DC controller PCB.
msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after
output, it is not detected for 100 msec.)
E100

The BD interval is outside a specific range.

0001 After the machine has become ready for image
formation (i.e., the scanner motor is ready for
operation, and the laser has been turned on), an
error has occurred 50 times or more (BD error).

E110

Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller

PCB. Check the wiring.

The scanner motor is faulty.

0001 The scanner motor speed lock signal does not
indicate a locked state a specific period of time
after the scanner motor has been started.

Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller

PCB. Check the wiring.

0002 The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10

Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller
times in sequence at intervals of 10 msec after the PCB. Check the wiring.
signal has indicated a locked state.

15-4

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

Remedy

0003 With the image clock switched over, the scanner Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller
motor speed lock signal does not indicate a
PCB. Check the wiring.
locked state 6.5 sec after a switchover is made
from low to normal speed or 8 sec after a
switchover is made from normal to low speed.
E191

There is an error in the communication with the high-voltage power supply.

0000 The data transmission/reception does not end
normally 500 msec after the most recent
transmission/reception of data ended normally.

E202

E225

Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the

DC controller PCB.

There is an error in the detection of the CIS home position.

0001 The attempt to detect the home position fails
when the CIS is moved forward.

Disconnect and then connect the harness connector.

Replace the following as necessary: scanner home
position sensor, scanner motor, reader controller
PCB.

0002 The attempt to detect the home position fails

when the CIS is moved back.

Disconnect and then connect the harness connector.

Replace the following as necessary: scanner home
position sensor, scanner motor, reader controller
PCB.

The light intensity of the CIS is faulty.

0001 During shading operation, the intensity is below a Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable.
specific level.
Replace the following as necessary: flexible cable,
CIS, reader controller PCB.
0002 During DF stream reading, the sheet-to-sheet
light intensity is faulty.

E227

Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable.

Replace the following as necessary: flexible cable,
CIS, reader controller PCB.

The reader unit power supply is faulty.

0001 At time of power-on, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply

harness connector. Replace the power supply.

0002 At the start of a job, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply

harness connector. Replace the power supply.

0003 At the end of a job, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply

harness connector. Replace the power supply.

0004 When a load is being driven, the 24-V port is off. Disconnect and then connect the power supply
harness. Replace the power supply.
E248

The backup memory is faulty.

0000 [Cause] A check error has occurred on the backup 1. Check the presence/absence of a backup SRAM
SRAM board.
PCB.
2. Disconnect and then connect the backup SRAM
[Location] bottom ROM
PCB.
3. Replace the backup SRAM PCB with a new one.
[Timing of Detection] once when the boot ROM
is started up
0001 An error has occurred at power-on.

E261

Replace the reader controller PCB.

0002 An error has occurred during a write operation.

Replace the reader controller PCB.

0003 An error has occurred during a read operation

following a write operation.

Replace the reader controller PCB.

The zero-cross signal is faulty.

0000 When the relay is on, the zero-cross signal is not Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC
detected for 500 msec or more.
controller PCB.

E315

E602

There is an error in image data.

0007 There is an error in JBIG encoding.

Turn off and then back on the power.

000d There is an error in JBIG decoding.

Turn off and then back on the power.

There is an error on the hard disk.

0001 [Cause] An HDD detection error has occurred. See the details under 602.
The HDD cannot be detected. The HDD does not
become ready. The HDD returns an error.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in session
BARSAC startup, mounting
(usrIde)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup
0002 [Cause] There is no startup file. The program for See the details under 602.
the main CPU does not exist on the HDD or in
BOOTDEV/BOOT, and so on.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in use
at time of system file loading (usrIde)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup

15-5

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

Remedy

0003 [Cause] An HD write abort error has occurred.

See the details under 602.
The sectors for BOOTDEV on the HD cannot be
read.
[Detection] BARSAC (all; at time of bootable
startup)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup
0006 [Cause] A subbootable that matches the PDL type See the details under 602.
does not exit in BOOTDEV/BOOT.
[Detection] during loading of sub boot in
oclibroot
[Timing of Detection] once at bootable startup
0007 [Cause] An ICC profile that matches the PDL
type does not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL.

See the details under 602.

[Detection] beginning of oclibroot; judgment

based on functions of PDL team that are called in
[Timing of Detection] once at bootable startup
01XX /DOSDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

02XX /FSTDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

03XX /DOSDEV2 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

04XX /FSTPDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

05XX /DOSDEV3 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

06XX /PDLDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

07XX /DOSDEV4 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

08XX /BOOTDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

09XX /DOSDEV5 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

FFXX There is an error in a partition that cannot be

identified.

See the details under 602.

E604

The image memory is faulty or is inadequate.

0000 The memory size does not match the model.

E609

Increase the memory.

There is an error on the HDD.

0008 At startup, the HDD fails to reach a specific
Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC controller
temperature level within a specific period of time. PCB.
0009 At time of sleep recovery, the temperature fails to Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC controller
reach a specific level.
PCB.

E610

The HDD coding key is faulty.

The SRM/PCB is faulty. The battery has become Try step 1); if it fails, try step 2).
exhausted, leading to loss of SRAM contents.
1) Turn off and then back on the power switch to
generate the key once again.
2) If the same error still continues, replace the board
on which the SRAM is mounted. (Keep in mind that
doing so will lead to loss of all user data.)

E674

An error has occurred in communication between the fax control PCB (2-line) and main controller PCB.
0001 An attempt to set mode for the fax device has
failed.

E710

E711

1. Check the connection of the cable between the fax

control PCB (2-line) and the main controller PCB.
2. Replace the ROM DIMM of the fax control PCB
(2-line).
3. Replace the fax control PCB (2-line).
4. Replace the main controller PCB.

There is an error in the initialization of the IPC.

0001 The machine fails to become ready 3 sec or less
after the IPC chip startup.

Check the cable.

0002 When the main power is turned on, the

communication IC (IPC) on the DC controller
PCB cannot be initialized.

Check the cable.

There is an error in the IPC communication.

0001 The occurrence of an error has been recorded in Check the cable.
the error register of the IPC chip 4 times or more
within 1.5 sec.
0002 The occurrence of an error has been recorded in Check the cable.
the error register of the IPC chip 4 times or more
within 2 sec.

E713

There is an error in the communication with the finisher or 3 Way Unit-A1.

0000 The communication with the finisher does not
resume within 5 sec after it has been disrupted.

E716

15-6

Check the cable. Replace the DC controller PCB.

Replace the finisher controller PCB.

There is an error in the communication with the pedestal.

Chapter 15

Code

E717

Cause

Remedy

0000 After the presence of a pedestal has been

detected, the communication fails to be normal
for 5 sec.

Check the cable. Replace the DC controller PCB.

Replace the pedestal drive PCB.

0010 When the communication with the 3 Way UnitA1 is faulty after detecting the connection with
the finisher.

Install the 3 Way Unit-A1. Replace the DC

controller PCB after checking the cable.

There is an error in the communication with the NE controller.

0001 The NE controller is not connected at power on, Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in
although it was connected before the power was service mode:
turned off because of an error.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 An IPC error has occurred while the NE
Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in
controller is in operation.
service mode:
There is an open circuit for the IPC. An error has COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
occurred, and the IPC communication remains
disabled.

E719

There is a coin vendor error.

0001 The coin vendor is not connected when the power Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in
is turned on, although it was connected before the service mode:
power was turned off because of an error.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 While the coin vendor is in operation, an IPC
Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in
error has occurred, IPC has developed an open
service mode:
circuit, or an error preventing recovery of IPC
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
communication has occurred.
An open circuit has been detected in the line for
the pickup/delivery signal.
An illegal signal has been detected.
0003 While the unit price is being checked at startup,
an error occurs in the communication with the
coin vendor.

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in

service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

0011 An error has occurred at new card reader startup. Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in
The new card reader is not connected when the service mode:
power is turned off, although it was connected
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
when the power was turned off.
0012 An IPC error has occurred at new card reader
startup.
There is an IPC open circuit. An error has
occurred that prevents recovery of IPC
communication.
E730

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in

service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

There is a PDL software error.

1001 An initialization error has occurred.

1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.

100A An error that may be critical to the system (e.g.,

failed initialization) has occurred.

1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.

9004 There is an error in the communication (PAI)

with an external controller.

1. Turn on the power once main.

2. Check the connection of the open I/F board and
the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external controller open
I/F.
4. Replace the main board.

9005 There is a fault in the connector of the vide cable 1. Turn on the power once main.
to the external controller.
2. Check the connection of the open I/F board and
the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external controller open
I/F.
4. Replace the main board.
A006 The PDL board does not respond. A subbootable 1. Execute PDL resetting.
is faulty or absent.
2. Turn on the power once again.
3. Check the connection of the SURF board.
4. Re-install the firmware.
5. Replace the main board.
A007 There is a mismatch between the control software 1. Execute PDL resetting.
of the machine and the PDL control software in 2. Turn on the power once again.
regard to version.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and reinstall the
system.
B013 There is corruption in the font data.

E732

1. Turn on the power once again.

2. Re-install the software.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and reinstall the
system.

There is an error in the communication with the scanner.

15-7

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

0001 There is a DDI-S communication error.

E733

Remedy
1. Check the connector used to connect the scanner.
2. Check the power supply of the scanner (to see if
initialization takes place at startup).
3. Replace the reader controller, scanner board, or
main board as necessary.

There is an error in the communication with the printer.

0000 At startup, communication with the printer fails. 1. Check the connector used to connect to the printer.
2. Check the power supply of the printer (to see if
initialization takes place at startup).
3. Replace the DC controller or the main board.
0001 There is a DDI-P communication error.

E740

There is an error on the Ether board.

0002 The MAC address is illegal.

E743

Replace the LAN card.

There is an error in the DDI communication.

0000 An SCI error has occurred. The received data is
faulty. A reception timeout condition has
occurred. An SEQ timeout error has occurred.

E744

1. Check the connection with the printer.

2. Check the power supply of the printer (to see if
initialization takes place at startup).
3. Replace the DC controller or the main board.

Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable used

to connect the reader unit and the printer unit.
Replace the following as necessary: flexible cable,
reader controller PCB, main controller PCB.

There is an error in the language file/boot ROM.

0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and Download a language file of the correct version.
that of the bootable do not match.

E745

0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too

large.

Download a language file of the correct version.

0003 There is no language file on the HDD indicated

by config.txt for a switchover.

Download a language file of the correct version.

0004 An attempt to switchover to a language on the

HDD fails.

Download a language file of the correct version.

1000 The boot ROM that is mounted is of the wrong

type.

Replace the boot ROM with one of the model in

question.

2000 The engine ID indicated by the software ID is

illegal.

Replace it with a software ID of the correct model.

There is a fault on the TokeRing board.

0001 An attempt at PCI initialization has failed.

1. Disconnect and then connect the TokeRing board.

2. Replace the TokeRing board.

0002 The MAC address is faulty.

1. Replace the TokenRing board.

0003 There is an error in the acquisition/setting of

board information.

1. Replace the TokenRing board.

0004 There is a connection error.

1. Check the connection of the cable.

2. Replace the cable.
3. Check the power source of the MAU.
4. Replace the MAU.
5. Replace the TokenRing board.

0005 Other Errors

E746

The accessories board is of the wrong type.

0003 At startup, a board for a different model has been Replace the UFR board of the correct type (model).
detected.

E748

There is a mismatch between controller board and SDRAM size.

1001 There is a mismatch between the control board
and the SDRAM.

E805

Check the correct combination between board and

SDRAM.

There is a fan error.

0000 While the fan is at rest, the lock signal has been Replace the fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.
detected for 5 sec.
While the fan is in operation, the lock signal is not
detected for 5 sec.

15-8

Chapter 15

15.2.2 E602 in Detaill

0008-1182
T-15-3
XX

YY

Description

Remedy

00

01

The HDD cannot be recognized. The

startup partition (BOOTDEV) cannot be
found at startup.

1. Turn off the main switch, and check the cable connector.
Then, turn on the main switch.
2. Check to see if the HDD spins up when the main switch
is turned on and if the 5V/12V power is supplied.
3. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, replace
the HDD, re-install the system software. If the symptom
still exists, replace the main board.

00

02

The system software for the main CPU

does not exist.

1. Start up in safe mode, and format the HDD using the

SST (all); then, re-initial the system software (System,
Language, RUI); then turn off and then back on the main
power switch.
2. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, suspect a
fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and re-install the
system software.

00

03

Suspension of a write operation to the boot 1. Find the sector for which the write operation has been
device has been detected.
suspended; then, execute recovery operation.
<in the case of black-and-white E code>
1-1 The machine will not permit the use of service mode;
go through the following:
1-2 Turn off the power. Then, turn on the power while
holding down on the 1 and 9 keys so that the repair routine
for the sector for which the write operation was suspended
will automatically start up and the screen will turn solid
black.
1-3 Wait for about 40 to 50 min. There will soon be an
indicator of progress of work. The screen will turn solid
white when the routine ends.
<if the spanner symbol is indicated>
1-1 Set 'CHK-TYPE-0', and execute 'HD-CHECK' (50 to
50 min); thereafter, turn off and then back on the main
power switch.
2. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, start up in
safe mode; then, format the HDD (full) using the SST, and
re-install the system software (System, Language, RUI),
and turn off and then back on the main power switch.
3. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, suspect a
fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and re-install the
system software.

00

04

Symptom absent

00

05

Symptom absent

00

06

The system software of the sub CPU does

not exist.

1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using

the SST and re-install the system software (System,
Language, RUI); then, turn off and then back on the main
power.
2. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, suspect a
fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and re-install the
system software once again.

00

07

The IC profile does not exist.

1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using

the SST and re-install the system software (System,
Language, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main
power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing, suspect a
fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and re-install the
system software.

[E602-XXYY]
T-15-4
XX

YY

XX CHKTYPE

Partition
in
question

Description

01

02

03

Reme-dy

Reme-dy

Reme-dy Reme-dy

At startup

11, 21

13, 25

10, 12, 14,

22, 23, 24

During routine operation

Reme-dy

Reme-dy

DOSDEV General data

storage area

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

FSTDEV

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

Image data
storage area
(e.g., Box)

15-9

Chapter 15

XX

YY

XX CHKTYPE

Partition
in
question

Description

01

02

03

Reme-dy

Reme-dy

Reme-dy Reme-dy

At startup

11, 21

13, 25

10, 12, 14,

22, 23, 24

During routine operation

Reme-dy

Reme-dy

DOSDEV Image
2
thumbnail
display data
area (e.g.,
Box)

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

FSTPDEV Image data

storage area
(e.g., Box)

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

DOSDEV General file *1

3
storage area
(user settings,
logs, PDL
spool, image
data control
info)

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

PDLDEV

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

DOSDEV Firmware
4
storage area
(address
book, filter)

*2

*6

*9

*10

*11

*12

BOOTDE Firmware
V
storage area
(System,
Language,
RUI)

*3

*8

*9

*10

*11

*12

DOSDEV For future

5
expansion

*1

*5

*9

*10

*11

*12

FF

Not
identified

Entire HDD *4
(check on
faulty sector
and recovery)

*7

*9

*10

*11

*12

PDL-related
file storage
area (font,
registered
form, ICC
profile, color
correction
info file for
PDL
function)

[HDD formatting]
T-15-5

15-10

XX CHKTYPE

Partition in Description
question

Typical item
deleted

HDD
Normal mode Safe mode +
formatting by + HDD
HDD formatting
HD-CLEAR formatting
with SST
with SST

DOSDEV

General data
storage area

Entire
collection of
image data
(e.g., Box)

Possible (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

FSTDEV
specified (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

FSTDEV

Image data
storage area
(e.g., Box)

Entire
collection of
image data
(e.g., Box)

Possible (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

FSTDEV
specified (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

Chapter 15

XX CHKTYPE

Partition in Description
question

Typical item
deleted

HDD
Normal mode Safe mode +
formatting by + HDD
HDD formatting
HD-CLEAR formatting
with SST
with SST

DOSDEV2

Image
thumbnail
display data
area (e.g., Box)

Entire
collection of
image data
(e.g., Box)

Possible (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

FSTDEV
specified (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

FSTPDEV

Image data
storage area
(e.g., Box)

Entire
collection of
image data
(e.g., Box)

Possible (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

FSTDEV
specified (4
partitions,
simultaneously)

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

DOSDEV3

General file
storage area
(user settings,
logs, PDL
spool, image
data control
info)

Items that are

relatively less
critical

Possible

DOSDEV3
specified

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

PDLDEV

PDL-related
User Font
file storage
IccProfil
area (font,
registered
form, ICC
profile, color
correction info
file for PDL
function)

Possible

PDLDEV
specified

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

DOSDEV4

Firmware
Address book
storage area
(address book,
filter)

Not possible

DOSDEV4
specified

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

BOOTDEV

Firmware
storage area
(System,
Language,
RUI)

System
software

Not possible

Not possible

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

DOSDEV5

For future
expansion

None in
particular

Possible

DOSDEV5
specified

Possible;
however,
selection of a
specific partition
is not allowed,
requiring deletion
of all data. After
formatting, the
system software
must be
downloaded.

15-11

Chapter 15

XX CHKTYPE

Partition in Description
question

Typical item
deleted

HDD
Normal mode Safe mode +
formatting by + HDD
HDD formatting
HD-CLEAR formatting
with SST
with SST

FF 0

Not
identified

Entire HDD
(check on
faulty sector
and recovery)

* When the machine starts up for the first time after its HDD has been formatted, it may take longer than usual to complete the startup session.
[Remedy]
T-15-6
YY

Description

*1

01

The ongoing write operation has been 1. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDDsuspended (at startup).
CHECK (50 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
2. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing,
type in TYPE-TYPE for the partition in question,
and execute HDD-CLEAR. Thereafter, turn off
and then back on the main switch.

Remedy

*2

01

The ongoing operation has been

suspended (at startup).

*3

01

The ongoing write operation has been To run a recovery session for the boot partition,
suspended (at startup).
you will have to use safe mode in combination with
the SST.

1. If possible, ask the user to back up the address

book data using the RUI.
2. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDDCHECK (40 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
3. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing,
start download mode, and execute full formatting
using the SST and re-install the system software
(System, Language, RUI). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the main power.

1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDDCHECK (40 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and the
back on the power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
start download mode, and execute full formatting
using the SST, and re-install the system software
(System, Language, RUI). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
*4

01

The ongoing write operation has been 1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDDsuspended (at startup).
CHECK (40 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
execute HDD-CLEAR using TYPE-TYPE=1, 2, 3,
5. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.

*5

02

A file system error has occurred.

1. Type in TYPE-TYPE of the partition in

question, and execute HDD-CLEAR. Thereafter,
turn off and then back on the main switch.
2. If the system still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

*6

02

There is a file system error.

The system software is designed so that the

information in this partition (e.g., address book,
filter) is not deleted inadvertently; i.e., you will not
the able to execute HDD-CLEAR from service
mode.
1. If possible, ask the user to back up the address
book data using the RUI.
2. From service mode, start download mode; then,
execute full formatting using the SST and re-install
the system software (System, Language, RUI).
Thereafter, turn off and the back on the main
power.

*7

02

A file system error has occurred.

This type of error is highly rare.

1. Using TYPE-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, execute HDDCLEAR. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the
power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

15-12

Chapter 15

*8

YY

Description

Remedy

02

A file system error has occurred.

The system software is designed so that a recovery

session will not run for the boot partition unless
you use safe mode in combination with the SST.
1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full
formatting using the SST and re-install the system
software (System, Language, RUI). Thereafter,
turn off and then on the main power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

*9

03

There is poor contact of the HDD, or 1. Check the cable and power supply connectors.
a v.x Works system error has
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
occurred.
start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting
using the SST and re-install the system software
(System, Language, RUI). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the main power.
3. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

*10

11,21

The HDD has poor contact.

This type of error is highly rare in relation to read/

write operations.
1. Check the cable and the power supply
connectors.
2.If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and install the system software.

*11

13, 25

The ongoing write operation has been There is a likelihood of the presence of damage to
suspended.
the file data on the HDD (e.g., Box).
1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDDCHECK (40 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing, set
'1' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR.
(In the case of DOSDEV4 or BOOTDEV, execute
formatting and re-installation once again.)
3. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

*12

10, 12, 14, 22, There is a system error or a packet

23, 24
data error.

The data may be corrupted or there is a software

bug.
1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full
formatting using the SST and re-install the system
software (System, Language, RUI). Thereafter,
turn off and then back on the main power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.

- HD-CLEAR
When you have executed HD-CLEAR, all contents of the partition in question (files, sub directories) will be lost.
The actual formatting will take place when the machine is started up after it has been turned off upon execution of HD-CLEAN.
At this time, the Startup screen shows a progress bar, its edge reaching the end in about 5 min. Be sure not to turn off the power while the progress bar is
moving.
This function (i.e., mode item) cannot be used for BOOTDEV and DOSDEV4; to re-format any of these 2 partitions, you will have to use the SST.
Keep in mind that formatting of the HDD in service mode will necessarily be full formatting.
- HD-CHECK
If the power is cut while data is being written to the HDD, the occurrence of a write-suspended sector is a possibility. When HD-CHECK is run on such a
sector, repairs will be made, but all data in the sector will be lost. A write-suspended sector may be repaired only by HDD-CHECK (0); if not TYPETYPE=0, the task will be limited to an FS level check.
If the write-suspended sector happens to be a critical sector that holds a control area, there is no way of repairing it; you will have to execute HDD formatting.
- Replacing the HDD
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Connect the new HDD.
3. Start up the machine in safe mode.
4. Connect the SST, and execute full formatting.
5. Using the SST, download the system software (System, Language, RUI).
6. Turn off and then back on the power. (It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up).

15-13

Chapter 15

15.2.3 Error Code Detailsitest for A4 sizej

0009-7180
T-15-7
Code
E000

Cause

Remedy

The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

0001 While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is less than Reset the condition in service mode:
30 deg C continuously for 200 msec or more 1 sec after the start of power supply. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the main thermistor.
While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is less than Replace the DC controller PCB.
70 deg C continuously for 200 msec or more 2 sec after the start of power supply.
While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is less than
120 deg C continuously for 200 msec 6 sec after the start of power supply.
The startup control does not end 30 sec after the start of power supply.

E001

The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

0000 The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for 200
msec.

Reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the main thermistor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.

0001 The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for 200
msec.

Reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the DC controller
PCB.

0002 The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec. Reset the condition in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the sub thermistor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
E002

The rise in temperature of the fixing assembly is faulty.

0000 While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is less than Reset the condition in service mode:
115 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 100 deg C.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the main thermistor.
While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is less than Replace the DC controller PCB.
150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 140 deg C.

E003

The fixing temperature is too low after a standby state.

0000 While regular temperature control is under way, the reading of the main
thermistor is less than 140 deg C continuously for 400 msec or more.

E007

Reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the main thermistor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.

The rotation of the fixing film is faulty.

0000 While the fixing motor is rotating, the marker signal is not detected for 6 sec with Reset the condition in service mode:
the reading of the main thermistor indicating 100 deg C or more.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Replace the main thermistor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.

E010

The rotation of the main motor is faulty.

0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, Replace the main motor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec.
0002 During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive Replace the main motor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
signal is absent 5 times in sequence.

E014

The rotation of the fixing motor is faulty.

0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec.
0002 During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
signal is absent 5 times in sequence.

E019

The waste toner case is full, or the waste toner case full sensor is faulty.
0000 When the waste toner case is identified as being full for 2000 prints continuously, Replace the waste toner sensor. Replace the DC controller PCB.
an alert is issued; thereafter, the case is identified as being full continuously for
100 prints.

E020

The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.
0000 The developing assembly toner sensor detects the absence of toner, while the sub Replace the developing assembly toner sensor. Replace the sub
hopper toner sensor detects the presence of toner. With the developing clutch
hopper toner sensor. Replace the DC control PCB.
turned on, the hopper feedscrew motor is rotated for 1 sec intermittently 194
times; still, the developing assembly toner sensor does not detect the presence of
toner.

E024

The developing assembly connector is disconnected.

0000 The connection detection signal is absent continuously for 100 msec.

E025

Replace the developing assembly toner sensor. Connect the

connector. Replace the DC controller PCB.

The hopper motor or the bottle motor is faulty.

0000 The sub hopper toner sensor connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10 Replace the sub hopper toner sensor. Connect the connector. Replace
times in sequence.
the detection PCB.
0001 While the hopper motor is rotating, the motor error lock signal is detected
continuously 4 times every 56 msec. Or, while the bottle motor is rotating, the
motor error lock signal is detected 22 times in sequence every 10 msec.

E032

The NE controller counter malfunctions.

0001 An open circuit is detected for the count pulse signal.

E064

15-14

Replace the hopper motor. Replace the bottle motor. Replace the DC
controller PCB.

The voltage of the power supply is faulty (high-voltage error).

Turn off the main power, and check the cable for an open circuit; then,
turn the main power back on.

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

0001 The value read from the EEPORM is outside a specific range.

Remedy
Turn off and then back on the main power. Replace the EEPROM.

0002 While output is being generated, the AD value of the primary DC voltage is 230 Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the DC controller
(DEC) or more for 100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after output, it is not PCB.
detected for 100 msec.)
0003 While output is being generated, the AD value of the developing DC voltage is Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the DC controller
224 (DEC) or more for 10 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after output, it is PCB.
not detected for 100 msec.)
0004 While output is being generated, the AD value of the transfer output current is 205 Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the controller PCB.
(DEC) or more for 100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after output, it is not
detected for 100 msec.)
0005 While output is being generated, the AD value of the transfer output voltage is 0 Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the DC controller
(DEC) for 100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after output, it is not detected PCB.
for 100 msec.)
E100

The BD interval is outside a specific range.

0001 After the machine has become ready for image formation (i.e., the scanner motor Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller PCB. Check the
is ready for operation, and the laser has been turned on), an error has occurred 50 wiring.
times or more (BD error).

E110

The scanner motor is faulty.

0001 The scanner motor speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific
period of time after the scanner motor has been started.

Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller PCB. Check the
wiring.

0002 The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10 times in sequence at intervals of 10 Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller PCB. Check the
msec after the signal has indicated a locked state.
wiring.
0003 With the image clock switched over, the scanner motor speed lock signal does not Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC controller PCB. Check the
indicate a locked state 6.5 sec after a switchover is made from low to normal speed wiring.
or 8 sec after a switchover is made from normal to low speed.
E191

There is an error in the communication with the high-voltage power supply.

0000 The data transmission/reception does not end normally 500 msec after the most
recent transmission/reception of data ended normally.

E202

E225

E227

E248

Replace the high-voltage power supply. Replace the DC controller

PCB.

There is an error in the detection of the CIS home position.

0001 The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CIS is moved forward.

Disconnect and then connect the harness connector. Replace the

following as necessary: scanner home position sensor, scanner motor,
reader controller PCB.

0002 The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CIS is moved back.

Disconnect and then connect the harness connector. Replace the

following as necessary: scanner home position sensor, scanner motor,
reader controller PCB.

The light intensity of the CIS is faulty.

0001 During shading operation, the intensity is below a specific level.

Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable. Replace the following
as necessary: flexible cable, CIS, reader controller PCB.

0002 During DF stream reading, the sheet-to-sheet light intensity is faulty.

Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable. Replace the following
as necessary: flexible cable, CIS, reader controller PCB.

The reader unit power supply is faulty.

0001 At time of power-on, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector.

Replace the power supply.

0002 At the start of a job, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector.

Replace the power supply.

0003 At the end of a job, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector.

Replace the power supply.

0004 When a load is being driven, the 24-V port is off.

Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness. Replace the
power supply.

The backup memory is faulty.

0000 [Cause] A check error has occurred on the backup SRAM board.
[Location] bottom ROM

1. Check the presence/absence of a backup SRAM PCB.

2. Disconnect and then connect the backup SRAM PCB.
3. Replace the backup SRAM PCB with a new one.

[Timing of Detection] once when the boot ROM is started up

E261

0001 An error has occurred at power-on.

Replace the reader controller PCB.

0002 An error has occurred during a write operation.

Replace the reader controller PCB.

0003 An error has occurred during a read operation following a write operation.

Replace the reader controller PCB.

The zero-cross signal is faulty.

0000 When the relay is on, the zero-cross signal is not detected for 500 msec or more. Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E315

E602

There is an error in image data.

0007 There is an error in JBIG encoding.

Turn off and then back on the power.

000d There is an error in JBIG decoding.

Turn off and then back on the power.

There is an error on the hard disk.

15-15

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

Remedy

0001 [Cause] An HDD detection error has occurred. The HDD cannot be detected. The See the details under 602.
HDD does not become ready. The HDD returns an error.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in session
BARSAC startup, mounting
(usrIde)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup
0002 [Cause] There is no startup file. The program for the main CPU does not exist on See the details under 602.
the HDD or in BOOTDEV/BOOT, and so on.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in use
at time of system file loading (usrIde)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup
0003 [Cause] An HD write abort error has occurred. The sectors for BOOTDEV on the See the details under 602.
HD cannot be read.
[Detection] BARSAC (all; at time of bootable startup)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup
0006 [Cause] A subbootable that matches the PDL type does not exit in BOOTDEV/
BOOT.

See the details under 602.

[Detection] during loading of sub boot in oclibroot

[Timing of Detection] once at bootable startup
0007 [Cause] An ICC profile that matches the PDL type does not exist in BOOTDEV/ See the details under 602.
PDL.
[Detection] beginning of oclibroot; judgment based on functions of PDL team that
are called in
[Timing of Detection] once at bootable startup
01XX /DOSDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

02XX /FSTDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

03XX /DOSDEV2 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

04XX /FSTPDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

05XX /DOSDEV3 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

06XX /PDLDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

07XX /DOSDEV4 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

08XX /BOOTDEV is faulty.

See the details under 602.

09XX /DOSDEV5 is faulty.

See the details under 602.

FFXX There is an error in a partition that cannot be identified.

See the details under 602.

E604

The image memory is faulty or is inadequate.

0000 The memory size does not match the model.

E609

E610

Increase the memory.

There is an error on the HDD.

0008 At startup, the HDD fails to reach a specific temperature level within a specific
period of time.

Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC controller PCB.

0009 At time of sleep recovery, the temperature fails to reach a specific level.

Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC controller PCB.

The HDD coding key is faulty.

The SRM/PCB is faulty. The battery has become exhausted, leading to loss of
SRAM contents.

Try step 1); if it fails, try step 2).

1) Turn off and then back on the power switch to generate the key
once again.
2) If the same error still continues, replace the board on which the
SRAM is mounted. (Keep in mind that doing so will lead to loss of all
user data.)

E674

An error has occurred in communication between the fax control PCB (2-line) and main controller PCB.
0001 An attempt to set mode for the fax device has failed.

E710

E711

1. Check the connection of the cable between the fax control PCB (2line) and the main controller PCB.
2. Replace the ROM DIMM of the fax control PCB (2-line).
3. Replace the fax control PCB (2-line).
4. Replace the main controller PCB.

There is an error in the initialization of the IPC.

0001 The machine fails to become ready 3 sec or less after the IPC chip startup.

Check the cable.

0002 When the main power is turned on, the communication IC (IPC) on the DC
controller PCB cannot be initialized.

Check the cable.

There is an error in the IPC communication.

0001 The occurrence of an error has been recorded in the error register of the IPC chip Check the cable.
4 times or more within 1.5 sec.
0002 The occurrence of an error has been recorded in the error register of the IPC chip Check the cable.
4 times or more within 2 sec.

15-16

Chapter 15

Code
E713

Cause

0000 The communication with the finisher does not resume within 5 sec after it has
been disrupted.
E716

Remedy

There is an error in the communication with the finisher.

Check the cable. Replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the finisher
controller PCB.

There is an error in the communication with the pedestal.

0000 After the presence of a pedestal has been detected, the communication fails to be Check the cable. Replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the
normal for 5 sec.
pedestal drive PCB.

E717

There is an error in the communication with the NE controller.

0001 The NE controller is not connected at power on, although it was connected before Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:
the power was turned off because of an error.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 An IPC error has occurred while the NE controller is in operation.
There is an open circuit for the IPC. An error has occurred, and the IPC
communication remains disabled.

E719

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

There is a coin vendor error.

0001 The coin vendor is not connected when the power is turned on, although it was
connected before the power was turned off because of an error.

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

0002 While the coin vendor is in operation, an IPC error has occurred, IPC has
Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:
developed an open circuit, or an error preventing recovery of IPC communication COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
has occurred.
An open circuit has been detected in the line for the pickup/delivery signal.
An illegal signal has been detected.
0003 While the unit price is being checked at startup, an error occurs in the
communication with the coin vendor.

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

0011 An error has occurred at new card reader startup.

The new card reader is not connected when the power is turned off, although it
was connected when the power was turned off.

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.

0012 An IPC error has occurred at new card reader startup.

Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service mode:
There is an IPC open circuit. An error has occurred that prevents recovery of IPC COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
communication.
E730

There is a PDL software error.

1001 An initialization error has occurred.

1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.

100A An error that may be critical to the system (e.g., failed initialization) has occurred. 1. Execute PDL resetting.
2. Turn on the power once again.
9004 There is an error in the communication (PAI) with an external controller.

1. Turn on the power once main.

2. Check the connection of the open I/F board and the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external controller open I/F.
4. Replace the main board.

9005 There is a fault in the connector of the vide cable to the external controller.

1. Turn on the power once main.

2. Check the connection of the open I/F board and the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external controller open I/F.
4. Replace the main board.

A006 The PDL board does not respond. A subbootable is faulty or absent.

1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.
3. Check the connection of the SURF board.
4. Re-install the firmware.
5. Replace the main board.

A007 There is a mismatch between the control software of the machine and the PDL
control software in regard to version.

1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and reinstall the system.

B013 There is corruption in the font data.

1. Turn on the power once again.

2. Re-install the software.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and reinstall the system.

E732

There is an error in the communication with the scanner.

0001 There is a DDI-S communication error.

E733

E740

1. Check the connector used to connect the scanner.

2. Check the power supply of the scanner (to see if initialization takes
place at startup).
3. Replace the reader controller, scanner board, or main board as
necessary.

There is an error in the communication with the printer.

0000 At startup, communication with the printer fails.

1. Check the connector used to connect to the printer.

2. Check the power supply of the printer (to see if initialization takes
place at startup).
3. Replace the DC controller or the main board.

0001 There is a DDI-P communication error.

1. Check the connection with the printer.

2. Check the power supply of the printer (to see if initialization takes
place at startup).
3. Replace the DC controller or the main board.

There is an error on the Ether board.

15-17

Chapter 15

Code

Cause

0002 The MAC address is illegal.

E743

There is an error in the DDI communication.

0000 An SCI error has occurred. The received data is faulty. A reception timeout
condition has occurred. An SEQ timeout error has occurred.

E744

Remedy
Replace the LAN card.
Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable used to connect the
reader unit and the printer unit. Replace the following as necessary:
flexible cable, reader controller PCB, main controller PCB.

There is an error in the language file/boot ROM.

0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and that of the bootable do not match. Download a language file of the correct version.

E745

0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too large.

Download a language file of the correct version.

0003 There is no language file on the HDD indicated by config.txt for a switchover.

Download a language file of the correct version.

0004 An attempt to switchover to a language on the HDD fails.

Download a language file of the correct version.

1000 The boot ROM that is mounted is of the wrong type.

Replace the boot ROM with one of the model in question.

2000 The engine ID indicated by the software ID is illegal.

Replace it with a software ID of the correct model.

There is a fault on the TokeRing board.

0001 An attempt at PCI initialization has failed.

1. Disconnect and then connect the TokeRing board.

2. Replace the TokeRing board.

0002 The MAC address is faulty.

1. Replace the TokenRing board.

0003 There is an error in the acquisition/setting of board information.

1. Replace the TokenRing board.

0004 There is a connection error.

1. Check the connection of the cable.

2. Replace the cable.
3. Check the power source of the MAU.
4. Replace the MAU.
5. Replace the TokenRing board.

0005 Other Errors

E746

The accessories board is of the wrong type.

0003 At startup, a board for a different model has been detected.

E748

1001 There is a mismatch between the control board and the SDRAM.
E805

Check the correct combination between board and SDRAM.

There is a fan error.

0000 While the fan is at rest, the lock signal has been detected for 5 sec.
While the fan is in operation, the lock signal is not detected for 5 sec.

15-18

Replace the UFR board of the correct type (model).

There is a mismatch between controller board and SDRAM size.

Replace the fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.

Chapter 15

15.3 Error Code (SEND)

15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis
0008-0278
T-15-8

Cause

Remedy

There is a shortage of TCP/IP resources. Try again later.

While continuous transmission is under way or has
Wait a while; then, try again.
ended in FTP or Windows (SMB), a shortage of TCP/IP
resources has occurred, not permitting reference.
Set the IP address.
The IP address of the machine has yet to be set.

In user mode, set the IP address; thereafter, turn off and

then on the machine.

The server does not respond. Check the settings.

The settings of the selected server are not correct, or the Wait a while; then, try again. If browsing is still not
permitted, select a different server.
server has not been turned on. Or, there may be a
shortage of resources.
NetWare is in use. Try again later.
NetWare is printing using PSeve or NDSPServer, not
permitting browsing.

Wait until NetWare finishes printing; then, try again.

The layer in question at the target is too deep to browse.

The number of characters is in excess of the number
allowed.

The layer in question cannot be specified. Specify a

different address.

There is no response.
The server is not ready for file transmission.

Check the target.

The network is cut for file transmission. (An attempt to Check the network.
connect to the target of transmission may have failed, or
there is an open circuit in the middle.)
The tree name is not specified for NetWare
transmission.

Type in the tree name.

An error has occurred for TCP/IP in the course of e-mail Check the condition of the network cable and the
or i-fax transmission.
connector.
Check TCP/IP.
The machine's TCP/IP is not in operation.

In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (IP address,

DHCP, RARP, BOOTP).

The selected server cannot be found. Check the settings.

The IP address in question cannot be identified.

1. In user mode, check the DNS settings.

2. On the DNS side, check the DNS data settings.

If the login information for the LDAP server is set to

In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (DNS settings).
'use (security authentication)', the host name in question
cannot be identified.
The selected server cannot be connected. Check the settings.
An attempt to connect to the IP address/port in question 1. In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (gateway
fails.
address of the IP address settings).
2. In user mode, check the LDAP server settings.
3. Check to see that the LDAP server is operating
normally.
4. If the login information of the LDAP server is set to
'use (security authentication)', check to see if the UDP
packet is blocked by a filter.
Check the user name, password, or the settings.
If the login information of the LDAP server is set to 'use' In user mode, check the LDAP server settings (user
or 'use (security authentication)', the user name or the name, password).
password is wrong.
If the login information of the LDAP server is set to 'use In user mode, check the LDAP server settings (domain
(security authentication)', the domain name is wrong. name).
A timeout condition has occurred, and a search cannot be completed. Check the settings.
The search cannot be completed within the specified
period of time.

In user mode, increase the length of time before a

timeout condition occurs (part of LDAP server settings).

An upper limit for search results has been exceeded. If the desired address is not indicated in the results,
change the search conditions.
The number of matches has exceeded the number of
results brought up in response to the search.

1. Narrow down the search conditions, and try again.

2. Try increasing the upper limit.

The search conditions include a character that cannot be used for the selected server.
The symbol \ is used in the search condition.

Remove the symbol \ from the search condition, and try

once again.

15-19

Chapter 15

Cause

Remedy

The combination of characters used in the search

condition fails to make up a correct search condition.
There must be as many "s as there are "s
The symbol * is not included within parentheses.

Check to be sure that the combination of characters is in

keeping with the rule; then, try once again.

If LDAP of the server and the character code is version Remove any character that cannot be used; then, try
2 (JIS), there is a character that is not part of the ASCII once gain.
code (0x20-0x7E).
The version setting of the server is wrong, and the search cannot be initiated. Check the settings.
In user mode, the LDAP server settings (server LDAP
version and character code) is set for version 3;
however, the LDAP server is operating for version 2.

In user mode, set the LDAP server settings so that the

LDAP server version and the character code are both
version 2.

15.3.2 Error Codes

0008-0315
T-15-9
Cause

Remedy

# 001
There is a paper or original jam.

Remove the jammed paper or original.

# 003
A communication lasting longer than a specific period of 1. Decrease the resolution for transmission.
time (64 min) will cause an error state.
2. In the case of reception, ask the source to decrease the
resolution or divide the original.
# 005
The target does not respond within 35 sec.

Check to be sure that the target is ready to communicate;

then, try once again.

The target is a non-G3 model.

Check the target.

# 009
There is no paper.

Supply paper.

The cassette is not fitted properly.

Fit the cassette correctly.

# 011
The original to be transmitted is not placed properly.

Start over from the beginning.

# 012
The target is out of recording paper, and transmission
has failed.

Ask the target to supply recording paper.

# 018
There is no response to a redial attempt.

Check to make sure that the target is ready for

communication; then, try once again.

The target is engaged for a different communication, and Check to make sure that the target is ready for
transmission has failed.
communication; then, try once again.
The settings do not match the settings of the target, and Check to make sure that the target is ready for
the transmission has failed.
communication; then, try once again.
# 022
The particulars of the group address selected as the
Try transmitting once again.
forwarding target may have been deleted, or there is no
more than a user box, thus causing the transmission to
fail.
The attempt to transmit to an address registered in the
address book has failed because the address has been
removed from the address table while in wait for
transmission.

Try once again.

# 037
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting reception. Remove error files and unnecessary files to increase
available memory.
# 080
F code is not set on the target.

Check the F code of the target, and start over.

# 081
The appropriate password is not set on the target.

Check the password of the target, and start over.

# 099
The transmission has been suspended in the middle.

Start over.

# 102
There is a mismatch of F code or password.

Check the F code and the password of the target, and

start over.

# 107
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting
transmission.

15-20

1. Decrease the resolution, and try once again.

2. Remove unnecessary files to increase available space.

Chapter 15

Cause

Remedy

# 701
The group ID set when the job was introduced no longer Type in the correct group ID or the ID No. (using the
exits. Or, the password has been changed.
keypad); then, start over.
# 702
The memory is full, not permitting transmission.

1. Wait a while. Try again until the ongoing transmission

of a job ends.
2. Try not to transmit to too many addresses at once;
rather, try dividing the address into smaller groups.

# 703
The memory image area is full, not permitting further
writing.

1. Wait a while. Try transmitting after the ongoing

transmission of a job ends.
2. Remove files from the Box; if the operation still fails
to return to normal, turn off and then back on the main
power.

# 704
An error has occurred while an attempt is made to obtain Check the settings of the address, and try once again; if
address information from the address book.
the operation is still not normal, try turning off and then
back on the main power.
# 705
The image data size is in excess of the upper limit
Try changing the upper limit imposed on transmission
imposed on transmission data size set in user mode, thus data size as part of the communication control settings of
causing suspension of transmission.
system control settings (user mode). When selecting low
resolution mode or using i-fax, try decreasing the
number of images to send at one time so that the
transmission will not be in excess of the upper limit
imposed on transfer data size.
# 706
An address table is being imported from or to the remote Start over once again.
UI; or, a different transmission component is being used.
# 711
All memory of the Box is used.

Delete files from the Box.

# 712
The Box is full of files.

Remove file from the Box.

# 713
The file has been removed from the Box before
transmitting the URL.

Put the file in question back into the Box, and start over.

# 751
The server is yet to start up. The network is
disconnected. (The connection to the target may have
failed, or the connection may have been cut in the
middle.)

Check the target. Check the network.

# 752
The SMTP server name of the e-main/i-fax in question
may be wrong, or the server in question is yet to start up.
Or, the appropriate domain name or e-mail address has
not been set. Or, the network has been disconnected.

Using the network settings of the system control setup

(user mode), check the SMTP server name, domain
name, and e-mail address. Check to see that the SMTP
server is operating normally. Check the connection of
the network.

# 753
A TCP/IP error has occurred in the course of e-mail
transmission. (e.g., socket, select error)

Check the condition of the network cable and the

connector. If the operation does not return to normal, try
turning off and then back on the main power of the
machine.

# 754
The server has not been started up for transmission, or
the network is disconnected. Or, the target settings are
wrong.

Check the server and the network. Check the settings of

the target.

# 755
The TCP/IP settings are not operating normally, thus not In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings.
permitting transmission.
The appropriate IP address has not been set up.

In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings.

When the machine is started up, its IP address is not

assigned by means of DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP.

In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings.

# 756
In system control setup (user mode), 'use NetWare' is set In network settings of system control setup (user mode),
to 'off' in NetWare settings.
set 'use NetWare' to 'on'.
# 801
While e-mail is being transmitted or i-fax is transmitted/ 1. Check to see that SMTP is operating normally.
received, the communication with the SMTP server
2. Check the condition of the network.
encountered a timeout error because of a factor
associated with the main server.

15-21

Chapter 15

Cause

Remedy

While an SMTP connection is being used, the SMTP

server has returned an error.
The address setting is not correct.
When data is transmitted to the file server, an error has
occurred owing to a factor associated with the server.

1. Check to see if SMTP is operating normally.

2. Check the condition of the network.
3. Check the address setting.
4. Check the condition of the file server and the setting.

An attempt has been made to transmit data to an address Check the address setting.
not authorized for a write operation.
In the course of transmitting data (file server), it was
found that there is a file having the same name, and an
overwrite operation to the file is prohibited.

Change the setting of the file server so that overwriting

may be permitted.

In relation to transmission (file server), the folder name Check the address setting.
or the password that has been specified is wrong.
# 802
In the system control setup (user mode), the settings of
the SMTP server for e-mail/i-fax are wrong.
The setting of the DNS server is wrong.
The attempt to connect to the DNS server has failed.

In the network settings under system control settings

(user mode), check the SMTP server name and the DNS
server name. Check to see if the DNS server is operating
normally.

# 803
Before all pages have been transmitted, the target has cut Try once again.
off the network.
# 804
When an attempt is made to transmit to the file server, it Check the address.
has been found that no match exits in the specified
directory.
You are not authorized for access to the folder.

Set the server so that you will be authorized to access the

folder.

# 806
When an attempt to transmit to the file server is made, it Change the user name or the password of the address.
has been found that the specified user name or password
is wrong.
The address specified for e-mail/i-fax transmission is
wrong.

Check the address of the e-mail/i-fax in question.

# 810
When an attempt is made to receive i-fax, a POP server 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
connection error has occurred.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
While a connection is made to the POP server, an error 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
has been returned by the POP server.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
While a connection is made to the POP server, a timeout 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
error has occurred owing to a factor associated with the 2. Check the operation of the POP server.
server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
# 815
If a file that has been transmitted to the file server is
Wait a while, and then try once again. Or, change the
being printed, you will not be able to log in to the server NetWare server settings of the target, or stop PServer.
in question.
# 818
The data that has been received is in a format that does
not permit printing.

Ask the source to change the file format and transmit it

once again.

# 819
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot
be handled (i.e., its MIME information is illegal).

Ask the target to check the settings and transmit it once

again.

# 820
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot
be handled (i.e., BASE64 or Unicode is illegal).

Ask the source to check the settings and transmit it once

again.

# 821
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot Ask the target to check the settings and transmit once
be handled (i.e., TIFF interpretation error has occurred). again.
# 822
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot
be handled (i.e., the image cannot be decoded).

Ask the source to check the settings and transmit once

again.

# 827
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot
be handed (i.e., part of its MIME information is not
supported).

Ask the source to check the settings and transmit once

again.

# 828
HTML data has been received.
# 829

15-22

Ask the source to use a format other than HTML.

Chapter 15

Cause

Remedy

The data that is being received consists of 100 pages or The machine is designed so that it removes data for the
more.
100th and subsequent pages and prints or saves in
memory up to the 999th page. Ask the source to transmit
the remaining pages one again.
# 830
A DSN error notice has been received because of the
following: the i-fax address or the target settings are
wrong, or the data of the file that has been transmitted is
greater than the size permitted by the mail server.

1. Check the i-fax address and the target settings.

2. In user mode, decrease the upper limit imposed on the
size of transmission data so that it is lower than the size
permitted by the mail server.
3. Check the condition of the mail server, DNS server,
and network.

# 831
An attempt to receive i-fax in SMTP has failed because Change the reception/printing range settings made as
of the reception/printing range settings made as part of part of the IP address range setting in user mode.
the IP address range setting in user mode.
# 832
In user mode, the e-mail setting or the network setting is
yet to be made, causing a mail server fault and, thus,
preventing reception of MDN (transmission
confirmation) mail.

1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/i-fax

setting, and IP address made as part of the network
settings.
2. Check the condition of the mail server and the DNS
server.

# 833
The network settings have not been made in user mode
or there is a mail-server related fault, thus preventing the
transmission of the mail (MDN; transmission
acknowledgement).

1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/i-fax

setting, and IP address made as part of the network
settings.
2. Check the condition of the mail server and the DNS
server.

# 834
The i-fax address or the condition settings of the target Check the specified i-fax address and the target
may be wrong, there may be a fault in the network or the conditions.
mail server, or the target may have encountered a
memory full condition, thus causing an MDS error
notice.
# 835
The number of text lines is more than the maximum
number of lines permitted for i-fax.

Ask the target to decrease the number of text lines and

try once again.

# 837
A request has been made by a host that comes under the Check the setting of the IP address range in user mode.
restrictions imposed by 'IP address range setting' in user The attempt to access in question may be illegal.
mode.
# 839
The SMTP authentication (SMTPAUTH) user name or Check the user name and password used for SMTP
password for e-mail/i-fax (network settings) may be
authentication (SMTPAUTH) as part of the network
wrong.
settings under system control settings (user mode).
# 841
In relation to an attempt for transmission for e-mail/ifax, there is no coding algorithm that may be used in
common with the mail server.

1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network settings under

system control settings (user mode).
2. Add a coding algorithm that may be used in common
(mail server settings).

# 842
In relation to an attempt for transmission of e-mail/i-fax, 1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network settings under
a request has been made for the use of a client certificate the system control settings (user mode).
by the mail server.
2. Change the mail server settings so that it will not
request a client certificate.
# 843
The time used by the KDC (key distribution center)
server and the time used by the machine are different
significantly.

1. Correct the time as part of the date/time settings under

the system control settings (user mode).
2. Correct the time used by the KDC (key distribution
center) server.

# 847
The memory of the Box has been used up, not permitting Remove unnecessary files from the fax box or the
the storage of the received file in the fax box.
system box.
# 851
The remaining memory of the machine is running short. Check the remaining memory of the machine; then,
remove unnecessary files for the Box.
There are more than 100 files in the specified box, not
permitting additional storage.

Remove unnecessary files from the specified box.

# 852
The main power switch has been turned off while a job Check to see that the main power switch is on; as
is being executed, causing an error.
necessary, try once again.
# 899

15-23

Chapter 15

Cause

Remedy

The transmission of e-mail or i-fax has ended. However, 1. Check with the target to see if the transmission has
the transmission has gone through multiple servers, and arrived.
there is no way of finding out whether the transmission 2. Check to see if an error notice has arrived.
has reached the target.
# 995
The reservation for the transmission has been cancelled. As necessary, start over.

15-24

Chapter 15

15.4 Jam Code

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit)
0007-8207
T-15-10
Code

Jam

01xx

delay jam

02xx

stationary jam

0Axx

residual jam

0B00

door open jam

T-15-11
Code

Sensor

Sensor notation

xx01

cassette 1 tray sensor

PS10

xx02

cassette 2 retry sensor

PS11

xx03

cassette 3 retry sensor

PS1 (cassette pedestal)

xx04

cassette 4 retry sensor

PS2 (cassette pedestal)

xx05

registration sensor

PS9

xx06

---

---

xx07

fixing delivery sensor

PS13

xx08

No. 1 delivery sensor

PS14

xx09

No. 2 delivery sensor

PS1A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0A

reversal sensor

PS4A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0B

No. 3 delivery sensor

PS5A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0C

duplexing assembly feed sensor

PS3A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0D

duplex/feed sensor

PS17

xx0E

deck retry sensor

PS6D (side paper deck)

xx0F

deck pull-off sensor

PS1D (side paper deck)

xx11

buffer inlet sensor

PS1B (buffer path unit)

xx12

buffer outlet sensor

PS2B (buffer path unit)

0B00

door switch

SW2

0B00

feeding cover sensor

PS18

0B00

front cover sensor

PS22

0B00

right cover open/ closed sensor

PS59 (cassette pedestal)

15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)

0009-4184

- Finisher-S1
T-15-12
Code

1011
1121
1F81
1506
1307
1408
1644
1347

Jam

Sensor notation

inlet path sensor feed delay jam

PI5

inlet path sensor feed stationary jam

PI5

stack delivery jam

PI1

staple jam

STP

power-on jam

POWER ON

door open jam (joint)

DOOR

punch hole jam

SR2

punch power-on jam

LED7/PTR7

15-25

Chapter 15

15.5 Alarm Code

15.5.1 Alarm Code
0009-4187
T-15-13

15-26

Location code

Alarm Code

02 Scanner

0002

alerts to soiling on glass in stream reading mode

04 Pickup/feeder

0008
0011
0012
0013
0014
0018

accessory deck lifter error

1st cassette retry alarm
2nd cassette retry alarm
3rd cassette retry alarm
4th cassette retry alarm
accessory deck retry alarm

61 Finisher

0001

no staple

65 Puncher

0001

punch waste case full

Chapter 15

15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes

15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher)
0008-1518
T-15-14

Code

Detail
code

Name

Detection

E500

0001

fault in
communication
with the finisher
(common among
all finishers)

E503

0002

fault in
communication
between finisher
fault in
communication and saddle unit
with the finisher fault in
(Finisher-Q3/Q4) communication
between finisher
and punch unit

0003

E505

0001

0002

E514

0001

0002

Remedy

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
DC controller PCB.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
saddle controller PCB.
Check the cable.
Replace the finisher
controller PCB. Replace the
punch drive PCB. Check
the cable.
Turn off the main power.
Check the wiring of the DC
controller PCB and the
fault in the data
finisher controller, and
fault in the
stored in backup
check the fuse of the 24-V
backup memory
memory
power supply. Thereafter,
of the finisher
turn the main power back
(common among
on.
all finishers)
fault in the
Replace the punch driver
EEPROM data of PCB. Replace the finisher
the punch unit
controller PCB.
When the stack
Replace the finisher
retaining spacer is controller PCB. Replace the
returned to home stack delivery motor.
position, the belt Check the stack delivery
escape home
drive mechanism.
position sensor
does not go on
fault in stack
within 1.5 sec.
delivery motor
When the stack
(Finisher-S1)
retaining spacer is
shifted from home
position, the belt
escape home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1.5 sec.

15-27

Chapter 15

Code

E514

Detail
code

0001

0002

E519

Gear change
motor error
(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

8001

8002

15-28

fault in trailing
edge assist motor
(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

0001

0002

E530

Name

Rear alignment
error (FinisherS1)

Detection

Remedy

The home position

sensor does not go
off even when the
trailing edge assist
motor has rotated
for a specific
period of time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even after the
trailing edge assist
motor has rotated
for a specific
period of time.
The home position
sensor does not go
off even when the
gear change motor
has rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even when the
gear change motor
has rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on within 2000
msec after the start
of operation when
the rear aligning
plate is shifted to
home position.
The home position
sensor does not go
off within 1000
msec after the start
of operation when
the rear aligning
plate is shifted
from home
position.

Replace the finisher control

PCB. Replace the trailing
edge assist motor.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
gear change motor. Check
the gear change
mechanism.

Replace the finisher

controlled PCB. Replace
the rear alignment motor.
Check the rear aligning
plate drive mechanism.
Check the rear alignment
home position sensor.

Chapter 15

Code

E530

Detail
code

0001

0002

E531

Name

Front alignment
error (FinisherQ3/Q4)

8001

Stapler error
(Finisher-S1)
8002

E531

0001

0002

E532

Stapler error
(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

8001

8002

Stapler shift error

(Finisher-S1)

Detection

Remedy

The home position

sensor does not go
off even when the
front alignment
motor has been
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even when the
front alignment
motor has been
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
At time of staple
jam recovery, the
home position
sensor does not go
on with 500 msec
after the start of
reverse rotation of
the stapler motor.
The home position
sensor does not go
off within 500
msec after the
stapler motor has
been started.
The home position
sensor does not go
off even when the
stapler motor has
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even when the
stapler motor has
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The stapler slide
home position
sensor does not go
on within 11 sec
when the stapler is
shifted to home
position.
The stapler slide
home position
sensor does not go
off within 1.0 sec
when the stapler is
shifted from home
position.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
front alignment motor.
Check the front aligning
plate drive mechanism.
Check the front alignment
home position sensor.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stapler. Check the harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stapler. Check the harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stapler shift motor. Check
the stapler shift home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

15-29

Chapter 15

Code

E532

Detail
code

0001

0002

E535

Swing cam error

(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

8001

8002

15-30

Swing cam error

(Finisher-S1)

0001

0002

E537

Stapler shift error

(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

0001

0002

E535

Name

Front alignment
error (FinisherS1)

Detection

Remedy

The home position

sensor does not go
off even after the
stapler shift motor
has rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even when the
stapler shift motor
has rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
off within 1000
msec after the start
of operation when
the swing arm is
shifted from home
position.
The home position
sensor does not go
off within 1.0 sec
when the stack
delivery roller
swing arm is
moved from home
position.
The home position
sensor does not go
off even when the
swing motor has
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on even when the
swing motor has
rotated for a
specific period of
time.
The home position
sensor does not go
on within 2.0 sec
when the front
aligning plate is
moved to home
position.
The home position
sensor dos not go
off within 1.0 sec
when the front
aligning plate is
shifted from home
position.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stapler shift motor. Check
the stapler shift home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
swing cam motor. Check
the swing cam home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
swing cam motor. Check
the swing cam home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
front alignment motor.
Check the front aligning
plate drive mechanism.
Check the front alignment
home position sensor.

Chapter 15

Code

E537

Detail
code

0001

0002

E540

8002

8003

E540

0002

0003

0004

E542

0002

0003

Name

Detection

The home position

sensor does not go
on within 2000
msec after the start
of operation when
the read aligning
plate is moved to
Rear alignment home position.
error (Finisher- The home position
Q3/Q4)
sensor does not go
off within 1000
msec after the start
of operation when
the rear aligning
plate is moved
form home
position.

Remedy

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
rear alignment motor.
Check the rear aligning
plate drive mechanism.
Check the rear alignment
home position sensor.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
tray ascent/descent motor.
Check the stack tray drive
mechanism. Check the
paper surface sensor.
Stack tray motor
Replace the finisher
error (Finishercontroller PCB. Check the
S1)
stack tray upper limit
An abnormal
sensor. Check the stack tray
combination of
lower limit sensor. Check
sensor states has
the stack tray upper paper
been detected.
surface sensor. Check the
stack tray lower paper
surface sensor.
Replace the No. 1 tray shift
motor. Replace the finisher
Upper tray ascent/
controller PCB. Check the
descent motor
tray ascent/descent
clock error
mechanism.
Upper tray ascent/
descent motor
Replace the No. 1 tray area
error (Finisher Area error
sensor PCB. Replace the
Q3/Q4)
finisher controller PCB.
Check the No. 1 tray closed
Safety switch
detecting switch. Replace
activation
the finisher controller PCB.
Replace the No. 2 tray shift
motor. Replace the finisher
Lower tray ascent/
controller PCB. Check the
descent motor
Lower tray
tray ascent/descent
ascent/descent clock error
mechanism.
motor error
(Finisher-Q3/Q4)
Replace the No. 2 tray shift
Area error
area sensor PCB. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.
The operation to
detect the paper
surface of the
stack tray does not
end within 1.0 sec.

15-31

Chapter 15

Code

E577

Detail
code

8001

8002

E584

Punch motor error

0001

0002

15-32

Shutter unit error

(Finisher-Q3/Q4)

0001

0002

E591

Paddle error
(Finisher-S1)

0001

0002

E590

Name

Punch dust sensor

error

Detection

Remedy

The paddle home

position sensor
does not go on
within 1.5 sec
when the paddle is
shifted to home
position.
The paddle home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1.0 sec
when the paddle is
moved to home
position.
The shutter open
sensor does not go
off (i.e., the
shutter does not
close).
The shutter open
sensor does not go
on (i.e., the shutter
does not open).
The punching
home position is
not detected even
when the puncher
motor has been
driven for 20
msec.
The punch home
position sensor is
not defected even
after the motor has
stopped at time of
punch motor
initial operation.
Error in lightreceiving voltage
while light is
emitted
Error in lightreceiving voltage
while light is not
emitted

Check the paddle motor.

Check the paddle home
position sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

E592

0001

Paper trailing
Error in lightedge sensor/
receiving voltage
horizontal sensor
when light is
error
emitted (trailing
edge sensor)

E592

0002

paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

Error in lightreceiving voltage

when light is not
emitted (trailing
edge sensor)

Check the stack edging

motor. Check the open/
close clutch. Check the
shutter home position
sensor. Replace the finisher
controller PCB.

Check the punch motor.

Check the punch motor
clock sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.

Check the waste paper case

full sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing

edge sensor. Check the
horizontal registration
sensor. Check the punch
driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.
Check the paper trailing edge
sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Chapter 15

Code
E592

Detail
code

0003

Name

Detection

Power trailing edge Error in lightsensor/registration receiving voltage

sensor
when light is

E592

0004

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0005

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0006

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0007

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0008

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0009

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

000A

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
1)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
1)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
2)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
2)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
3)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
3)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
4)
Error in lightreceiving voltage
when light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration sensor
4)

Remedy
Check the paper trailing edge
sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper training edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper training edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

15-33

Chapter 15

Code

E593

Detail
code

0001

0002

E5F0

0001

0002

15-34

Name

Detection

The lightreceiving voltage

home position
sensor does not go
off when light is
Punch shift motor emitted.
error
The lightreceiving voltage
home position
sensor does not go
on when light is
not emitted.
The paper
positioning plate
home position
sensor does to go
on when the paper
positioning motor
has been driven
for 1.33 sec.
Paper positioning
plate motor
(M4S)/paper
positioning plate
home position
Saddle paper sensor (P17S)
positioning plate The paper
error
positioning plate
home position
sensor doest not
go off when the
paper positioning
plate motor has
been driven for 1
sec.
Paper positioning
plate motor
(M4S)/paper
positioning plate
home position
sensor (P17S)

Remedy

Check the horizontal

registration motor. Check
the horizontal registration
home position sensor.
Check the punch driver
PCB. Replace the finisher
controller PCB. Check the
punch shift mechanism.

Check the paper positioning

plate motor. Check the
paper positioning plate
home position sensor.
Replace the finisher
controller PCB. Check the
paper positioning plate
drive mechanism.

Chapter 15

Code

E5F1

Detail
code

0001

0002

E5F2

Name

Saddle paper
folding error

0001

0002

Saddle guide
error

Detection

Remedy

The number of
detection pulses of
the paper folding
motor clock
sensor has
dropped below a
specific value.
Paper folding
motor (M2S)/
paper folding
motor clock
sensor (P14S)
The state of the
paper folding
home position
sensor doest not
change when the
paper folding
motor has been
driven for 3 sec.
Paper folding
motor (M2S)/
paper folding
motor clock
sensor (P14S)
The guide home
position sensor
does not go on
when the guide
motor has been
driven for 0.455
sec.
Guide motor
(M3S)/guide
home position
sensor (PI13S)
The guide home
position sensor
does not go off
when the guide
motor has been
driven for 1 sec.
Guide motor
(M3S)/guide
home position
sensor (PI13S)

Check the paper folding

motor. Check the paper
folding motor clock sensor.
Replace the finisher
controller PCB. Check the
paper folding plate drive
mechanism.

Check the guide motor.

Check the guide home
position sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.
Check the guide drive
mechanism.

15-35

Chapter 15

Code

E5F3

Detail
code

0001

0002

E5F4

0001

0002

15-36

Name

Detection

The aligning plate

home position
sensor does not go
on when the
alignment motor
has been driven
for 0.5 sec. (at
time of
initialization, 1.67
sec.)
Alignment motor
(M5S)/aligning
plate home
saddle alignment
position sensor
error
(PI5S)
The aligning plate
home position
sensor does not go
off when the
alignment motor
has been driven
for 1 sec.
Alignment motor
(M5S)/aligning
plate home
position sensor
(PI5S)
The stitching
home position
sensor does not go
on when the stitch
motor (rear) has
been rotated in
reverse for 0.5 sec
or more.
Stitch motor (rear;
M6S)/stitching
home position
sensor (rear;
MS5S)
Saddle rear
stapling error The stitching
home position
sensor does not go
off when the stitch
motor (rear) has
been rotated in
normal direction
for 0.5 sec or
more.
Stitch motor (rear;
MS)/stitching
home position
sensor (rear;
MS5S)

Remedy

Check the alignment motor.

Check the alignment home
position sensor. Check the
aligning plate drive
mechanism. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Replace the stitcher (rear).

Check the harness. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.

Chapter 15

Code

E5F5

Detail
code

0001

0002

E5F6

0001

E5F6

0002

Name

Detection

The stitching
home position
sensor does not go
on when the stitch
motor (front) has
been rotated in
reverse for 0.5 sec
or more.
Stitch motor
(front; M7S)/
stitching home
position sensor
(front; MS7S)
Saddle front
stapling error The stitching
home position
sensor does not go
off when the
switch motor
(front) has been
rotated in normal
direction for 0.5
sec or more.
Stitch motor
(front; M7S)/
stitching home
position sensor
(front; MS7S)
Saddle butting
The paper butting
error
plate home
position sensor
does not go on
when the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 0.3 sec.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate home
position sensor
(PI14S)
Saddle butting error The paper butting
plate home
position sensor
does not go off
when the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 80 msec
or more.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate home
position sensor
(PI14S)

Remedy

Replace the stitcher (front).

Check the harness. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper butting

plate motor. Check the
paper butting plate home
position sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

15-37

Chapter 15

Code
E5F6

15-38

Detail
code

0003

E5F6

0004

E5F6

0005

Name

Detection

Saddle butting error The number of

detection pulses of
the paper butting
plate motor has
dropped below a
specific value.
paper butting plate
motor (M8S)/
paper butting plate
motor clock
sensor (PI1S)
Saddle butting error The paper butting
plate leading edge
sensor does not go
off when the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 80
msec.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor (PI15S)
Saddle butting error The paper butting
plate leading edge
sensor does not go
on when the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 0.3 sec.
Paper butting
plate more (M8S)/
paper butting plate
leading edge
sensor (PI15S)

Remedy

Check the paper butting

plate motor. Check the
paper butting plate motor
clock sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper butting

plate motor. Check the
paper butting plate leading
edge sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Chapter 15

Code

E5F8

Detail
code

0001

0002

0003

Name

Detection

The connector of
the paper butting
plate home
position sensor
has been
identified as being
disconnected.
Connector of
guide home
position sensor
(PI13S)
The connector of
the paper butting
plate home
position sensor
Saddle connector has been
error
identified as being
disconnected.
Connector of
paper butting plate
home position
sensor (PI14S)
The connector of
the paper butting
plate leading edge
sensor has been
identified as being
disconnected.
Connector of
paper butting plate
leading edge
sensor (PI15S)

Remedy

Connect the connector of

the guide home position
sensor. Check the harness.
Replace the finisher
controller PCB.

Connect the connector of

the paper butting plate
home position sensor.
Check the harness. Replace
the finisher controller PCB.

Connect the connector of

the paper butting plate
leading edge sensor. Check
the harness. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

15-39

Chapter 15

Code

15-40

Detail
code

E5F

0001

E5F

0002

Name

Saddle switch
error

Detection

The inlet cover

switch has been
identified as being
open for 1 sec or
more after the start
of printing or the
start of initial
rotation with the
following sensors
identifying their
respective covers
as being closed:
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- nt cover open/
closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover
sensor (PI3S)
Or, the front over
switch (MS2S) or
the delivery cover
switch (MS3S) is
open.
Inlet cover switch
(MS1S)/front
cover switch
(MS2S)/delivery
cover switch
(MS3S)
Saddle switch error The front cover
switch has been
identified as being
open from the start
of printing or the
start of initial
rotation with the
following sensors
identifying their
respective covers
as being closed.
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/
closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover
sensor (PI3S)
- front cover
switch (MS2S)/
delivery cover
switch (MS3S)

Remedy

Check the inlet cover

switch. Check the inlet
cover sensor. Check the
front cover open/closed
sensor. Check the delivery
cover sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the front cover

switch. Check the inlet
cover sensor. Check the
front cover open/closed
sensor. Check the delivery
cover sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Chapter 15

Code
E5F

Detail
code

0003

Name

Detection

Saddle switch error The delivery

cover switch has

been identified as
being open after
the start of
printing or the
start of initial
rotation of the host
machine with the
following sensors
identifying their
respective covers
as being closed:
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/
closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover
sensor (PI3S)
- delivery cover
switch (MS3S)

Remedy

Check the delivery cover

switch. Check the inlet
cover sensor. Check the
inlet cover sensor. Check
the front cover open/closed
sensor. Check the delivery
cover sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

15.6.2 Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher)

0009-4183
T-15-15

Code

Detail
code

Items

E500

0001

Finisher
communication
error

E503

0003

Finisher internal
communication
error

E505

0001

Finisher backup
memory error
0002

Description

There is an error
in the
communication
between the
finisher and the
punch unit.
There is an error
in the data stored
in the backup
memory.
There is an error
in the punch unit
EEPROM data.

Remedial action

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Check the
cable. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Replace the finisher
controller PCB. Replace the
punch driver PCB. Check
the cable.

Turn off the main power,

and check the following:
DC controller PCB and
finisher PCB wiring, 24V
fuse. Thereafter, turn on the
main power.
Replace the punch driver
PCB. Replace the finisher
controller PCB.

15-41

Chapter 15

Code

E514

Detail
code

0001

0002

E530

8001

8002

15-42

Description

Remedial action

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stack delivery motor.
Check the stack delivery
drive mechanism.

Stack delivery
motor error
(Finisher-S1)

When the stack

retainer is moving
to home position,
the return belt
escape HP sensor
does not go on
within 1.5 sec.
When the stack
retainer is moving
from home
position, the
return belt escape
HP sensor does
not go off within
1.5 sec.
While the offset
motor is in
operation, drive was
applied for 1000
msec for movement
toward the home
position sensor;
however, the offset
home position
sensor does not go
on.

Replace the offset motor.

Replace the offset home
position sensor. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

0001

0002

E520

Items

The offset motor

or the finisher
controller PCB is
faulty. The offset
home position
sensor is faulty.

While the offset

motor is in
operation, drive was
applied for 1000
msec for movement
away from the home
position sensor;
however, the offset
home position
sensor does not go
off.

When the rear

aligning plate is
moving to home
position, the HP
sensor is not
identified as being
ON within 2000
msec after the start
Rear alignment
of the movement.
error (FinisherWhen
the rear
S1)
aligning plate is
moving from
home position, the
HP sensor is not
identified as being
OFF within 1000
msec after the start
of the movement.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
rear alignment motor.
Check the rear aligning
plate drive unit. Check the
rear alignment HP sensor.

Chapter 15

Code

E531

Detail
code

8001

8002

E532

8001

8002

E535

0001

0002

Items

Description

At time of a staple
jam recovery
session, the HP
sensor is not
identified as being
ON within 500
msec after the start
Staple error
of staple motor
(Finisher-S1)
reversal drive.
The HP sensor is
not identified as
being OFF within
500 msec after the
start of staple
motor drive.
When the stapler
is moving to home
position, the
stapler slide HP
sensor does not go
Stapler shift error on within 11 sec.
(Finisher-S1) When the stapler
is moving from
home position, the
stapler slide HP
sensor does not go
off within 1.0 sec.
When the swing
arm is moving
from home
position, the HP
sensor is not
identified as being
OFF within 1000
msec after the start
Swing cam error
of the movement.
(Finisher-S1)
When the stack
delivery roller
swing arm is
moving from
home position, the
swing cam HP
sensor does not go
off within 1.0 sec.

Remedial action

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
Staple. Check the harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
stapler shift motor. Check
the stapler shift home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
swing cam motor. Check
the swing cam home
position sensor. Check the
harness.

15-43

Chapter 15

Code

E537

Detail
code

8001

8002

E540

8002

Items

Description

When the front

aligning plate is
moving to home
position, the front
alignment HP
sensor does not go
Front alignment on within 2.0 sec.
error (Finisher- When the front
S1)
alignment plate is
moving from
home position, the
front alignment
HP sensor does
not go off within
1.0 sec.

E577

8001

8002

E590

0001

0002

15-44

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
front alignment motor.
Check the front aligning
plate drive unit. Check the
front alignment HP sensor.

Replace the finisher

controller PCB. Replace the
tray ascent/descent motor.
Check the stack tray drive
mechanism. Check the
paper surface sensor.
Stack tray shift
Replace
the finisher
motor error
controller
PCB. Check the
(Finisher-S1)
An error sensor
stack tray upper limit
output
sensor. Check the stack tray
combination has lower limit sensor. Check
been detected.
the stack tray paper surface
sensor. Check the stack tray
lower paper surface sensor.
When the paddle Check the paddle motor.
is moving to home Check the paddle home
position, the
position sensor. Replace the
paddle HP sensor finisher controller PCB.
does not go on
within 1.5 sec.
Paddle error
(Finisher-S1)
When the paddle
is moving from
home position, the
paddle HP sensor
does not go off
within 1.0 sec.
The punch home Check the punch motor.
position sensor is Check the punch motor
not detected even clock sensor. Check the
when the punch
punch driver PCB. Replace
motor has been
the finisher controller PCB.
driven for 200
msec.
Punch motor error At time of punch
motor initial
operation, the
punch home
position sensor is
not detected after
the motor has
stopped.
The stack tray
paper surface
detection does not
end within 1.0 sec.

8003

Remedial action

Chapter 15

Code

E591

Detail
code

Items

0001

0002

Punch dust sensor

error

E592

0001

Paper trailing
edge sensor/
horizontal
registration
sensor error

E592

0002

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0003

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0004

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0005

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0006

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

E592

0007

Paper trailing edge

sensor/registration
sensor error

Description

Remedial action

There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is
shined.
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is not
shined.
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is
shined (trailing
edge sensor).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is not
shined (trailing
edge sensor).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
1).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is not
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
1).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
2).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
when light is not
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
2).
There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
3).

Check the dust case full

sensor. Check the punch
driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing

edge sensor. Check the
horizontal registration
sensor. Check the punch
driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.
Check the paper trailing edge
sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.
Check the paper trailing edge
sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the power trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

15-45

Chapter 15

Code

Detail
code

E592

0008

E592

0009

E592

000A

E593

0001

0002

15-46

Items

Description

There is an error
in the voltage of
light reception
while light is not
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
3).
Paper trailing edge There is an error
sensor/registration in the voltage of
sensor error
light reception
while light is
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
4).
Paper trailing edge There is an error
sensor/registration in the voltage of
sensor error
light reception
while light is not
shined (horizontal
registration sensor
4).
The light
reception voltage
HP sensor does
not go off when
Punch shift motor light is shined.
error
The light
reception voltage
HP sensor does
not go on while
light is not shined.
Paper trailing edge
sensor/registration
sensor error

Remedial action
Check the paper trailing edge
sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher control PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the paper trailing edge

sensor. Check the horizontal
registration sensor. Check the
punch drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.

Check the horizontal

registration motor. Check
the horizontal registration
HP sensor. Check the punch
driver PCB. Check the
finisher controller PCB.
Check the punch shift
mechanism.

Chapter 15

15.7 DADF Error Codes

15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF)
0008-1517
T-15-16

Code
E400

Detail
code
0001

0002

0003

E490

0001

Description

Type

Remedy

Disconnect and then

connect the connector.
Check sum error
Replace the reader
controller PCB. Replace
the ADF controller PCB.
Disconnect and then
DF
connect the connector.
Reception status
communicatio
Replace the reader control
error
n error
PCB. Replace the ADF
control PCB.
Disconnect and then
connect the connector.
Reception interrupt
Replace the reader
error
controlled PCB. Replace
the ADF controller PCB.
The installed DF is Install an ADF that is
Wrong DF
not of a supported compatible with the
machine.
type.

15-47

Chapter 16 Service Mode

Contents

Contents
16.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections ........................................................................................................................ 16-2
16.1.3 Ending Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.4 Back-Up ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.5 Initial Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen ................................................................................................................................................................. 16-3
16.1.7 4th Item Screen ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16-4

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)..............................................................................................................................16-5

16.2.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.1.1 Copier List...................................................................................................................................................................................................16-5

16.2.2 FEEDER .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-9

16.2.2.1 Feeder List...................................................................................................................................................................................................16-9

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)............................................................................................................................................16-10

16.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.3.2 <DC-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.3.3 <R-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................... 16-12
16.3.4 <FEEDER> ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-14
16.3.5 <SORTER>............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-14

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................................16-21

16.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-21
16.4.1.1 Copier List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-21

16.4.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-26

16.4.2.1 FEEDER List ............................................................................................................................................................................................16-26

16.4.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-27

16.4.3.1 Sorter List..................................................................................................................................................................................................16-27

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)..............................................................................................................16-28

16.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-28
16.5.1.1 Copier List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-28

16.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-35

16.5.2.1 Feeder List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-35

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .........................................................................................................................16-37

16.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-37
16.6.1.1 Copier List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-37

16.6.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-54

16.6.2.1 Feeder List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-54

16.6.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-54

16.6.3.1 Sorter List..................................................................................................................................................................................................16-54

16.6.4 BOARD.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-55

16.6.4.1 Board List..................................................................................................................................................................................................16-55

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ..........................................................................................................................................16-56

16.7.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-56
16.7.1.1 Copier List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-56

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ....................................................................................................................................16-58

16.8.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-58
16.8.1.1 Copier List.................................................................................................................................................................................................16-58

Chapter 16

16.1 Outline
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode
0007-8133

The machine's service mode has a 3-layer screen construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, and Level 3 screen. Its mode items are grouped into those
used in regular maintenance work (Level 1 items) and those used in response to faults (Level 2 items).
User screen

)(2,8)(

Reset key

Initial screen
(Level 1)

Initial screen
(Level 2)

)(2)

(Select an item.)

Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 1)

(Select an item.)

Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 2)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)

Sub-item screen
(Level 1)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)

Sub-item screen
(Level 1)

Sub-item screen
(Level 2)

Previous/next page

Sub-item screen
(Level 2)

Previous/next page

F-16-1

The machine's service mode is divided into the following 7 types:

COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY

status indication mode

SORTER
BOARD

I/O
ADJUST
FUNCTION

input/output indication mode

adjustment mode
operation/inspection mode

OPTION

settings mode

TEST

test print mode

COUNTER

counter mode

F-16-2

16-1

Chapter 16

16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections

0007-8135

If you want to execute a machine operation using a service mode item, be sure to disconnect all cables from an external controller or a network before
starting service mode. Particularly, if you are using a FUNCTION (operation/inspection) mode item, the arrival of a print job from an external source
can cause the machine to malfunction, leading to damage.

1) Press the asterisk key "

" on the control panel.
2) Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the asterisk key "
" on the control panel.
In response to the foregoing key operations, the machine will bring up the following Initial screen:

Copier's service mode

COPIER

ADF's service mode

only when installed.
Sorter's or finisher's service mode
only if installed; the absence
of a mode for a sorter prevents
the indication of the notation.

Optional board's service mode

only if installed

FEEDER
SORTER

BOARD

F-16-3

16.1.3 Ending Service Mode

0007-8136

A press on the Reset key will bring back the Service Mode Initial screen.
Another press on the Reset key will end service mode, and bring back the User screen (standard screen).

If you used service mode (ADJUST, FUNCTION, OPTION), be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch after ending service mode.

16.1.4 Back-Up
0007-8137

At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in their respective service labels.
If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the adjustment values (for ADJUST and
OPTION) will return to their default settings. If there has been any change in a service mode item, be sure to update its setting indicated on the service
label. As necessary, make use of the space in the service label (as when recording an item not found on the label).
- Service Label for the Reader Controller PCB (behind the left cover [1] of the reader unit)
- Service Label [2] for the Main Controller PCB/DC controller PCB (behind the front cover unit of the printer unit)
[1]

[2]

F-16-4

16-2

Chapter 16

16.1.5 Initial Screen

0007-8138

COPIER
Initial item

FEEDER

Touch to select
an item.

SORTER

BOARD

F-16-5

16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen

0007-8139

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

Option

Test

Counter

2nd item
Touch to select
an item.

VERSION
USER
ACC-STS

3rd item

ANALOG
CST-STS

Touch to select
an item.

JAM
ERR

F-16-6

16-3

Chapter 16

16.1.7 4th Item Screen

0007-8140

Page

Display

I/O

Adjust Function Option

3rd
item

Test

Counter

< READY >

< 1/3 >

<VERSION>
DC-CON

Machine States
READY:
JAM:
SERVICE:
WAITING:
DOOR:
COPYING:
ERROR:
NO-TONER:
WTNR-FUL:
NO-PAPER:
ALERM:

IP
PANEL
ANAPRO
POWER
4th
item

PREV

ready for service/copy

paper jam present
service mode under way
operation (e.g., initial rotation) under way
cover open
copying under way
error present
toner absent
waste toner case full
paper absent
alarm condition present

+/-

NEXT

OK

Previous page
Next page
F-16-7

Display

I/O

Adjust Function Option

Reverses to indicate
selection

xxxxx

Counter

< READY >

< 1/3 >

<ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X

Test

yyyyy

{aaaaa

bbbbb}

numerical input range

value before change

input value

ADJ-X

PREV

NEXT

+/-

OK
stores input value

toggles between + and Stop

key: press it to stop the ongoing operation.

Clear

key: press to clear an input.

Start

key: press to start copying without leaving service mode.

F-16-8

16-4

Chapter 16

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

16.2.1 COPIER
16.2.1.1 Copier List
0007-9077

<VERSION>
T-16-1
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Sub-item

Description

Level

ROM version of each circuit board

Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number
- <--.--> if no circuit boards are connected.
DC-CON

ROM version of the DC controller circuit board

R-CON

ROM version of the reader controller circuit board

1
1

PANEL

ROM version of the CPU circuit of the operator panel

POWER

ROM version of the composite power circuit board

FEEDER

ROM version of the DADF controller circuit board

SORTER

ROM version of the finisher controller circuit board

FAX

ROM version of the fax board

NIB

Version of the network software

SDL-STCH

ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller circuit board

MN-CONT

ROM version of the main controller circuit board

DIAG-DVC

ROM version of the self-diagnostic device

RUI

Version of the remote UI

PUNCH

Version of the punch unit

LANG-EN

Version of the English language file

LANG-FR

Version of the French language file

LANG-DE

Version of the German language file

LANG-IT

Version of the Italian language file

LANG-JP

Version of the Japanese language file

JAVA-VM

Version of JavaVM in bootable

MEAP

Version of the MEAP Description on the hard disk

OCR-CN

Version of the simple-font Chinese OCR

OCR-JP

Version of the Japanese OCR

OCR-KR

Version of the Korean OCR

OCR-TW

Version of the full-font Chinese OCR

BOOTROM

Boot ROM version of the main controller circuit board

Marking style: xx.yy_z
z indicates the boot ROM type.

LANG-CS

Version of the Czech language file

LANG-DA

Version of the Danish language file

LANG-EL

Version of the Greek language file

LANG-ES

Version of the Spanish language file

LANG-ET

Version of the Estonian language file

LANG-FI

Version of the Finnish language file

LANG-HU

Version of the Hungarian language file

LANG-KO

Version of the Korean language file

LANG-NL

Version of the Dutch language file

LANG-NO

Version of the Norwegian language file

LANG-PL

Version of the Polish language file

LANG-PT

Version of the Portuguese language file

LANG-RU

Version of the Russian language file

LANG-SL

Version of the Slovenian language file

LANG-SV

Version of the Swedish language file

LANG-TW

Version of the full-font Chinese language file

LANG-ZH

Version of the simple-font Chinese language file

LANG-BU

Version of the Bulgarian language file

LANG-CR

Version of the Croatian language file

LANG-RM

Version of the Rumanian language file

LANG-SK

Version of the Slovak language file

LANG-TK

Version of the Turkish language file

16-5

Chapter 16
<ACC-STS>
T-16-2
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Sub-item

Description

Level

FEEDER

DADF connection status

0: Not connected 1: Connected

SORTER

Finisher and punch unit connection status

Sorter type 0: None 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher
Punch type 0: None 1: 2 holes 2: 2/3 holes 3: 4 holes (fr) 4: 4 holes (sw)

DECK

Paper deck connection status

0: Not connected 1: Connected

CARD

Card reader connection status

0: Card reader connected with no card inserted
1: Card reader not connected or connected with card inserted
(1: Ready to copy, 0: Not ready to copy)

Copy data controller connection status

0: Not connected 1: Connected

RAM

Capacity of the memory on the main controller circuit board 256 MB, 512 MB

COINROBO

Coin vendor connection status

0: Not connected 1: Connected

NIB

Network board connection status

0: No board connected
1: Ethernet board connected
2: Token ring board connected
3: Ethernet board and token ring board connected

PS/PCL

Not used

NETWARE

Netware firmware installation status

0: Not installed 1: Installed

SEND

Send function addition status

0: Send function not added 1: Send function added

PDL-FNC1/2

Valid PDL
0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 (0:OFF,1:ON)
b31 to b16 for PDL-FNC1
b15 to b0 for PDL-FNC2
b31: BDL, b30: PS, b29: PCL, b28: PDF, b27: LIPS, b26: N201, b25: I5577, b24:
ESC/P, b23: HPGL, b22: HPGL2, b21: IMAGING, b20: KS, b19 to b0: Reserved

HDD

Model name of the hard disk drive

PCI1/2/3

PCI1/2/3 board name

Not connected: Hyphen (-) displayed
Connected: Board name displayed

DATA-CON

<ANALOG>
T-16-3
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
Sub-item

Description

Level

TEMP

In-machine temperature (environment sensor): Unit: deg C

HUM

In-machine humidity (environment sensor): Unit: %RH

ABS-HUM

Water content (environment sensor): Unit: g

DR-TEMP

Photoconductor drum ambient temperature (drum sensor): Unit: deg C

FIX-C

Fixing heater temperature (main thermistor): Unit: deg C

FIX-E

Fixing heater edge temperature (sub-thermistor): Unit: deg C

<CST-STS>
T-16-4
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
Sub-item
WIDTH-MF

<JAM>

16-6

Description
Paper width on the manual feedtray
Unit: mm

Level
2

Chapter 16

[1]

[2]
[3]
[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

F-16-9

Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam.
(1) To previous page
(2) To next page
(3) Jam sequential number
(4) Jam type
(5) Corresponding sensor
(6) To next jam screen
(7) To previous jam screen
<No.> Jam sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest jam has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Jam occurrence date
<TIME1> Jam occurrence time
<TIME2> Jam reset time
<L>Location of the jam: 0 - 2 (0:host machine, 1:Feeder, 2:Finisher)
<CODE>Jam Code
<P> Paper feed position
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 7: Side paper deck, 8: Manual feed tray, 9: Duplex section
<CNTR> Software counter value of the paper feed stage
<SIZE> Paper size
<ERR>

F-16-10

<No.> Error sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest error has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Error occurrence date
<TIME1> Error occurrence time
<TIME2> Error reset time
<CODE> Error code

16-7

Chapter 16
<DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none)
<L> Error location
0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Not used 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit
6: Various PDL board 7: Fax board
<P> Not used
<HV-STS>
T-16-5
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
Sub-item

Description

Leve

Primary charge current at photoconductor drum Registrationance detection

control (APVC) Unit: uA

TR

Transfer current setting for the job executed last Unit: uA

BIAS

Developing bias setting for the job executed last Unit: V

TR-V

Voltage at transfer charging roller Registrationance detection control

(ATVC) Unit: V

PRIMARY

<CCD>
T-16-6
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
Sub-item

Description

Level

TARGET-R

Red shooting target value

OFST

CCD offset level adjustment value

2
2

GAIN

CCD gain level adjustment value

MFIL

Main-scan MTF correction index

SFIL

Subscan MTF correction index

<SENSOR>
T-16-7
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
Sub-item
DOC-SZ

Description
Document size detected by the document size sensor

Level
2

<ALARM-2>

F-16-11

<No.> Alarm sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest alarm has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Alarm occurrence date
<TIME1> Alarm occurrence time
<TIME2> Alarm reset time
<CODE> Alarm location code and alarm code
<DTL> Alarm detail code
<CNTR> Total counter value at alarm occurrence
<ENVRNT>
Environmental log display
Changes of [In-machine temperature (deg C)/humidity (%) / Fixing roller surface (center) temperature (deg C) are displayed as log data.
Remarks: The data acquisition cycle can be set at COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-INT in Service Mode.

16-8

Chapter 16

F-16-12
T-16-8
Item
No.

Description
Error sequential number: (The oldest error has the greatest number.)

DATE

Data acquisition date

TIME

Data acquisition time

D+deg C

In-machine temperature

E+%

In-machine humidity

F+deg C

Fixing roller surface temperature

16.2.2 FEEDER
16.2.2.1 Feeder List
0007-9922

FEEDER >DISPLAY
T-16-9
FEEDER >DISPLAY
Sub-item

Description

Level

FEEDSIZE

Document size detected by the feeder

TRY-WIDE

Distance between document width detection slides (Paper width detection

[mm])

16-9

Chapter 16

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

16.3.1 Outline
0008-0893

The figures below show the COPIER>I/O screen and the next pages describe the items (necessary items for market services only).

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

Option

Test

Counter

Option

Test

Counter

DC-CON
R-CON

FEEDER
SORTER

MN-CONT

F-16-13

<Screen interpretation>

Display

I/O

Adjust

<DC-CON>

Function

< 1/3 >

< READY >

P001 xxxxxxxx
P002 xxxxxxxx
P003 xxxxxxxx
P004 xxxxxxxx
P005 xxxxxxxx
P006 xxxxxxxx
P007 xxxxxxxx
P008 xxxxxxxx

0
7

F-16-14

16.3.2 <DC-CON>
0008-1403
T-16-10
Address
P001

16-10

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

0-1

For development

Fixing motor FG output signal

Polygon motor FG output signal

4-7

For development

8-15

Not used

Chapter 16

P002

P003

0-1

For development

2-3

Not used

4-5

For development

Thermistor: Overheat

0:Relay OFF

High-voltage board high voltage reset detection

0:High voltage reset detection

8-15

Not used

0-7

For development

8-15

Not used

P004

0-7

For development

8-15

Not used

P005

0-5

Not used

High-voltage board high voltage reset request

For development

P006

0:High voltage reset request

8-15

Not used

Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 0

Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 1

Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 2

Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 3

Fixing motor deceleration signal

Fixing motor acceleration signal

Thermistor pull-up resistor switching

1:At low temperature

Fan half-speed switching signal

1:Half speed

8-15

Not used

P007

0-15

Not used

P008

0-2

For development

Laser power select

Main motor

1:ON

5-7

For development

8-15

Not used

0-5

Not used

Polygon motor acceleration signal

7-15

For development

P010

0-7

Not used

P011

0-7

Not used

P012

0-7

Not used

P013

0-7

Not used

P014

0-7

Not used

P015

0-7

Not used

P016

0-7

Not used

P017

0-7

For development

P018

0-7

For development

P019

Manual feed clutch

1:ON

Registration clutch

1:ON

Sleeve clutch

1:ON

Duplex transport clutch

(iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F model only)

1:ON

Cassette 2 retry sensor

1:Detected

Cassette 2 paper sensor

1:No paper

Cassette 2 paper level A sensor

1Half or less

Cassette 2 paper level B sensor

1:About 50 sheets or less

Polygon motor standby signal

1:STBY

Bottle rotation motor

1:ON

Hopper screw motor

1:ON

Pre-exposure board

1:Pre-exposure with large

quantity of light

First paper ejection motor current switching 0

First paper ejection motor current switching 1

Heat exhaust fan F

1:ON

Pre-exposure light quantity switching

1:Pre-exposure with medium

quantity of light

P009

P020

16-11

Chapter 16

P021

Manual feed detection sensor

0:Paper present

Toner detection

1:Toner remaining

Duplex transport sensor

1:Detected

Heat exhaust fan F lock detection

0:Locked

4-7

For development

P022

0-7

For development

P023

Duplex motor current switching 10

Duplex motor current switching 11

Heat exhaust fan R

1:ON

For development

Waste toner sensor

0:Full

For development

Pre-exposure switching

1:Pre-exposure with small

quantity of light

For development

P024

0-7

For development

P025

0-3

For development

Pickup 1 solenoid

1:ON

Pickup 2 solenoid

1:ON

6-7

For development

P026

1-7

For development

P027

Door switch

1:OPEN

Pre-registration sensor

1:etected

For development

Heat exhaust fan R lock detection

For development

Main motor lock detection

0:Locked

Bottle power supply overcurrent detection

P028

P029

0:Locked

For development

0-4

For development

Cassette 1 paper sensor

1:No paper

Cassette 1 paper level A sensor

1:Half or less

Cassette 1 paper level B sensor

1:About 50 sheets or less

First paper ejection sensor

1:Detected

First paper ejection full sensor

0:Full

Fused paper ejection sensor

1:Detected

Front door sensor

0:OPEN

4-7

For development

0-1

For development

Paper feed door sensor

0:OPEN

Hopper level sensor

0:No toner

Cassette 1 retry sensor

1:Detected

5-7

For development

P031

0-7

Not used

P032

0-7

Not used

P033

0-7

Not used

P034

0-7

Not used

P035

0-7

Not used

P030

16.3.3 <R-CON>
0008-1274
T-16-11

16-12

Address

Bit

Address

P001

Not used

For development

For development

For development

For development

Not used

Remarks

Chapter 16

Address

P002

P003

P004

P005
P006

P007

P008

P009

Bit

Address

For development

Remarks

Size sensor drive signal

Not used

24V power supply monitor signal

0:Normal

Optical motor drive signal

1: Forward 0: Reverse

For development

For development

13V power supply monitor signal

Not used

For development

For development

For development

For development

For development

LED control signal

For development

None

None

1:ON

0:Normal

1:ON

Document size detection 0

0:Document present

Document size detection1

0:Document present

Document size detection2

0:Document present

Document size detection3

0:Document present

Not used

For development

For development

Not used

0-3

For development

4-7

None

Not used

For development

For development

For development

ADF sensor interrupt input

Platen sensor interrupt input 0

1:Platen closed

HP sensor interrupt input

1:HP
1:Platen closed

0:In operation

Platen sensor interrupt input 1

For development

For development

For development

For development

Optical motor driver power saving

0:active

ADF feed motor clock interrupt input

Repetition of 0/1

ADF read motor clock interrupt input

Repetition of 0/1

Not used

Lamp ON signal

1:ON

CIS drive ON signal

1:ON

For development

For development

For development

For development

For development

For development

0-4

For development

5-7

None

16-13

Chapter 16

16.3.4 <FEEDER>
0008-1275
T-16-12

Address

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

P001

Read sensor

1:Detected

Pre-registration sensor

1:Detected

Stamp solenoid

1:ON

Clutch

1:ON

Document load LED

1:ON

P003

0-7

P004

Document detection sensor

Cover sensor

For development

For development

For development

End sensor

1:Paper present

Length sensor 2

1:Paper present

Length sensor 1

1:Paper present

A4/LTR judgment sensor

1:Paper present

Paper ejection sensor

P002

P005

P006

0-7

For development

P007

0-7

P008

0-7

P009

0-7

P010

0-7

For development

P011

0-7

For development

1:Document present
1:Closed

1:Paper present

16.3.5 <SORTER>
0008-1276
T-16-13
Address

Controller

Bit

P001

STACKER

Entry transport motor A

Entry transport motor B

P002

16-14

STACKER

Display contents

Remarks

Entry transport motor A-

Entry transport motor B-

Entry transport motor current switching 0

0:ON

Entry transport motor current switching 1

0:ON

Entry transport/bundle ejection motor standby

signal

1:ON
0:ON

Common solenoid ON signal

Punch transport motor A

Punch transport motor A-

Punch transport motor B

Chapter 16

Address

P003

P004

P005

P006

P007

P008

P009

Controller

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

Punch transport motor B-

Punch transport motor current switching 0

1:ON

Punch transport motor current switching 1

1:ON

Tray 2 motor clock

Tray 1 motor clock

For development

For development

For development

For development

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Saddle connection detection signal

Not used

Oscillating HP sensor

Top cover sensor

0:ON

Front cover sensor

0:ON

Front cover interlock sensor

1:ON

Gear change HP sensor

1:ON

0:ON
1:ON

Not used

For development

For development

Punch send request signal

0:ON

Saddle 13VON signal

1:ON

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Punch connection sensor

Not used

Not used

Punch motor standby

Entry sensor(IRQ0)

1:ON

Paper rear end sensor(IRQ1)

1:ON

Punch communication input(IRQ2)

0:ON

Not used

Tray proximity sensor

0:ON

Tray 2 area sensor 1

0:ON

Tray 2 area sensor 2

0:ON

Tray 2 area sensor 3

0:ON

Tray 2 paper detection sensor

1:ON

Tray 2 paper surface sensor

1:ON

Entry motor clock input

0:ON

1:ON

Bundle ejection motor clock input

Tray 3 paper detection sensor

Tray 3 connection sensor

0:ON

High-quality paper sensor

1:ON

Tray 1 interlock detection sensor

1:ON

Tray 1 area sensor 1

0:ON

Tray 1 area sensor 2

0:ON

Tray 1 area sensor 3

0:ON

Tray 1 paper detection sensor

1:ON

Tray 1 shift motor CW

0:ON

Tray 1 shift motor enable

1:ON

Tray 1 shift motor power switching 0

0:ON

Tray 1 shift motor power switching 1

0:ON

Tray 2 shift motor CW

0:ON

Tray 2 shift motor enable

1:ON

Tray 2 shift motor power switching 0

0:ON

Tray 2 shift motor power switching 1

0:ON

1:ON

16-15

Chapter 16

Address

Controller

Bit

P010

STACKER

Not used

Oscillating pressure motor power switching 0

Oscillating pressure motor phase-A pulse

output

Oscillating pressure motor phase-B pulse

output

Not used

Not used

Not used

P011

P012

P013

P014

P015

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

Display contents

Not used

Entry roller spaced solenoid

For development

Remarks
0:ON

1:ON

For development

Buffer roller spaced solenoid

1:ON

Transport path sensor

1:ON

Not used

Not used

Not used

Gear change phase A

Gear change phase B

Gear change motor current switching 0

0:ON

Gear change motor current switching 1

0:ON

Not used

For development

For development

For development

For development

Pre-alignment HP sensor

Pre-alignment HP sensor

1:ON

Processing tray paper detection sensor

1:ON

Rear-end assist HP sensor

1:ON

Not used

Not used

Not used

Post-alignment motor phase A

Post-alignment motor phase B

Post-alignment motor current switching 0

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Pre-alignment phase A

Pre-alignment phase B

Pre-alignment motor current switching 0

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

1:ON

0:ON

0:ON

T-16-14
Address

Controller

Bit

P016

STACKER

Rear-end assist phase A

Rear-end assist phase B

Rear-end assist motor current switching 0

0:ON

Rear-end assist motor current switching 1

0:ON

Rear-end assist standby

1:ON

Not used

Not used

P017

16-16

STACKER

Display contents

Not used

Stapler slide standby

Remarks

1:ON

Chapter 16

Address

P018

P019

P020

P021

P022

P023

P024

Controller

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

SADDLE

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

Stapler CW

1:ON

Stapler CCW

1:ON

Not used

Stapler slide phase A

Stapler slide phase B

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler HP sensor

1:ON

Staple Ready signal

1:ON

Staple Present signal

1:ON

Stapler connection signal

0:ON

Stapler slide HP sensor

1:ON

Stapler - alignment plate interference sensor

1:ON

Stapler slide current switching 0

0:ON

Stapler slide current switching 1

0:ON

Under-bundle roller clutch

1:ON

Shutter clutch

1:ON

First paper ejection roller spaced solenoid

1:ON

Buffer paper rear-end press solenoid

1:ON

Bundle-out motor current switching 1

0:ON

Bundle-out motor current switching 0

0:ON

Bundle-out motor phase A

Bundle-out motor phase B

Bundle-out motor phase A-

Bundle-out motor phase B-

Ejection-position paper detection sensor

Scalable interlock

1:ON

Shutter HP sensor

1:ON

1:ON

Oscillating guide interlock

1:ON

DIPSW_8

0:ON

DIPSW_7

0:ON

DIPSW_6

0:ON

DIPSW_5

0:ON

DIPSW_4

0:ON

DIPSW_3

0:ON

DIPSW_2

0:ON

DIPSW_1

0:ON

PUSU switch 1

0:ON

PUSU switch 2

0:ON

PUSU switch 3

0:ON

Not used

5V detection signal

1:ON

24V detection signal

0:ON

Not used

Fan error detection signal

0:ON

FAN ON

1:ON

LED1

0:ON

LED2

0:ON

LED3

0:ON

FIN internal power supply ON

0:ON

Not used

Not used

Return roller spaced solenoid

Guide motor phase A

Guide motor phase B

Guide motor current switching

Saddle transport motor current switching

Saddle transport motor phase A

Saddle transport motor phase B

0:ON

0:ON

16-17

Chapter 16

Address

Controller

Bit
6

P025

P026

P027

P028

P029

P030

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

Display contents

Remarks

Saddle transport motor phase A-

Saddle transport motor phase B-

Alignment motor phase A

Alignment motor phase B

Alignment motor current switching

0:ON

Paper positioning motor current switching

0:ON

Paper positioning motor phase A

Paper positioning motor phase B

For development

For development

Not used

For development

Not used

For development

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler current detection signal

1:ON

Stapler current detection signal

1:ON

Paper ejection cover sensor connector open

0:ON

Front cover sensor connector open

0:ON

Butting plate HP connector open

0:ON

Folding roller guide HP connector open

0:ON

Saddle stapler unit connector open

0:ON

Butting plate TOP connector open

0:ON

Inside staple detection

1:ON

Front staple detection

1:ON

Front stapler motor reverse rotation signal

0:ON

Transport motor driver standby signal

0:ON

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Front cover open - 24V down detection

1:ON

Entry cover open - 24V down detection

1:ON

Folding motor forward rotation signal

1:ON

Folding motor reverse rotation signal

1:ON

Folding motor clock sensor

1:ON

Butting motor clock sensor

1:ON

Stapler HP sensor

1:ON

Stapler HP sensor

1:ON

Paper positioning plate HP sensor

0:ON

Folding roller guide HP sensor

1:ON

Entry cover open detection

0:ON

Saddle stapler open detection

1:ON

Butting plate HP sensor

1:ON

Butting plate TOP sensor

1:ON

Not used

Transport clock
T-16-15

16-18

Address

Controller

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

P031

SADDLE

Saddle tray paper detection sensor

0:ON

Paper positioning section paper detection

sensor

0:ON

Crescent roller HP sensor

0:ON

Saddle paper ejection path sensor

0:ON

Saddle path (upstream) sensor

1:ON

Saddle path (midstream) sensor

1:ON

Saddle path (downstream) sensor

1:ON

Chapter 16

Address
P032

P033

P034

P035

P036

P037

P038

P039

Controller
SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

Bit

Display contents

Remarks

Saddle path sensor

1:ON

Butting motor enable signal

1:ON

Butting motor forward rotation signal

1:ON

Butting motor reverse rotation signal

1:ON

Folding roller HP sensor

1:ON

Front door open detection sensor

0:ON

Paper ejection cover open detection sensor

(photosensor)

0:ON

Saddle alignment HP sensor

0:ON

Paper ejection cover open and 24V down

detection

1:ON

Entry flapper solenoid

1:ON

Saddle path switching flapper 1

1:ON

Saddle path switching flapper 2

1:ON

Intermediate transport solenoid

1:ON

Not used

Not used

Entry path sensor

Not used

Inside stapler motor forward rotation

Inside stapler motor reverse rotation

0:ON

Front stapler motor forward rotation

0:ON

Not used

Folding roller HP connector open

Not used

Not used

1:ON
0:ON

0:ON

Not used

DIPSW_1

0:ON

DIPSW_2

0:ON

DIPSW_3

0:ON

DIPSW_4

0:ON

DIPSW_5

0:ON

DIPSW_6

0:ON

DIPSW_7

0:ON

DIPSW_8

0:ON

Not used

Not used

Push switch 1

0:ON

5V detection signal

0:ON

24V detection signal

0:ON

Not used

Not used

Not used

POWER_ON

1:ON

LED1

1:ON

LED2

1:ON

LED3

1:ON

LEDY

0:ON

TRAY_MTR_CUR

0:ON

TRAY_MTR_B

0:ON

TRAY_MTR_A

0:ON

DIPSW1

0:ON

DIPSW2

0:ON

DIPSW3

0:ON

PCH-OUT

Rear-end sensor

Punch encoder clock

Punch HP sensor

For development

For development

1:ON
0:ON

16-19

Chapter 16

Address

P040

P041

P042

P043

16-20

Controller

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

Bit

Display contents

For development

Remarks

For development

For development

For development

For development

Horizontal registration HP sensor

1:ON

Horizontal registration motor STB

0:ON

Punch motor CCW

0:ON

Punch motor CW

0:ON

DIPSW4

0:ON

Horizontal registration motor CUR

0:ON

For development

LED1

For development

For development

LED2

0:ON

Front cover sensor

0:ON

For development

PUSHSW2

0:ON

PUSHSW1

0:ON

Top cover sensor

0:ON

0:ON

Chapter 16

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

16.4.1 COPIER
16.4.1.1 Copier List
0007-9190

<AE>
T-16-16
COPIER > ADJUST > AE
Sub-item
AE-TBL

Description

Level

Adjusting the character density at image density adjustment

<Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5)
Setting a greater value makes characters darker.
Setting a smaller value makes characters lighter.
If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared, enter the value from
the service label.

<ADJ-XY>
T-16-17
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Sub-item

Description

Level

Adjusting the mage read start position

- If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value
from the service label.
- If the setting of this item has been changed, enter the new value into the service label.
ADJ-X

Adjusting the optical image head position (image read start position in the subscan
direction)
<Setting range> 1 to 100 (Default: 20)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm backward.

ADJ-Y

Adjusting the CCD read start cell position (image read start position in the main
scan direction)
<Setting range> 85 to 169 (Default: 144)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm outward.

ADJ-S

Adjusting the main scan position at DF flow read

<Setting range> 50 to 250 (Default: 144)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm outward.

STRD_POS

Adjusting the optical shading measuring position

<Setting range> 20 to 200 (Default: 40)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the shading measuring position 0.1 mm forward.

ADJ-Y-DF

Adjusting the CCD read start position at DF flow read

<Setting range> 1 to 200 (Default: 100)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm to left.

16-21

Chapter 16

Original

Increase the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward
the trailing edge).

Decrease the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward
the leading edge).
CIS Unit
F-16-15

Decrease the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward the rear).

Read start position

Increase the setting

(so that the read
start position moves
toward the front).

Original

F-16-16

<CCD>
T-16-18
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Sub-item
MTF-MG

Desciption
<Setting range> 0 to 99 (Default: 0)
- If the CIS unit has been replaced, enter the value from the label affixed to the CIS
unit.
- If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
- If the setting of this item has been changed, enter the new value into the service label.

MTF-SG

Not used

DFTAR-R

Entering a shading target value (red) when DF is in use (Ordinary document read
position)
<Setting range> 1 to 2047 (Default: 1106)
If an image error (attributable to a dirty chart or other) has occurred after the execution
of COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2, enter factory measurement data
in this mode.

DFTAR2-R

Entering a shading target value (red) when DF is in use (Secondary document read
position)
<Setting range> 1 to 2047 (Default: 1138)
If an image error (attributable to a dirty chart or other) has occurred after the execution
of COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-WLVL2, enter factory measurement data in this mode.

16-22

Level

Entering a main-scan MTF correction value

Chapter 16

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Sub-item
SH-TRGT

Desciption

Level

Entry of a white level target value at the time of shading correction

<Setting range>1 to 2046 Default: 1070
As a remedy in the field, a shade on an image occurring when a folded/creased
document is read is lessened.

<LASER>
T-16-19
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
Sub-item
LA-OFF

Description

Level

Adjusting the rear-end laser OFF position

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

LA-DELAY

Entering a delay value after laser unit displacement (Matching the laser main scan)
<Setting range> 360 to 440
Enter the delay value peculiar to the unit affixed to the unit at laser unit
replacement.

POWER

Adjusting the laser power

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

<DEVELOP>
T-16-20
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
Sub-item
DE-OFST

Description

Level

Entering an offset value for the developing bias DC

1

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)

Setting a greater value increases the density.

<DENS>
T-16-21
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
Sub-item
DENS-ADJ

Description

Level

Correcting the image (copy/print) density

The F-value table is corrected if an image becomes fogged or blurred.
<Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5)
Setting a greater value reduces fogging.
Setting a smaller value reduces blurring.
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

<BLANK>
T-16-22
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
Sub-item
BLANK-T

Description
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
Setting a greater value increases the chipping width.
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

BLANK-B

Level

Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the front of an image
1

Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the rear of an image
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
Setting a greater value increases the chipping width.
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

16-23

Chapter 16
<HV-PRI>
T-16-23
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Sub-item
OFST1-DC

Description
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been
replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Note: If the compound power circuit board has been replaced, enter the value from the
label affixed to the casing of the new compound power circuit board.

OFST1-AC

Level

Entering an adjustment value for primary charge DC offset 1

1

Entering an adjustment value for primary charge AC offset 1

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been
replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Note: If the compound power circuit board has been replaced, enter the value from the
label affixed to the casing of the new compound power circuit board.

<HV-TR>
T-16-24
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
Sub-item
TR-OFST

Description
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

TR-SPP

Entering an output adjustment value for thick-paper transfer bias (for simplex
printing on thick paper and duplex printing on the 1/2 side)
- Increasing the value is very effective.
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

TR-TP-TM

TR-DUP1 to
TR-DUP8

<FEED-ADJ>

16-24

Setting an offset value for the paper sharing voltage in ATVC

<Setting range> -10 to 10
(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clearance: 0)

TR-PPR1 to TR- Setting a paper type at ATVC setting

PPR8
<Setting range> 1 to 8
(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clearance: 0)
1: Plain paper (Default), 2: thick paper, 3: envelope, 4: tracing paper, 5: OHP
transparency, 6: Postcard, 7: Label paper, 8: Bond paper
TR-ENV1 to
TR-ENV8

Adjusting the level of applying weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range> -50 to 50 (Default: 0) (Unit: %)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
This mode is to set the voltage application level. The setting becomes enabled
depending on the combination of the following modes.
COPIER>OPTION>COMBO>PPR-SLCT/MOD-SLCT/ENV-SLCT/ TR-SW1 to
5

2TR-TGT1 to
2TR-TGT8

Adjusting the time of applying weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range> 0 to 127 (Default: 0) (Unit: 2 ms)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
This mode is to set the voltage application time. The setting becomes enabled
depending on the combination of the following modes.
COPIER>OPTION>COMBO>PPR-SLCT/MOD-SLCT/ENV-SLCT/ TR-SW1 to
5

TR-TP-LV

Level

Entering an output adjustment value for transfer charge current offset

Setting environment at ATVC setting

<Setting range> 1 to 3
1: Category A (low temperature) (Default), 2: Category B (room temperature), 3:
Category C (high temperature)

Setting simplex paper feed mode at ATVC setting

<Setting range> 1to 4
1: Simplex (Default), 2: Auto duplex feed, 3: Multiple simplex feed, 4: Multiple
duplex feed

Chapter 16
T-16-25
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
Sub-item
REGIST

Description
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image 0.1 mm forward.
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

LOOP-CST

Adjusting the registration loop amount at special-paper feed

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)

LOOP-ENV

Adjusting the registration loop amount at thick-paper feed

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)

LOOP-SP

Adjusting the horizontal registration at paper re-feed (Large paper)

- If the image is deviated to this side, increase the value.
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

LOOP-THK

Adjusting the registration clutch ON timing

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

ADJ-RE-L

Adjusting the registration loop amount at duplex paper feed

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 45)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

RG-HF-SP

Adjusting the horizontal registration at paper re-feed (Small paper)

- If the image is deviated to this side, increase the value.
<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

LOOPREFE

Adjusting the registration loop amount at cassette paper feed

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 45)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

ADJ-REFE

Adjusting the registration loop amount at cassette paper feed

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 63)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself
has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

LOOP-MF

Level

Adjusting the registration roller clutch ON timing

Adjusting the registration loop amount at envelope feed from a cassette

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
A higher setting will increase the degree of paper arching. (unit:0.1mm)

<CST-ADJ>
T-16-26
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
Sub-item
MF-A4R

Description
<Setting range> 0 to 1024 (Default: 516)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value for the firs
time, this service mode shall be executed by FUNCTION>CST.

MF-A6R

Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A6R)
<Setting range> 0 to 1024 (Default: 175)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value for the firs
time, this service mode shall be executed by FUNCTION>CST.

MF-A4

Level

Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A4R)

Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A4)
<Setting range> 0 to 1024 (Default: 791)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value for the firs
time, this service mode shall be executed by FUNCTION>CST.

16-25

Chapter 16
<FIXING>
T-16-27
COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING
Sub-item
FX-FL-SP

Description

Level

Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when plain paper is
used.
Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when
plain paper is used.

<Setting range> -3 to 3 (Default: 0) (Unit: ms)

If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
FX-FL-TH

Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when thick paper is
used.
Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when
thick paper is used.

<Setting range> -3 to 3 (Default: 0) (Unit: ms)

If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
FX-FL-LW

Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when low-speed plain
paper is used.
Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when
low-speed plain paper is used.

<Setting range> -3 to 3 (Default: 0) (Unit: ms)

If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.

<MISC>
T-16-28
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
Sub-item
IMG-DLY

Description

<Setting range> -128 to 127

iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F: +23 (Default)
iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F: +35 (Default)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has
been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
C1/2/3/4ADJ-Y

Level

Entering a fine adjustment value for the image delay in the subscan direction
Make a fine adjustment of the image delay in the subscan direction when image data
is transferred from the controller board to the DCON board.

Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for Cassette 1/2/3/4

Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from Cassette 1/2/3/4 according to the
registered numeric value.

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)

MF-ADJ-Y

Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the multiple manual feed tray
Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the multiple manual feed tray
according to the registered numeric value.

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)

DK-ADJ-Y

Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the side paper deck
Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the side paper deck according to
the registered numeric value.

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)

FRAME-X

Entering a fine adjustment value in the subscan direction for zooming

Enter an image zooming value in the subscan direction according to the registered
numeric value.

<Setting range> -10 to 10 (-1% to 1%)

FRAME-Y

Entering a fine adjustment value in the main scan direction for zooming
Enter an image zooming value in the main scan direction according to the registered
numeric value.

<Setting range> -10 to 10 (-1% to 1%)

16.4.2 FEEDER
16.4.2.1 FEEDER List
0007-9921

FEEDER >ADJUST

16-26

Chapter 16
T-16-29
FEEDER >ADJUST
Sub-item
DOCST

Description

Level

Adjusting the front position of document image

<Adjustment method> Setting a greater value delays the image front
timing.

<Setting range> -50 to 50

(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM
clearance: 0)
LA-SPEED

Adjusting the document transport speed at feeder flow read

<Adjustment method> Setting a greater value increases the speed
(Reducing the image)

<Setting range> -30 to 30

(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM
clearance: 0)

16.4.3 SORTER
16.4.3.1 Sorter List
0007-9953

SORTER > ADJUST

T-16-30
SORTER > ADJUST
Sub-item
PNCH-HLE

Description
Adjusting the distance from the paper end to the punched hole
position
<Setting range> -4 to 2
(Value at shipping / Value after RAM clearance: 0)

Level
1

16-27

Chapter 16

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

16.5.1 COPIER
16.5.1.1 Copier List
0008-6670

<INSTALL>
T-16-31
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
Sub-item
TONER-S

Description
<Operating procedure>
1. Select an item to reverse its display.
2. "Check the Developer" is displayed.
Check that the developer connector is connected.
3. Press the OK key to start operation. The operation automatically stops after countdown.
<Reference>
"Check the Developer" is displayed to prevent the connector from being disconnected
when the developer is replaced. Therefore, this message is not necessary when the
machine is shipped with the developer for installation.

STRD-POS

Installing and setting the card reader

<Operating procedure>
Enter the card number (1 to 2001) and press the OK key. (One thousand cards can be
used from the input card number.)
Then the card management information (department ID and PIN) is initialized.

E-RDS

Automatically adjusting the CCD read position at flow read

- This is necessary when DF is installed and when ADF is removed and mounted again.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
- Adjustment automatically starts and stops.
2) Since the value is updated in the service mode, COPIER>ADJUST>ADJXY>STRD-POSenter the value into the service label.

CARD

Level

Stirring toner in the developer at installation

Setting whether or not to use Embedded RDS

<Setting range>
0: Do not use E-RDS (Default)
1: Use E-RDS (Sending all counter information)

RGW-PORT Specifying the port number of the dealer server for use by Embedded RDS
<Setting range>
1 to 65535 (Default: 433)
COM-TEST

Checking connection to the dealer server for use by Embedded RDS

<Operating procedure>
1) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
2) The connection is checked and OK or NG is displayed.
OK: Connected, NG: Not connected

COM-LOG

16-28

Specifying the URL of the dealer server for use by Embedded RDS
<Operating procedure>
1) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the information display field.
2) The URL input screen is displayed. After input, press the OK key.
Default: http://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

<CCD>

Displaying the detailed results of testing connection to the dealer server for use by
Embedded RDS
<Operating procedure>
1) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the information display field.
Maximum log count: 30
Display contents: Date, time, error code, and error detail information (128 characters
max.)

RGW-ADR

Chapter 16
T-16-32
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub-item
CCD-ADJ

Description

Level

Automatically adjusting CCD

<Operating procedure>
1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (whitest paper used by the
user, excluding color print paper) on the document table.
2) Select <CCD-ADJ> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
3) Adjustment is executed automatically (about 15 seconds). During adjustment,
<ACTIVE> is displayed at the upper right of the screen.
4) The LED lamp (for document lighting) lights twice and the automatic adjustment
ends with <OK> displayed on the screen.
5) Since all items are updated in this service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>CCD), enter
the values into the service label.

DF-WLVL1/ Adjusting the ADF white level (Platen scan/Flow read scan)
2
<Operating procedure>
1) Place the user's usual paper on the document table and execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1: Read the white level in Book mode (to
check the transparency of the glass for Book mode).
2) Load the user's usual paper on DF and execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DFWLVL2: Read the white level in DF (flow read) mode (to check the transparency of
the glass for flow read).
(Reading both sides of the chart)
Front side read: Calculating DFTAR-R
Back side read: Calculating DFTAR2-R
Note: Both items shall be executed simultaneously.

LUT-ADJ2

Data 2 for CCD link correction

<DENS>
T-16-33
COPIER > FUNCTION > DENS
Sub-item
WHITEME

PD-DENS

Description
<Operating procedure>
1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (the user's usual paper) on the
document table.
2) Select <WHITE-ME> to reverse the display. Then press the OK key.
3) The document lighting lamp scans once and the operation terminates.

Outputting a print pattern for automatic density adjustment in Character mode

Note: Since binarizing is supported by the PD method in Character mode, execute this
mode to adjust the density automatically.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select <PD-DENS> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
2) Paper is fed from Cassette 2 and a 17-tone print pattern is output. This print pattern
is used in <PD-ME>.

PD-ME

Level

Automatically correcting the white level

Automatically adjusting the density in Character mode (Reading PD-DENS output

pattern)
<Operating procedure>
1) As shown in the figure, set the PD-DENS output pattern on the document table by
noting the following:
- Face the print side down.
- Orient the white (light) side of the 17-tone chart toward the vertical size plate.
- Align the output pattern with the index inside left of the document table.
2) Select <PD-ME> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
3) The document lighting lamp is turned ON and OFF for 13 automatic scans.

<DPC>
T-16-34
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
Sub-item
D-GAMMA

Description

Level

Controlling photoconductor drum resistance measurement (APVC)

Note: Execute this mode only in the following cases and skip it when unnecessary.
- Adjustment if the drum unit has been replaced
- Fault isolation if automatic copy density adjustment (PD-ME) has ended
abnormally
- Reference for checking the drum endurance

<Operating procedure>
1) Select an item and press the OK key.
2) Automatic control terminates after outputting one blank copy.
3) Select DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY to display the measurement results.

16-29

Chapter 16
<CST>
T-16-35
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
Sub-item
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4

Description

Level

Registering the basic paper width of the manual feeder (DADF)

A4R width: 210 mm, A6R width: 105 mm, A4 width: 297 mm
For micro adjustment after basic width registration, select MF-A4R, MF-A6R, or
MF-A4 from COP. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ.
<Operating procedure>
1) Place an A4R size document on the manual feed and align the size guide with
the A4R width.
2) Select (MF-A4R) in this service mode to reverse its display. Press the OK key
to register the numeric value after automatic adjustment.
3) Also about the A6R and A4 sizes, register the basic width by following the
steps of 1) and 2).

<FIXING>
T-16-36
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
Sub-item
NIP-CHK

Description

Level

Making output for measuring the fixing nip width automatically

<Operating procedure>
1) Make a solid black print in A4/LTR.
2) Make about 20 A4/LTR prints of the Test Sheet.
3) Place the A4/LTR solid black output obtained in step 1. in the manual feed tray
with the printed side facing down.
4) Select this service mode and press the OK key (to feed paper from the manual
feed tray).
5) The fed paper is held once by the fixing roller and ejected after about 10 seconds.
6) Check that the nip width of the ejected paper conforms to the standard.
<Standard>
iR4570/4570F/3570/3570F:7.6 to 10.6mm
iR2870/2870F/2270/2270F:4.0 to 6.0mm
<Note>
This machine does not allow nip width adjustment. This item is used for nip width
checking only.

<PANEL>
T-16-37
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub-item
LCD-CHK

Description
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The front of the panel
lights repeatedly in order of white, black, red, green, and blue. (Check this lighting.)
2) Press the Stop key to terminate the operation.

LED-CHK

Checking key input

<Operating procedure>
1) Select KEY-CHK to display the input key numbers and names.
2) Press a key to check. If the key is normal, the touchpanel displays the
corresponding key. (See the attached table.)
3) Select KEY-CHK again to exit from key input check.

16-30

Checking LED lighting in the operating section

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item to terminate LED-CHK operation.

KEY-CHK

Checking LED lighting in the operating section

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The LED lamps light
sequentially.
2) Press LED-OFF to terminate the operation.

LED-OFF

Level

Checking the LCD display for missing dots

Chapter 16

COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL

Sub-item
TOUCHCHK

Description

Level

Adjusting the coordinate positions on the analog touchpanel

<Operating procedure>
- Align the press positions on the touchpanel and the coordinate positions on the
LCD section.
- If the LCD section has been replaced, execute this service mode.
1) Select TOUCHCHK to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
2) Press sequentially the nine positive signs (+) that appear on the touchpanel in
order.

<Input Key Numbers and Names>

T-16-38
Key

Screen Display

0 to 9, #, and *

0 to 9, #, and *

Reset

RESET

Stop

STOP

User Mode

USER

Start

START

Clear

CLEAR

PIN

ID

Help

Counter Check

BILL

<PART-CHK>
T-16-39
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
Sub-item
CL

Description

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Enter the code of the clutch from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press CL-ON to check its operation.
CL-ON

Specifying a solenoid to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 9)
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Enter the code of the solenoid from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press SOL-ON to check its operation.

SL-ON

Starting the motor operation check

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following
pattern:
20-second ON -> OFF

SL

Specifying a motor to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 16)
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Enter the code of the motor from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press MTR-ON to check its operation.

MTR-ON

Starting the clutch operation check

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following
pattern:
0.5-second ON ->10-second OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> 10-second OFF -> 0.5second ON -> OFF

MTR

Level

Specifying a clutch to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 6)

Starting the solenoid operation check

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following
pattern:
0.5-second ON -> 5-second OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> 5-second OFF -> 0.5second ON -> OFF

16-31

Chapter 16
T-16-40

- Designation numbers and corresponding clutches

Multiple paper feed clutch (CL1)

Duplex transport clutch (iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F

only) (CL6)

Registration clutch (CL2)

Extraction clutch (deck) (CL1)

Developing sleep clutch (CL3)

Paper feed clutch (deck) (CL2)

T-16-41

- Designation numbers and corresponding motors

1

Polygon motor (M1)

Hopper screw motor (M12)

Main motor (M2)

10

Cassette 3 paper feed motor (cassette pedestal) (M1)

Fixing motor (M3)

11

Cassette 4 paper feed motor (cassette pedestal) (M2)

First paper ejection motor (M4)

12

Deck paper feed motor (deck) (M1)

Bottle rotation motor (M5)

13

Deck lifter motor (deck) (M2)

14

Second paper ejection motor (2/3 paper ejection)

(M1)
Third paper ejection motor (2/3 paper ejection) (M2)

Cassette 1 paper feed motor (M6)

6
7

Cassette 2 paper feed motor (M7)

15

Duplex motor (iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F

only) (M10)

16

Buffer pass motor (M1)

T-16-42

- Designation numbers and corresponding solenoids

1

Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (CL1)

Storage open solenoid (deck) (SL2)

Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL2)

First flapper solenoid (SL1)

Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (cassette pedestal)

(SL2)

Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (cassette pedestal)

(SL2)

Pickup solenoid (deck) (SL1)

Second flapper solenoid (2/3 paper ejection) (SL2)

Second flapper solenoid (2/3 paper ejection) (SL3)

<CLEAR>
T-16-43
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Sub-item
ERR

Description

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
DC-CON

Clearing the jam history

The jam history is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

16-32

Clearing RAM on the reader controller circuit board

The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the contents of
the service mode.
2) Select this item and press the OK key.
3) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
4) Enter the P-PRINT output data as required.

JAM-HIST

Clearing RAM on the DC controller circuit board

The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the contents of
the service mode.
2) Select this item and press the OK key.
3) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
4) Enter the P-PRINT output data as required.

R-CON

Level

Clearing an error code

(Object error code: E000/E001/E002/E003)

Chapter 16

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

Sub-item
ERR-HIST

Description
Clearing the error history
The error history is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

PWD-CLR

Clearing the password of the system administrator set in user mode

The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

ADRS-BK

Clearing the service counter incremented by the main controller circuit board
The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

CNT-DCON

Clearing the address book on the reader controller circuit board

The address book is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

CNT-MCON

Level

Clearing a service counter incremented by the DC controller circuit board

The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
This applies to SORT, FIN-STPR, SADDLE, and SDL-STPL under
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2.

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
OPTION

Resetting a service mode (OPTION) to default (values after RAM clearance)

The service mode is reset when the OK key is pressed.
This clears data in the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print the contents of the
service mode.
2) Select this item and press the OK key.

MMI

Clearing the following settings in User mode

- Backup data (user-defined values) for copy operations
- Backup data (user-defined values) of common settings
- Various backup data (user-defined values), excluding fax
The settings are cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
MN-CON

Clearing RAM on the main controller circuit board

The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print the contents of the
service mode.
2) Select this item and press the OK key.
3) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
4) Enter the P-PRINT output data as required.

CARD

Clearing the card ID (department) related data

The card ID related data is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and
ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

ALARM

Clearing the send-read settings

The send-read settings are cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and
ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

CA-KEY

Clearing the salutation setting

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

SND-STUP

Clearing the alarm log

The alarm log is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

SLT-CLR

Clearing the CA certificate and key pair

The CA certificate and key pair are cleared when the main power switch is turned
OFF and ON.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item and press the OK key.
2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

16-33

Chapter 16
<MISC-R>
T-16-44
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
Sub-item
SCANLAMP

Description

Level

Lighting the LED lamp (for document lighting)

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key. The LED lamp (for document lighting) is lit for three
seconds.

<MISC-P>
T-16-45
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
Sub-item
P-PRINTS

Description
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.

USER-PRT

Printing out the service mode (DISPLAY) contents

This mode outputs only the DISPLAY items (excluding ones output by P-RPINT/
LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM).
<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.

ENV-PRT

Checking the pre-exposure lamp (LED)

<Operating procedure>
1) Press this item to reverse its display.
2) Press the OK key. After executing each operation for several seconds, the
machine stops automatically. (All lit)
3) Press the OK key to start printing.
Reference
If the lighting of the pre-exposure lamp gives a problem to the photoconductor
drum, rotate the drum.

D-PRINT

Printing out the service label

<Operating procedure>
1) Load A4 or LTR paper on Cassette 1.
2) Select this item.
3) Press the OK key to start printing.

PRE-EXP

Printing out the user mode list

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.

LBL-PRNT

Level

Printing out the service mode settings

Printing out the in-machine temperature & humidity and fixing temperature
change log
Changes of the in-machine temperature & humidity and the fixing temperature
(center) are printed as log data.

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.
KEY-HIST

Printing out the operating section key input history

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.

HIST-PRT

Printing out the jam history and error history

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.

TRS-DATA

16-34

Transferring memory received data to the box

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start data transfer.

<SYSTEM>

Chapter 16
T-16-46
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
Sub-item

Description

Level

DOWNLOAD Switching to Download mode

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK button to enter Download mode.
CHK-TYPE

Specifying a partition number for executing HD-CHK

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Select a partition number with the ten-key pad.
0: Entire HDD
1: Image accumulation area
2: General-purpose file (user-defined data/various log data/PDL spool data/image
data management information) storage area
3: PDL-related file storage area
4: Firmware/address book/file storage area
5: MEAP area
6: Address book area
Remarks: HD-CLEAR shall be indispensable for 4 and 6.

HD-CHECK

Checking and restoring the partition specified by CHK-TYPE

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key.
3) The result (1:OK, 2:NG (hardware), 3:NG (software) restored/alternative sector)
is displayed.

HD-CLEAR

Initializing the partition specified by CHK-TYPE

<Operating procedure>
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key.

16.5.2 FEEDER
16.5.2.1 Feeder List
0007-9924

FEEDER >FUNCTION
T-16-47
FEEDER >FUNCTION
Sub-item
MTR-CHK

Description
<Operating procedure>
1) Press MTR-CHK to reverse its display.
2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press MTR-ON to check the motor operation.
<Setting range>
0 to 1

TRY-A4

Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF (A4

width)

TRY-A5R

Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF (A5R

width)

TRY-LTR

Level

Checking the ADF motor and other individually

Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF (LTR

width)

TRY-LTRR Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF (LTRR

width)

1
1
1
1

FEED-CHK Checking ADF paper feed operation

<Operating procedure>
1) Press FEED-CHK to reverse its display.
2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press FEED-ON to check ADF paper feed operation.
Paper feed mode
0: Simplex feed
1: Duplex feed
2: Simplex feed with stamping
3: Duplex feed with stamping
[Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM
clearance: 0]

16-35

Chapter 16

FEEDER >FUNCTION
Sub-item
CL-CHK

Description
<Operating procedure>
1) Press CL-CHK to reverse its display.
2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press CL-ON to check DF clutch operation.

CL-ON

Starting solenoid operation

<Operating procedure>
Operation specifications shall differ depending on the model.
1) Press SL to reverse its display. Then press the OK key to start
solenoid operation.
2) Press the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in five seconds but the status
changes to STOP only when the OK key is pressed again.)

MTR-ON

Checking ADF solenoid operation

<Operating procedure>
1) Press SL-CHK to reverse its display.
2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press SL-ON to check ADF solenoid operation.
Part corresponding number
0: Pressurizing solenoid
1: Stamping solenoid
[Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM
clearance: 0]

SL-ON

Starting clutch operation

Press CL-ON. Then press the OK key to start clutch operation. Press
the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in two seconds but the status
changes to STOP only when the OK key is pressed again.)

SL-CHK

Level

Checking DF clutch operation

Starting motor operation

<Operating procedure>
Operation specifications shall differ depending on the model.
1) Press MTR-ON to reverse its display. Then press the OK key to
start motor operation.
2) Press the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in five seconds but the status
changes to STOP only when the OK key is pressed again.)

ROLL-CLN Cleaning the ADF roller

While the roller is being rotated automatically by a motor, press
alcohol-moistened lens cleaning paper against the roller for
cleaning.
<Operating procedure>
1) Press ROLL-CLN to reverse its display.
2) While the roller is rotating, press alcohol-moistened lens cleaning
paper against the roller for cleaning.
3) Press ROLL-CLN to reverse its display. Press the OK key to stop
the roller.
FEED-ON

Checking ADF paper feed operation

<Operating procedure>
1) Press FEED-ON and then the OK key to start paper feed in the
operation mode set by FEED-CHK.

16-36

Chapter 16

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

16.6.1 COPIER
16.6.1.1 Copier List
0007-9547

<BODY>
T-16-48
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
MODELSZ

Description

Leve
l

Switching regular resized display and ADF document size detection

<Setting range>
0: AB (6R5E) [Default]
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)

FIX-TEMP Switching the plain paper down sequence table

Setting range
0: OFF [Default]
1: Priority to productivity, control temperature fixed at -10deg C
2: Control temperature fixed at -6deg C
3: Control temperature fixed at -3deg C
4: Priority to fixing, control temperature fixed at +3deg C
5: Control temperature fixed at +6deg C
6: Control temperature fixed at +10deg C
7: Control temperature fixed at +15deg C
TRANSSW

Switching transfer high-voltage control from constant current control to constant voltage
control
<Setting range>
0: No switching [Default], 1: Constant voltage mode 1, 2: Constant voltage mode 2

TEMPCON

Switching thick-paper fixing temperature mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: Priority to productivity, control temperature fixed at -10deg C
2: Control temperature fixed at -6deg C
3: Control temperature fixed at -3deg C
4: Priority to fixing, control temperature fixed at +3deg C
5: Control temperature fixed at +6deg C
6: Control temperature fixed at +10deg C
7: Control temperature fixed at +15deg C

PRIAC-SW Improving the image quality in case of a drum charging fault

Note: This setting is cleared if APVC is executed with a new drum unit or if a service mode
(FUNCTION>D-GAMMA) is executed.

<Setting range>
0: No UP [Default], 1: 50 mA UP, 2: 100 mA UP
TEMPCON Improving fixing (Increasing the fixing temperature)
2
Note: Valid for iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F only
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: Priority to productivity, control temperature fixed at -10deg C
2: Control temperature fixed at -6deg C
3: Control temperature fixed at -3deg C
4: Priority to fixing, control temperature fixed at +3deg C
5: Control temperature fixed at +6deg C
6: Control temperature fixed at +10deg C
7: Control temperature fixed at +15deg C
CONFIG

Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country,
language, and paper size type of this machine
<Adjustment method>
XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ(00) Destination, AA(00): Paper size
type
The display contents conform to the display method of
(COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE). Enclosed in the brackets are defaults. The
country and language are only displayed.
<Operating procedure>
1) Select <CONFIG>.
2) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the + or - key to change the contents.
3) Each time the + or - key is pressed, the contents change sequentially.
4) Display the intended contents at all items and press the OK key.
5) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.

16-37

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

Sub-item
W/SCNR

Description
Setting whether a scanner is present (Copy model)

Leve
l
1

<Setting range>
0: Printer model [Default]
1: Model with scanner
FTPTXPN

Specifying the send destination port (FTP) number

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (Default: 21)

DFDST-L1 Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used (Inter-paper correction)
Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles.
<Setting range>
0 to 255
(0 to set this mode OFF) (Default: 242)

DFDST-L2 Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used (Post-job detection)
Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles.
<Setting range>
0 to 255
(0 to set this mode OFF) (Default: 242)
CCD-LUT

Setting whether or not to use LUT for gain correction

0: Do not use (Default)
1: Use (One-point correction)
2: Do not use (Three-point correction)

ENVP-INT Setting the in-machine temperature & humidity and fixing temperature log acquisition cycle
Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT to
set the log acquisition cycles.
<Setting range>
0 to 480 <minute> (0 for no log acquisition)
Default: 60
BASE-SW

Improving fixing at low temperature

Note: Valid for iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F only
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default], 1: Low-temperature fixing improvement mode ON

SC-L-CNT

Turning ON and OFF the sequence of reducing the copy speed to maintain the fixing
performance for copy images
<Setting range>
0: OFF, 1: ON

HUM-SW

Changing the charge output setting by humidity sensor

<Setting range>
0: Automatic control by humidity sensor [Default]
1 to 5: Fixed environment and deemed control corresponding to the parameters of charging,
development, and transfer

SCANSLC
T

Setting the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned

<Setting range>
0: No cleaning(Default), 1: Once every 500 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60second idling, 2: Once every 200 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60-second
idling, 3: Once every 100 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60-second idling

CPMKPSW

Switching the threshold value of the paper size (Large/Small) of the scan counter
<Setting range>
0: Count B4 as the small size [Default]
1: Count B4 as the large size

FIX-CLN

Switching from the MEAP-Full mode to the Base model

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Base model), 1: ON (Full model)

FIX-LOW

Turning ON or OFF the function of calculating a scan area from the selected paper size
<Setting range>
0: OFF (Determining the scan area by document detection)
1: ON (Determining the scan area by paper size)

SENS-CNF Setting the arrangement of document detection sensors

<Setting range>
0: AB type [Default]
1: Inch type
2: A type
RAWDATA

Setting whether or not to print out received data with no change

If a received image has a problem, the problem is used to isolate the data contents and image
processing.
<Setting range>
0: Usual operation [Default]
1: Print out with no change

16-38

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

Sub-item
SHARP

Description

Leve
l

Changing the sharpness level (Setting the central value)

<Setting range>
1 to 5 [Default: 3]

COTDPC-D Saving the toner (Potential (VD) low)

<Setting range>
0: No saving [Default]
1: Down about 10%
2: Down about 20%
3: Down about 30%
RMTLANG

Changing the remote UI language from web

IFAX-LIM

Limiting the number of output lines when a large amount of data has been received by IFAX.

<Adjustment method>
Select a language code with the + or - key.
<Setting range>
0: No limit
0 to 999 [Default: 500]

DF-BLINE

Taking corrective measures against a black line caused by dust on the platen at flow read
<Setting range>
0: No corrective measures [Default]
1: Corrective measures

TEMP-TBL Reserved
FIX-SMR

2
2

Taking corrective measures against smearing at fixing

<Setting range>
1: Lower the absolute value of developing bias Vdc by 20 V
2: Lower the absolute value of Vdc by 40 V
3: (Reserved)

FAN-EXTN Setting the post-job fan extension mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
SMTPTXP
N

Changing the SMTP send port number

SMTPRXP
N

Changing the SMTP send port number

POP3PN

Changing the POP receive port number

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 25]
<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 25]
<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 110]

RUI-DSP

Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at LGL notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LEGAL [Default]
1: FOOLSCAP
2: A-FOOLSCAP
3: FORIO
4: G-LEGAL
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: B-OFFICIO
9: A-LEAGAL
10: M-OFFICIO
11: LEGAL

ORG-LTR

Setting whether to display a copy screen for RUI (Option switch conforming to the Disability
Law)
<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Default]
1: Display

ORG-LGL

Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at LTR notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LTR [Default]
1:G-LTR
2:A-LTR
3:EXECTIVE
4:LTR

16-39

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

Sub-item

Description

Leve
l

ORG-LTRR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at LTR-R notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LTR-R [Default]
1:G-LTR-R
2:A-LTR-R
3:OFFICIO
4:E-OFFICIO
5:EXECTIVE-R
6:LTR-R
ORG-LDR

Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at LDR notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LDR [Default]
1:A-LETTER
2:LDR

ORG-B5

Setting whether or not to display the fax screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
1: Display [Default]

UI-EXT

Setting whether or not to display the send screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
1: Display [Default]

UI-FAX

Setting whether or not to display the box screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
1: Display [Default]

UI-SEND

Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at B5 notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: B5 [Default]
1: K-LEAGAL
2:B5

UI-BOX

Setting whether or not to display the extended screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
1: Display [Default]

NEGA-GST Making additional setting about the pre-exposure sequence (excluding laser)
<Setting range>
0: Environmental control [Default]
1: Full
2: Slightly weak
3: Weak
NWSPEED

Selecting the data transfer speed at service network connection

<Setting range>
0: Auto [Default]
1: 100Base-TX
2: 100Base-T

STS-PORT Turning the TOT synchronous command communication port ON or OFF

The port for Inquiry/Response (synchronous) command communication in TUIF over TCP/IP
is turned ON or OFF.
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
CMDPORT

Limiting the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication.
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use

16-40

Limiting the use of CRAM-MD5 in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of CRAM-MD5 in SMTP authentication
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use

NS-GSAPI

Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF

The port for asynchronous status communication in TUIF over TCP/IP is turned ON or OFF.
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON

NS-CMD5

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

Sub-item
NS-NTLM

Description

Leve
l

Limiting the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication.
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use

NS-PLNWS Limiting the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment of
communication packet encryption
This is set to limit the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment
where communication packets are encrypted

<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use
NS-PLN

Limiting the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment
This is set to limit the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment
where communication packets are not encrypted.
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use

NS-LGN

Limiting the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment where
communication packets are encrypted
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]
1: Do not use

MEAP-PN

Changing the HTTP port number of the MEAP application

<Setting range> 0 to 65535 (Default: 8000)

SVMDENT

Switching how to enter service mode

SSH-SW

Turning the SSH server function ON or OFF

0: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [2] and [*]-> [User mode] (Default)
1: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [4] and [9]-> [User mode]
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON

RMT-LGIN Turning remote login to the SSH server ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
RE-PKEY

Turning the regeneration of the SSH server key ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON

U-NAME

Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: CLOSE [Default]
1: OPEN (when DA is attached)

DA-CNCT

Setting a user password for connection to the SSH server

Setting value:
Up to 8 characters (half-size alphanumerics)

DA-PORT

Setting a user name for connection to the SSH server

Setting value:
Up to 8 characters (half-size alphanumeric)

U-PASWD

Setting DA connection
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON

CHNG-STS Setting the TOT status connection port number

<Setting range>
1 to 65535 [Default: 20010]
CHNGCMD

Setting the TOT status connection port number

<Setting range>
1 to 65535 [Default: 20000]

MEAP-DSP Turning screen transition from MEAP to Native ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Transition to the Native screen) [Default]
1: ON (No transition to the Native screen)
ANIM-SW

Turn MEAP application error/jam screen display ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Display warning screen) [Default]
1: ON (Do not display warning screen)

16-41

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

Sub-item

Leve
l

Description

MEAP-SSL Setting the MEAP HTTPS port

2

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (same as the setting of another network port system) [Default: 8443]
CCD-TYPE Setting the CCD unit type
<Setting range>
0: Initial CCD unit [Default]
1: Revised CCD unit

<USER>
T-16-49
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
COPY-LIM

Description
<Setting range>
1 to 9999 [Default: 999]

SLEEP

Switching the charging counter and default display items

<Setting range>
- When the set value is 0 [Default]
101: Total 1
- When the set value is 1
102: Total 2
202: Copy total 2
127: Total A Total 2
- When the set value is 2
101: Total 1
104: Total small
103: Total large
501: Scan total 1

16-42

Switching the count-up job type about the department management counter
<Setting range>
0: Counting BoxPrint, ReportPrint, SendLocalPrint, and PDLPrint in the
PRINT category
1: Counting ReportPrint, SendLocalPrint, and PDLPrint in the PRINT category

CNT-SW

Setting whether or not to display the print pause function switch

<Setting range>
0: No print pause function [Default]
The user screen does not display the print pause function. (Conventional
specification)
1: Print pause function [Default]
The user screen does not display the print output stop and restart settings.

IDPRN-SW

Prohibiting copy job reservation when a card reader and a coin robot are used
<Setting range>
0: Copy job reserved [Default]
1: Copy job not reserved

PR-PSESW

Setting whether to count B4 as the large size or the small size on Software
counters 1 to 6
<Setting range>
0: Small size [Default]
1: Large size

COPY-JOB

Limiting the user of a control card for a PDL job

<Setting range>
0: Do not use [Default]
1: Use

B4-L-CNT

Setting Software counters 2 to 6 on the User mode screen

<Setting range>
0 to 999

CONTROL

Setting Software counter 1 on the User mode screen

<Setting value>
101: Total 1
[Value at shipping / Value after RAM clearance = 101 -> Cannot be changed]

COUNTER2to6

Turning the sleep function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF
1: ON [Default]
The sleep function is set with Timer in User Mode.

COUNTER1

Level

Changing the upper limit of copy count

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION >USER

Sub-item
REMPNL

Description
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON

BCNT-AST

Turning document size detection in Book mode ON or OFF

Copying with the platen open is switched to the manual document size input
mode (conventional) or the automatic document size detection mode.
<Setting range>
0: Manual document size input mode [Default]
1: Automatic document size detection mode

NW-SCAN

JOB-INVL

Enabling or disabling the network scan function

<Setting range>
0: Network scan function disabled [Default]
1: Network scan function enabled
Notes:
Not changeable for anything in Japan
Always 1 for PSPCL outside Japan
Changeable for other outside Japan

HDCR-DSP

Setting the number of lines for printing in Photo mode

<Setting range>
0: 141 lines [Default]
1: 134 lines

OP-SZ-DT

Setting whether or not to display a serial number when the counter confirmation
key is pressed
<Setting range>
0: Display a serial number [Default]
1: Do not display a serial number

PH-D-SEL

Setting the long mode key

<Setting range>
0: Ordinary [Default]
1: Display a long mode key on the corresponding mode screen

CNT-DISP

Setting output or no output in the tray full state

<Setting range>
0: Ordinary mode (Interrupt when the finisher tray is full) [Default]
1: Interrupt by height detection only

MF-LG-ST

Limiting the mailbox control card user

<Setting range>
0: No [Default]
1: Yes

TRY-STP

Switching the date display format

<Setting range>
0: YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM/YY
2: MM/DD/YY

MB-CCV

Turning the document size detection function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (When the platen is opened, the user will not be dazzled because the
lamp does not light.)
1: ON [Default]

DATE-DSP

Setting whether or not to display the document removal message

<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Default 1]
1: Display

SIZE-DET

Switching the job type of counting box prints by ASSIST

<Setting range>
0: Count as PDL job [Default]
1: Count as Copy job

DOC-REM

Level

Turning the remote panel function ON or OFF

Setting whether or not display HDD clearance in User mode and changing the
contents of clearance

<Setting range>
1: Clear once with 0 [Default]
2: Clear once with random data
3: Clear three times with random data

Setting the job interval at interrupt

<Setting range>
0: Output the next job continuously in interrupt copying (Standard) [Default]
1: Start outputting the next job after the last paper of the interrupted copy job is
output
2: Start outputting the next job after the last paper of all jobs is output

16-43

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION >USER

Sub-item
LGSW-DSP

Description

<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Log display ON/OFF] [Default]
1: Display [Log display ON/OFF]
PCL-COPY

Setting PS internal mode

<Setting range>
0 to 65535
0: Not compatible [Default]
1: PS Type 3 Halftone command compatible (conventional) (Dither growth
forward and reverse)
2 to 65535: Reserved

16-44

Setting whether or not to use a network application supporting BW2 (CL1)

<Setting range>
0: Do not use (1w(2w) sleep possible) [Default]
1: Use (1w(2w) sleep not possible) [Default]

PS-MODE

Turning PDL jam recovery ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Do not recover)
1: ON (Recover) [Default]

SLP-SLCT

Limiting access in User mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Transition to the User mode screen with no password request)
[Default]
1: ON (Transition to the User mode screen after password matching)

PTJAM-RC

Setting whether or not to permit split send in pages (only beyond the upper limit
of the send data size)
<Setting range>
0: Do not permit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission [Default]
1: Permit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission

AFN-PSWD

Enabling or disabling the send size limit in IFAX transmission (not via server
only)
<Setting range>
0: Send size limit enabled (via server/not via server)
1: Send size limit disabled (not via server only) [Default]

IFAX-PGD

Turning the MEAP Safe mode ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON (Safe mode)

IFAX-SZL

Setting whether or not to display the free section of the MEAP counter (SEND)
<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Default]
1: Display

MEAPSAFE

Setting whether or not to erase the RUI address display or the send password
source display on the edit screen
<Setting range>
0: Do not erase the send password source display on the edit screen. [Default]
1: Erase the send password source display on the edit screen.

FREG-SW

Setting whether or not to erase the password from the export file of the file send
address
<Setting range>
0: Do not erase the password from the export file. [Default]
1: Erase the password from the export file.

CTM-S07

Disconnecting the HTTP port from RUI by three authentication failures

<Setting procedure>
0: Invalid [Default]
1: Valid

CTM-S06

Registering the department ID and entering 7 digits for authentication

<Setting range>
0: Conventional [Default]
1: 7-digit input

RUI-RJT

Setting the CCV count pulse at reception and report output

<Setting range>
0: Do not output count pulse [Default]
1: Output count pulse

DPT-ID-7

Supporting the PCL command [COPIES Meru/Pinatubo/Hood]

<Setting range>
0: Control each page according to the command of the COPIES command
specified to the page [Default]
1: Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatible mode
2 to 65535: Reserved

PRJOB-CP

Level

Setting whether or not to display [Log display ON/OFF] on the User mode
screen

Chapter 16
Software counter specifications
100 - 199: Total
200 - 299: Copy (001 to 099 added in case of shortage)
300 - 399: Print
400 - 499: Copy and print
500 - 599: Scan
600 - 699: Box print
700 - 799: Receive print
800 - 899: Report print
900 - 999: Send
Explanations of symbols and terms in the table
- YES: Counter valid in this machine
- Large size: Paper greater than B4
- Small size: Paper of B4 or smaller
- Counter Description: Numerals 1 and 2 indicate the counts of large size paper.
In service mode (COPIER>OPTION>USER>B4-L-CNT), B4 or greater can be set as the large size.
- Total A: Total excluding local and remote copies
- Total B: Total excluding local and remote copies and box prints
- Copy: Local and remote copies
- Copy A: Local and remote copies and box prints
- Print: PDL, report, and box prints
- Print A: PDL and report prints
- Scan: Black-and-white and color scans
T-16-50
No.

Counter Description

Support

101

Total 1

102

Total 2

yes
yes

103

Total (Large)

yes

104

Total (Small)

yes

105

Total (Full-color 1)

106

Total (Full-color 2)

108

Total (Black-and-white 1)

yes

109

Total (Black-and-white 2)

yes

110

Total (Monochrome / Large)

111

Total (Monochrome / Small)

112

Total (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

113

Total (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

114

Total 1 (Duplex)

yes

115

Total 2 (Duplex)

yes

116

Large (Duplex)

yes

117

Small (Duplex)

yes

118

Total (Monochrome 1)

119

Total (Monochrome 2)

120

Total (Full-color / Large)

121

Total (Full-color / Small)

122

Total (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

123

Total (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

124

Total (Full-color + Monochrome 2)

125

Total (Full-color + Monochrome 1)

126

Total A1

127

Total A2

yes

128

Total A (Large)

yes

129

Total A (Small)

yes

130

Total A (Full-color 1)

131

Total A (Full-color 2)

132

Total A (Black-and-white 1)

yes

133

Total A (Black-and-white 2)

yes

134

Total A (Monochrome / Large)

135

Total A (Monochrome / Small)

yes

136

Total A (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

137

Total A (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

138

Total A1 (Duplex)

139

Total A2 (Duplex)

140

Large A (Duplex)

141

Small A (Duplex)

142

Total A (Monochrome 1)

143

Total A (Monochrome 2)

16-45

Chapter 16

No.
144

16-46

Counter Description

Support

Total A (Full-color / Large)

145

Total A (Full-color / Small)

146

Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

147

Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

148

Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 2)

149

Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 1)

150

Total B1

151

Total B2

yes

152

Total B (Large)

yes

153

Total B (Small)

yes

154

Total B (Full-color 1)

155

Total B (Full-color 2)

156

Total B (Black-and-white 1)

yes

157

Total B (Black-and-white 2)

yes

158

Total B (Monochrome / Large)

159

Total B (Monochrome / Small)

yes

160

Total B (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

161

Total B (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

162

Total B1 (Duplex)

163

Total B2 (Duplex)

164

Large B (Duplex)

165

Small B (Duplex)

166

Total B (Monochrome 1)

167

Total B (Monochrome 2)

168

Total B (Full-color / Large)

169

Total B (Full-color / Small)

170

Total B (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

171

Total B (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

172

Total B (Full-color + Monochrome 2)

173

Total B (Full-color + Monochrome 1)

201

Copy (Total 1)

yes

202

Copy (Total 2)

yes

203

Copy (Large)

yes

204

Copy (Small)

yes

205

Copy A (Total 1)

yes

206

Copy A (Total 2)

yes

207

Copy A (Large)

yes

208

Copy A (Small)

yes

209

Local copy (Total 1)

yes

210

Local copy (Total 2)

yes

211

Local copy (Large)

yes

212

Local copy (Small)

yes

213

Remote copy (Total 1)

yes

214

Remote copy (Total 2)

yes

215

Remote copy (Large)

yes

216

Remote copy (Small)

yes

217

Copy (Full-color 1)

218

Copy (Full-color 2)

219

Copy (Monochrome 1)

220

Copy (Monochrome 2)

221

Copy (Black-and-white 1)

yes

222

Copy (Black-and-white 2)

yes

223

Copy (Full-color / Large)

224

Copy (Full-color / Small)

225

Copy (Monochrome / Large)

226

Copy (Monochrome / Small)

227

Copy (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

228

Copy (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

229

Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

230

Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

231

Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

Chapter 16

No.

Counter Description

232

Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

233

Copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

234

Copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

235

Copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

236

Copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

237

Copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

238

Copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

245

Copy A (Full-color 1)

246

Copy A (Full-color 2)

247

Copy A (Monochrome 1)

Support

248

Copy A (Monochrome 2)

249

Copy A (Black-and-white 1)

yes

250

Copy A (Black-and-white 2)

yes

251

Copy A (Full-color / Large)

252

Copy A (Full-color / Small)

253

Copy A (Monochrome / Large)

254

Copy A (Monochrome / Small)

255

Copy A (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

256

Copy A (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

257

Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

258

Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

259

Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

260

Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

261

Copy A (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

262

Copy A (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

263

Copy A (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

264

Copy A (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

265

Copy A (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

266

Copy A (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

273

Local copy (Full-color 1)

274

Local copy (Full-color 2)

275

Local copy (Monochrome 1)

276

Local copy (Monochrome 2)

277

Local copy (Black-and-white 1)

yes

278

Local copy (Black-and-white 2)

yes

279

Local copy (Full-color / Large)

280

Local copy (Full-color / Small)

281

Local copy (Monochrome / Large)

282

Local copy (Monochrome / Small)

283

Local copy (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

284

Local copy (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

285

Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

286

Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

287

Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

288

Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

289

Local copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

290

Local copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

291

Local copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

292

Local copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

293

Local copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

294

Local copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

002

Remote copy (Full-color 1)

003

Remote copy (Full-color 2)

004

Remote copy (Monochrome 1)

005

Remote copy (Monochrome 2)

006

Remote copy (Black-and-white 1)

yes

007

Remote copy (Black-and-white 2)

yes

008

Remote copy (Full-color / Large)

009

Remote copy (Full-color / Small)

010

Remote copy (Monochrome / Large)

011

Remote copy (Monochrome / Small)

16-47

Chapter 16

No.

16-48

Counter Description

Support

012

Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

013

Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

014

Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

015

Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

016

Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

017

Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

018

Remote copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

019

Remote copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

020

Remote copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

021

Remote copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

022

Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

023

Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

301

Print (Total 1)

302

Print (Total 2)

yes

303

Print (Large)

yes

304

Print (Small)

yes

305

Print A (Total 1)

yes

306

Print A (Total 2)

yes

307

Print A (Large)

yes

308

Print A (Small)

yes

309

Print (Full-color 1)

310

Print (Full-color 2)

311

Print (Monochrome 1)

yes

312

Print (Monochrome 2)

313

Print (Black-and-white 1)

yes

314

Print (Black-and-white 2)

yes

315

Print (Full-color / Large)

316

Print (Full-color / Small)

317

Print (Monochrome / Large)

318

Print (Monochrome / Small)

319

Print (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

320

Print (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

321

Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

322

Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

323

Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

324

Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

325

Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

326

Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

327

Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

328

Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

329

Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

330

Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

331

PDL print (Total 1)

yes

332

PDL print (Total 2)

yes

333

PDL print (Large)

yes

334

PDL print (Small)

yes

335

PDL print (Full-color 1)

336

PDL print (Full-color 2)

339

PDL print (Black-and-white 1)

yes

340

PDL print (Black-and-white 2)

yes

341

PDL print (Full-color / Large)

342

PDL print (Full-color / Small)

345

PDL print (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

346

PDL print (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

351

PDL print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

352

PDL print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

355

PDL print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

356

PDL print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

401

Copy + Print (Full-color / Large)

402

Copy + Print (Full-color / Small)

403

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large)

Chapter 16

No.

Counter Description

404

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small)

405

Copy + Print (Monochrome 2)

406

Copy + Print (Monochrome 1)

407

Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

408

Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

409

Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

410

Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

411

Copy + Print (Large)

412

Copy + Print (Small)

413

Copy + Print (2)

414

Copy + Print (1)

415

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large)

416

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small)

417

Copy + Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

418

Copy + Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

419

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

420

Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

Support

421

Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

422

Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

501

Scan (Total 1)

502

Scan (Total 2)

yes

503

Scan (Large)

yes

504

Scan (Small)

yes

505

Black-and-white scan (Total 1)

yes

506

Black-and-white scan (Total 2)

yes

507

Black-and-white scan (Large)

yes

508

Black-and-white scan (Small)

yes

509

Color scan (Total 1)

510

Color scan (Total 2)

yes

511

Color scan (Large)

512

Color scan (Small)

601

Box print (Total 1)

602

Box print (Total 2)

yes

603

Box print (Large)

yes

604

Box print (Small)

yes

605

Box print (Full-color 1)

yes

606

Box print (Full-color 2)

607

Box print (Monochrome 1)

608

Box print (Monochrome 2)

609

Box print (Black-and-white 1)

yes

610

Box print (Black-and-white 2)

yes

611

Box print (Full-color / Large)

612

Box print (Full-color / Small)

613

Box print (Monochrome / Large)

614

Box print (Monochrome / Small)

615

Box print (Black-and-white / Large)

yes

616

Box print (Black-and-white / Small)

yes

617

Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)

618

Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)

619

Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)

620

Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)

621

Box print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

622

Box print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

623

Box print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

624

Box print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

625

Box print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)

626

Box print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)

701

Receive print (Total 1)

yes

702

Receive print (Total 2)

yes

703

Receive print (Large)

yes

704

Receive print (Small)

yes

16-49

Chapter 16

No.

16-50

Counter Description

705

Receive print (Full-color 1)

706

Receive print (Full-color 2)

707

Receive print (Gray-scale 1)

Support

708

Receive print (Gray-scale 2)

709

Receive print (Monochrome 1)

yes

710

Receive print (Monochrome 2)

yes

711

Receive print (Full-color / Large)

712

Receive print (Full-color / Small)

713

Receive print (Gray-scale / Large)

714

Receive print (Gray-scale / Small)

715

Receive print (Monochrome / Large)

yes

716

Receive print (Monochrome / Small)

yes

717

Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large)

718

Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small)

719

Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2)

720

Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1)

721

Receive print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

722

Receive print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

723

Receive print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex)

724

Receive print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex)

725

Receive print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

726

Receive print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

801

Report print (Total 1)

yes

802

Report print (Total 2)

yes

803

Report print (Large)

yes

804

Report print (Small)

yes

805

Report print (Full-color 1)

806

Report print (Full-color 2)

807

Report print (Gray-scale 1)

808

Report print (Gray-scale 2)

809

Report print (Monochrome 1)

yes

810

Report print (Monochrome 2)

yes

811

Report print (Full-color / Large)

812

Report print (Full-color / Small)

813

Report print (Gray-scale / Large)

814

Report print (Gray-scale / Small)

815

Report print (Monochrome / Large)

yes

816

Report print (Monochrome / Small)

yes

817

Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large)

818

Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small)

819

Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2)

820

Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1)

821

Report print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)

822

Report print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)

823

Report print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex)

824

Report print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex)

825

Report print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)

826

Report print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)

901

Copy scan total 1 (Color)

902

Copy scan total 1 (Black-and-white)

903

Copy scan total 2 (Color)

904

Copy scan total 2 (Black-and-white)

905

Copy scan total 3 (Color)

906

Copy scan total 3 (Black-and-white)

907

Copy scan total 4 (Color)

908

Copy scan total 4 (Black-and-white)

909

Local copy scan (Color)

910

Local copy scan (Black-and-white)

911

Remote copy scan (Color)

912

Remote copy scan (Black-and-white)

913

Send scan total 1 (Color)

Chapter 16

No.

Counter Description

914

Send scan total 1 (Black-and-white)

915

Send scan total 2 (Color)

916

Send scan total 2 (Black-and-white)

917

Send scan total 3 (Color)

918

Send scan total 3 (Black-and-white)

919

Send scan total 4 (Color)

920

Send scan total 4 (Black-and-white)

921

Send scan total 5 (Color)

922

Send scan total 5 (Black-and-white)

929

Send scan total 6 (Color)

930

Send scan total 6 (Black-and-white)

931

Send scan total 7 (Color)

932

Send scan total 7 (Black-and-white)

933

Send scan total 8 (Color)

934

Send scan total 8 (Black-and-white)

935

Universal send scan total (Color)

yes
yes

yes
yes

936

Universal send scan total (Black-and-white)

937

Box scan (Color)

938

Box scan (Black-and-white)

939

Remote scan (Color)

940

Remote scan (Black-and-white)

941

Send scan / FAX (Color)

yes

942

Send scan / FAX (Black-and-white)

943

Send scan / IFAX (Color)

944

Send scan / IFAX (Black-and-white)

945

Send scan / E-mail (Color)

946

Send scan / E-mail (Black-and-white)

947

Send scan / FTP (Color)

948

Send scan / FTP (Black-and-white)

949

Send scan / SMB (Color)

950

Send scan / SMB (Black-and-white)

951

Send scan / IPX (Color)

952

Send scan / IPX (Black-and-white)

953

Send scan / Database (Color)

Support

954

Send scan / Database (Black-and-white)

955

Send scan / Local print (Color)

956

Send scan / Local print (Black-and-white)

957

Send scan / Box (Color)

958

Send scan / Box (Black-and-white)

<CST>
T-16-51
COPIER > OPTION > CST
Sub-item
ENV1/2

Description
<Setting range>
21: ISO-C5 [Default], 22: COM10, 23: Monarch, 24: DL, 25: ISO-B5, 26:
Western style No.4

U1-NAMEto U4NAME

Level

Registering Envelope cassette ENV1/2

1

Setting whether or not to display a paper name when a paper size group (U1 to
U4) has been detected
<Setting range>
0: Display U1, U2, U3, or U4 on the touchpanel.
1: Display the paper name set in service mode (CST-U1/U2/U3/U4).

16-51

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > CST

Sub-item
CST-U1/U2/
U3/U4

Description

Level

Specifying paper names for use in paper size groups

If the following special paper sizes are set to U1, U2, U3, and U4, paper of the
sizes can be handled on the universal cassette as special size paper.
<Setting range>
24: FOOLSCAP (CST-U2: Default)
25: Australian FOOLSCAP
26: OFFICIO
27: Ecuadorian OFFICIO
28: Bolivian OFFICIO
29: Argentine LETTER (U4: Default)
30: Argentine LETTER-R
31: Governmental LETTER (U1: Default)
32: Governmental LETTER-R
34: Governmental LEGAL (U3: Default)
35: FOLIO
36: Argentine OFFICIO
37: Mexican OFFICIO
38: EXECUTIVE

<ACC>
T-16-52
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
Sub-item
COIN

Description

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
DK-P

Setting a paper size for use on a paper deck (option)

<Setting range>
0: A4 [Default]
1: B5
2: LTR

OUT-TRAY

Setting whether or not to use the third paper ejection tray (mainly when the second
and third paper ejection units are mounted)
1

<Setting range>
0: Do not use [Default]
1: Use
IN-TRAY

Setting whether or not to use an inner paper ejection tray

<Setting range>
0: Do not use [Default]
1: Use

CC-SPSW

Level

Switching the coin vendor

Set whether the coin vendor management mode can be entered or not.

Setting whether or not to support the control card (CC IV /CCV) interface
<Setting range>
0: Do not support [Default]
1: Support

<INT-FACE>
T-16-53
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Sub-item
IMG-CONT

Description
<Setting range>
0: Usual operation [Default]

AP-OPT

Setting a department ID for a print job from the PrintMe application installed in the
PS print server unit
<Setting range>
0 to 99999999 [Default: 0]

16-52

Permitting or prohibiting printing from the PrintMe application installed in the PS

print server unit
<Setting range>
0: Permit printing by a specified account
1: Permit printing, irrespective of the account [Default]
2: Prohibit printing (except by specified department ID

AP-ACCNT

Level

Setting the EFI controller connection

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

Sub-item

Description

AP-CODE

Level

Setting a CPCA path for a print job from the PrintMe application installed in the PS
print server unit

<Setting range>
0 to 99999999 [Default: 0]

<COMBO>
T-16-54
COPIER >OPTION > COMBO
Sub-item

Description

PPR-SLCT

Level

Setting a paper type for weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range>
1: Plain paper [Default] 2: Thick paper 3: Envelope 4: tracing paper 5: OHP
transparency 6: Postcard 7: Label paper 8: Bond paper

MOD-SLCT

Setting a paper mode for weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range>
1: Simplex [Default]
2: Automatic duplex feed - Second side (Cassette feed)
3: Manual duplex feed - Second side (Manual feed)

ENV-SLCT

Setting the environment for weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range>
1 to 5 [Default: 3]
Recommended settings:
1. Low temperature
2. Between low and normal temperature
3. Normal temperature
4. Between normal and high temperature
5. High temperature

TR-SW1/2/3/4/5

Turning weak bias to the transfer tip ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
Register the following settings to TR-SW 1 to 5.
COPIER>OPTION>COMBO>PPR-SLCT/MOD-SLCT/ENV-SLCT
How to use:
1) Set the above 3 service modes to a registered combination.
2) Select appropriate TR-SW between 1 and 5.
3) Set the TR-SW selected in step 2) to 1.
With these steps, weak bias of the transfer leading edge becomes enabled at
the time of the registered combination.
If any of TR-SW 1 to 5 which has been set to 1 is selected, settings of the TRSW are displayed in COPIER>OPTION>COMBO>PPR-SLCT/MODSLCT/ENV-SLCT.

<LCNS-TR>
Example of display: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1] Status display 0: Not installed [Default] 1: Installed
[2] Invalidation 0: Invalidate (Only 0 can be entered.)
Transfer invalidation procedure
1. Select ST-XXXX, enter 0, and press the OK key.
2. A transfer license number (24 digits) is displayed at TR-XXXX.
T-16-55
COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR
Sub-item

Description

Level

ST-SEND

Displaying the send function installation status in transfer invalidation and executing
transfer invalidation

TR-SEND

Acquiring a transfer license key for the send function in transfer invalidation

ST-ENPDF

Displaying the encrypted PDF send function installation status in transfer

invalidation and executing transfer invalidation

TR-ENPDF

Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted PDF send function in transfer
invalidation

ST-SPDF

Displaying the searchable PDF send function installation status in transfer

invalidation and executing transfer invalidation

TR-SPDF

Acquiring a transfer license key for the searchable PDF send function in transfer
invalidation

16-53

Chapter 16

COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR

Sub-item
ST-EXPDF

Description

Level

Displaying the PDF extension kit (compound function of encrypted PDF and
searchable PDF) installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer
invalidation

TR-EXPDF

Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF extension kit (compound function of
encrypted PDF and searchable PDF) installation status in transfer invalidation

ST-LIPS

Displaying the LIPS installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer
invalidation

TR-LIPS

Acquiring a transfer license key for LIPS in transfer invalidation

ST-PDFDR

Displaying the PDF direct function installation status in transfer invalidation and
executing transfer invalidation

TR-PDFDR

Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF direct function in transfer invalidation

ST-SCR

Displaying the encrypted secure print function installation status in transfer

invalidation and executing transfer invalidation

TR-SCR

Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted secure print function in transfer
invalidation

ST-HDCLR

Displaying the HDD encryption/complete erasure function installation status in

transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation

TR-HDCLR Acquiring a transfer license key for the HDD encryption/complete erasure function
in transfer invalidation

ST-BRDIM

Displaying the BarDIMM installation status in transfer invalidation and executing

transfer invalidation

TR-BRDIM

Acquiring a transfer license key for BarDIMM in transfer invalidation

16.6.2 FEEDER
16.6.2.1 Feeder List
0007-9937

FEEDER>OPTION
T-16-56
FEEDER > OPTION
Sub-item

Description

SIZE-SW

Setting whether or not to detect a mixed document of A/B size and

inch size

Level

<Setting value>
0: Do not detect [Default]
1: Detect

16.6.3 SORTER
16.6.3.1 Sorter List
0007-9957

SORTER > OPTION>

T-16-57
SORTER > OPTION
Sub-item
BLNK-SW

Description

<Setting value>
0: Ordinary width (5 mm)
1: Large width (10 mm)
[Value at shipping/Value after RAM clearance: 1]
MD-SPRTN

Setting the finisher function limit

<Setting value>
0: Usual
1: Degenerated
[Value at shipping/Value after RAM clearance: 0]

16-54

Level

Setting the margin width (W) on each side of the folding position when the
saddle stitcher is used

Chapter 16

16.6.4 BOARD
16.6.4.1 Board List
0007-9959

BOARD > OPTION

T-16-58
BOARD > OPTION
Sub-item
FONTDL

Description

<Setting value>
0: Do not display [Default]
1: Display
MENU-1 to
MENU-4

Level

Setting whether or not to display the font service setting screen for list
display by the PS kanji font downloader
1

Setting whether or not to display Levels 1 to 4 of the printer setting menu

<Setting value>
0: Do not display
1: Display
[Value at shipping/Value after RAM clearance: 0]

16-55

Chapter 16

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

16.7.1 COPIER
16.7.1.1 Copier List
0008-0571

<PG>
T-16-59
COPIER>TEST>PG
Sub-item
TYPE

Description

Level

Enter a test print type number and press the Start key for test printing. (After test
printing, be sure to return the number to 0.)
0: Image from CCD (Ordinary print)
1: Checker
2: 17 tones (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
3: 17 tones (Dither screen method)
4: Totally white 00H
5: Halftone 80H (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
6: Halftone 80H (Dither screen method)
7: Totally black FFH
8: Horizontal line (space: 27 dots, line width: 40 dots)
9: Horizontal line (space: 50 dots, line width: 60 dots)
10: Horizontal line (space: 3 dots, line width: 2 dots)
11: Halftone 60H (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
12: Halftone 60H (Dither screen method)
13: Halftone 30H (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
14: Halftone 30H (Dither screen method)
15 - 20: For development

TXPH

Reserved

PG-PICK

Selecting an output stage for test printing

1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Side deck
6: Manual feed
7 - 8: Not used

2-SIDE

Setting the output mode for test printing

0: Simplex [Default] 1: Duplex

PG-QTY

Setting the number of pages for test printing

1 to 999 [Default: 1]

<NETWORK>
T-16-60
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
Sub-item
PING

Description

Level

Checking the connection from this machine to the network (TCP/IP only)
The network connection is checked when the machine has been installed and when the
connection has become faulty.

1) Press the switch at the operating section long for the shutdown sequence and turn the main power switch OFF.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine and turn the main power switch ON.
3) Notify the system administrator that the machine has been installed to request network setup.
4) Notify the system administrator of the network connection check plan and check the PING remote host address (IP address of a PC terminal in the user
network).
5) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the IP address checked at Step 4 from the ten-key pad of the operating section,
and press the OK key and the Start key.
- Once the network has been connected normally, OK is displayed. (End)
- If NG is displayed, check the connection of the network cable first. If the network cable is connected normally, do Step 6 and later. If the network
cable is not connected normally, repeat Step 5.
6) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the loopback address *(127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and the Start key.
- If NG is displayed, the TCP/IP setting of the local machine may be wrong. Return to Step 3 and check the setting again.
- If OK is displayed, the TCP/IP setting of the local machine seems correct but the network controller (main controller circuit board) may be faulty.
Check the controller at Step 7.
*: Since the loopback address signal is returned before the network controller, the TCP/IP setting of the local machine can be checked.
7) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the local host address (IP address of the local machine), and press the OK key.
- If NG is displayed, the IP address of the local machine may be wrong or the network controller may be faulty. Check the IP address with the system
administrator or replace the main controller circuit board.
- If OK is displayed, there seem to be no problems about the network setting of the local machine or the network controller.
Then the problem may be attributable to the user network environment. Report this to the system administrator and request action.

16-56

Chapter 16

IP address input

Result (OK/NG)

F-16-17

16-57

Chapter 16

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

16.8.1 COPIER
16.8.1.1 Copier List
0008-0599

<TOTAL>
T-16-61
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
Sub-item

Description

Level

SERVICE1

Total service counter 1

This counter is incremented when paper is ejected out of the printer. Irrespective of the
paper size, large or small, the increment is one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Total service counter 2

This counter is incremented when paper is ejected out of the printer. The increment is
2 for the large size and 1 for the small size.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Total copy counter

This counter is incremented when a copy is created and ejected out of the printer.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

PDL print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of
the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in PDL printing.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 5 each for a large or small print.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

FAX receive print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of
the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in fax reception.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The count can
be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Remote print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of
the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in remote printing.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The count can
be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Box print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of
the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in box printing.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The count can
be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Report print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of
the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in report printing.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The count can
be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Duplex copy/print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a duplex copy/print is
ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in remote
printing.
The increment is 0 for blank copy/print and 1each for a large or small copy/print. The
count can be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Scan counter
This counter is incremented at the end of a scan.
The increment is 1each for the large or small size. The count can be cleared.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

SERVICE2

COPY

PDL-PRT

FAX-PRT

RMT-PRT

BOX-PRT

RPT-PRT

2-SIDE

SCAN

<PICK-UP>
T-16-62
COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP
Sub-item
C1/2/3/4

16-58

Description
Cassette 1/2/3/4 paper feed total counter
The number of sheets fed from Cassette 1/2/3/4 is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Level
1

Chapter 16

COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP
Sub-item
MF

DK

2-SIDE

Description

Level

Manual feed total counter

The number of sheets fed from the manual paper feed unit is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Deck paper feed total counter

The number of sheets fed from the deck paper feed unit is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

Duplex paper feed total counter

The number of duplex fed sheets is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

<FEEDER>
T-16-63
COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER
Sub-item
FEED

DFOP-CNT

Description

Level

ADF document feed total counter

The number of documents fed from ADF is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

ADF hinge open-close counter

The ADF hinge open-close count is displayed.
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

<JAM>
T-16-64
COPIER>COUNTER>JAM
Sub-item

Description

Level

TOTAL

Copier total jam counter

FEEDER

Feeder total jam counter

1
1

SORTER

Finisher total jam counter

2-SIDE

Duplex unit jam counter

MF

Manual paper feed jam counter

C1/2/3/4

Cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter

DK

Side paper deck jam counter

<MISC>
T-16-65
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
Sub-item
LSR-MTR

Description
Scanner motor counter
This counter counts motor rotations. If the time until the motor run become stable is
shorter than the average, however, this counter is not incremented.
Average time
iR2230/2870: About 1.3 seconds iR3570/4570: About 3.3 seconds

Level

<DRBL-1>
T-16-66
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
Sub-item

Description

Level

TR-ROLL

Transfer roller counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.

SP-SC-EL

Separate discharge needle high-voltage ON counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.

DVG-CYL

Developing cylinder rotation counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one.

16-59

Chapter 16

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
Sub-item

Description

Level

C1/2/3/4PU-RL

Cassette 1/2/3/4 feed roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

C1/2/3/4SP-RL

Cassette 1/2/3/4 separation roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

C1/2/3/4FD-RL

Cassette 1/2/3/4 transport roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

M-PU-RL

Manual paper feed roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

M-SP-PD

Manual separation pad counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

FX-LW-RL

Lower fixing roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

FX-FILM

Fixing film counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

FX-CL-RL

Fixing cleaning roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

FX-LW-BR Pressurizing roller bearing counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

FL-WD

FL-NRW

OZ-FIL-1

Fixing unit counter by paper size (Wide paper)

This counter is incremented one when paper of 279.4 mm or greater main scan width
has passed.

Fixing unit counter by paper size (Narrow paper)

This counter is incremented one when paper of main scan width smaller than 279.4
mm has passed.

Ozone filter (FM1) fan counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

<DRBL-2>
T-16-67
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
Sub-item

Description

Level

ADF paper feed roller counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one for each
read document (not side) both in simplex mode and duplex mode.

DF-SP-PL

ADF separator counter

The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.

DF-SP-PD

ADF separation pad counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one for each
read document (not side) both in simplex mode and duplex mode.

ADF transport roller counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one for each
document in simplex mode and three for each read document (front, back, and idle
transfer) in duplex mode.

ADF dust collection tape counter

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one for each
read document (not side) both in simplex mode and duplex mode.

PD-PU-RL

Paper deck feed roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

PD-SP-RL

Paper deck separation roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

PD-FD-RL

Paper deck transport roller counter

This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size.

SORT

Sort counter
The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.

FIN-STPR

Stacker stapling counter

SADDLE

Saddle paper transport counter

The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.

DF-PU-RL

DF-FD-RL

LNT-TAPE

16-60

SDL-STPL

Saddle stapling counter

PUNCH

Punching counter

FN-BFFRL

Buffer roller counter

The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.

Chapter 17 Upgrading

Contents

Contents
17.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine .......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ........................................................................................................................................ 17-1

17.2 Formatting the HDD ..................................................................................................................................................17-5

17.2.1 Formatting All Partitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.2.2 Formatting Selected Partitions ................................................................................................................................................. 17-5
17.2.3 Formatting Procedure............................................................................................................................................................... 17-6

17.3 Downloading System Software..................................................................................................................................17-9

17.3.1 Downloading System ............................................................................................................................................................... 17-9
17.3.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................17-9
17.3.1.2 Downloading Procedure..............................................................................................................................................................................17-9

17.3.2 Downloading RUI, and Language ......................................................................................................................................... 17-11

17.3.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-11
17.3.2.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-12

17.3.3 Downloading SDICT ............................................................................................................................................................. 17-14

17.3.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-14
17.3.3.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-14

17.3.4 Downloading MEAPCONT................................................................................................................................................... 17-16

17.3.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-16
17.3.4.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-16

17.3.5 Downloading KEY................................................................................................................................................................. 17-18

17.3.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-18
17.3.5.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-18

17.3.6 Downloading BOOT .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-20

17.3.6.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-20
17.3.6.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-21

17.3.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon ................................................................................................................................................ 17-23

17.3.7.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-23
17.3.7.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-23

17.3.8 Downloading G3 FAX ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-25

17.3.8.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-25
17.3.8.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-26

17.3.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ........................................................................................................................... 17-27

17.3.9.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-27
17.3.9.2 Uploading Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................................17-28
17.3.9.3 Downloading Procedur..............................................................................................................................................................................17-30

Chapter 17

17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine
0008-7362

The machine and its accessories may be upgraded by replacing DIMM-ROM or using the Service Support Tool (hereafter, SST) installed on a personal
computer (PC).
The following table shows the various system software used in conjunction with the machine and how they may be upgraded.
T-17-1
Type

Type of system software

Method of upgrading
SST

ROM-DIMM
replacement

Yes

No

Remarks

Machine
System (main controller)
Language (language mode)

Yes

No

RUI (remote user interface)

Yes

No

Boot (boot program)

Yes

Yes

MEAP CONT (MEAP library)

Yes

No

SDICT (OCR dictionary)

Yes

No

KEY (encryption communication

key)

Yes

No

The machine controller is also used to

control the Super G3 Fax Board-Q1.

DCON (DC controller)

Yes

No

RCON (reader controller)

Yes

No

The reader controller is also used to

control the ADF.

Fin-S1 (Finisher-S1)

Yes

No

A special service tool (downloader

PCB: FY9-2034) is needed.

Fin_QR (Finisher-Q3/Saddle
Finisher-Q4)

Yes

No

A special service tool (downloader

PCB: FY9-2034) is needed.

Accessory

17.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool

0008-7307

The Service Support Tool (hereafter, SST) has the following functions:
iR XXXX
PC for service work

SST
Initializing the HDD
HDD setting information

System software

Downloading
system software

HDD

Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data

Downloading backup data

Back up RAM
F-17-1

17-1

Chapter 17
The machine must be in download mode when the SST is used.
The download control program comes in 2 types:
-Normal Mode (download mode B)
turn on the main power while holding down 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
-Safe Mode(download mode A)
turn on the main power while holding down 2+8

Main power
switch ON

on keypad, 2+8

Safe mode
program

on keypad, 1+7

Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
normal mode
program

Download mode A

Download mode B
F-17-2

Use safe mode for the following:

-when you have replaced the HDD.
-when the system fails to start up normally.

The following table shows the functions that may be used in download mode with the SST in use:
T-17-2

Function

Download mode
Normal mode
(download mode B)

Formatting the HDD

17-2

Safe mode
(download mode A)
Entire HDD
BOOTDEV

Chapter 17

Function

Download mode
Normal mode
(download mode B)

Safe mode
(download mode A)

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
PDL_DEV
FSTCDEV

Downloading the system

software

-System
-Language
-RUI
-Boot
-G3FAX
-Dcon
-Rcon
-SDICT
-MEAPCONT
-KEY

-System
-Language
-RUI
-Boot
-Dcon
-Rcon
-SDICT
-MEAPCONT
-KEY

Uploading/downloading
backup data

-SramImg
-Meapback

Installing the System Software

The system software that has been downloaded by the SST (version 3.01 or later) is saved in the temporary storage area of the HDD. You must then turn
off and then on the main power switch so that the system software will be written to the system area, boot ROM, and flash ROM when the machine starts
up. When you turn off and then on the main power switch for a second time, the machine will start up using the new version of the system software.

17-3

Chapter 17

1) The system software is downloaded.

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

Status of reception (sample)

- - - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%

System
Software

- - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG
-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete

HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area

2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

3) Writing takes place.
<<<<< download
do wnload shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
+++ Switch OFF the po
power
er then ON. +++

HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area

Boot
ROM

FLASH
ROM

4) The main motor switch

is turned off and then on.

5) The machine starts up using

the new version.
F-17-3

17-4

Chapter 17

17.2 Formatting the HDD

17.2.1 Formatting All Partitions
0008-7381

When you format all partitions of the HDD, all individual partitions will be initialized and made ready for use by the main controller.
The information needed for partition settings is stored under HDFormat of the iRXXXX.

HDD

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND

[2]

APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV

[1]

[3]
F-17-4

[1] HDD (service part; without partition setup)

[2] Formatting of all partitions (in safe mode only)
[3] HDD after formatting
[4] Partition setup information

17.2.2 Formatting Selected Partitions

0008-7382

You can also format (initialize) only those partitions that you select.

17-5

Chapter 17

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX

HDD

APL_SEND

[1]

APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV

[2]

F-17-5

[1] Formatting possible in normal mode

[2] Formatting possible in safe mode (requires downloading of System and RUI after formatting)

1. Unless you have selected 'ALL', you may execute formatting without registering HDFormat.
2. An attempt to format after selecting TMP_FAX in the absence of a fax board will cause an error.
3. An attempt to format after selecting FSTCDEV for expansion will cause an

17.2.3 Formatting Procedure

0008-7387

1) Click [Format HDD].

F-17-6

2) Select the partitions you want to format. Or, select 'ALL'.

17-6

Chapter 17

F-17-7

3) Click [Start].
4) When the Confirmation screen has appeared, click [Execute Formatting].

F-17-8

5) When the session has ended, click [OK].

17-7

Chapter 17

F-17-9

6) Start a download session. Or, turn off and then on the machine to end the work.

- If you have formatted all partitions or formatted BOOTDEV, be sure to download System newly. (Otherwise, 'E602' will occur when you turn on the
main power.)

17-8

Chapter 17

17.3 Downloading System Software

17.3.1 Downloading System
17.3.1.1 Outline
0009-0501

The system software comes in 2 types (one for use inside Japan and the other, outside Japan).
Unlike previous iR controllers, however, there is only one type of system software. (Previously, one type supported NetWare while the other did not. There
is now only one type for the machine supporting NetWare.)

17.3.1.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7395

You can run a downloading session either in normal or safe mode.

1) Select the version of the system you want to download.

F-17-10

2) Click [Start].

F-17-11

17-9

Chapter 17
3) When the session has ended, click [OK].

F-17-12

4) If you want to start another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the upgrade status indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the
switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570,2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. The ongoing session will be
suspended and the machine may fail to start up.

F-17-13

17-10

Chapter 17

<<<<< download shell >>>>>

[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Writing to HDD XX%

F-17-14

If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and then download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17.3.2 Downloading RUI, and Language

17.3.2.1 Outline
0008-7410

iR -----

Network
LCD

RUI(en)

Version check

System
RUI(it)

System Language

Language-XXen

RUI-XXen

Language-XXit

RUI-XXit

Language-XXja

RUI-XXja

Language

RUI(ja)

RUI

Network PC
F-17-15
T-17-3

Control Panel LCD Display Language

Check the version of System and Language.

1. If correct, You can switch languages by making the following selections in user mode:
common settings>display language change.

17-11

Chapter 17

Control Panel LCD Display Language

2. If not correct, 'E744' will be indicated, and System Language will be used when the main
power is turned off and then on.
T-17-4

RUI Display
Language
Select using the RUI.
You can select a different language for a different PC.
<Language Code>

<Language>

de

German

en

English

fr

French

it

Italian

ja

Japanese

Service PC

iR -----

SST
Main Controller Unit

iR ----Language
XXen
XXja

HDD
Download

BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja

RUI
XXen
XXja

RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja

F-17-16

17.3.2.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7411

You can run a download session in either normal or safe mode.

[In the Case of Language]
1) Select the version of Language to download.

17-12

Chapter 17

F-17-17

2) Click [Start].

F-17-18

3) When the result of the downloading session has appeared, click [OK].

17-13

Chapter 17

F-17-19

4) If you want another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.

5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn off and then
on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session
will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17.3.3 Downloading SDICT

17.3.3.1 Outline
0009-0391

SDICT is a dictionary used when converting image data read by the reader unit into character code (OCR processing). This function is used in conjunction
with the PDF Generation Expansion Kit-B1.

17.3.3.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7842

You can run a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.

1) Select the version of SDICT to download.

17-14

Chapter 17

F-17-20

2) Click [Start].

F-17-21

3) When the session has ended, click [OK].

17-15

Chapter 17

F-17-22

4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn off and then
on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be
suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17.3.4 Downloading MEAPCONT

17.3.4.1 Outline
0009-0413

MEAPCONT is a standard library used in conjunction with a MEAP application.

17.3.4.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7844

You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.

1) Select the version of MEAPCONT you want to download.

17-16

Chapter 17

F-17-23

2) Click [Start].

F-17-24

3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].

17-17

Chapter 17

F-17-25

4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn off and then
on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be
suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17.3.5 Downloading KEY

17.3.5.1 Outline
0009-0010

KEY serves as a certificate used for encrypted communications over a network.

KEY may be either of 2 types: XXxc and XXxp. Be sure to download both types.

17.3.5.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-9881

You can execute a download session in either normal or safe mode.

1) Select the version of KEY you want to download.

17-18

Chapter 17

F-17-26

2) Click [Start].

F-17-27

3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].

17-19

Chapter 17

F-17-28

4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn
off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the ongoing write
operation will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17.3.6 Downloading BOOT

17.3.6.1 Outline
0008-7421

Boot registered in the SST may be used in common for various types of boot ROMs. You cannot change the type of a boot ROM by means of downloading.

17-20

Chapter 17

Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

may be upgraded by
DIMM replacement

PC for service
iR4570/3570,
2870/2270 Series

C Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

SST
P Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

iR4570/3570,
2870/2270 Series

Download

Boot

N Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

(other than 100V machine)

H Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

(230V machine only)

Main controller block

F-17-29

If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the boot ROM.

17.3.6.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7422

You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.

1) Select the version of BOOT to download.

F-17-30

17-21

Chapter 17
2) Click [Start].

F-17-31

3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].

F-17-32

4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn
off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a download session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation will be suspended and the machine may not start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.

17-22

Chapter 17
If the machine fails to start up, be sure to replace the boot ROM.

17.3.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon

17.3.7.1 Outline
0008-7605

Dcon/Rcon is downloaded by way of the main controller unit.

- The DC controller PCB/reader controller PCB is equipped with a boot ROM, and downloading may be attempted multiple times in the event of failure.
- The system software used in the DC controller differs between the iR3570/3570 and the iR2870/2270. The system software designed for the iR4570/3570
is stored as iR3570, while the system software designed for the iR2870/2270 is stored as iR2270. The machine has a mechanism to read the appropriate
system software. It is a good idea to download both types of system software.

iR XXXX
Service PC

SST
iR XXXX

Printer unit

Reader unit
Signal cable

Download

Main controller
unit

Dcon

CPU

Flash ROM

Rcon
Reader controller PCB

Power cable
DIMM

CPU
Boot ROM

Power supply
control signal

Power supply
unit

DC controller PCB

F-17-33

You will not be able to download Rcon unless the DC controller has started up normally (as, otherwise, the power supply control signal will not be valid
and, as a result, the reader unit remains without power).

17.3.7.2 Downloading Procedure

0008-7824

You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode. In the case of safe mode, however, you will not be able to find out the version of
Dcon/Rcon, causing all downloading to occur (overwriting of the same version and downgrading).
[Downloading Rcon]
1) Select the version of Rcon to download.

17-23

Chapter 17

F-17-34

2) Click [Start].

F-17-35

3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].

17-24

Chapter 17

F-17-36

4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When the downloading session has ended, turn off and then on the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn
off and then on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the machine may
not be able to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System, Language, and RUI.
If an error code is indicated, be sure to download appropriate firmware.

17.3.8 Downloading G3 FAX

17.3.8.1 Outline
0009-0281

The Multi Fax Board-D1 (2-line) comes with a control CPU and its system software, which is downloaded by way of the main controller unit.
Service PC

iR XXXX
G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)

Upgrading is also possible

by replacing the DIMM.

SST
Download

G3Fax

iR XXXX
CPU

(Flash ROM DIMM)

G3Fax
Main controller
unit

Multi Fax Board-D1 (2-line)

Downloading is possible only in normal mode.

F-17-37

If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the flash ROM DIMM.

17-25

Chapter 17

17.3.8.2 Downloading Procedure

0009-0280

You will have to use normal mode for downloading.

1) Select the version of G3FAX you want to download.

F-17-38

2) Click [Start].

F-17-39

3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].

17-26

Chapter 17

F-17-40

4) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
5) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn
off and then on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/570, 2870/2270 Series).

You will not be able to download G3Fax twice in succession. (Once downloading is executed, the board will be reset, causing download mode to end.)
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the write operation
(to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board) may fail, preventing board functions. In the event the board fails to function, be sure to replace the flash
ROM DIMM found on the G3 fax board.

17.3.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

17.3.9.1 Outline
0008-7845

SramImg is data that is stored in the SRAM of the main controller PCB, while MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD.
T-17-5

Backup data

Files to select for downloading/uploading

Main controller PCB backup RAM

SramImg.bin

MEAP application

MeapBack.bin

for R&D

Sublog.txt

- If you are replacing the main controller PCB, you can transfer such data as parts counter readings by uploading the data before replacement and
downloading it after replacement.
- If you are replacing the HDD or executing 'ALL' or 'APL_MEP', you can temporarily set aside MEAP applications by uploading MeapBack before
execution and downloading it after execution.
- Only the machine uploaded can download SramImg and MeapBack.

17-27

Chapter 17

Service PC
SST
iR XXXX
System
SramImg
Meapback

Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading
Downloading is possible only
in safe mode.

Main controller PCB

SRAM
SramImg.bin

HDD
Meapback.bin

Main controller unit

F-17-41

17.3.9.2 Uploading Procedure

0008-7854

Use safe mode for uploading.

1) Select [Upload Data].

F-17-42

2) Select the data you want to back up.

17-28

Chapter 17

F-17-43

3) Click [Start].

F-17-44

4) Click [Save].

17-29

Chapter 17

F-17-45

5) Click [OK].

F-17-46

17.3.9.3 Downloading Procedur

0008-7856

Use safe mode for downloading.

1) Select [Download Data].

17-30

Chapter 17

F-17-47

2) Select the data to download.

F-17-48

3) Click [Start].

17-31

Chapter 17

F-17-49

4) Click [OK].

F-17-50

5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears asking you to turn
off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).

Be sure not to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. The write operation will be suspended, and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download System, Language, and RUI.

17-32

Chapter 18 Service Tools

Contents

Contents
18.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Special Tools............................................................................................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Oils and Solvents ..................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

Chapter 18

18.1 Service Tools

18.1.1 Special Tools
0007-6516

In addition to the standard tools set, you will need the following special tools for servicing of the machine:
T-18-1

Tool No.

Rank

Digital multimeter

Tool name

FY9-2002

Cover switch

TKN-0093

Tester extension pin

FY9-3038

As an addition when
making an electrical
check.

Tester extension pin

(L-shipped)

FY9-3039

As an addition when
making an electrical
check.

For checking and

adjusting images.

NA-3 Test Chart

FY9-9196

Shape

Uses
For making electrical
checks.

Key to Notation (rank)

A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.

18.1.2 Oils and Solvents

0007-6517
T-18-2

Name
Alcohol

Uses
cleaning; e.g.,
glass, plastic,
rubber; external
covers

Composition
fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
alcohol
surface activating agent
water

Remarks
- Do not bring near fire.
- Procure locally.
- IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be
substituted.

18-1

Chapter 18

Name
Solvent

Uses

Lubricant

18-2

Composition

fluorine-family
cleaning; e.g.,
hydrocarbon
metal; soiling
with oil or toner chlorine-family
hydrocarbon
alcohol

Remarks
- Do not bring near fire.
- Procure locally.
- MEK may be substituted.

mineral oil (paraffin family) - CK-0524 (100 cc)

Lubricant

drive
mechanism,
sliding
mechanism

silicone oil

- CK-0551 (20 g)

Lubricant
(EM-50L)

gear

special oil
special solid lubricating
agent
lithium soap

- HY9-0007

Lubricant

scanner rail

silicone oil

- KF96SS (300CS)
- FY9-6011 (50 cc)

Aug 2 2005